PT-R4300ES Service Manual V10 PDF

PK/4300/V1.
0/SM152
Plate Thermal Recorder
4300E/S
SERVICE MANUAL
Jan, 01, 2007 Version 1.0

Oct, 12, 2006 Version 0.8 (temporary)
Jun, 19, 2006 Version 0.6
Quality Promotion Department

Media Technology Division
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
For your safety
Caution labels are affixed to potentially hazardous parts or areas of the equipment for the
safety of the operators and maintenance staff. Caution labels are classified into two types
"WARNING" and "CAUTION" depending upon the degree of potential danger as shown
below. Please read, understand and heed the meanings of these labels to prote
yourself and to prevent unforeseen accidents.
: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

or properly handled, could possibly result in death or serious
injury.
: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

or properly handled, could possibly result in minor or moderate
injury or equipment damage.
The PT-R mashine operators must thoroughly read this manual. Do not turn on
the machine’s power supply until all of the precautions have been read and
understood. Very serious accidents may occur if this instruction is not
observed.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Please keep the following premises and expectations in mind.

This service manual is only intended for engineers trained in service procedures and maintenance
personnel trained by qualified engineers. Readers are therefore expected to already appreciate
the potential hazards presented by this equipment and type of work, as well as understand all the
basic operations needed for equipment maintenance.
When exporting the machine

International transfer of this equipment, any of its parts, components and/or software must be
carried out in compliance with the relevant laws and ordinances of the country of export and the
country of equipment end-use. We do not assume any responsibility or liability for equipment
transferred without regard to proper export/import regulations or procedures.
Limits of responsibility
Please note that equipment specifications are subject to change without notice for updates and
improvements. This may cause inconsistencies between the contents of this manual and the
equipment you currently possess.
We shall not be held responsible for any damage caused by conditions beyond our control such
as customer modification, disassembly or misuse of our products, programs or software, or their
use in a defective or deficient environment.
Although great care has been taken in preparing this manual, if you find that certain points seem
unclear or in error, please contact Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.
We assume no responsibility or liability for any damage or consequential and/or indirect losses
resulting from any accident or malfunction that might occur during the operation of this
equipment.
Copyright
©2007: Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.
The copyright for this entire manual belongs to Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Copying, reprinting or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part in any media without our
express consent infringes upon the copyright and the rights of the publisher.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
§ On safety
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
Contents
1. On Safety................................................................................................. 1
1-1. When using this machine ..................................................................................... 1
1-2. Precautions for electricity ..................................................................................... 1
1-3. Regarding the safety of this machine ................................................................... 3
1-4. Precautions for equipment operation.................................................................... 4
1-5. Maintenance......................................................................................................... 4
1-5-1. For maintenance personnel .......................................................................... 4
1-5-2. Laser maintenance and safety ...................................................................... 5
1-6. Caution labels on the equipment .......................................................................... 6
1-7. Disposal of the machine. ...................................................................................... 8
1-8. Connecting the blower .......................................................................................... 8
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) §-i

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
§-ii PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) §-iii

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
§-iv PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
1. On Safety
1-1. When using this machine
· This manual is written for maintenance technicians of this machine. It describes operation
procedures and safety precautions.
· All information appearing in this manual is provided only as reference for operating this ma-
chine and , as such, contains no legal value and should in no way be used for any legal
purpose.
· This machine was designed and manufactured with special attention to safety considerations.
However, it is impossible either to eliminate all potential sources of danger from such prod-
ucts or to anticipate all possible hazards and misuses. It is therefore critical that you both
familiarize yourself, all your operators and other relevant personnel with all of the noted pre-
cautions, countermeasures and related procedures, and take maximum care when operating
this machine.
· Do not operate the unit when there are gas vapors in the air that may ignite or explode.
· Do not cover this machine with a cloth or block its air vents in any way.
· Do not remove any protection covers, when the power supply of this machine is turned on.
Since the inner part is high temperature, there is a danger of burning oneself.
· Never allow water to enter this machine. This may result in electrical shock and damage the
unit.
· Before attaching the plate to this machine, verify that no paper or places of packing remain on
either side of the plate. The thermal laser may cause paper or packaging to ignite and start a
fire in this machine.
· The edges of the plate are very sharp. When handling the plate, be sure to use anti-slip
protective gloves. If handled with bare hands, the edges of the plate may cause injury.
1-2. Precautions for electricity
1) Power supply
· Before connecting this machine and accessories power cables to switchboard, connect power
cables to this machine and accessories.
· Before connecting this machine and accessories power cables to switchboard, be sure to
confirm that the power supply switch is turned OFF.
· When this machine is installed, perform proper grounding in accordance with the regulations
of the country of installation.
· The ground wire must be solely used for this machine. Also, the ground wire must be solely
used for the accessories.
· This machine incorporates high-voltage circuits. Touching any part of your body to such cir-
cuits can cause serious injury and even death. BE EXTREMELY CAREFUL not to touch
these circuits, especially with wet hands.
· Whenever you install this machine in Japan, be sure to use the power cable provided with it.
· Power cables are not provided in countries outside Japan. Please refer to the specification of
this machine, and obtain appropriately rated power cables that conform to the standards of
your country or region.
· Use power cables with the proper ratings for connection to this machine and other accesso-
ries to ensure that no voltage drops will be caused not only by the steady-state currents but by
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) §-1

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
the starting currents as well.
· Have an electrical contractor or qualified electrician be responsible for selecting the circuit
breakers and doing the electrical work.
2) Switching operation of power supply

· Before turning ON the power supply switch to this machine, be sure to confirm the following:
1) The accessories (e.g. supply cassette) are properly mounted and connection areas (e.g.
supply unit) are connected properly and securely.
2) Doors are completely closed, and covers are attached properly.
· Be sure to turn OFF the power supply and fix the power supply switch using a padlock etc.
before you start maintenance, cleaning or repairs. Switching the power switch to “ I ” turns the
power ON and switching it to “ O ” turns the power OFF.
The power supply switch

ON
ON
ON
OFF OFF
OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
Main unit Blower unit
3) Power cables
· If you find anything that might indicate power cable damage such as unusual deformations or
surface flaws, immediately turn OFF the power switch and the circuit breaker of the switch-
board, and contact our nearest dealer or branch office.
· Do not place heavy objects or articles with sharp edges anywhere on the power cable or
forcefully pull at it.
4) Interlocks
While the covers are open, releasing interlocks or performing control or adjustment
procedures other than those specified in this manual will cause dangerous laser
radiation exposure.
· To ensure operator safety, this machine is provided with a variety of interlocking safety de-
vices. Do not deactivate these devices except when maintenance technicians are performing
maintenance. Operating this machine when these safety devices are inactive could result in
severe injury and/or damage to the equipment.
· This machine is equipped with a laser head. This head emits laser beams for exposure pur-
poses which uses infrared rays that are invisible to the eye. It is therefore extremely danger-
ous to expose the eyes to these rays, and doing so may cause loss of sight. Under NO
circumstances must the interlock system be tampered with.
· If a cover is opened during exposure, the respective rollers stop automatically. Always wait at
least ten seconds until the rollers come to a complete stop before touching them.
· This machine has a maintenance key switch to deactivate the interlocking safety devices for
the maintenance by technicians. The maintenance key switch has to be operated by the spe-
cially trained and authorized maintenance technicians. Turning ON the maintenance key switch
§-2 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
shuts down the power supply to the laser. However, be aware that power is still supplied to the
moving parts. The moving parts such as rollers or motors will be operated even if the covers
or door are opened with turning ON the maintenance key switch. Therefore pay attention to
the moving parts when performing the maintenance with turning ON the maintenance key
switch. However, high-speed drum rotation ( In case of the drum slowdown software switch is
deactivated) and communication to the laser head are disabled. Be sure to turn OFF the
maintenance key switch when the maintenance was finished. ( The cover cannot be closed
when the maintenance key switch is turning ON.)
5) Processing after power failures

· When a power failure in external electric power occurs, immediately turn OFF the circuit
breaker of the switchboard and the power switch of this machine.
· If a power failure, which is caused by a utility defect, occurs while the safety interlock release
key is being used, turn OFF the switchboard breaker of the user’s site.
· Since this machine is reset in concurrence with shutdown of the power supply, turn ON the
switchboard breaker, which has been turned OFF, and perform a normal initialization after the
power has been restored.
· When the maintenance key switch is turned ON to deactivate the interlocking safety devices,
for the safety reason, be sure that nobody is touching the machine when you turn ON the
power switch or perform initialization.
1-3. Regarding the safety of this machine

1) Electrical safety
The PT-R has been designed, tested, and evaluated in accordance with IEC60950-1 and
IEC60204-1 of the “Safety of Information Technology Equipment, Including Electrical Busi-
ness Equipment” electrical safety standards.
2) Laser safety
The PT-R complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations
pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated July 26, 2001.
“Safety of Laser Products” of IEC 60825-1.
“Equipment Classification”
“Requirement”
“User's Guide”

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
1-4. Precautions for equipment operation
· Do not turn on this machine power supply or start operation until this manual has been thor-
oughly read and fully understood
· All maintenance technicians must wear appropriate work clothing.
Wear clothing that

will not become
caught in the machinery.
Hands are wet.

Long hair is tied
back.
Cuffs are open.
A necktie or necklace
is dangling.
Cuffs are buttoned.
Unneeded things
are carried.
Safety boots are
Excessively long pants.
recommended.
Slippers or sandals.
· Whenever you notice anything abnormal, report it immediately to your supervisor or manager
so appropriate measures can be taken quickly.
· This machine cannot be guaranteed to operate continuously without an operator in atten-
dance. In order to immediately deal with emergencies, an operator trained for initial correc-
tive action should always be in attendance.
· When this machine is not operated for a long period of time, be sure to turn OFF the circuit
breaker of the switchboard.
· During operation, do not open any protective covers attached to the equipment. Opening
these covers may be hazardous to the safety of operators and other persons working in the
vicinity, and may also hinder the equipment’s normal functioning.
· Do not operate the PT-R if you feel in any way sick, nauseous or unsteady.
1-5. Maintenance
· Maintenance must always be performed by specially trained and authorized maintenance

technicians.
· Never turn the machine’s power on while maintenance engineers are working on the equip-
ment.
1-5-1. For maintenance personnel

1) Basic cautions
· Before doing any electrical work, be sure to turn OFF the power supply switch and fix the
power OFF status by using a padlock, etc., in order to prevent accidents such as electrical
shock.
· Pay attention to your surroundings when working with this unit.
· Do not touch any moving parts during operation.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
2) About laser safety
· Make sure the interlock safety devices are all in place when the user is operating this unit.
· Tell the user not to attempt to modify the laser for any reason.
· All responsibility for any changes in safety standards due to changes to the class of laser
used are the responsibility of the party who altered the machine.
For example, if the user has altered the laser, the user bears responsibility. If the maintenance
technicians department of a branch office altered the laser, the maintenance technicians
department bears responsibility.
3) Cautions about chemicals

· Be sure to handle lens cleaners and isopropyl alcohol properly.
4) Cautions concerning static electricity

· Before turning on the power supply, always make sure the power supply is properly grounded.
· Use an anti-static wristband and anti-static bags to prevent the buildup of static electricity
when handling or transporting parts such as circuit boards or laser diodes, which can easily
be damaged by static electricity.
5) About the laser diode

· This machine uses a high-output semiconductor laser. If procedures and safety guidelines
are not followed correctly, the radiation from the laser diode may injure your eyes. Note that
the laser diode can be damaged by static electricity.
The laser diode is extremely sensitive to static electricity.
Damage to it from static electricity may result in a shortening of the laser’s service life.
1-5-2. Laser maintenance and safety

1) Under normal conditions
When all of the covers encasing this machine are in place, the entire machine can be thought of
as a single area. Anything within that area is within the laser work area, while anything outside it
is outside the laser work area.
All of the covers are fitted with interlock devices that shut off power to the laser if the covers are
removed, preventing the laser from turning on unexpectedly. This means that only the mildest
laser classification, Class 1, are required.
2) While performing maintenance with covers removed

After removing the covers and disabling the interlocks, the entire room in which the PT-R is
housed should be considered a laser work area.
This means that laser classification for CLASS 4 units must be followed.
However, in this machine, there are no exposure operations that are performed while the covers
are removed and the interlocks are released.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
3) When working with the laser and related parts
When focusing or optically adjusting the laser, follow the rules indicated below.
· Do not bring any flammable objects into the laser work area.
· Do not place any objects with a reflective surface near the path of the laser beam. (e.g. rings,
watches, glossy or shiny plated Allen wrenches)
· In order to shrink your pupils, make the room as bright as possible.
· Display a sign limiting entry to the laser area to those working on the laser, in order to prevent
accidents to other personnel.
However, in this machine, no laser operations are performed while the power is being supplied.
1-6. Caution labels on the equipment
· Caution labels are attached to potentially hazardous parts or areas of this machine for the
safety of the operators and maintenance technicians.
· Be sure to observe the following precautions when you perform operation or maintenance of
this machine. Be sure to follow the instructions on these labels.
· If a label has faded or fallen off, replace it immediately with a new one.
· Do not peel or tear off labels or erase their markings.
· Do not block the visibility of labels by covering or placing anything in front of them.
Label indicating the power supply specifications.
Label indicating that this machine complies with CDRH Regulations.
Label indicating that this machine complies with FCC and VCCI.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
Label indicating that this machine complies with CE standards.
Label indicating that opening the cover to which the label is attached poses a danger of
exposure to laser radiation.
This label warns that you absolutely must not touch the drum until it comes to a complete
stop.
Label indicating that this machine is a Class 1 laser product.
Label warning that this equipment contains a high leakage current and mustbe grounded.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
On Safety
This label indicates a hightemperature area that must not be touched.
Label indicating that high voltage power circuits in the inside.
This label warns you not to get your hand or fingers squeezed.
1-7. Disposal of the machine.
· When disposing this machine, request the services of a professional disposal company that
specializes in recycling.
· A lithium battery is used in the control panel of this machine. Under normal use the lithium
battery has a life of five to ten years. When it expires it should be disposed of carefully using
special procedures for handling harmful substances.
1-8. Connecting the blower
Connect the blower hose, blower communication cable and power supply cable between the
blower unit and the PT-R. Then, secure the blower power supply cable with a cable-tie. For the
safety reason, set the plate under the blower casters and make sure the blower won’t move from
there.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
A. Outline
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................. 1
1-1.For maintenance personnel .................................................................................. 1
1-2.Laser maintenance and safety .............................................................................. 3
2. System Overview..................................................................................... 4
2-1. Product positioning ............................................................................................... 4
2-2. System overview .................................................................................................. 5
2-3.Recommended configurations .............................................................................. 5
3. Overall configuration chart and part names ............................................ 6
3-1.Front and right side view of the main unit.............................................................. 6
3-2.Back view of the main unit .................................................................................... 6
3-3.Plate conveyor view of the main unit ..................................................................... 7
3-4.Peripheral device connectors ................................................................................ 8
3-5.Inside of front cover............................................................................................... 9
3-6.Inside of rear cover ............................................................................................... 9
4. Outline of Electric .................................................................................. 10
4-1.Block diagram(PT-R4300S) ................................................................................. 10
4-2.Block diagram(PT-R4300E) ................................................................................. 11
4-3. Board functions .................................................................................................. 12
5. Equipment Overview ............................................................................. 15
5-1. 4300S (32 ch) and 4300E (16 ch) calibration ..................................................... 15
5-2. Determining the lifetime of 4300S (32 ch) and 4300E (16 ch) LDs .................... 17
5-3. How to check if the exposure head data cables are disconnected ..................... 19
5-4.The change point of PT-R4300S, 4300E ............................................................. 21
6.Specification ........................................................................................... 27
6-1.Basic spec. of PT-R4300S/4300E (Comparison with conventional model).......... 27
7.Parts compatibility information. .............................................................. 33
7-1.Shifted position list. (Excerpt) .............................................................................. 33
7-1-1.PT-R4100/4300 -> PT-R4300E/S ..................................................................... 33
7-2.Current model <-> Re-model PCB compatibility list. ........................................... 34
7-2-1.PT-R4100/4300 -> PT-R4300E/S ..................................................................... 34
7-3.Re-model PCB compatibility list. ......................................................................... 35
7-4.Old machine PCB compatibility list ..................................................................... 36
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) A-i

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
A-ii PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) A-iii

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
A-iv PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
1. Introduction
1-1.For maintenance personnel
1) Basic cautions
· In order to prevent electrical shock, always turn this unit off and unplug it
before doing any electrical work.
· Pay attention to your surroundings when working with this unit.
· Do not touch any moving parts during operation.
2) About laser safety

· Make sure the interlock safety devices are all in place when the user is
operating this unit.
· Tell the user not to attempt to modify the laser for any reason.
· All responsibility for any changes in safety standards due to changes to
the class of laser used are the responsibility of the party who altered the
machine.
For example, if the user has altered the laser, the user bears responsibility.
If the CS department of a branch office altered the laser, the CS
department bears responsibility.
3) Cautions about chemicals

· Be sure to handle lens cleaners and isopropyl alcohol properly.
4) Cautions concerning static electricity

· Use an anti-static wristband and anti-static bags to prevent the buildup of
static electricity when handling or transporting parts such as circuit
boards or laser diodes, which can easily be damaged by static electricity.
5) About the laser diode

· The PT-R4300E/S uses a high-output semiconductor laser. If procedures
and safety guidelines are not followed correctly, the radiation from the
laser diode may injure your eyes. Note that the laser diode can be
damaged by static electricity.
The laser diode is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Damage to

it from static electricity may result in a shortening of the laser’s
service life.
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) A-1

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
6) Safety measures to prevent static electricity buildup

· Before turning on the power supply, always make sure the power supply
is properly grounded.
· Wear an anti-static wristband to avoid any buildup of static electricity on
your body.
· Wear semiconductor laser radiation shaded safety goggles (glasses) to
protect your eyes.
7) Safety and static electricity buildup prevention equipment

· To maintain safety and prevent the excessive buildup of static electricity,
make sure you have the following tools.
· Anti-static wristband.
Semiconductor laser radiation shaded safety goggles (glasses)
Laser type : Laser Diode
Wavelength : 790 to 850
A-2 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
1-2.Laser maintenance and safety
1) Under normal conditions

When all of the metal plates encasing the PT-R4300E/S are in place, the
entire machine can be thought of as a single area. Anything within that
area is within the laser work area, while anything outside it is outside the
laser work area.
All of the metal plates are fitted with interlock devices that shut off power
to the laser if the plates are removed, preventing the laser from turning on
unexpectedly. This means that only the mildest laser safety standards,
Class 1, are required.
2) While performing maintenance with metal plates removed

After removing the covers and disabling the interlocks, the entire room in
which the PT-R4300E/S is housed should be considered a laser work
area.
This means that laser safety standards for CLASS 4 units must be
followed.
3) When working with the laser and related parts

When focusing or optically adjusting the laser, follow the rules indicated
below.
· Do not bring any flammable objects into the laser work area.
· Do not place any objects with a reflective surface near the path of
the laser beam. (e.g. rings, watches, glossy or shiny plated Allen
wrenches)
· In order to shrink your pupils, make the room as bright as possible.
· Use semiconductor laser radiation safety goggles (glasses).
· Display a sign limiting entry to the laser area to those working on
the laser, in order to prevent accidents to other personnel.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
2. System Overview
2-1. Product positioning

1) PT-R4300E/S series
The remodeled PT-R4300E/S series consists of two types of PT-Rs, the PT-R4300E (16 ch) and
the PT-R4300S (32 ch). They were developed from the PT-R4100 (16 ch) and the PT-R4300 (32
ch) respectively.
PT-R4100 (16 ch) ----- PT-R4300E (16 ch)
PT-R4300 (32 ch) ----- PT-R4300S (32 ch)
The structures of the main units derive from their predecessors, the PT-R4100 and the PT-R4300,
and include general innovations as well as upgraded specifications. The heads can be upgraded in
the field (16 ch to 32 ch) and there is now support for small size (up to 304 x 370 mm) plates,
which can be set as factory options.
* Upgraded PT-R4300S from PT-R4300E cannot support 2000dpi / 4000dpi.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
2-2. System overview
The Remodel PT-R4300E/S is connected to the host computer by means of a F-PIF cable. Page
files (PS data) created by software on the computer are converted to bit map data using a software
RIP such as HQ-510, and transmitted on-line to the Remodel PT-R4300E/S.
F-PIF
Trueflow3
TrueflowRite
Trueflow3 DTC
AD810MX
HQ-510PC
2-3.Recommended configurations
A connection is possible if it is a version after the version for Rip in Remodel PT-R4300E/S
release fundamentally.
Trueflow3 Ver3.03 Ver3.12

TrueflowRite Ver3.03 Ver3.12
Trueflow3 DTC Ver3.12
Trueflow DTC Ver2.21
HQ-510PC Ver7.0
AD-810MX Ver1.3 Ver2.0
For details on the specifications of each RIP, refer to the respective installation guides.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
3. Overall configuration chart and part names
3-1.Front and right side view of the main unit
Operation door
Operation panel
Transport unit Power switch
Front cover
3-2.Back view of the main unit
Rear plate out
Punch debris outle
Punch debris receptacle External cover filter
Rear cover
Peripheral device connectors

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
3-3.Plate conveyor view of the main unit
Operation door
Ejection table
Plate table
Tranceport roller
External cover
External fan
Protrusions Rectangular
External holes
cover filter

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
3-4.Peripheral device connectors
F-PIF connector (serial)
Maintenance connector F-PIF connector (image•j
Conveyer connector
Signal tower (option) Blower control

connector connector
LAN connector
Power supply
connector for blower

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
3-5.Inside of front cover
Recording head unit
Optical system filter
Hook for front cover
3-6.Inside of rear cover
Punch unit
Squuze roller
Cleaning roller
Recording drum
Hook for rear cover

A,B,Z
Phase
RS-232-C
A-10
Operation ENC 1000pulses
Themista panalel
6* PM Driver
RS-232-C AC Servo
Driver (Main) (Sub)
CPU
BUS
Parallel I/O
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Secondary- CON- CON- SA-L

scanning pulse SAL MAL4 MA-L
4. Outline of Electric
RS-232-C Encoder pulse PIO-PTR4XE

Maintenance RCP3E Secondary-
(Download) scanning sensor
Board
Board
4-1.Block diagram(PT-R4300S)
Parallel I/O
CON-PTR4XE Board
Ethernet
10/100 Base T
Remote
CAL_SEN2E
monitoring
Board
HEAD MB2E(Mother Board)

RS-232
RS-232-C
(Command)
Chapter A OUTLINE
HEAD HEAD HEAD HEAD

Head_CPU3E DRV3E-1 DRV3E-2 DRV3E-3 DRV3E-4
F-PIF Board Board Board Board
Board
16bit Parallel Image data

(Image data) LD-ENABLE
LRB32E PELTIETR 80 PLD 0

Board PELTIETR 81
PMD80 12V
RH _CON32E PLD 31
PELTIETR 82 Board
RT80 LD Base Temp
PM81 PM80
PELTIETR 83 RT81 RH Base Temp
Zoom Motor Focus Motor
RT82 PELTIETR Fin Temp
32ch Laser Head CO80 Condensation
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

A,B,Z
Phase
RS-232-C Operation ENC 1000pulses
Themista panalel
6* PM Driver
RS-232-C AC Servo
Driver (Main) (Sub)
CPU
BUS
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Secondary- Parallel I/O CON- CON- SA-L

scanning pulse SAL MAL4 MA-L
RS-232-C Encoder pulse PIO-PTR4XE
Maintenance RCP3E Secondary-
(Download) scanning sensor
Board

Board
Parallel I/O
4-2.Block diagram(PT-R4300E)
CON-PTR4XE Board
Ethernet
10/100 Base T
Remote
CAL_SEN2E
monitoring
Board
HEAD MB2E-16 (Mother Board)

RS-232
RS-232-C
(Command)
Chapter A OUTLINE
HEAD HEAD
Head_CPU3E DRV3E-1 DRV3E-3
F-PIF Board Board
Board
16bit Parallel Image data

(Image data) LD-ENABLE
LRB32E PELTIETR 80
V08
PLD 0
Board
PMD80 12V
RH_CON16E PLD 15
PELTIETR 82
Board RT80 LD Base Temp
PM81 PM80
RT81 RH Base Temp
Zoom Motor Focus Motor
RT82 PELTIETR Fin Temp
16ch Laser Head CO80 Condensation
A-11
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
4-3. Board functions
RCP3E board
-Communications via serial port (RS-232C)
Operation panel
Head CPU
AC servo pack (pack parameter read/write, status read)
PIF (communication with the RIP)
Maintenance PC (firmware downloads, data backup, etc.)
AT I/F (communication between the AT-T and the AT-M, developer status import)
-Communication via Ethernet port
Ethernet ports for remote monitoring and CPUs for which TCP/IP settings can be made and that
can connect to a RAN have their own individual MAC addresses.
-Secondary scanning pulse motor (M2) control
Sends control signals, such as for the number of travel pulses and the rotation direction, to the
secondary scanning motor via the PIO-PTR4XE board->CON-PTR4XE board.
-Exposure control
Synchronizes with the encoder signals, performs various types of correction, such as scaling
correction, generates various timing signals required for plotting, and sends them to the LRB32E
board connected via the control bus.
-Motor control, sensor status import
Imports and monitors the status of the motor controls as well as the sensors and actuators via the
PI086XE board connected via the control bus.
-External temperature sensor import
Connected to the external temperature measurement thermistor.
*Up to now, this was an external temperature sensor board, but it has been changed to a
thermistor.
LRB32E board
-Image data control
Receives image data from the RIP via the F-PIF board, and when the data from a single rotation
of the drum (32 lines of data for a 32-channel head) has all been received, it synchronizes with
the exposure reference signal and sends all of the LD on/off signals to the Head CPU3E board.
The LRB32E board has three buffer areas for storing the data from a single rotation (32 lines of
data), and during normal exposure, two of these buffers are toggled back and forth. The third
buffer area is used in a ring only during 4000 dpi exposure (interlaced exposure).
-Test pattern generation, automatic burn-out
Contains a test pattern ROM and generates test patterns within the board. In addition, it also has
an automatic burn-out function.
-Spiraling correction
Contains a circuit and memory for correcting for spiraling (corrects slanting of the image) that
can correct ± 32 channels of data.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
-Disconnection check for signal cables
In conjunction with the Head CPU3 board, can check whether or not signal cables are
disconnected
PIO-PTR4XE board
-Primary scanning servo motor control
Exchanges control signals with the primary scanning servo pack. Adjusts the speed using analog
voltage from the PI0 to control low-speed rotation during drum positioning. It also accurately
determines the drum position by counting encoder signals.
-Sensor and actuator control
Controls the pulse motors and DC motors that transport the plates via the CON-PTR4XE board
using I/O control. Also processes input signals from switches and sensors and output signals from
solenoid drives, etc. The signals from the loose plate detection sensor (PH7) sensor are input
directly.
-Autoloader control
Is directly connected to the SA-L, MA-L and CON-SAL boards and controls I/O.
CON-PTR4XE board
-Relays sensor and actuator signals
Relays IN port signals from sensors, actuators, etc. to the PI0-PTR4XE board.
-DC motor and pulse motor control
Relays OUT port signals from the PI0-PTR4XE board, converts them to 24V in the DC motor
controller, and controls the motor on/off and rotation direction. It also relays signals to the pulse
motor drivers.
HEAD CPU3E board

-Communication with the RCP3E board
Connects to the RCP3E board with an RS-232C interface, and performs head data read/write and
head status communication functions.
-DRV board control
Relays LD on/off signals received from the LRB32E board to the MB2E board, and distributes
them 8 channels at a time to DRV2E boards 1 ~ 4.
-Focus motor, zoom motor and sensor control
Controls the focus motor and zoom motor as well as each motor’s sensors.
-CAL sensor light intensity data import
-Monitors internal head temperature sensors and condensation sensors
Loads and monitors temperature sensors (RH base, LD base, Peltier fin) and condensation sensor
signals via the relay boards (CON32E board, CON16E board).

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE V08

HEAD DRV2E boards
-LD control
There are four HEAD DRV2E boards on the 4300S (32 ch), and two on the 4300E (16 ch), and
each board controls the current flowing to the LDs, 8 channels at a time.
-Peltier unit control
There are four Peltier unit controls inside the 4300S (32 ch) and two inside the 4300E (16 ch) that
cool and heat the LD blocks, 8 channels at a time. Their respective drivers control the Peltier
units by supplying them with ± 12V.
MB2E board (4300S) / MB2E-16 board (4300E)

Motherboard into which the HEAD CPU 3E board and the HEAD DRV boards (two on the
4300E and four on the 4300S) are inserted. A head cooling fan and a Peltier cooling fan are
connected, and it supplies 24V to them.
RH CON32E board (4300S) / RH CON16E board (4300E)

Relays the drive current supplied to the LDs from the HEAD DRV2E boards. It is connected to
the temperature sensor and condensation sensors inside the head and sends signals to the HEAD
CPU3E board.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
5. Equipment Overview
5-1. 4300S (32 ch) and 4300E (16 ch) calibration
The calibration sequence for the remodeled PT-R4300S and PT-R4300E is the same as the
previous PT-R4100 and PT-R4300 sequence.
Target Laser power

The target laser power during calibration is set for each resolution, and normally is not changed.
2000dpi 270mW
1200/2400pi 240mW
4000dpi 270mW
2438dpi 240mW
2540dpi 230mW
These target laser power are entered in the Laser power setting screen under RH parameter.
CLR
Lpw Ip1 Ip2 Ip3 7 8 9
The same target value was entered. The
240 90 75 50
LPW (original) value changes only if the 4 5 6
LPW(original)
target value for the calibration drops due [mW]
240 1 2 3
to a deterioration of the LDs or a dirty
optical system. 0 . -
ESC SAVE ENT
Calibration and the creation of output/current value correlation curve data

1.First, find the current (Iop) at the target light intensity (240 mW at 2400 dpi).
2.Measure the light intensity at 90%, 75% and 50% of the current at the Iop that was found.
Example: If the Iop = 700 mA
Current value Measured power

lp1 =Iop x 90% = 700 x 0.9 = 630mA Pw1 = 210.5mW
lp2 =Iop x 75% = 700 x 0.75 = 525mA Pw2 = 164.5mW
lp3 =Iop x 50% = 700 x 0.5 = 350mA Pw3 = 89mW
3.You can confirm the measured results in the Laser power confirm screen under RH parameter.
Iop Pw1 Pw2 Pw3
CLR
Ch.0 788 210 164 89
Ch.1 819 214 171 93 7 8 9
Ch.2 812 212 165 91
Ch.3 822 212 164 90 4 5 6
Ch.4 789 216 172 90
Ch.5 798 211 172 93 1 2 3
Ch.6 802 212 165 91
Ch.7 811 212 164 90 0 · —
ESC OK ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
4.Create correlation curves (tables) of the output/current values for each channel from the
measured light intensity
Power
(mW) Ideal correlation
[Lpw] 240
90 213
[pw1] 210.5
75 180
[pw2] 164.5
50 120
Correction curve
[pw3] 88
350 525 630 700 Current

422 560 637 (mA)
50 75 90 100
[Ip3] [Ip2] [Ip1] [Iop]
*As you can see from the graph, if the plates are exposed using 75% of the set light intensity, a
current of 525 mA, which is 75% of 700 mA, is not set, and a 560 mA current derived from the
correlation curve flows, and the current is calibrated to 180 mW, which is 75% of the 100% target
light intensity (240 mW).

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
5-2. Determining the lifetime of 4300S (32 ch) and 4300E (16 ch) LDs
On the older PT-R4300 and PT-R4100 models, the lifetime of the LDs was defined using the
difference from the rated maximum current for each LD. On the remodeled PT-R4300S and PT-
R4300E, the method for determining the lifetime of the LDs calculates the maximum current
from the initial current values set for the LDs at the time of replacement.
Earlier method of determining the lifetime of the LDs

Warning :Iopd (Maximum rated current) – Iop (actual current) <= 50 mA
Error :Iopd (Maximum rated current) – Iop (actual current) = 0 mA (Iopd = Iop)
Method of determining the lifetime of the LDs on the PT-R4300S and the PT-R4300E
IopI :Current value set using calibration immediately after laser replacement
Iop :Actual current set from calibration
IopMAX :Maximum current value calculated from IopI (IopI x 1.35)
Warning :{(IopMAX – Iop)/(IopMAX – IopI)} x 100 <= 20%

Error :IopMAX – Iop = 0 (IopMAX = Iop)
Iop
12345678901
12345678901
IopMAX(IopI x 1.35) 12345678901
12345678901
ERROR
12345678901
12345678901
12345678901 Warning area
12345678901
12345678901 {(IopMAX-Iop)/(IopMAX-Iopl)} x 100 <= 20%
12345678901
12345678
12345678901
12345678
12345678901
IopMAX-(IopMAX-IopI) x 0.2
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678 Normal use area
12345678
12345678 {(IopMAX-Iop)/(IopMAX-Iopl)} x 100 > 20%
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678
12345678
IopI
12345678

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
The service and maintenance screen (RH parameter/IopMAX-Iop and Iop/IopMAX) appears as
shown below.
IopI Iop IopMAX Remainder

Ch0 799 788 1039 251mA 104.5% {IopMAX-Iop)/(IopMAX-IopI)} x 100%
Ch1 828 819 1035 216mA 104.3%
IopMAX - Iop
ESC OK NEXT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
5-3. How to check if the exposure head data cables are disconnected
The function for checking if there are disconnected cables is the same on the earlier PT-R4300
and PT-R4100, but on both the PT-R4300S (32 ch) and the PT-R4300E (16 ch), the image
processing board is the same board, the LRB32E.
PT-R4100 :LTB16 board + HeadCPU3 board

PT-R4300 :LRB32 board + HeadCPU3 boar
PT-R4300S and PT-R4300E: LRB32E board + Head CPU3E board

The LRB32 board sends parity (CAL), check clock (DOTDCK) and LD On permission signals
(LD-ENABLE) in addition to 32-bit image data, to the Head CPU3 board.
Image data (LD0-LD32)
LRB32E Board Parity line (CAL) HeadCPU3E Board
Clock for check 㧔DOTCK㧕
Image data cable
"
LD_ENABLE
DOTCK "
LD0㨪LD15 1 2 3 4 "
1,2,3,4:The image data of every one pixel
CAL(PARITY) A B A B "
A:Total parity of LD0 -LD7
Parity : Total of ON/OFF signal is odd or even
B:Total parity of LD8 -LD15
Creating a parity bit on the LRB32E board

In disconnection check routine 1, a 16-channel check is run using two pixels of data. The
appended parity data is 1-bit, so the upper 16 bits of the image data and the lower 16 bits of the
image data are split into two and calculated individually so that it is possible to detect a parity
line disconnection.
Select Add Prity Prity from Prity Prity from

from 0-7 8-15 of from 0-7 8-15 of
of First Second of Third Fourth
pixel pixel pixel pixel
Image data(LD0 - LD7)
8bit
CAL_A1 CAL_B2 CAL_A3 CAL_B4 ---
1bit CAL_A*/
0 or 1 CAL_B*
CAL_A1=LD0+LD1 +LD7 (First pixel)
CAL_B2=LD8+LD9 +LD15(Second pixel)
CAL_A3=LD0+LD1 +LD7 (Third pixel)
CAL_B4=LD8+LD9 +LD15(Fourth pixel)
DOTCK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
Head CPU3E board side disconnection detection

On the Head CPU3E board, parity is created from the received image data using the same method
as on the LRB32 and is compared with the parity created on the LRB32E board to detect a
disconnection.
Select Add
First Second Third Fourth Comparate

Image data(LD0 - LD7) pixel pixel pixel pixel
8bit
1bit
0-7 8 - 15 0-7 8 - 15 ---
0 or 1
Prity Prity Prity Prity
First Second Third Fourth OK or NG

DOTCK
pixel pixel pixel pixel
CAL(PARITY) CAL_A1 CAL_B2 CAL_A3 CAL_B4 ---
Prity Prity Prity Prity
DOTCK
Disconnection check results

-If there is a mismatch in the CAL_A data, it is determined that there is a disconnection in
channels 0~7.
Exee6 : Detect the braking at 0-7ch
-If there is a mismatch in the CAL_B data, it is determined that there is a disconnection in
channels 8$~15.
Exee7 : Detect the braking ar 8-15ch
-If there is a disconnection in the DOTCK line
If the check clock is disconnected, the disconnection check function does not run, so an error
cannot be detected. However, on the exposure head CPU, the check clock cannot be detected, so
it determines that there is a malfunction that includes a signal line disconnection.
If this happens, the following error is displayed:
Exee8 : Detect the braking at 0-15ch or DOTCK line
-If there is a disconnection in the CAL (PARITY) line

If the CAL (PARITY) line is disconnected, the disconnection check function does not run, but
alternately, the parity check results show a disconnection in channels 0~7 and channels 8~15.
When the main unit side CPU receives a channel 0~7 or channel 8~15 disconnection error, it
determines that there is a malfunction that includes a signal line disconnection.
If this happens, the following error is displayed:
Exee8 : Detect the braking at 0-15ch or DOTCK line
*The LD-ENABLE signal is not subject to a disconnection check, so when this line is
disconnected, the image may not be exposed, regardless of whether the exposure sequence ends
normally.
*Two signal cables (+/-) are used as a set for a single signal between the LRB32E board and the
Head CPU3E board. For example, -LD3/+LD3. If these individual sides are disconnected, they
may be sent normally as telegraphic signals. If this happens, the disconnection is not detected, but
the exposed image is also normal.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
5-4.The change point of PT-R4300S, 4300E
1.Drum Unit
1）Drum Unit for 304mm width

<Small size 304mm> for plate location pin form.
Taper pin -> inclination pin
* Leading edge clamp is modified to 304 mm width spec.
* Unique leading edge clamp is needed for 304 mm

width and 12 mm grip spec. (Factory option)
2）To change Vacuuming groove

* Countermeasure to plate floating problem.
2.Sub axis
1) Change MT base and joint of ball screw.
>> Keep to mount of RH unit while replacing the screw.
* Ball screw unit (RC) was changed.
2) Width of cable duct was changed.

>> Through the gas suction horse in duct.
Cable duct
MT base
Flexible mount bracket
Bearing block
Motor bracket
Universal arm
Coil spring + stripper

b l

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
3.Main Flame Unit
1）Change Base Rubber (refer to Fig.1)

SPM50/SPM80 -> SP-S200
2）Circuit board digital adjustment meter

-> Thermistor:PB3L-43-D2(SHIBAURA)
Spacer1
Spacer2
Base rubber
Bolt
Fig.1
4.Outer panels
1) Add logo panel (Molding)

2) Operation panel (molding) can be tilt
3) Change operation panel type
4) Hand screw on back cover 2 were changed.
5) Change drum stop switch

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
5.Blower unit
1) Model change to BU-200

2) Extend the blower horse
>> Direct connection to the drum.
6.Main Transport Unit
1) To add belt transportation
2）Transport roller 1 (Upper) / Discharge roller

Transport 　Roller hardness 50 dec to 70 dec
* Counter measure the roller mark
3) Change detection sensor.
Discharge roller 1 Transport roller 1 (Upper)
Belt unit

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
7.Electricity
1) To Change PCBs
CON-PTR4XE
　　RCP3E, LRB32E, PIO-PTR4XE, CON-PTR4XE
　　LRB32E: Sharing to LRB(4300), LTB(4100)
2) To change power supply

JWS150-5/R -> HWS150-5/RA (E model)
　JWS300-5 -> HWS300-5 (S model)
RCP3E 　JWS300-24 -> HWS300-24
　ZWS75PF-15 -> ZWS50-15
Pulse motor 　ZWS100PF-5 -> ZWS75AF-5/J
dri er 　ZWS30-24/J -> ZWS30-24/J
3) To change LD-5V power supply location

PIO-PTR4XE
4）Change PCB location
LRB32E
Insert hall of
　RCP / LRB / PIO board
blower horse
5) Change pulse motor driver. (One driver unit has two drivers)
6) Change blower horse bracket.

LD-5V power supply
8.Clamp unit
1) Punch unit is mounting on the main unit. (More satiable)
2) Squeeze roller hardness is changed 50 to 70.

* Counter measure the roller mark
3) Leading edge clamp arm refined.
4) Change photo sensor.
Squeeze roller
Mount punch unit

on frame unit.
Photo sensor

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
9.Punch Unit
1) To support Min 304mm plate as an option changes are
registration punch, guide block, centering unit the above changes
must be done by factory.
Standard register
PTR50 PTR51
ration punch
PTR209 PTR210
304 mm spec.
register ration
h
10.Clamp pin unit
1) Change photo sensor.
11.Main axis
1) Change pressure sensor
2) Change main motor
Pressure sensor

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE
12.Head unit
1) Blow air into the RH. (Keep clean inside RH)

Head＿CPU3E
Head_DRV3E 2) Change head driver board
　CAL_SEN２E
　HEAD_CPU3E
RH_CON32E/16E 　HEAD_DRV3E
Regulator of head 　RH_CON32E/RH_CON16E
compress air.
3) Temperature sensor position is changed.
　RH_CON board to MT（RH) base
4) Motor driver is changed.

PT-R4300S PT-R4300 PT-R4300E PT-R4100
Recording method External drum scanning type φ φ φ
MAX: 830 x 660 mm φ φ φ
Plate size
MIN: 304 x 370 mm (*1, *2) 324 x 370 mm 304 x 370 mm (*1, *2) 324 x 370 mm
MAX: 0.30mm φ φ φ
Plate thickness
MIN: 0.15mm φ φ φ
6.Specification
Primary scanning direction length - 27 mm

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
(leading grip margin: 15 mm, trailing grip

Effective image area φ φ φ
margin: 12 mm). The leading grip margin can
be changed to 12 mm as a factory option. (*3)
Plate loading direction Landscape(*4) φ φ φ
Drum rotational speed 1000rpm φ φ φ
Drum diameter 270mm φ φ φ
LD type CAN type laser diode 32ch φ CAN type laser diode 16ch φ

Light source and output power 808nm 1W/1ch φ φ φ
Resolution 1200/2000/2400/2438/2540/4000dpi (*5) φ 2400/2438/2540dpi φ
Throughput 21 plates/hour (@2400dpi & 724x615mm) (*6) 20 plates/hour (@2400dpi & 724x615mm) (*6) 11 plates/hour (@2400dpi & 724x615mm) (*6) 10 plates/hour (@2400dpi & 724x615mm) (*6)
Media to be used Aluminum-based thermal plate φ φ φ

Exposure method Spiral exposure φ φ φ
Stop and restart function Installed φ φ φ
Interface F-PIF (dedicated I/F for DS) φ φ φ
Front-end TF, HQ, AD (*7) TF, RENATUS (T-RIP600), HQ, AD TF, HQ, AD (*7) φ
Standard: Semiautomatic φ φ φ
Plate loading
Option: Auto loader (SAL/MAL-4300II) (*8) Auto loader (SAL/MAL-4300) Auto loader (SAL/MAL-4300II) (*8) Auto loader (SA-L4100)
Chapter A OUTLINE
Connection to auto Standard: Plate receiving tray φ φ φ

processor Option: AT unit φ φ φ
Centering unit and registration punch (Punch Centering unit and registration punch (Punch Centering unit and registration punch (Punch Centering unit and registration punch (Punch
Punch system
system for printing machine is optional.) (*9) system for printing machine is optional.) system for printing machine is optional.) (*9) system for printing machine is optional.)
Registration punch Standard:2 sets Option:3 sets㧔*1㧕 2 sets Standard:2 sets Option:3 sets㧔*1㧕 2 sets
Registration pin Standard:2, Option:3 䋨*1䋩 2 pcs. on drum Standard:2, Option:3 䋨*1䋩 2 pcs. on drum
6-1.Basic spec. of PT-R4300S/4300E (Comparison with conventional model)
A-27
A-28
PT-R4300S PT-R4300 PT-R4300E PT-R4100
TUV GS Mark TUV GS Mark
CE(GS‫ޔ‬EMC)‫ޔ‬FCC‫ޔ‬VCCI‫ޔ‬FDA‫ޔ‬UL CE(GS‫ޔ‬EMC)‫ޔ‬FCC‫ޔ‬VCCI‫ޔ‬FDA‫ޔ‬
Approval acquired 㧔EN60950,EN60204,EN60825)‫ޔ‬EMC‫ޔ‬ 㧔EN60950,EN60204,EN60825)‫ޔ‬EMC‫ޔ‬
(C-UL) UL(㨏㧙UL)
FCC‫ޔ‬VCCI‫ޔ‬FDA‫ޔ‬UL(㨏㧙UL) FCC‫ޔ‬VCCI‫ޔ‬FDA‫ޔ‬UL(㨏㧙UL)
Main unit:1770X1028X1185mm (WxDxH) Main unit:1750x1030x1178mm(WxDxH) Main unit:1770X1028X1185mm (WxDxH) Main unit:1750x1030x1178mm(WxDxH)
Dimensions
Blower unit:600x429x361mm(WxDxH) Blower unit:600x429x361mm(WxDxH) Blower unit:600x429x361mm(WxDxH) Blower unit:600x429x361mm(WxDxH)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Main unit:Approx. 670kg Main unit:Approx. 645kg Main unit:Approx. 670kg Main unit:Approx. 645kg
Weight
Blower unit:Approx. 25kg Blower unit:Approx. 30kg Blower unit:Approx. 25kg Blower unit:Approx. 30kg
Supplied from the main unit for the SA-L/MA-
φ φ Supplied from the main unit for the SA-L4100
L4300
Single-phase 200V㧔-10%㧕㨪240V㧔+6%㧕 Single-phase 200V㧔-10%㧕㨪240V㧔+6%㧕
φ φ
20A/4.0KW 15A/4.0KW
φ φ
An individual power supply is also possible. An individual power supply is also possible.
φ φ
Main unit φ φ Main unit
Single-phase 200V㧔-10%㧕㨪240V㧔+6%㧕 Single-phase 200V㧔-10%㧕㨪240V㧔+6%㧕
Power supply requirements φ φ
15A/3.0KW 15A/3.0KW
SA-L/MA-L φ φ SA-L4100
Single-phase 200V㧔-10%㧕㨪240V㧔+6%㧕 φ φ Single-phase 200V㧔-10%㧕㨪240V㧔+6%㧕
5A/1.0KW 5A/1.0KW
AT-T4000 φ φ AT-T4000
Single-phase 100V㨪120V±10%‫ޓ‬1.1A/100V φ φ Single-phase 100V㨪120V±10%‫ޓ‬1.1A/100V
Chapter A OUTLINE
Single-phase 200V㨪240V±10%‫ޓ‬0.55A/200V φ φ Single-phase 200V㨪240V±10%‫ޓ‬0.55A/200V
Temperature:Celsius 23͠±2͠(with no sudden

temperature change) (Operating φ φ φ
Recommended operation environment conditions : Celsius 18 degree to 26 degree.)
Humidity : 40% to 70% (with no φ φ φ
condensation)
Grounding Grounding resistance: 100 ohm or less φ φ φ
Main unit (with SAL/MAL/Blower/ATT) Main unit (with SAL/MAL/Blower/ATT) Main unit (with SAL/MAL/Blower/ATT) Main unit (with SAL/Blower/ATT)
13.76㨗J 3440Kcal 13.6㨗BTU 14.4㨗J 3400Kcal 13.6㨗BTU 13.76㨗J 3440Kcal 13.6㨗BTU 14.4㨗J 3400Kcal 13.6㨗BTU
Calorific value
Main unit (with blower unit) Main unit (with blower unit) Main unit (with blower unit) Main unit (with blower unit)
10.2kJ㧔2620kcal/10.2kBTU㧕 10.8kJ㧔2580kcal/10.2kBTU㧕 10.2kJ㧔2620kcal/10.2kBTU㧕 10.9kJ㧔2600kcal/11.4kBTU㧕

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Chapter A OUTLINE V08

*1 Corresponding (order production) is done in the factory option. A time limit of delivery : After
the order, one month. It can't modify with it in the customer.
<Contents of modification and check in the factory>
The change related to the position of plate location pin on the drum and the hook pin.
Reference punches is put for the punch for the for small size and changed.
Firmwear switching, and quality check.
Standard reference punch layout. Option punch area.

(PT-R4300E/S)
Reference Reference
punch punch
Plate width W Grip L Rpm Reference punch layout.
(Factory OP)
Reference punch layout Option punch area.

of small size option. (* Option)
(304mm factory OP.) Reference Reference Reference
punch punch punch
Plate width W Grip L Rpm Reference punch layout.
(Factory OP
No hook punch)
(No hook punch)
(Factory OP)
(Factory OP)
(Factory OP)
*2 The following size of the plate that the edge side hangs to the clamp groove on the drum
(direction of width) cannot be used.
1. 420 mm - 442 mm
2. 702 mm - 720 mm

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 Chapter A OUTLINE

*3 Standard Small size factory option
(Min 324mm) (Min 304mm)
Plate width 324 mm or more 304 mm - 323 mm 324 mm or more
Hook punch ON OFF ON
Standard (15mm
Clamp) Max 1000rpm Max 900rpm Max 1000rpm
15mm / 12mm
Factory OP (12mm
Clamp) Max 1000rpm Max 900rpm Max 1000rpm
12mm / 12mm
*4 There letter size of plates can use on 4300E/S.

t0.15: 324 x 370, 324 x 492, 340 x 505
t0.3: B3 letter size (450 to 455 x 600 to 605), 330 x 610, 404 x 580, 448 x 640)
*5 Use is impossible with 4300S upgraded from 4300E (16ch) 2000 / 4000dpi.
*6 Productivity refers to the processed amount per specified hour while Alarge number of plates
are being exposed.
*7 Trueflow3 :Ver3.03 Ver3.12
TrueflowRite :Ver3.03 Ver3.12
Trueflow3 DTC :Ver3.12
Trueflow (Include DTC) :Ver2.21
HQ-510PC (For Japan market) :Ver7.0
AD-810MX :Ver1.3 Ver2.0
*8 Refer to auto loader matrix table next page.
AT-T connects the conventional model. (No change.)
Small size option is required when 304mm width plate (small size option) is supported to SA-
L/MA-L4300 / 4100.
SA-L / MA-L4300II can support 304mm plate size with standard spec.
Small size kit Code Note

Sub cassette for small size.
For SA-L / MA-L4300 100096735V00
Parts to change pad position.
For SA-L4100
（Apply S/N273 or 100096736V00 Parts to change pad position.
later)
Plate size 304 x 370 - 450 x 510

The number of
Max 50 (t = 0.15 to 0.3 mm)
sheets
*9 About press punch option

Standard spec.
Conventional punch blocks can be used. (Refer to Chap. E)
Small size (304 mm) spec.
Reference punch block positions are different from standard spec. (Refer to Chap. E)

Confidential
Re-model auto loader for PT-R4300 connection matrix. 2006.3.13
A B 䌃䌄䌅
RE-model autoloader SA-L4300/MA-L4300 SA-L4300/MA-L4300 SA-L4000/MA-L4000
SA-L4100
SA-L/MA-L4300II *4) 䌓-blue spec. 䌓-red spec. (Discontinued) (Discontinued)
O
O *1)
(Fpr PT-R4100/4300 spec. Conventional model)
O
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
F0365T01 SA-L4100
F0534T01䇭SA-L4300II DS for Japan market. F0352T01䇭SA-L4300 for Japan market. 䂦䂦
1 PT-R4300E/S AL DSJ
F0534T02䇭SA-L4300II DS for overseas. F0352T02䇭SA-L4300 for overseas. Specified color cover unit ( 䌓-blue) Custom. Confirm OSD *2)
F0365T02䇭SA-L4100
DSOS
Auto loader matrix table
F0535T01䇭MA-L4300II for Japan market. F0353T01䇭MA-L4300 for Japan market.

ML
F0535T02䇭MA-L4300II for overseas. F0353T02䇭MA-L4300 for overseas.
O *1)

PT-R4100/4300 F0534T01䇭SA-L4300II for Japan market.
2 AL
䇭䌓-blue spec.
䇭䌓 F0534T02䇭SA-L4300II for overseas.
F0535T01䇭MA-L4300II for Japan market.

ML
F0535T02䇭MA-L4300II for overseas.
O *1)
PT-R4100/4300 F0534T01䇭SA-L4300II for Japan market.

3 AL
䌓-red spec. F0534T02䇭SA-L4300II for overseas.

ML
F0535T02䇭MA-L4300II for overseas.
Chapter A OUTLINE
䂦PT-R4000II spec. (Custom)

䇭(Factory option)䇭*3)
PT-R4000II
F0534T05䇭SA-L4300II for Japan market.
䌓-red spec.
4 AL 4000IIspec.
(Discontinued)
F0534T06䇭SA-L4300II for overseas. 4000II spec.
S/N421 or later
ML 4000IIspec.
F0534T06䇭SA-L4300II for overseas. 4000II spec.
䂦PT-R4000 spec. (Custom)

䇭(Factory option)䇭*3)
PT-R4000 F0534T09䇭SA-L4300IIfor Japan market. 4000

5 (Discontinued) AL spec.
F0534T10䇭SA-L4300II for overseas. 4000 spec.
F0535T09䇭MA-L4300II for Japan market. 4000
ML spec.
F0535T10䇭SA-L4300II for overseas. 4000 spec.
E.g.) F0534T01 SA-L4300II for Japan market.

Code Location
*1) The bridge for No.1 and No.2 are belt transport type. The bridge for No.3 and No.4 are roller transport type.
*2) As for the connection to an old model auto loader, the principle is not acceptable. Confirm to OSD each case.
*3) The delivery date has been three months since the order.
*4) Re-model autoloader color is white. No need to order the covers.
A-31
A-32
㪩㪼㪄㫄㫆㪻㪼㫃㩷㪸㫌㫋㫆㩷㫃㫆㪸㪻㪼㫉㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫃㫀㫊㫋㪚㫆㫅㪽㫀㪻㪼㫅㫋㫀㪸㫃
㪉㪇㪇㪍㪅㪈㪅㪈㪊
AL, ML option
Interchangeability
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
No. Option name Code Explanation Note

SA-L4100 SA-L/MA-L4000 SA-L/MA-L4000II SA-L/MA-L4300
Additional cassette and career of For auto loader cassette (Plate width
1 100096740V00 Number of plate on cassette. 100 plates 䋭 × × 䂾
small size (for AL) 304 mm to 830 mm)
Small size ( 304mm) option kit for
2 100096736V00 Change pad position kit for small size. Need to installed machine. 䂾䋭䋭䋭
4100.
Sub cassette for small size. (304 x
370 to 450 x 510mm, Max 50 plates) /
3 Small size ( 304mm) option kit for 4300 100096735V00 Need to installed machine. 䋭 × × 䂾
Pad position change parts.
4 Discharge paper box. (option) 100095607V00 For addition or reserve Screen blue 䋭䋭䋭䂾
5 Discharge paper box. (option) 100026495V00 For addition or reserve Sub color 䋭䂾䂾䂾
㪫㪿㫉㪼㪼㩷㫊㫋㪼㫇㫊㩷㫊㫇㪼㪺㪅䂾
6 Upgrade kit to MAL (JPN) 100096738V00 For Japan market. 䋭 × ×
㪪㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋㩷㪊㪇㪋㩷㫄㫄㩷㫋㫆㩷㪏㪊㪇㩷㫄㫄 (AL)
Chapter A OUTLINE
㪫㪿㫉㪼㪼㩷㫊㫋㪼㫇㫊㩷㫊㫇㪼㪺㪅䂾
7 Upgrade kit to MAL (OS) 100096739V00 For overseas. 䋭 × ×
㪪㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋㩷㪊㪇㪋㩷㫄㫄㩷㫋㫆㩷㪏㪊㪇㩷㫄㫄 (AL)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
A.Outline
7.Parts compatibility information.

7-1.Shifted position list. (Excerpt)
7-1-1.PT-R4100/4300 -> PT-R4300E/S
PT-R4300S/E (Old model name: PT-R4300 / 4100） shifted parts.
Part / Unit Wiring name Old New Reason

Primary scanning AC servo motor
M1 SGMPH-08AAA21-E Deal with Rohs.
section 　SGMPH-08AAA21
Push SW
Main part SW58 AR22-F5R01B Discontinue
　AH22-F5B01
PANEL Discontinue / For
Operation panel GP-377 (Digital) GP-2301L
BOARD Rohs
RCP2 RCP3E Deal with Rohs.
LRB32 LRB32E Deal with Rohs.
LTB16 LRB32E Deal with Rohs.
PIO-PTR4 PIO-PTR4XE Deal with Rohs.
CON-PTR4 CON-PTR4E Deal with Rohs.
U1 ZWS100PF-5 LEA75F-5-Y
U4 JWS300-24 PBA300F-24
U5 JWS300-24 PBA300F-24
U6 JWS300-5 PBA300F-5
U9 ZWS30-24/J LDA30F-24
Electrical section
AC servo pack
E1 SGDH-08AE-SY202-E Deal with Rohs.
SGDH-08AE-SY202
Fan Part
FAN1 9G1224H104
109R1224H102 communalization .
Noise filter
Z1 NAC-20-472
MXB-1220-33
Pressure ｓensor Part
P1 ZSE30-01-25-M（SMC）
PS40-102V-NAR communalization .
THERMO THERMOMETER Thermistor Part
SENSOR TTM-10L-0-N-M2-Z01 PB3L-43-D2 communalization .
Puls motor driver Part
PMD5/PMD6 PM-UDUA1S02-10
PMM-MD-23221-10 communalization .
HEAD_CPU3 HEAD_CPU3E Deal with Rohs.
HEAD_DRV2 HEAD_DRV２E Deal with Rohs.
HEAD_MB2 HEAD_MB2E Deal with Rohs.
RH＿CON32 RH＿CON32E Deal with Rohs.
Recording head RH＿CON16 RH＿CON16E Deal with Rohs.
Stepping motor driver
PMD80 PMM-BD-53131-10 Deal with Rohs.
PMM-BD-5701
Fan Part
M80,81,82 9G1224H104
109R1224H102 communalization .
Noise filter
Blower Z2 NAC-06-472
MAF-1206-33
Option Signal tower Add

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
A.Outline
7-2.Current model <-> Re-model PCB compatibility list.
7-2-1.PT-R4100/4300 -> PT-R4300E/S
Current-model Re-model
4100 4300 4300E 4300S Note
16ch 32ch 16ch 32ch
RCP2-PTR4
F
U1254023-00 Firmware / Stir data are required to
RCP2 download by RMLight.
100016143V00
CPU
RCP3 F
S100051553V02 ROHS: X Product ID / Firmware / FPGA data are
RCP3E required to download by RMLight.
F
？？？？？
LTB16
○
S100035013V00
LRB32
Image ○ ROHS: X
S100049647V01
LRB32E
Main ○ ○
S100065861V00
PIO-PTR4(2) That part code is included a FPGA (IC).
○
U1254019-03 This FPGA (IC) have 4100/4300 data.
I/O
PIO-PTR4XE That part code is included a FPGA (IC).
△ ○
S100094575V00 This FPGA (IC) have 4300E/S data.
CON-PTR4
○
U1254020-00
Connection
CON-PTR4XE
○
S100085844V00
GP377 Panel data is required to download by
F
S100015125V00 RMLight.
Panel
GP2301L
○ Panel data is common to each machines.
S100093560V00
F
HEAD-CPU3(16ch) ROHS:
○ F ROHS: Current model can use each boards witch
S100035188V01 X
X are necessarily downloaded head firm wear
HEAD-CPU3E(16ch) and FPGA by directly connection.
○ F ○ F
S100092848V00 Re-model can use each boards witch are
CPU
F necessarily downloaded head firm wear
HEAD-CPU3(32ch) ROHS:
F ○ ROHS: and FPGA by directly connection or
S100058238V01 X
X RMLight.
HEAD-CPU3E(32ch)
F ○ F ○
S100092796V00
HEAD-DRV2
○ ROHS: X
U1154009-00
LD DRV
HEAD-DRV3E
○ ○
S100092797V00
HEAD MB2-16 ROHS:
○
S100050868V01 X
HEAD MB2E-16
○ ○
Head S100050868V02
Mother board
HEAD MB2 ROHS:
○
S100050867V01 X
HEAD MB2E
○ ○
S100050867V02
OCE-50PX2
○
100031057V00
Correspond for ROHS
？？
??????
Peltier unit
OCE-100PX2
○
151199-01
Correspond for ROHS
？？
??????
CAL_SEN
○ ROHS: X
U1150075-01
Cal-Sen CALIBRATION
○ SENSOR ○
S100092799V00
○ Compatible
F PCB is common. Some data are required to download.
IC PCB is common. FPGA (IC) is required to replace.
△ Under testing
ROHS: X Un-corresponding ROHS machine can use them.
* About the other old machine parts compatibility, refer to the board compatibility list of old machine below.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
A.Outline
7-3.Re-model PCB compatibility list.
PCB compatibility list. 2006/6/15
Re-model
4300E 4300S Note
16ch 32ch
RCP3 S100051553V02
(Un-corresponding for ROHS) Product ID / Firmware / FPGA data are
CPU
required to download by RMLight.
RCP3E ？？？？？？？
LRB32E
S100065861V00
Image
Main
PIO-PTR4XE That part code is included a FPGA (IC). This FPGA (IC)
I/O
S100094575V00 have 4300E/S data.
Common for 4300ES

FPGA (IC)
100097517V00
CON-PTR4XE
Connection
S100085844V00
GP2301L
Panel Panel data is common to each machines.
S100093560V00
Re-model can use each boards witch are
HEAD-CPU3E(16ch) HEAD-CPU3E(32ch)
CPU S100092848V00 S100092796V00
necessarily downloaded head firm wear and
FPGA by directly connection or RMLight.
HEAD-DRV3E
LD DRV
S100092797V00
Head HEAD MB2E-16 HEAD MB2E

Mother board
S100050868V02 S100050867V02
Correspond for ROHS Correspond for ROHS

Peltier unit
?????? ??????
CALIBRATION SENSOR
Cal-Sen
S100092799V00
Other PCB Not common

Un-corresponding for ROHS Un-corresponding ROHS machine can use them.

A-36
PT-R4300 PT-R4000Τ PT-R4100 PT-R4000
RCP2 board RCP2-PTR4 The board (U1541023-00) for the PT-R4XXX does not include the
φ φ φ
U1254023-00 Flash ROMs (U4, U13). (Note 1)
S0249 Ver1.00
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
FLASH ROM(U3‫ޔ‬U14) S0249 Ver1.32 S0249 Ver1.30 S0249 Ver1.00

(4100)
PROM(U62) B8381 φ φ φ
PIO board PIO-PTR4(2) PIO-PTR4 PIO-PTR4(2) PIO-PTR4 The board (U1254019-XX) for the PT-R4XXX does not include the P
U1254019-03 U1254019-02 U1254019-03 U1254019-02 ROMs (U32). (Note 2)
PROM(U32) C0050 B8984 C0050 B8982
CON board CON-PTR4
φ φ φ Common to 4300,4000Τ,4100,4000
U1254020-00
7-4.Old machine PCB compatibility list
RB31 board U1154007-01 φ φ Common to 4300,4000Τ,4000

SPX32 board U1154005-00 φ φ Common to 4300,4000Τ,4000
TB64 board
TB16 board S100035013V00
A.Outline
Head CPU board U1154008-00 φ S100035188V00 U1154008-00 Common to 4300,4000Τ,4000

Head Driver board U1154009-00 φ φ φ Common to 4300,4000Τ,4100,4000
Head mother board U1150042-03 φ 100031061V00 U1150042-03 Common to 4300,4000Τ,4000
COOLING UNIT 151199-01 φ 100031057V00 151199-01 Common to 4300,4000Τ,4000
Calibration sensor U1150075-01 φ φ φ Common to 4300,4000Τ,4100,4000
Note 1: The RCP2 board can commonly be used by all type of the PT-R units once you have removed U3, U14, and U62.
Note 2: The PIO-PTR4 (2) board for the PT-R4300 is upwardly compatible and can be used with the PT-R4000 and PT-R4000II.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B. Installation
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Index
1. Installation ......................................................................................... B-1

1-1.Information required for adjustments during installation ........................... B-1
1-2.Installation schedule ...................................................................................... B-2
2. Installation conditions ...................................................................... B-3
2-1.Dimensions of delivery path .......................................................................... B-3
2-2.Dimensions when delivering the machine .................................................... B-3
2-3.Dimensions when the machine is installed (1:20)........................................ B-5
2-4.Installation space and layout position .......................................................... B-9
2-5. Environmental conditions ........................................................................... B-13
2-5-1.Temperature and humidity................................................................................. B-13
2-5-2.Floor load capacity ............................................................................................. B-14
2-5-3.Floor levelness ................................................................................................... B-14
2-5-4.Vibrations ............................................................................................................ B-14
2-5-5.Room cleanliness ............................................................................................... B-14
2-6.Power requirements ...................................................................................... B-15
2-7.Cable and hose lengths ................................................................................ B-16
3. About transportation ....................................................................... B-17
3-1.Transporting the main unit using the forklift (or similar equipment) ....... B-17
3-2.Transporting the main unit by hoisting it.................................................... B-17
4. Installation procedure ..................................................................... B-18
4-1.Packing list check ...................................................................................................... B-18
4-2.Assembly .................................................................................................................... B-18
4-2-1.Installation of the PT-R4300E/S ......................................................................... B-18
4-2-2. Removing the transport fixing brackets .......................................................... B-19
4-2-3.Adjusting the levelness ..................................................................................... B-23
4-3.Connection .................................................................................................... B-23
4-3-1.Connecting the blower. ...................................................................................... B-23
4-3-2.Connecting the blower unit control cable ........................................................ B-24
4-3-3.Connecting an auto loader to the PT-R4300 (option) ...................................... B-26
4-4. Start of the machine .................................................................................................. B-28
4-5.Initial settings ............................................................................................................. B-30
4-5-1.Outline for panel settings .................................................................................. B-30
4-5-2.Setting the media type ....................................................................................... B-32
4-5-3.Setting the plate.................................................................................................. B-37
4-5-4.Setting the printing machine information ........................................................ B-41
4-5-5.Setting the exposure conditions ....................................................................... B-49
4-5-6.Setting the punch name ..................................................................................... B-52
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) B-i

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-6.Option setting ................................................................................................ B-53
4-6-1.User screen ........................................................................................................ B-53
4-6-2.Maintenance screen .......................................................................................... B-61
4-7.Confirming plate winding and exposure ..................................................... B-63
4-8.Laser calibration ........................................................................................... B-68
4-9.Exposure adjustment ................................................................................... B-69
4-9-1.Adjusting the focus value .................................................................................. B-70
4-9-2.Adjusting the zoom value .................................................................................. B-73
4-9-3.Adjusting the light intensity <Reference> ........................................................ B-76
4-9-4.Saving the data ................................................................................................... B-77
4-9-5.Test exposure ..................................................................................................... B-78
4-9-6.Other test exposure methods ............................................................................ B-82
4-10.Other settings ........................................................................................................... B-85
4-10-1.Setting the exposure maintenance ................................................................. B-85
4-10-2.User settings ..................................................................................................... B-87
4-11.Exposure check........................................................................................... B-98
5.Punch attachment (option) .............................................................. B-99
5-1.Attachment .................................................................................................... B-99
5-2.Setting the punch name (Service menu) ................................................... B-101
5-3.Tilt correction method ................................................................................ B-103
6.Relocation ....................................................................................... B-105
7.Installation check sheet ................................................................. B-110
B-ii PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
1. Installation
1-1.Information required for adjustments during installation

The specification of the standard of the leading grip margin and the trailing grip margin of PT-
R4300E/S is as follows.
The leading grip margin : 15mm
The trailing grip margin : 12mm
However, PT-R4300E/S can set the leading grip margin to 12mm as a factory option.
Before installing the machine, check the items listed below.

Manufacturer Plate width (W) Plate length (L) Plate thickness
Plate information
Punch system BACHER (single)/BACHER (double)/KOMORI/DS/PROTOCOL/
custom specification
Pitch of pin (P)
Edge of plate (E)
1 Leading grip margin (G1)
Trailing grip margin (G2)
Printing machine
Manufacturer and model
of printing machine
Printable area
Manufacturer Plate width (W) Plate length (L) Plate thickness
Plate information
Punch system BACHER (single)/BACHER (double)/KOMORI/DS/PROTOCOL/
custom specification
Pitch of pin (P)
Edge of plate (E)
2 Leading grip margin (G1)
Trailing grip margin (G2)
Printing machine
Manufacturer and model
of printing machine
Printable area
G2
Image
W
G1 E
PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL B-1

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
1-2.Installation schedule
Installation: Approx. 3 hours
Wiring and connection: Approx. 1 hour
Machine stand-alone operation checks: Approx. 1 hour
Exposure adjustment: Approx. 3 hours
Check and adjustment of connection with host computer: Approx. 6 hours
Explanation of operation and safety: Approx. 2 hours
Punch attachment (option) (Approx. 2 hours)
Total: Approx. 2 days
B-2 PT-R4300 SERVICE MANUAL

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2. Installation conditions
2-1.Dimensions of delivery path

A delivery path of at least the following dimensions is required when delivering the machine to
the installation site.
Width Depth Height

PT-R4300E/S 1780mm or more 1150mm or more 1192mm or more
PT-R4300/4100 1760mm or more 1150mm or more 1185mm or more
It is the above-mentioned dimensions at the standard installation. Refer to the following

page for the minimum dimensions of the machine.
2-2.Dimensions when delivering the machine

The following gives the dimensions of the main unit and the blower unit when delivering the
machine to the installation site.
Width(mm) Depth(mm) Height(mm) Weight(kg)

Main unit 1770 1140 1185 Approx.670
PT-R4300E/S
Blower unit 600 429 361 Approx.30
Main unit 1750 1140 1173 Approx.645
PT-R4300/4100
Blower unit 600 429 361 Approx.30
SA-L4300II 1395 1177 1060 Approx.345
Loading unit 1395 1177 1060 Approx.380
Cassette unit
MA-L4300II (Weight 1195 1177 695 Approx.390
contains three
SA-L4300 1395 1217 1055 Approx.340
Loading unit 1395 1217 1055 Approx.375
Cassette unit
MA-L4300 (Weight 1195 1175 695 Approx.390
contains three

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
The following gives the minimum dimensions of the machine when delivering the machine to the
installation site.
Width(mm) Depth(mm) Height(mm)

PT-R4300E/S 1750 905(*1) 1000(*2)
PT-R4300/4100 1750 905(*1) 1000(*3)
SA-L/MA-L4300II 1330(*4) 1160(*4) 990(*4,5)
SA-L/MA-L4300 1330(*4) 1160(*4) 990(*4,6)
1) The depth given above is for when the front cover, the rear cover, the apron and the
hoist attachments are removed from the machine.
The depth when removing only the hoist attachments is as follows,
PT-R4300E/S : 1030mm
2) The height given above is for when the operation panel, the casters and adjustment
bolts are removed from the machine.
3) The height given above is for when the operation panel, the operation door, the
casters and adjustment bolts are removed from the machine.
4) When removing all covers around of the machine.
5) The height given above is for when the casters and adjustment bolts are removed
from the machine.
6) The height given above is for when the paper cover(top), the casters and adjust-
ment bolts are removed from the machine.
· When moving the machine, the main unit must not be tilted.
· There is a punch unit in the rear of a machine. Therefore, when you installate a PT-
R4000/4300, please do not remove a back cover.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2-3.Dimensions when the machine is installed (1:20)
-PT-R4300E/S
From Front side
From upper side

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
From side
-MA-L4300II
From back side

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
From upper side
From upper side

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
-AT-T4000

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2-4.Installation space and layout position

Be sure to secure spaces as follows so that the machine can be operated and maintenance can be
performed.
200
200 429 200
Communication
600 cable (2 m)
Blower
Vacuum hose (2 m)
800
Single phase 200-240V
Dia. 60mm
200
45
97.5
PT-R4300E/S
655
1030
Power cable for
blower (2 m)
107.5
Leveling bolt
125
750 750 125

800 1750 1000
(Units: mm) 1:25 1000

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
-PT-R4300E/S+MA-L4300II
50
working space)
space
maintenance
space
maintenance
installation

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
-PT-R4300E/S+SA-L4300II
50
work space)
space
maintenance
space
IN/OUT
cassette

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
-PT-R4300E/S+SA-L4100
50
space
maintenance
space
IN/OUT
cassette
rotation cassette space)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2-5. Environmental conditions
2-5-1.Temperature and humidity

Operating temperature range: 18ºC to 26ºC (with no sudden temperature change
within a short period)
Optimum operating temperature range: 21ºC to 25ºC
Operating humidity range: 40% to 70% (with no condensation)
Storage temperature range: 10ºC to 40ºC
Storage humidity range: 25% to 75% (with no condensation)
The following describes the calorific values of the machine. Refer to the following values when
arranging air conditioning facilities for the room where the machine is located.
PT-R4300E/S :14400kJ(3440kcal,13600BTU)
SA-L,MA-L4300I I : 3600kJ (860kcal, 3400BTU)
AT-T4000 : 251kJ (60kcal, 238BTU)
During the coldest and hottest seasons, the room environment may deviate from the
above conditions when air conditioning facilities are not run at night or during medium
and long-term intermissions. In such cases, turn ON the air conditioning facilities and
power to the machine, and warm up the machine one or two hours prior to operation.
The power to the machine must be turned ON, because the air conditioning facilities
alone cannot circulate air inside the machine.
Follow the procedure below to prevent condensation with sudden temperature change.
• Two hours before machine operation, set a timer and start operating the air condition-
ing facilities.
• An hour before machine operation, turn ON the power to the machine.
If the air conditioning facilities to be used are equipped with a humidifying function, turn
ON the power to the machine first.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2-5-2.Floor load capacity
The floor minmum The weight of the load

load capacity on one adjustment bolt
PT-R4300E/S :447 (kg/m2 ) 167.5(kg)
SA-L4300II :230 (kg/m2 ) 98.0(kg)*With plates
MA-L4300II
Loader unit :262 (kg/m2 ) 111(kg)
cassette unit :385 (kg/m2 ) 135(kg)*With plates
1) When not setting plates.

2) When setting three cassets.
2-5-3.Floorlevelness
Choose an installation site with the most level floor. Six adjustment bolts are attached to the
machine for level adjustment; these bolts can be adjusted to within 10 mm.
2-5-4.Vibrations
The following are the vibration criterion for machine installation in both the vertical direction
and horizontal direction.
0.03 m/s2 (3.0 Gal) or less (Within DC to 60 Hz)
2-5-5.Roomcleanliness
The installation site must be well ventilated and relatively dust-free.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2-6.Power requirements
The following describes the power requirements for the machine.
PT-R4300E/S
single -phase 200 to 240V 20A 4.0kW (50/60Hz)
*Case of 200V +-10%, Case of 240V -10% to +6%
*Include blower unit
For safety, power to the SA-L/MA-L should be turned OFF when the power to the main
unit is turned OFF. Therefore, PT-R4300 is changed so that the power supply of SA-
L4300/MA-L4300 can be connected.
<Reference>
SA-L4300/MA-L4300II
Single-phase 200 V to 230 V +6%,-10% 5 A 1.0 kW (50 Hz/60 Hz)
AT-T4000
Single-phase 100 V to 120 V ± 10% 1.1 A (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Single-phase 200 V to 230 V ± 10% 0.55 A (50 Hz/60 Hz)
• The machine requires a dedicated power supply. Be sure to ground the AC outlet in
the specified manner (grounding resistance: 100 W or less) for machines designed to
Japanese specifications. For overseas specifications, follow the manner that specified
in standard of each country.
• Only connect devices designated for use with the main unit.
• If you anticipate a greater range of fluctuation in the power supply voltage than the
range described above, stabilize the power supply with an appropriate voltage regula-
tor.
• Make sure that the power supply voltage fluctuations are moderate, i.e., there are no
spikes or noise.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2-7.Cable and hose lengths

The following describes the lengths of cables and hoses that are to be attached to the main unit
and blower unit.
Main unit
• Power cable: 10 m (CAUTION 1)
Blower unit
• Power cable: 2 m
• Blower hose: 2 m
• Blower unit control cable: 2 m
1) About power cable

The power cables of the main unit and the blower unit are only provided for ma-
chines with Japanese specifications, not with overseas specifications. For ma-
chines with overseas specifications, power cables must conform to the given
country’s standards, must be able to handle AC 300 V, and must have three cable
leads of at least 2.5 mm2.
However in case of PT-R4300E/S, as a part of cable comes in power terminal when
connecting, you can not connect power cable if the thickness of power cable itself is
more than 4mm.
6 to 7mm
4mm or less 2.5mm
2) About lengths of blower hose and gas suction hose

Depending in the installation conditions, the blower unit hose can be cut and short-
ened. However, whenever you cut the hose at the customer site, be sure to refasten
the hose end to its cuffs with silicon adhesives to prevent any air leakage.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
3. About transportation
3-1.Transporting the main unit using the forklift (or similar equipment)
When lifting the main unit using equipment such as a forklift, be careful about the positions of
casters and hoist brackets.
Make sure to insert the forks of equipment into the back of the main unit, as shown below.
If the forks are not inserted into the back of the main unit, the frame of the main unit may
be damaged.
Forks of equipment
Forks of equipment
3-2.Transporting the main unit by hoisting it

When hoisting the main unit, attach the hoist attachments in PT-R4300. The belt should not touch
the main unit using the side board currently used for packing of PT-R.
The side board currently

used for packing of PT-R

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4. Installation procedure
4-1.Packing list check
Be sure to check the oacking list(included with the equipment packaging) to determine if there
are any missing items.
4-2.Assembly
4-2-1.Installation of the PT-R4300E/S
Each part of this machine is in the status noted below when the transport fixing brackets are
attached.
• Transport path: Up position (Origin position)
• Recording head: Approx 365 mm
1) Stabilizer removal
There are two stabilizers on both the front and rear sides of the main unit. First remove the connecting
beam and then remove the stabilizers.
Stabilizer (1 set)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2) Installation of the main unit
Install the main unit using leveling bolts. The unit's casters should be set at 11 mm above the floor
surface as shown in the figure. Adjust all leveling bolts uniformly so that they touch the floor surface
evenly.
Be aware that if the distance between the bottom of casters and the floor surface exceeds 22
mm, the leveling bolts may detach from the main unit.
95
11
(mm)
4-2-2. Removing the transport fixing brackets

The number of the transport fixing brackets for each PT-R unit is as follows.
PT-R4300E/S: 23 transport fixing brackets (including the stabilizer set mentioned earlier)
In addition, five cushioning materials are used.
Ensure that all of them have been removed finally.
The tag shown below is attached to each transport fixing bracket. Note, however, that it is not
attached to the cushioning materials.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
1) Open the operation door.
Insert a thin rod (e.g., a hexagonal wrench) into the door-releasing hole for the operation door, which is
located at the right section of the plate table, and lower the rod. This will open the operation door.
2) Remove all covers from the main unit.

3) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the front of the main unit.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4) Remove the fixing brackets, shown below, from the back of the main unit. Also Squeeze Roller brackets.
Remove both. Remove both.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
5) Remove the exterior jig below.
Discharge tray
Remove
Remove these cushioning materials to

remove the discharge tray.
Remove
Protection material for the discharge roller

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-2-3.Adjusting the levelness

The PT-R4300E/S does require leveling, adjust all leveling bolts uniformly so that they evenly
touch the floor surface.
4-3.Connection
4-3-1.Connecting the blower.
Connect the blower hose, blower communication cable, and power supply cable between the blower unit
and the PT-R main unit. Then, secure the blower power supply cable with a tie band.
• When connecting a blower unit to the main unit using hoses, be sure to confirm that a cuff (joint
portion) is firmly attached to each hose end.
If a cuff is not adequately fastened to the hose, air leakages are likely to occur.
• Make sure to install the blower unit in the room where the PT-R4300E/S is installed.
Blower power supply Blower control cable Blower control cable Blower power supply
cable connection connection connection cable connection
Blower Main unit
Blower hose connection

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-3-2.Connecting the blower unit control cable
1) PT-R4300E/S
Main unit power Optional power sup-

Main unit power supply Ground line Optional power
supply cable inser- ply cable insertion
cable connection connection supply cable
tion port port
connection
Power supply cable connections Power supply cable insertion ports
6 to 7 mm
• Cable stripping
4 mm or less 2.5 mm

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
• Wiring connection. Please follow as below.
1: Insert screw driver ob- 2: Insert till the end with 3: If it is correct opera-
liquely for operation screw driver tion, a entrance of
slot. straightly. that can be opened.
4: Insert the wire in 5: If the wire is inserted 6: For confirming, pull

round hole like draw- till the end, please pull the wire slightly.
ing. At that time if wire screw driver out with
is inserted along pushing the wire.
round hole, that will be
smooth.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-3-3.Connecting an auto loader to the PT-R4300 (option)
For the PT-R4000/4000II, the exterior apron unit needed to be ordered separately in
order to prevent any components from being wasted. This order system is not required
for the PT-R4300, as there are fewer components to be wasted when connecting the
SA-L4300 to the PT-R4300.
1) Remove front cover of PT-R4300.
2) Open operation door of PT-R4300. A hole to open the door manually is right side of opera-
tion door.
3) Remove front cover at apron unit of PT-R4300. (4 screws)
Front cover of apron unit.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4) Remove apron unit of PT-R4300. (6 screws)
2 screws,right side and left side
2 screws at center of apron unit
5) Remove plate insert guide 3 of PT-R4300.(4 screws)
Condition after removing front cover of apron,

apron unit and plate insert guide3.
6) Install positioning plate in PT-R4300. (2 pieces)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
7) Connect SA-L/MA-L4300 to PT-R4300.

Easy to connect if apron side covers at left and right is loosened not take out completely
otherwise hard to fix again.
(2 screws inside machine fix them.)
Apron side covers
8) As the rest of procedure to connect is the same as that of PT-R4300 and SA-L/MA-L4300.
So please refer to their service manual.
• Nothing changes for shipping brackets though their shape is a little different.
• The shape of bridge and external cover is different but nothing changes regarding
shipping bracket.
9) The power source of SA-L/MA-L4300 is to be shared from PT-R4300.

The way to connect power source at PT-R4300 is changed. Please connect Grand (earth)
onto power terminal not machine frame.
Power terminal is also changed. It is quite new type so that please refer to attached proce-
dure.
For information on cable connections and how to connect the power supply cables, refer to
“4-3-2 Connecting the blower unit control cable” on page 34.
10) When you connect SA-L/MA-L to PT-R, set height of guide at PT-R and that at Bridge unit
to be parallel .
If they are not paralell each other, thin and small plate will not be transported well.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-4. Start of the machine
Before turning ON the power to the main unit, check one more time whether all transport
fixing brackets removed.
1) Turn ON the power to the main unit to start up the main unit.
ON
OF F
OFF
ON/OFF

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2) The screen on the left appears on the panel of the
main unit, and the PT-R4300 memory check starts.
Memory check progress!!
Please wait.
If an error occurs during the memory check, the

screen on the left will be displayed.
Memory check error
Please download control program.

If this screen is displayed, be sure to download
the system software from the host computer.
0101
3) When the memory check is completed, the screen on
P T- R 4 3 0 0 S the left appears.
Press [START] to start the initialization of the PT-
Please press [START] R4300.
'02.05.01
START V1.00
0200
The screen on the left is displayed during the initial-
ization.
Initializing ! !
Please wait.
0200 The Online (Ready) Screen appears after the ma-

Ready
chine initialization is completed.
1 : 1: Plate 1
OFFLINE OPEN
B-30 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-5.Initial settings
4-5-1.Outline for panel settings

The information settings in the PT-R4300 have the following configuration. This information
must be set before a plate can be loaded in the PT-R4300 and exposed.
Printing machine information Plate information Media type information
Comments Comments Comments
Plate information number Media type information number Thickness
Grip direction Size Positive type/negative type
Front and trailing grip margins Balancer constant setting
Centering Light intensity for each resolution
Offset when centering is OFF Punch information Rotational speed for each resolution
Punch number Focus for each resolution
Comments
Positioning punch ON/OFF Zoom for each resolution
(Punch block number)
Fine adjustment of image position Primary scanning length correction
(Punch interval) for each resolution
Exposure conditions
Mirror
Negative/positive
Layout
Offset for multi-output
(1) Media type information (Same meaning as “plate type information”.)

This sets information regarding the plate manufacturer, model number, and thickness. Fif-
teen type can be registered. In addition to the fifteen types (Nos. 1 through 15) that can be
registered, there are also four types (Nos. 31 through 34) that have been preset, and these
can be copied to Nos. 1 through 15.
(2) Plate information
This sets the plate size and media type information number. Fifteen types can be registered.
(3) Printing machine information
This sets the plate information number, grip, centering, and punch information. 60 types can
be registered.
(4) Punch information
This stores punch comments. Nine types can be registered. (Note that there is limit to the
number of punch units that can be attached.) A service technician sets the punch block num-
ber and punch interval when he installs an optional punch mechanism.
(5) Exposure conditions
Only one type can be registered. These settings are effective regardless of the printing
machine information selected.
• Set the information in the following order: media type information, plate information,
printing machine information, and then exposure conditions.
• When you instruct the host computer to output to the PT-R4300, the plate data set in
the printing machine information that was selected when the plate was loaded is auto-
matically selected, and output takes place according to the conditions set in the print-
ing machine information.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-5-2.Setting the media type
Select a media type number.

↓
(Copy preset media type information.)
↓
Enter comments and select negative or positive.
↓
Set the plate thickness and the balancer constant.
↓
Select the light intensity and the drum rpm.
↓
Set the focus value.
↓
Set the zoom value and the absolute precision correction value.
As many as 20 types of detailed information concerning the output media can be
registered.
NOTE • A service technician from the Dainippon Screen sales office or an agent newly registers
the media type information. Customers can change only the changeable data of the
registered information items. When you wish to newly register any data, please ask a
Dainippon Screen sales office or agent to dispatch a service technician.
Checking if the media is negative or positive

Here, as an example, the setting of Media Type 1 will be explained.
1) Select [Set media type] in the offline screen and press [OK]. The following screen
appears.
1 Media Type 1
2 Media Type 2
3 Media Type 3
4 Media Type 4
5 Media Type 5
ESC OK NEXT
2) Select the number of the media type you want to check and press [OK]. In this
example, Media Type 1 is selected. The following screen appears.
Comment Comment
Media Type 1
The selected item
will be highlighted.
Posi Nega
ESC OK Copy form
Nega : Negative type (ink adheres to exposed parts of the plate)

Posi : Positive type (ink does not adhere to exposed parts of the plate)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
NOTE • When positive plate is exposed, the section exterior to the image will burn out
.
3) To add comments to the data for the registered media type, press [Comment].
The keyboard screen is displayed.
NOTE • See “ Description of buttons” for more information about the [NEXT], [Comment] and
[Copy form] buttons.
4) To copy previously registered data, press [Copy form]. The page with the original
to be copied is displayed.
NOTE • If media are from the same manufacturer and have the same serial number butr thei
thickness is not the same, it is necessary to register separate media types.
5) Press [OK] . (Cont. on “Setting the plate thickness” )
Setting the plate thickness

You can set the thickness of the plates.
Plate thickness
These keys also move
0.30 the highlighted portion.
Thickness CLR
0.00 Front sensor offset value
0.00 7 8 9
Front offset. 10.00
Disp. offset 0.00 4 5 6
0.00
1 2 3 Displacement sensor offset
Distance limit 20.00
0
value
0
Plate displacement sensor
ESC OK ENT
detection distance
1) Enter the thickness of the plate and press [ENT].

2) When you are finished making the entries, press [OK].
(Cont. on “ Setting the laser power and drum rpm ”)
CAUTION! Only change these values by instruction from technical support staff. Also
be sure to enter the numbers accuratel y. If you enter a value incorrectly ,
plate displacement may not be detected accurately during high speed drum
rotation, which may result in damage to the PT-R .
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) B-33

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Setting the laser power and drum rpm
NOTE • The screens displayed in the PT-R4300S are used as an example in the subsequent
description. With regard to the PT-R4300E and PT-R4300E Upgrade, the resolutions that
cannot be selected are not displayed.
Set the laser power and drum rotation speed for each resolution.
dpi [%] [rpm] CLR

1200 70.0 1000 These keys also move the
7 8 9
2000 70.0 1000 highlighted portion.
2400 70.0 1000 4 5 6
4000 70.0 1000
1 2 3 Drum rpm values
2438 70.0 1000
2540 70.0 1000 0
ESC OK ENT
Setting screen 1 Laser power values
Laser power ranges from 0.0% to 100.0%.

Minimum rpm is 300 rpm. For the maximum rpm, refer to the following table.
Maximum drum Laser power and

Condition drum rotation speed
rotation speed
used for exposure
Values shown in the

Plate width is 324 mm or more. 1000min -1 (rpm)
setting screen 1
Values shown in the

Plate width is less than 324 mm (option). 900min -1 (rpm)
setting screen 2
1) The highlight moves between the laser power and rpm values each time you
press [ENT]. Enter each value and press [ENT].
2) After input is complete, press [OK]. The following screen appears.
324>X [rpm] CLR

[%]
1200 70.0 900
7 8 9
2000 70.0 900
2400 70.0 900 4 5 6
4000 70.0 900
1 2 3
2438 70.0 900
2540 70.0 900 0 Displayed when a plate width
smaller than 324 mm is supported
ESC OK ENT (factory option).
Setting screen 2
(Cont. on “ Setting the focus value and zoom value” )
NOTE • Doing a test exposure, decide upon and enter the appropriate values for laser power and
drum rpm. For more details, refer to “ Test exposure.”
• Input is not possible where “- - - -” appears under the “dpi” column.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Setting the focus value and zoom value
Set the focus value and Zoom value for each resolution setting for the media.
CLR
dpi [pulse] [pulse]
1200 2000 10000 7 8 9 These keys also move the
10000 highlighted portion.
2000 2000
10000
4 5 6
2400 2000
4000 2000 10000 1 2 3
2438 2000 10000
2540 2000 10000 0
ESC OK ENT
Zoom values
Focus values
1) The highlight moves between the focus values and zoom values each time you
press [ENT]. Enter each value and press [ENT].
2) After input is complete, press [OK].
(Cont. on “ Setting the absolute precision correction value” )
NOTE • To check the focus value and zoom value settings or perform a text exposure to
determine the optimum focus values and zoom value, refer to “ Test exposure.”
• A focus value of 1 pulse corresponds to 1 µm. The larger the focus value, the closer the
focus point moves toward the drum. For example, if the focus value of a plate with
thickness = 0.24 mm is 2000, the focus value of a 0.30 mm plate will be approximately
1940 (0.30 - 0.24 mm = 60 µm, hence 2000 - 60 = 1940).

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Setting the absolute precision correction valu e
Set the D value for each plate resolution and the absolute precision correction value
for the main scanning direction.
NOTE • The D value is a value determined by the media type, and entering this value sets the
optimal exposure conditions.
• The absolute precision correction value is a correction of the length of the primary scan-
ning direction. For example, if this value is initially 0 and an image is exposed that is 800
mm in the primary scanning direction, but the exposed image is actually 799 mm, entering
a correction value of
(400 - 399)/800 × 100 = 0.250(%)
will cause the correct length to be exposed.
R These keys also move

dpi [%] CLR the highlighted portion.
1200 0.000
7 8 9
2000 0.000
2400 0.000 4 5 6
4000 0.000
1 2 3
2438 0.000
2540 0.000 0 Absolute precision
correction values
ESC SAVE ENT
1) The highlight moves each time you press [ENT]. Enter each absolute precision
correction value and press [ENT].
NOTE • To check the absolute precision correction value settings, or perform a text exposure to
determine the optimum and correction values, refer to “ Test exposure. ”
2) After input is complete, press [SAVE]. The save confirmation screen appears.
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK
3) Press [YES] and then [OK] to save all of the set information as Media Type 1.
The data is saved, and the screen returns to the first screen in “ Set media
type”.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-5-3.Setting the plate
Select a plate number.

↓
Enter comments and select the media type.
↓
Set the plate size.
As many as 60 types of output plate information can be individually registered.
Selecting the media type

1) Press [Set plate] and then [OK] in the offline screen. The following screen ap-
pears.
1 Plate 1
2 Plate 2
3 Plate 3
4 Plate 4
5 Plate 5
ESC OK NEXT
2) Select the number of the plate and press [OK]. In this example, Plate 1 is set.
The following screen appears.
Comment
Comment
Plate 1
Media
Media Type 1
Selected plate type
ESC OK Copy form
3) To add comments to the data for the plate, press [Comment]. The keyboard
screen is displayed.
- The comments set here are displayed in the work request screen where you requested
the plates to be set or the screen where you selected the plates to be set. We recommend
that you enter the name of the size, the dimensions, and the thickness (and the name of
the plate type if you are using more than one plate type) as shown below.
Example A4-8 page 650x550 0.20 mm
A4-8 page 650x550 0.24 mm
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
5) Press [Media] . The following screen appears.
1 Media Type 1
2 Media Type 2
3 Media Type 3
4 Media Type 4
5 Media Type 5
ESC OK NEXT
6) Select the number of the media type and press [OK]. The screen returns to the
previous screen.
NOTE • For more details, refer to “ Setting the plate size” and “ Set media type.”
7) Press [OK] .
(Cont. on “ Fine mode” )

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Fine mode
Set the linkage of the information regarding the media type in the fine mode.
NOTE • In order to allow switching of the zoom or laser value depending on the Fine screen mode
settings (specified in the printing machine information or instructed from the host com-
puter), the two types of media information in the normal and fine modes are linked with the
media information.
Plate information Media type information
Name Laser power

Size Drum rpm
Media type information Focus
number (for Normal mode) Zoom
Media type information
number (for Fine mode)
Media type information
Laser power
Drum rpm
Focus
Zoom
1) The fine screen mode screen appears.
Fine screen mode: Fine screen mode:
Media Media
same as Normal mode No.5 Media Type 5
ESC OK ESC OK
When “same as Normal mode” is selected When “Media Type 5” is selected
2) Press [Media] to display the following screen.
0 same as Normal mode 1 Madia Type 1
2 Madia Type 2
3 Madia Type 3
4 Madia Type 4
5 Madia Type 5
ESC OK NEXT ESC OK NEXT
3) First press [0] or any number from [1] to [20], and then press [OK].
After [0] “same as Normal mode” has been selected, the media type information

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
to be used for the Normal mode and the Fine mode will be the same. (The media type
information specified in the first page will be used in both modes.) After a number
from [0] to [20] has been selected, the specified media type setting will be used
when exposure is performed in the Fine mode.
(Cont. on “5.3.3 Setting the plate size”)
Setting the plate size

Set the plate size. The size to be set is the total area including the print area and the
leading and trailing grip settings.
NOTE • The maximum plate size that can be set is 830 x 660 mm, and the minimum size is 324 x
370 mm.
• The minimum size for the small-size plate option is 304 x 370 mm.
• Due to the restrictions on the machine specifications, plates with widths of 420 to 442 mm
and 702 to 720 mm cannot be used.
• When the registration punch option is not installed in the PT-R with the small size option, a
plate 590 mm or larger and a plate smaller than 610 mm cannot be used.
Size [mm] CLR

These keys also move the
7 8 9 highlighted portion.
830.0
4 5 6
Plate width
1 2 3
645.0
0
Plate length
ESC SAVE ENT
1) Enter the plate width and then press [ENT]. The highlight will move to the plate
length setting.
2) Enter the plate length and then press [ENT].
3) After input is complete, press [SAVE]. The save confirmation screen will appear.
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK
4) Press [YES] and then [OK] to save all of the entered information as Plate 1 data.
The data is saved, and the screen returns to the first screen in “Set plate” .

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-5-4.Setting the printing machine information
Select a printing machine number.

↓
Enter comments and select the plate.
↓
Set the grip direction.
↓
Set the leading and trailing grip margins.
↓
Set the image centering method.
↓
Set the image position offset.
↓
Set the punch.
↓
Fine adjust the image position.
Output conditions such as the media type, leading grip margin, trailing grip margin,
and image centering can be associated and saved as the printing machine informa-
tion. Up to 60 different printing machine information types can be registered.
Selecting the plate

1) Press [Set printing machine] and then press [OK] in the offline screen. The
following screen appears.
1 Printing machine 1
SPC
ESC OK NEXT
2) Select the number of the plate recorder and press [OK]. In this example, “Printing
machine 1” is selected. The following screen appears.
Comment
Selected plate

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
3) To add comments to the data for the registered plate recorder, press [Comment].
The keyboard screen is displayed.
5) Press [Plate]. The following screen appears.
6) Select the number of the plate and press [OK].

NOTE • See “Set plate” for information about plate settings.
(Cont. on “Fine screen mode settings” )
Fine screen mode settings

Set whether or not to use fine screen mode (Fine mode).
Fine screen mode: OFF

Each time you press this button it will
switch between [OFF] and [ON].
ESC OK
[ON] : Use plate type information for Fine mode.

[OFF] : Use plate type information for Normal mode.
NOTE • Depending on the type of host machine you are using, you can select Normal/Fine from
the host machine. If you do this, the settings on the host machine take precedence over
the settings in “Set printing machine”.
• See “ Fine mode” for more information about registering Fine mode and Normal
mode.
(Cont. on “ Grip direction and leading/trailing gripper settings” )

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Grip direction and leading/trailing gripper settings
Set the plate grip direction and the length of the leading and trailing grip amount
(amount of offset from the edge of the plate to the printed area).
Spiral/Step
Grip direction
ESC OK
:Select horizontal gripping (at the top and bottom) of the plate.
: Select vertical gripping (at each side) of the plate.
1) Select the grip direction and then press [OK]. The following screen appears.
Grip [m Grip [mm]/ CLR

After G After Grip These keys also move
the highlight.
7 8 9
0.0 mm
4 5 6
Leading grip margin
1 2 3
0.0 mm
Trailing grip margin
0
ESC ESC OK ENT
Vertical grip screen Horizontal grip screen
NOTE • The leading/trailing grip position changes depending on the grip direction set in Step 1.
2) Enter the leading grip margin and then press [ENT]. The highlight will move to the
trailing grip margin setting.
3) Enter the trailing grip margin and then press [ENT].
4) After input is complete, press [OK].
(Cont. on “ Setting the image centering method” )

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Setting the image centering method
The image centering function is used to center the image data in the center of the
print area minus the leading and trailing grip margins. (The following screen illustra-
tion assumes that the grip direction has been set to horizontal gripping.)
Centering
ESC OK
( ) Primary scanning direction (vertical) :centering OFF

Secondary scanning direction (horizontal) :centering ON
( ) Primary scanning direction (vertical) :centering ON

Secondary scanning direction (horizontal) :centering ON
( ) Primary scanning direction (vertical) :centering OFF

Secondary scanning direction (horizontal) :centering OFF
( ) Primary scanning direction (vertical) :centering ON

Secondary scanning direction (horizontal) :centering OFF
Select the centering method and then press [OK].

(Cont. on “ Setting the image of fset”)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Setting the image offset
If centering in either or both of the scanning directions was set to OFF in the proce-
dure described in “ Setting the image centering method,” the of fset value (the
image output position on the plate) for the non-centered scanning direction can be
adjusted. (The following explanation assumes that centering in both the primary and
secondary scanning directions has been set to OFF.)
Offset H CLR
These keys also move the
highlighted position.
R 0.0 mm 7 8 9
Offset value for the secondary
4 5 6 (horizontal) scanning direction.
Offset V
1 2 3
R 0.0 mm
Offset value for the primary
0 (vertical) scanning direction.
ESC OK ENT
1) Enter the offset value for the secondary (horizontal) scanning direction and then
press [ENT]. The highlight will move to the offset value setting for the primary
(vertical) scanning direction.
2) Enter the offset value for the primary (vertical) scanning direction and then press
[ENT].
3) After input is complete, press [OK]. The punch setting screen appears.
(Cont. on “ Punch” )
NOTE • If image centering is set to ON in the primary (vertical) scanning direction and OFF in the
secondary (horizontal) scanning direction, an offset value can only be set for the second-
ary scanning direction. Likewise, if image centering is set to OFF in the primary (vertical)
scanning direction and ON in the secondary (horizontal) scanning direction, an offset
value can only be set for the primary scanning direction.
• If image centering is set to ON in both scanning directions, the image offset setting screen
will not appear.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
The following diagrams show the relation of the image centering and offset value
settings to the image output position.
Trailing grip
Leading grip
Trailing grip
( ) a a
a a
Offset V
Leading grip Offset V
Trailing grip
b
b
Leading grip
Trailing grip
( ) a a a a
b
b
Leading grip
Trailing grip
Leading grip
Trailing grip
( )
Offset H Offset V
Leading grip Offset H Offset V
Trailing grip
b
b
Leading grip
Trailing grip
( )
Offset H b Offset H
b
Leading grip
NOTE • When an image is output from the host computer, an error will occur if the image is moved
by an offset setting to the point that it extends beyond the plate size minus the leading and
trailing grip settings.
Example: Trailing grip Trailing grip
Offset V Offset H
Leading grip Leading grip
• If multi-output has been selected in the exposure condition settings, the settings for image
centering in the secondary scanning direction and image offset in the secondary scanning
direction will be ignored.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Punc h
Set the punch type and hook punch.
OFF Punch
ESC OK
1) Setting the punch

Press [Punch]. The following screen appears.
NOTE • If [OFF] is selected, the plate will not be punched.
2) Select the desired punch type from the registered punch types and then press
[OK]. The punch type will be linked to printing machine 1, and you will return to
the punch setting screen.
NOTE • For the procedure for registering punch types, refer to “Setting the punch name. ”
3) After selecting the punch, press [OK].

(Cont. on “ Fine adjustment of plate loading position” )

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Fine adjustment of the image position
Perform fine adjustment (shifting the print area) of the image output position on the
plate.
Paper Position H CLR

These keys also move the highlight.
R 0.0 mm 7 8 9
4 5 6 Shift amount in the secondary

Paper Position V scanning (horizontal) direction
1 2 3
0.0 mm
R Shift amount in the primary
0
scanning (vertical) direction
ESC SAVE ENT
1) Enter the desired shift in the secondary scanning (horizontal) direction and then
press [ENT]. The highlight will move to the shift setting in the primary scanning
direction.
2) Enter the desired shift amount in the primary scanning (vertical) direction and
then press [ENT].
3) After input is complete, press [SAVE]. The save confirmation screen appears.
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK
4) Press [YES] and then [OK] to save all the information you set as printing machine
1 data. The data is saved and the screen returns to the first screen in “ Set
plate”.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-5-5.Setting the exposure conditions

Set the plate ejection method for output, and select positive/negative output, and
exposure conditions for the layout method.
1) Select [Set exposure mode] and press [OK] at the offline screen. The following
screen appears.
Auto/ Manual : For having the plate automatically

loaded from the cassette of
the MA-L.
: For manually loading the plate at

the bridge of the MA-L.
ESC OK
2) Select [Set exposure mode] in the offline screen and press [OK]. The following
screen appears. If an online processor is not connected, the screen of procedure
2 will appear.
: Unload an exposed plate from the

rear outlet of the PT-R .
: Unload an exposed plate to the

PT-R’s ejection table.
3) Select the ejection method and press [OK]. The exposure condition setting
screen appears.
Posi/Nega
: Positive output
Layout 1 1 2 3
: Negative output
ESC SAVE
NOTE • Normally is selected and the host computer outputs a positive image. The PT-R
checks whether the media type is set to positive or negative and then adjusts exposure so
that a positive image is output. If the image output from the host computer is a negative
image, select in the exposure condition setting screen. However, for positives, since
exposure occurs at the burning out border when is selected, please set the RIP for
negatives.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Layout:
1 : Output a single image (output one image on one plate)
123 : Output multiple images (output several images on one plate)
NOTE Normally single output is used. Use multi-output for the following situations:
• When you want to output the same image several times to one plate while changing
exposure conditions such as the laser power each time after exposure is complete.
• When you want to output several images to one plate without using pagination.
CAUTION! Multi-output is for exposure and test printing for such purposes as dot gai n
adjustment. We do not recommend using a plate exposed using multi-
output for actual, finished-work printing. Take careful note of the following
when doing multi-output .
• Do not attempt to cancel output from the host computer by such means
as pressing [STOP] or [CANCEL] on the PT-R operation panel. Doing so
may cause faulty exposure.
• Do not set the next plate while an exposure is in progress.
3) Select the desired exposure condition and press [SAVE].

The save confirmation screen appears.
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK
4) Press [YES] and then [OK] to save all of the condition settings. The data is saved
and you are returned to the offline screen.
If you want to cancel the data save, press [NO] and then [OK]. You then return to
the offline screen.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Multi-output
If the length of the subsequent image to be exposed is longer in the feed direction
than the remaining available exposure area (length) on the plate, the plate will be
ejected.
Eject Plate (first)
Image Image Image

(first) (second) (third)
Plate (second)
Image
(third)
Overview of multi-output
If centering in the sub scanning direction is set to ON in the printing machine settings,
exposure of the initial image will begin at a position 5 mm from the edge of the plate
(or the leading grip). A 5 mm gap is automatically inserted between each image.
Grip direction: Top and bottom grip

Trailing grip Printing area
Output Output Output

image image image
Leading grip
Output Output
image image
Grip direction: Side grip
Gap = 5 mm
Output Output
image image
Printing area
Leading grip Trailing grip
Gaps between multi-output images
NOTE When performing multi-output using a positive-type plate, the 5 mm gap before the first
image, the 5 mm gap between images, and the gap from the edge of the last image to the
edge of the plate will be burned out. The burn-out after the last image is executed before
unloading.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-5-6.Setting the punch name

When an optional punch unit is installed, a service technician will set the punch
number (1 to 9) where the punch is installed to enable the punch, and the punch hole
pitch. The punch can be used at this point; however, to make it easier to select a
punch in the printing machine settings, you can assign a name to the punch.
1) Select [Set punch name] and then press [OK] in the offline screen. The following
screen appears.
1 Punch 1 425 mm
Punch hole pitch
2 Punch 2 0 mm
3 Punch 3 0 mm
4 Punch 4 0 mm
5 Punch 5 0 mm
ESC OK NEXT
2) Select the number of the punch which you want to add a name to then press
[OK]. The keyboard screen appears.
NOTE • See “ Description of buttons ” for more information about the keyboard screen.
3) Enter a name for punch 1
After input is complete, press [ENT]. The save confirmation screen appears.
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK
4) To save the name for punch 1, press [YES] and then [OK]. The data is saved and
you are returned to the offline screen.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-6.Option setting
4-6-1.User screen
Use option setting to set ON/OFF for the alarm to sound during plate unloading or for
an incorrect unload destination for loaded plates. The optional settings appear on the
following two pages. Select [Option Setting Screen] in the first ETC.(other user
settings) screen and press [OK] to display the first page.
The specification in which the PT-R4300E/PT-R4300S is connected
Buzzer during trans ON Exposure channel 32ch
Incorrect plate Remove
Interleaf warning Network ON

30 sheets
Negotiation Auto
Preload button OFF
Empty warning ON
ESC NEXT ESC SAVE
First page Second page

The specification in which the PT-R4300/PT-R4100 is connected
Buzzer during trans ON Exposure channel 32ch
Incorrect plate Remove
Interleaf warning 30 sheets
Preload button OFF
Empty warning ON
ESC NEXT ESC SAVE
First page Second page

NOTE • The items to be displayed in the option setting screen will vary due to the machine configura-
tion (e.g. the presence of an autoloader or the connection status of the conveyer).
• For further information on the following items, refer to Chapter 5 in the manual of the PT-R
that you use.
Network, Negotiation, Image buffer and Chiller cooler
Buzzer during trans

When exposed plates are ejected to the online processor, a buzzer beeps at one-
second intervals to indicate that you cannot insert plates to the bridge while this
action is in progress. The buzzer can be set not to sound.
[ON] : Buzzer beeps when plate is ejected.
[Loud] : The buzzer sounds loudly when the plate is unloaded.
[OFF] : Buzzer does not beep when plate is ejected.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Incorrect plate
Set whether to unload from either the ejection table side or the rear outlet door if the
plates that were loaded are different from the plate information specified on the host
machine (size, thickness, etc.).
As you press the button, it changes from [Remove] to [Rear Unload].
[Remove] : Unloads the plates on the ejection table side.
[Rear Unload] : Unloads plates from the rear outlet door on the PT-R.
Interleaf warning
Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in increments of 10 sheets as
[OFF], [10 sheets], [20 sheets] … [100 sheets]. When [OFF] is selected, a warning
alarm will not sound. Also, [RESET] will not appear in the online screen.
Preload button
Perform the procedure below to set forced preloading. Each time it is pressed, it will
cycle from [OFF] to [ON/OFF] to [COUNTER] and back.
NOTE • Preloading
Preloading refers to the action of loading the next plate to be exposed beforehand. The
next plate is loaded to the insertion table of the PT-R while the current plate is still being
exposed. Preloading is executed via instructions from the RIP for separation of the first
page and operation efficiency improves in proportion with the amount of multi-color
separation output. Preloading is not performed for single-color outputting. Also, for two-
color outputting, only the second plate is preloaded.
• Forced Preloading
Having preloading performed regardless of whether a command has come from the RIP
is called forced preloading. Forced preloading only occurs when the same plate (size,
thickness, type, etc.) is being used in succession and is very efficient for single color
and two-color outputting. However, when forced preloading is used, the amount that
productivity is increased relies greatly on the file size, plate size, RIP processing time,
RIP platform, and other factors. Therefore, it is not guaranteed to increase the productiv-
ity for all job conditions. Furthermore, since forced preloading occurs even when no
command is given from the RIP, if the plate size or type is changed, the plate that has
already been loaded will be wasted. If this occurs, that plate will need to be ejected and
removed, resulting in lower productivity compared to if you had not used forced
preloading.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
When you select [ON/OFF], either [PLoad On] or [PLoad Off] is displayed in the
bottom right of the online screen in auto loading mode. Switch between [PLoad On]
and [PLoad Off] by pressing the button. It is possible to change this during exposure.
[PLoad On] : Performs preloading regardless of the whether a command is
given from the RIP.
[PLoad Off] : Only performs preloading when the command is given from
the RIP.
Ready RESET Ready RESET
1: Plate1 1: 800 600 0.30
50 50
50 50
0 0
OFFLINE PLoad On OFFLINE PLoad On
PT-R4300S/PT-R4300E specification PT-R4300/PT-R4100 specification
If you select [PLoad On], plates are preloaded regardless of the instructions from the
RIP machine. However, when [PLoad On] is set, plates are preloaded even after the
final output.
For example, in the following type of operation, you can eliminate the time it takes to
process extra loaded plates and run output more efficiently.
Example: When 10 same size, same type plates are output, and the plates differ,
starting from the 11th plate, switch to [PLoad Off] while the 9th plate is being
exposed.
NOTE • [PLoad Off] means to following the RIP instructions. It does not mean that preloading is
not performed.
If you select [COUNTER], the screen for setting the number of plates to output (bot-
tom right) is displayed. Enter the number of same size, same type plates to be output
consecutively.
The specification in which the PT -R4300E/PT-R4300S is connected
Ready RESET Number of plates CLR
1: Plate 1 10 7 8 9
50 4 5 6
50
0 1 2 3
0 (1) 0
OFFLINE COUNTER ESC OK ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
The specification in which the PT-R4300/PT-R4100 is connected
Ready RESET CLR

Number of plates
1: 800 600 0.30 10 7 8 9
50 4 5 6
50
0 1 2 3
(1) 0
OFFLINE COUNTER ESC OK ENT
Press [ENT] and [OK] to return to the online screen (top left). The number of plates
that were set is displayed in the online screen.
NOTE • If the counter value is 2 or more, preloading is performed regardless of the command from
the RIP.
• The counter value decreases by 1 each time a plate is loaded.
• When the value becomes 1, it will not decrease any further and forced preloading is
stopped. (Preloading will be performed according to the commands from the RIP.)
• To perform forced preloading after the counter reaches 1, reset the counter to the desired
value.
• In case of PT-R4300/PT-R4100, the counter value become 1 when you restart. (Forced
preloading is not performed and preloading is performed according to the commands from
the RIP.) In case of PT-R4300E/PT-R4300S, the counter value become the last value
when you restart.
• It is also possible to change the counter value during exposure.
Example: When 10 of the same size, same type plates are output consecutively, and
then the size is changed and 20 plates are output consecutively.
• When the forced preloading is used, a plate is loaded even after the last data is exposed.
In such a case, unload the plate using the user maintenance mode screen in the PT-R.
For more details, refer to the USERS MANUAL of the PT-R that you use.
Empty warning
If no more plates are detected while outputting in the automatic loading mode, a
warning message is displayed. If you like, this message can be set not to display.
Set the counter to 10 and start output, and after the 10th plate is output, set the
counter to 20 and restart output.
[ON] : Displays the warning message when there are no more plates.
[OFF] : Does not display the warning message when there are no more plates.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Exposure channel
Set the laser diode channels to be used during exposure.
The specification in which the PT-R4300S/PT-R4300 is connected
Set the laser diode channels to be used during exposure. As you press the button, it
changes from [32ch] to [0-15ch] to [16-31ch].
[32ch] : Uses all 32 laser diode channels for exposure.
[0-15ch] : Uses laser diode channels 0 to 15 for exposure.
[16-31ch]: Uses laser diode channels 16 to 31 for exposure.
The specification in which the PT-R4300E/PT-R4100 is connected
Set the laser diode channels to be used during exposure. As you press the button, it
changes from [16ch] to [0-7ch] to [8-15ch].
[16ch] : Uses all 16 laser diode channels for exposure.
NOTE • Changing the exposure channels is a countermeasure for when problems occur on the
laser diode.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Negotiation
As you press the button, it changes from [Auto] to [100M FULL], [100M HALF], [10M
FULL], [10M HALF].
[Auto] : Auto negotiation mode
[100M FULL] : 100 Mbps Full Duplex fixed mode
[100M HALF] : 100 Mbps Half Duplex fixed mode
[10M FULL] : 10 Mbps Full Duplex fixed mode
[10M HALF] : 10 Mbps Half Duplex fixed mode
Check the hub settings for the machine to be connected and make settings in accor-
dance with the “O” symbols in the chart below. The descriptions below the circles are
communication modes that are activated when the PT-R is correctly connected to the
hub.
PT-R
Hub Auto 100 M 100 M 10 M 10 M
FULL HALF FULL HALF
Auto
100 M FULL
100 M HALF
10 M FULL
10 M HALF
NOTE • When you have changed the setting of Network, turn off the power to the PT-R and then
turn the power on again.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
TCP/IP
To connect the PT-R to a LAN, it is necessary to set IP addresses and other settings.
NOTE • When connecting the PT-R to a LAN, see “Network” in “ Option setting. ”
• When connecting the PT-R to a LAN, consult with your network administrator before
making the following settings.
1) Select [TCP/IP] and press [OK] in the user setting selection screen. The following
screen appears.
TCP/IP
CLR
MAC address (xxx)
00:D0:19:xx:xx:xx 7 8 9
IP address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 4 5 6
Subnet mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 1 2 3
Default gateway
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 0
ESC SAVE ENT
MAC address: Displays the MAC (Media Access Control) address for
the PT-R (Ethernet address)
IP address: For setting the IP address of the PT-R
Subnet mask: For setting the subnet mask of the LAN to which the
PT-R is connected
Default gateway: For setting the default gateway of the LAN to which the
PT-R is connected
2) When you have completed the settings, press [SAVE]. The following screen
appears.
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK
3) To save the settings, first press [YES], then [OK]. The settings will be saved and
the user setting selection screen reappears. If you don’t want to save the set-
tings, first press [NO], then [OK]. You are returned to the first ETC.(other user
settings) screen.
NOTE After changing the settings, restart the PT-R.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Signal towe r
You can make a warning light flash on the signal tower (optional) when an error
occurs. Use this to set the display color of this signal tower as well as whether an
alarm will sound. Select [Signal tower] in the first ETC. (other user settings) screen
and click [OK] to display the following screen.
Error Red
Warning Orange
Request Red
Online Green
ESC SAVE
Each of the [Error], [Warning] and [Request] buttons change to [Off], [Red], [Orange],
[Green], [Red + Bz], [Orange + Bz] and [Green + Bz].
In addition, the online status buttons change between [Off] and [Green].
[Off] : Lamp does not light.
[Red] : Red lamp flashes.
[Orange] : Orange lamp flashes.
[Green] : The green lamp flashes for the [Error], [Warning] and [Request]
buttons. The green lamp stays continuously lit in online status.
[Red + Bz] : Red lamp flashes and alarm sounds.
[Orange + Bz] : Orange lamp flashes and alarm sounds.
[Green + Bz] : Green lamp flashes and alarm sounds.
Online status is a status where [Error], [Warning] or [Request] is not displayed in the
online screen after initialization is finished.
See “Chapter 8 Messages” for more information about [Error], [Warning] and [Re-
quest].

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-6-2.Maintenance screen
3051 Machine option select

Input parameter
Allows setting of the options for the PT-R.
Machine option select
I/O Read/Write
P r e s s i n g t h e OK key after selecting the
Initialize data
key brings up the screen in which
Special action
you can set options for the PT-R.
ESC
ESC OK NEXT
Returns you to the upper layer Menu screen.
4200 LD/Stocker
LD/Stacker OFF
LD : It is possible to discharge plates to the processor (rear
Cassette OFF
discharge). The Error and Busy signals are used for
Singnal tower OFF
Air filtering unit OFF

communication.Be sure to select “D” when the AT-T
is connected.
ESC NEXT
Stocker : Although it is possible to discharge plates to the
processor (rear discharge), the Error and Busy signals
are ignored.
OFF : Plates are discharged within the machine. The rear
discharge is not available.
ATM : Be sure to select “ATM” when the AT-M is con-
nected.
CASSETTE
OFF : Select when the PT-R is used alone.
Single : Select “Single” when the SA-L is connected.
Multi : Select “Multi” when the MA-L is connected.
Signal tower
OFF: Without Signal tower option. (Standard)
ON: With Signal tower option. (Option)
Air filtering unit

OFF: Without Air filtering unit option. (Standard)
ON: With Air filtering unit option. (Option)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V1.0 B.Installation
Centering unit:
4201
Centering unit Normal
Normal: Without small size option unit. (Plate minimum
width 450.0mm) (Standard)
Option: With small size option unit. (Plate minimum width
304.0mm)
ESC NEXT
Power up Laser:
4202
Power up Laser
OFF:Default. (Maximum EXP. power: 100%: 240 mw)
OFF
ON:Change maximum EXP. power to 113%: 270 mw
Use delicate plate OFF Use delicate plate:

# of option pattern 0
Countermeasure against roller marks on exposed plate.
OFF: Default.: The plate is nipped at the same position as
ESC SAVE before (approximately 40 mm from the end of the plate).
0 mm: The plate is nipped at a position approximately 12
mm away from the end of the plate.
-2 mm: The plate is nipped at a position approximately 10
+2 mm: The plate is nipped at a position approximately 14
# of option pattern:
0:Default.
Fine screen mode ON
1: A button to select a test pattern is dis played on the first
Std.
page of light intensity exposure, rotation exposure, focus
Test pattern
exposure, and zoom exposure screens.
When this button is pressed, it toggles ‘Std.’ and ‘Checkers’

sequentially.
ESC OK
‘Std.’: Exposes the existing pattern.
‘Checkers’: Exposes the new pattern.
4205
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-7.Confirming plate winding and exposure

Confirmation of plate winding load a plate and check the winding.
<Preliminary check>
Make sure that none of the plates the customer will use
are wrapped, bent or dented.
1) Check the following items during the plate loading.

• When the plate is being punched, the cam follow-
ers of the centering unit touch the plate sides.
• The cam followers do not press against the plate
sides too hard.
• The plate top side detection sensors are properly
Plate Centering unit
operating.
2) Check the following items for the wound plates.

• Leading and trailing edge grip margins
(Leading edge grip margin = 13.2 mm, Trailing
edge grip margin = 7 mm 0, +0.1 mm)
The values mentioned above are used for 0.3 mm
plates. The thinner the plate is, the longer the trail-
ing edge grip margin length will be.
• The plate must touch the registration pins.
Registration pin
Trailing edge clamp

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
3051
Input parameter 3) Adjust the front sensor offset
I/O Read/Write This adjustment is not necessary for the LH-PI

Initialize data
plates, as it has been done at the factory.
Special action <Front sensor offset adjustment>

Initialize the machine.
ESC OK NEXT
→Load a plate on the drum to confirm the plate edge
hits the registration pins completely.
4451
Front sensor offset →Go to the service maintenance mode.
Centering test →Special action
Adjust Displacement sensor
→Execute Front sensor offset.
→Select the plate type.
NVRAM backup
→Press [START] to execute.
NVRAM restore
→The offset value for the plate will be set.
ESC OK NEXT Adjust the offset if the thickness is different just in
case even though the same type of plate.
1150
1 0.15
2 0.20
3 0.24
4 0.30
5 Media Type 5
ESC OK NEXT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
0300
Set printing machine 4) Adjust the displacement sensor offset
Set plate
Set media type This adjustment is not necessary for the LH-
Set exposure mode
PFplates, as it has been done at the factory.
User maintenance <displacement sensor offset adjustment>

Initialize the machine.
ONLINE OK NEXT
→Select the plate type.
→Input -9.99 on Displacement offset.
1150
(This is the mode to get the offset.)
1 0.15
→Load a plate.
2 0.20
Adjust the offset if the thickness is different just in
3 0.24 case even though the same type of plate.
4 0.30
5 Media Type 5
ESC OK NEXT
1100
Comment
Media Type 1
Posi Nega
ESC OK Copy form
1101
CLR
Thickness 0.24 mm
7 8 9
Front offset 4 5 6
0.00
1 2 3
Displancement offset
-9.99 mm
0 •
ESC OK ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
5) Y-lengthSince the sensor is at the rear side of the plate loaded on the drum, the sensor need
not be re-adjusted to accommodate different types of plates used with the machine.
Therefore, you do not need to re-adjust the sensor when the machine is installed.Readjust
this sensor only when an error occurs with the plate length in the Y direction during plate
loading on the drum, when the sensor is replaced with a new one, or when the position or
angle of the sensor is adjusted.
Even if the sensor has been adjusted (or the plate length has been recognized by the machine)
properly, a plate length deviation within a ± 2.4 mm range is still allowed.
0300 <Memorize the plate length>

Set printing machine
Measure the plate length by scale and input this value
Set plate
at the plate setting.
Set media type →Go to the user maintenance mode.
Set exposure mode →Test exposure
User maintenance →Hidden command (RH) for service engineer
→Input the password.(4302)
ONLINE OK NEXT
→Hit OK key.
2000
ETC.
ESC OK
2100
focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
2180
CLR
7 8 9
Pass Word
4 5 6
0
1 2 3
0 •
ESC OK ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V1.0 B.Installation
2181
No-Plate Off
RH Off
Full size Off
ESC OK
2182 →Input the actual measured value at the memory

CLR
Plate Length 0.0 mm
view.
When you want to calibra- 7 8 9
te the plate length sensor, →SAVE
input the value of the cor-
rect plate size for Y direc-
4 5 6 →Wind the plate.
tion. And load the measur-
ed plate. 1 2 3
Normally save "zero".
0 • <Re-model PT-R4300E/S>
ESC SAVE ENT The plate is loaded on the drum with the registra-
tion punch.
2185
Save Data ? <PT-R4000/4000II/4100/4300>

The plate is loaded on the drum without the regis-
YES NO
tration punch when memorizing the length. At this
moment,, the front sensor might get error. In this
ESC OK
case change the parameter referring to the fol-
lowing procedure.
Go to the service maintenance mode.

→Input parameter
→Drum position
→Change the value of Front sensor. ( Increase
about 5 pulses.)
(The drum front check position shifts to counter
clock wise when the Front sensor value is in-
creased.)
→Confirm the sensor lights are off after execut-
ing “Front check position” on Drum.
→Memorize the plate again.
→Set back the front sensor value.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-8.Laser calibration
1) Write down the Iop values set for exposing images at 2000 and 2400 dpi.
2) You do not need to write down the values for resolutions whose Iop values have already been
described in the factory set electric current data sheet.
3) Check whether the difference between the average operating current value (Iop value) set at
the factory and the calibrated average operating current (calibrated Iop value) above is less
then 50 mA.
There is no problem when these values are almost equivalent. However, if the difference is
significant, the optical axis may have deviated during transportation or condensation may
have occurred.
It is recommended that you should note down the calibration values when the service work is
performed. This allows you to check the variation in the current values since the machine has
been installed and helps you to find out the LDs that need to be replaced.
4) If there is no problem with the calibrated operating current, execute the calibration for the
resolution at which the customer will expose images.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-9.Exposure adjustment
0300 1) In the offline screen, select [User maintenance] and

press [OK]. The screen shown in step 2) will appear.
Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
2000 2) Select (test exposure) and press [OK]. The screen

shown in step 3) will appear.
ETC.
ESC OK
2100 3) Select the desired test exposure in the screen on the

left, and perform exposure adjustment.
focus
: Performs a test exposure to adjust the focus.
focus zoom
RH zoom
: Performs a test exposure to adjust the zoom.
: Performs a test exposure to adjust the light in-

ESC OK
tensity.
• Be sure to load the plate manually before performing a test exposure.

• The printing machine and exposure condition settings are ignored when a test expo-
sure or test pattern exposure is performed.
• The start position for exposure in the primary scanning direction is approximately 25
mm from the bottom edge of the plate and the end position is approximately 25 mm
from the top edge. Both positions are fixed.
• When a positive-type plate is exposed, burn-out is not performed.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-9-1.Adjusting the focus value
2100 1) Load the plate manually.
2) Select focus
in the screen on the left and press [OK].
focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
Resolution key Currently set value

2130 3) Enter values into the following fields.
CLR
2400dpi
[Resolution key]
(1920) 7 8 9
Inital Value:[pulse] 2000 Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
Inc.Value: [pulse] 10 4 5 6 lution changes each time the resolution key is
Count: 3 1 2 3 pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
Start Point:[mm] 0.0 appears.
(0.0 - 830.0mm) 0 •
[Currently set value]
ESC OK ENT
Displays the focus value (in pulse) currently set in
“Set media type” data selected when the plate was
loaded in the PT-R4300.
For the focus adjustment, perform the test exposure
with the following settings.
[Initial Value] : Currently set value -100

[Inc. Value] (incremental value) : 10
[Count] : 21
[Start Point] (exposure start point) :-
Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 4) will appear.
[Initial Value]
The first focus value used in the test exposure.
Allowable range: 101 to 4000
[Inc. Value]
The amount of change from the initial value. Allowable range: 1 to 4000
[Count]
The number of times the test exposure is to be performed. Allowable rage: 0 to 9999
[Start Point]
Allowable range: 0.0 to 830.0

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
• The exposure start point is the distance from the plate edge to the point where the test
exposure begins. This value is updated (moved to the next possible exposure posi-
tion) each time a test exposure ends. (In this sequence, the exposure starting point is
automatically recalculated by adding 5 mm to the last exposure end point.)
• When performing a test exposure, the settings for the media type registered in the
plate data that is selected when the plate is loaded are used for settings other than the
initial value, incremental value, and count.
2131 4) Check the displayed information and press

2400dpi [START]. The test exposure begins using the set in-
(1920) formation.
Initial Value: 2000 pulse
Inc.Value: 10 pulse
When the test exposure is completed, the test expo-
Count: 3 sure selection screen reappears.
Start Point: 0.0 mm
ESC START CANCEL The test exposure exposes the width that you set
in [Plotting Width] and automatically inserts a 5
mm gap between exposures.
5) Manually unload and develop the plate.

Check the exposure pattern strips with a magnifying
glass and designate the focus value that satisfies the
following conditions.
When using a positive plate:

• Shows the clearest Dot 0%.
• Shows the sharpest Hor L&S 1.
• Shows no unevenness for Dot 50%.
When no differences can be found among the pat-
terns, designate the focus value for the strip of the
exposure patterns located at the median as the opti-
mum focus value. Ten is subtracted from the opti-
mum value to attain the actual set value to be used.
When using a negative plate:

• Shows the highest density for Dot 100%.
When no differences can be found among the pat-
terns, designate the focus value for the strip of the
exposure patterns located at the median as the opti-
mum focus value. Ten is subtracted from the opti-
mum value to attain the actual set value to be used.
For details of the names and the types of each

exposure pattern, refer to “ Test exposure”.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
The actual set value of the focus should be rounded
up to the nearest multiple of 5.
6) Following the same procedures, designate the focus

values for the other resolutions and plates.
Factory set value

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-9-2.Adjusting the zoom value
1) Load the plate manually.
2100 2) Select zoom

‚ in the screen on the left and press [OK].
focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
Resolution key Currently set value 3) Enter values into the following fields.
2140 [Resolution key]
CLR
2400dpi Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
(1000) 7 8 9 lution changes each time the resolution key is
Inital Value: [pulse] 900
10
4 5 6 pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
Inc.Value: [pulse]
Count: 3 1 2 3 appears.
Start Point:[mm] 0.0 [Currently set value]
(0.0 - 830.0) 0 •
Displays the zoom value (in pulse) currently set
ESC OK ENT
in “Set media type” data selected when the plate
was loaded in the PT-R4300.
For the zoom adjustment, perform the test exposure
with the following settings.
[Initial Value] : Currently set value -350

[Count] : 15
[Start Point] (exposure start point) :-
[Initial Value]
The first zoom value used in the test exposure. Allowable range: 201 to 9970
[Inc. Value]
The amount of change from the initial value. Allowable range: 1 to 9970
[Count]
[Start Point]

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation

2400dpi [START]. The test exposure begins using the set in-
(1920) formation.
Initial Value: 2000 pulse
Inc.Value: 10 pulse
Count: 3 sure selection screen reappears.
Start Point: 0.0 mm

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Horizontal lines are
consistently straight. Check the exposure pattern strips with a magnifying
glass and designate the zoom value that satisfies the
There are not many ver- following condition.
tical lines which are un-
• Shows the most straight lines for Hor L&S 2.
even or of inconsistent
thickness. When no differences can be found among the pat-
terns, designate the zoom value for the strip of the
exposure patterns located at the median as the zoom
Ch29
Ch30
Ch31
Ch0
Ch1
Ch2
set value.
For details of the names and the types of each

exposure pattern, refer to “ Test exposure”.
The actual set value of the zoom should be rounded

up to the nearest multiple of 5.
6) Following the same procedures, designate the zoom

values for the other resolutions and plates.
<Positive plate> C1 pattern

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-9-3.Adjusting the light intensity <Reference>
Use the light intensity value that is set for each media type (manufacturer, model number, thick-
ness).
2) Select in the screen on the left and press [OK].

focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
Resolution key Currently set value

2400dpi CLR
[Resolution key]
(80.0) 7 8 9
Initial Value:[%] 50.0
Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
4 5 6 lution changes each time the resolution key is
Inc.Value:[%] 5.0
Count: 3 1 2 3 pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
Start Point:[mm] 0.0 appears.
(0.0 - 830.0) 0 •
[Currently set value]
ESC OK ENT
Displays the light intensity value (in %) currently
set in “Set media type” data selected when the
plate was loaded in the PT-R4300.
For the light intensity adjustment, perform the test
exposure with the following settings.
[Initial Value] : 40 onward

[Count] : 13
[Initial Value]
The first light intensity value used in the test exposure. Allowable range: 10.0 to 100.0
[Inc. Value]
The amount of change from the initial value. Allowable range: 1.0 to 100.0
[Count]
[Start Point]

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
automatically recalculated by adding 5 mm to the last exposure endpoint.)

2400dpi
[START]. The test exposure begins using the set in-
(80.0) formation.
InitialValue: 50.0 %
Inc.Value: 5.0 % When the test exposure is completed, the test expo-
Count: 3
Start Point: 0.0 mm sure selection screen reappears.
Plotting Width: 2 0 mm

Check the strips of exposure patterns with a magni-
fier and designate the light intensity set value that
satisfies the following condition.
• Multiply the value of the strip of test patterns that
shows the clearest Dot 0% by 1.4 to 1.6 times.
The actual set value of the light intensity should be

rounded up to the nearest whole number.
6) Following the same procedures, designate the light

intensity values for the other resolutions and plates.
4-9-4.Saving the data

Following the procedures in “ Setting the media type”, save the focus, zoom and light intensity
values that are designated for each media type.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-9-5.Test exposure
To check the data that are saved, perform a test exposure.
2) Select in the screen on the left and press [OK].

focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
Test pattern
Resolution key selection key
CLR
2400dpi [Resolution key]
7 8 9
Pattern: C1 Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The resolu-
4 5 6 tion changes each time the resolution key is pressed.
Plotting Width: 50.0
(5.0 - 830.0 [mm]) 1 2 3 Press the key until the desired resolution appears.
Start Point: 0.0
(0.0 - 830.0 [mm]) 0
[Test pattern selection key]
•
Selects the test pattern. The test pattern changes
ESC OK ENT
each time the test pattern selection key is pressed.
Press the key until the desired test pattern ap-
pears. For the type of test pattern, refer to the de-
scription below.
[Plotting Width]
The exposure width of the test pattern.
[Start Point]
• The exposure start point is the distance from

the plate edge to the point where the test expo-
sure begins. This value is updated (moved to
the next possible exposure position) each time
a test exposure ends. (In this sequence, the
exposure starting point is automatically recal-
culated by adding 5 mm to the last exposure
end point.)
• When performing a test exposure, the settings
for the media type registered in the plate data
that is selected when the plate is loaded are
used for settings other than the initial value, in-
cremental value, and count.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2171 Press [OK]. The screen show in step 4) will appear.
2400dpi 4) Check the displayed information and press

Pattern: C1 [START]. The test exposure begins using the set in-
Plotting Width: 5 0 . 0 formation.
Start Point: 0.0 mm
sure selection screen reappears.
ESC START CANCEL

Check if there is any problem with the exposed re-
sults.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Test pattern list
Pattern name Dot% Dot angle Line number/pitch Remarks
Dot 0% 0% 45 4000 dpi: 250 line/inch Pseudo dots
Dot 3% 3% 2400 dpi: 150 line/inch
Dot 85% 85%
Dot 90% 90%
Dot 95% 95%
Dot 97% 97%
Dot 100% 100%
Grid 4000 dpi: 1.63 1.52 mm Grid pattern
2400 dpi: 2.71 2.54 mm
2000 dpi: 3.25 3.05 mm
1200 dpi: 5.42 5.08 mm
2540 dpi: 2.56 2.40 mm
2438 dpi: 2.67 2.50 mm
C1 Continuous exposure of C1 pattern
D1 Continuous exposure of C1 pattern
AUX1 Not used
AUX2 Not used
AUX3 Not used
AUX4 Not used
CHO-31 To allow verification of the light intensity balance of each laser channel (ch 0
through ch 31), a solid is exposed with each channel.
Hor L&S 1 Horizontal direction 1 line - 1 space Lines and spaces
Hor L&S 2 Horizontal direction 2 lines - 2 spaces
Ver L&S 1 Vertical direction 1 line - 1 space
Ver L&S 2 Vertical direction 2 lines - 2 spaces

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
256pixel a a
240pixel
Lines and spaces
Pseudo dots Grid pattern (1 line, 1 space)
a a a a
7 15 23 31
6 14 22 30
5 13 21 29
Primary scan- 4 12 20 28
ning direction 3 11 19 27
2 10 18 26
Lines and spaces 1 9 17 25

(2 lines, 2spaces) 0 8 16 24
Expose original point
Secondary scan-
ning direction
Ch0 through ch31 pattern exposure
C1 pattern D1 pattern

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-9-6.Other test exposure methods

In addition to the test exposures described above, test exposures for simultaneous adjustment of
focus and zoom, and for simultaneous adjustment of light intensity and drum rpm can be per-
formed in the PT-R4300.
2100 1) Select or in the screen on the left and press

[OK].
: Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of
focus zoom
focus and zoom
RH : Test exposure for simultaneous adjustment of
light intensity and drum rpm
2) When is selected, the screen on the left appears.
ESC OK
When is selected, the screen on the next page ap-
pears.
Enter values into the following fields.
Currently set [Resolution key]
Resolution key value
Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
2160
lution changes each time the resolution key is
CLR
2400dpi pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
(2280, 6450) 7 8 9 appears.
Initial Value: 2000 4985
[puls]
4 5 6 [Currently set value]
Inc.Value: 50 20
[puls] Displays the focus value (in pulse) and the zoom
Count: 8 7 1 2 3
Start Point:
value (in pulse) currently set in the “Set media
0.0 0
(0.0 ~ 1030.0 [mm]) • type” data selected when the plate was loaded in
ESC OK ENT the PT-R4300.
[Initial Value]:
The first focus value and zoom value used in the
test exposure.
[Inc. Value] (incremental value):
The amount of change from initial values
[Count]:
The number of times the test exposure is to be
performed.
Allowable rage: 0 to 9999
[Start Point]

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Resolution key Currently set value [Resolution key]
2150 Sets the resolution for the test exposure. The reso-
CLR
2400dpi
lution changes each time the resolution key is
(700, 75.0) 7 8 9
Initial Value:
650 50.0
pressed. Press the key until the desired resolution
[rpm],[%]
Inc.Value 4 5 6 appears.
25 2.0
[rpm],[%]
Count: 9 10 1 2 3 [Currently set value]
Start Point:
(0.0 ~ 1030.0 [mm]) 0.0
0
Displays the light intensity value (in %) and the
•
drum rpm (in rpm) currently set in “Set media
ESC OK ENT
type” data selected when the plate was loaded in
the PT-R4300.
[Initial Value]:
The first light intensity value and drum rpm value
used in the test exposure.
[Inc. Value] (incremental value):
The amount of change from initial values
[Count]:
The number of times the test exposure is to be
performed.
Allowable rage: 0 to 9999
[Start Point]
Please note the following whenever you enter a parameter value.

• Set the initial value higher than the lower limit for each parameter.
• Values calculated by the formula “Initial Value + Inc. Value x (Count - 1)” should be
lower than the upper limit for each parameter.
• Values calculated by the formula “Start Point + 35 x (Count set for the secondary
direction - 1)” should be less than the plate size in the secondary direction.
• Values calculated by the formula “Start Point + 100 x (Count set for the primary direc-
tion -1)” should be less than the plate size in the primary direction minus 40 mm.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2161 3) When is selected, the upper screen appears.
2400dpi When is selected, the lower screen appears.
(2280) (6450)
Check the displayed information and press
Initial Value: 2000 puls 4985 puls [START].
Inc.Value: 50 puls 20 puls
Count: 8 7
Start Point: 0.0 mm
ESC START CANCEL
2151
2400dpi
(700) (75.0)
Initial Value: 650 rpm 50.0 %
Inc.Value: 25 rpm 2.0 %
Count: 9 10
Start Point: 0.0 mm
ESC START CANCEL
Zoom is Drum rpm is

incremented. incremented.
30mm 30mm
6050pulse 95mm 650rpm 95mm
5mm 5mm
Focus is Light intensity is

6000pulse 600rpm
incremented. incremented.
5mm 5mm
2000pulse 50%
2020pulse 55%
: Test exposure for simultaneous adjust- : Test exposure for simultaneous adjust-
ment of focus and zoom ment of light intensity and drum rpm

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-10.Other settings
4-10-1.Setting the exposure maintenance

Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
2000 2) Select ‚ and press [OK] in the screen on the left.

The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
ETC.
ESC OK
2100 3) Select and press [OK] in the screen on the left.

RH
The screen shown in step 4) will appear.
focus zoom
RH
ESC OK
2180 4) Enter the password shown below in the screen on the

CLR
left.
7 8 9
Password: 4302
Pass Word
4 5 6 The screen shown in step 5) will appear.
0
1 2 3
0 •
ESC OK ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2181 5) Set the following commands.
No-Plate Off
[No-Plate]
Allows you to check all the exposure sequences
RH Off
without loading a plate into the machine.
For usual operation: OFF
Full size Off
ESC OK The commands set here are effective only when

they are executed from the host computer. The
commands are ignored during test exposure in
the PT-R4300.
RH :
Allows you to operate the PT-R4300 without
lighting up the LD (laser diodes) in the recording
head.
[Full size]:
Allows you to perform exposures including the
grip margins.
2182 6) Enter values into the plate length and plate width
CLR
Plate Length 0.0 mm
fields so that the PT-R4300 will recognize the length
When you want to calibra- 7 8 9
te the plate length sensor, and width when detecting plates in the primary scan-
input the value of the cor-
rect plate size for Y direc-
4 5 6 ning direction and the secondary scanning direction.
tion. And load the measur-
ed plate. 1 2 3 For details about teaching the PT-R4300 the plate
Normally save "zero". length and width for plate detection, refer to page B-
0 •
65.
ESC SAVE ENT
2185 7) Press [YES] and then [OK] to save the data.

If you want to cancel the save, press [NO] and then
Save Data ? [OK].
Pressing [ESC] returns you to the screen shown in
YES NO
step 6).
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-10-2.User settings

Set plate
Set media type
Set exposure mode
User maintenance
ONLINE OK NEXT
2000 2) Select [ETC.] and press [OK] in the screen on the

left. The screen shown in step 3) will appear.
ETC.
ESC OK
2200
Set Date Time
3) [Set Date Time]
Sets the date and time.
Punch for cleaning
[Punch for cleaning]
Consumable Timer
Operates the punch.
Language [Laser calibration]
Laser power measure Calibrates the laser in the recording head.
[Consumable Timer]
ESC OK NEXT
Checks the running time of the PT-R4300 and
sets the consumable timers.
[Language]
Sets the language used in the display.
[Laser power measure]
Measures the laser power.
[Cancel calibration]
Cancels the calibration results and restores the
original status.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
2201
Laser calibration
[Laser calibration]
Calibrates the laser. Refer to “ Laser Calibration
Cancel calibration
screen” in chapter D. The screen is shared by the
Calibration info.
User Maintenance and the Maintenance screens.
Return error to host [Calibration info.]
Option setting Displays the calibration information.
[Return error to host]
ESC OK NEXT
Sends the error information to the host computer.
[Option setting]
Allows the setting of the options that can be ac-
cessed by customers.
(1) Set Date/Time

1) Select [Set Date Time] and press [OK] in the screen
2200 on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will appear.
Set Date Time
Punch for cleaning
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC OK NEXT
2210 2) Check or enter the date and press [SAVE]. The

CLR
screen shown in step 3) will appear.
Year/Month/Day 7 8 9
2001 6 1
4 5 6
Time
10: 10 1 2 3
0 •
ESC SAVE ENT

Save Data ? [OK].
YES NO step 2).
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
(2) Punch for cleaning
2200 1) Select [Punch for cleaning] and press [OK] in the
Set Date Time
screen on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will
Punch for cleaning
appear.
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC OK NEXT
2270 2) Press [OK] to start operating all punches. Pressing

[ESC] or [Cancel] returns you to the screen shown in
step 1).
Start OK ?
ESC OK Cancel

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
(3) Cosumable Timer
2200 1) Select [Consumable Timer] and press [OK] in the
Set Date Time
screen on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will
Punch for cleaning
appear.
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC OK NEXT
View the running time of the PT-R and the number of exposures performed, and set
the consumable timer for replacement of consumables.
1) Select [Consumable Timer] in the first ETC.(other user settings) screen and then
press [OK]. The following screen appears.
Running time
0h Running time
Actual running time
0h Actual running time
Exposure time
0h Exposure time
Plate loading cycles
0 Plate loading cycles
ESC SAVE NEXT
Running time ........... The total time the power has been on.
Actual running time ..... The time the PT-R has actually been in operation
(loading and unloading plates and exposing).
Exposure time ......... The amount of time exposure has been performed.
Plate loading cycles .... The number of times plates have been loaded.
2) When the following screen appears, press [NEXT].
External cover filter

RESET
(Max:1000h) 0h Usage time of external cover filter
Clamp cycles 10 Number of clamp cycles
(Max:30000)
Plate winding cycles/year
10 Number of plate loads in 1 year
LD
0h Usage time of compressor
linked LD
ESC SAVE NEXT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
External cover filter ............ Usage time is calculated by running time. After 1000
hours you must replace the external cover filter. You
must also replace the radiator filter for the chiller unit
at the same time. After replacing these items, press
[RESET] to reset to “0 h” usage time.
Clamp cycles ..................... The number of plate loads after maintenance of the
clamps is displayed.
Plate winding cycles/year ...... This counter counts the number of times plates are
loaded per year.
LD ...................................... The operating time of the pump that starts to operate
at the same time as the LD lights up.
3) Press [NEXT] to return to the Step 1 screen. When you press [SAVE] in any
screen, the following screen appears.
Punch cycles No.1

0
Punch cycles No.2
0
Punch cycles No.3 No. of punches per punch block.
0
Punch cycles No.4
0
ESC SAVE NEXT
Punch cycles ..................... The number of punches performed is displayed for

each punch block.
(There are three screens for punch collection.)
Press [NEXT] again to return to the first screen of the consumable timer. Press
[SAVE] on any screen and the save confirmation screen appears.
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK
4) To save the consumable timer information, press [YES] and then [OK].
The screen returns to the first ETC. (other user settings) screen.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
(4) Language
2200 1) Select [Language] and press [OK] in the screen on
Set Date Time
the left. The screen shown in step 2) will appear.
Punch for cleaning
Consumable Timer
Language
Laser power measure
ESC OK NEXT
2250
English
2) Select the desired language and press [OK]. The
screen shown in step 3) will appear.
Japanese
AUX
ESC OK

Save Data ? [OK].
YES NO step 2).
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
(5) Laser power measure
2200 [Laser power measure]

Set Date Time
Measures the laser output.
Punch for cleaning
Select [Laser power measure] and press [OK] in
Consumable Timer the screen on the left. The screen to select the
Language resolution will appear.
Laser power measure
Pressing [ESC] returns you to the upper layer
Menu screen.
ESC OK NEXT
2260 Select the resolution for measuring the laser

Resolution
power and press [OK].
1200 2000 2400
dpi dpi dpi
The screen for laser output measurement will ap-
pear.
4000 2438 2540
dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
2261 Press [OK] to execute the laser power measure-

ment.
Start OK ?
ESC OK
2262 During the laser power measurement, the screen

shown on the left is displayed.
Once the laser output measurement has been
Processing Now. completed, the screen shown next will appear.
Please wait !

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation V1.0
2264 After completing the laser power measurement,
0 8 16 24 the screen shown on the left is displayed.
1 9 17 25
2 10 18 26
3 11 19 27
4 12 20 28
{ : The measured value of the laser power is within ± 5%
5 13 21 29 (threshold) relative to the target laser power (Lpw)
6 14 22 30
7 15 23 31 × : The measured value of the laser power is not
within ± 5% (threshold) relative to the target laser
OK
power (Lpw)
16ch only are displayed
for PTR4300E. Target value (Lpw):
The value set in the Laser Power setting
screen.
(Select Service Maintenance/Recording head/
RH parameter/Laser power setting.)
PT-R4300
1200dpi:240mW/ch2000dpi:270mW/ch
The measured values are indicated in mW in the

service mode screen.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
(6) Calibration info.
This displays the calibration state of the laser head.

1) Select [Calibration info.] in the first ETC.(other user settings) screen and then
press [OK]. The following screen appears.
Calibration period: xx h
Time to next calibration: xx h
Reso. Channel Pow. Cal. Warning
1200 xxch xxx% xx Exxxx
ESC
Calibration period
Automatic calibration is performed each time the indicated number of
exposure hours elapses. (Normally 10 hours.)
Time to next calibration
This shows the exposure time remaining until the next automatic calibra-
tion.
The following information is displayed for each resolution.

Channel
( In case of the PT-R4300S)
32ch ......... This indicates that the laser is calibrated to expose using the laser
diodes of all 32 channels.
0 to 15ch .. A number of laser diodes in channels 16 to 31 cannot be calibrated to
the set laser power, thus the laser head is calibrated for exposure using
channels 0 to 15.
16 to 31ch A number of laser diodes in channels 0 to 15 cannot be calibrated to the
set laser power, thus the laser head is calibrated for exposure using
channels 16 to 31.
( In case of the PT-R4300E)
16ch ......... This indicates that the laser is calibrated to expose using the laser
diodes of all 16 channels.
0 to 7ch .... A number of laser diodes in channels 8 to 15 cannot be calibrated to the
channels 0 to 7.
8 to 15ch .. A number of laser diodes in channels 0 to 7 cannot be calibrated to the
channels 8 to 15.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Pow. ......... This indicates the percent of the set laser power to which the laser head
has been calibrated. Normally this is 100%. A value less than 100%
means that some channels cannot be calibrated to the set laser power
and thus calibration is performed with a reduced intensity so that expo-
sure takes place at a laser power higher than the laser power set for the
plate type (this does not affect exposure quality). If the value displayed is
“????”, calibration did not take place normally (thus exposure quality will
be adversely affected).
Cal. .......... When the exposure time indicated in “Calibration period:” elapses and
calibration is required, “req.” will appear until calibration is begins. After
calibration is performed, “done” will appear.
Warning ... This displays the code of warnings or errors that occurred during calibra-
tion. Nothing will appear if calibration was completed normally.
NOTE • It is normal when “32ch” (PT-R4300S) or “16ch” (PT-R4300E) appears for the channels
used, “100%” appears for the laser power, and nothing appears under “Warning.” If this
does not appear, please contact a Screen sales office or agent.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
(7) Return error to host
Exposure cannot be interrupted from the host computer. Therefore, the interruption command is
sent to the host computer when the power of the main unit is turned OFF during exposure.
2201
1) Select [Return error to host] and press [OK] in the
Laser calibration screen on the left. The screen shown in step 2) will
Cancel calibration appear.
Calibration info.
Return error to host
Option setting
ESC OK NEXT
2270 2) Press [OK] to send an error to the host computer.

Pressing [ESC] or [Cancel] returns you to the screen
shown in step 1).
Start OK ?
ESC OK Cancel

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4-11.Exposure check
1) Perform a test exposure with the plate sizes to be used by the customer following the illustra-
tion below.
Use the test patterns 0% and 50% from the Home side to the Away side, and set [Full size] to
ON.
Make sure that there is no plate looseness and also check the grip margins. The following
illustrates the use of a positive-type plate. (For details of adjustment procedures.)
50% 0% 50%
100mm 100mm
2) Perform a full size plate exposure using the Grid pattern and check for any slanting of the
image. (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
3) Perform an exposure via the RIP and check the exposed image with the items described
below.
• Starting point for image exposure (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
• Image position relative to plate (For details of the adjustment parameter.)
• Checking of effective image area (grip margins 12 mm/8 mm) (For details of the adjust-
ment parameter.)
4) When attaching the punch system for printing machine (optional punch), check the edge of
plate and the horizontal position of the punch.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
5.Punch attachment (option)
5-1.Attachment
The PT-R4300 can optionally incorporate up to four punches, including five punch types in
addition to the registration punch. Customer’s should attach the optional punches.If optional
punches are provided with the PT-R4300, attach them following the procedure described below.
<Punch types>
Bacher 220, 425
DS 400, 500
Protocol 458
Heidel 425, 393
Komori 550
Maximum attachable punch number: 4 punches
1) Punch set check

Confirm that all required parts, such as punches,
bases, parallel pins, attachment screws and tilt pins,
are set.
(The figure on the left shows a Heidel punch set.)
2) Punch attachment to the base

After confirming the punch front margin the cus-
tomer uses, insert parallel pins into the base holes
and mount a punch block on them.The base can be
used with either side up. A base whose upper surface
Parallel pin shows an “H” mark should be used on the Home side,
and one with an “A” mark should be used on the
Magnet sensor Away side.
3) Magnet sensor attachment

Attach punch magnet sensors facing the marked side
up.
• Be sure to insert the magnet sensors to the fur-

thest end.
Ser.NO Punch No. • When you adjust the sensor, ensure that the
punches are not extended by executing an Ac-
tuator test.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4) Punch attachment to the main unit
Pins Make sure that no dirt or scratches are found on the
main unit’s punch attachment bases before attaching
the punches.When attaching the punches, make sure
that they touch the pin stoppers on the main unit side.
No dirt or scratches on the at- • Check the type of optional punch that the cus-
tachment surface (also on the tomer will use as the required margin at the
punch side)
edge of a plate may vary depending on the
punch type.
• Always turn OFF the power to the main unit dur-
ing the punch attachment.
When the punch is attached (Home side) When the punch in attached (Away side)
5) Connecting connectors
Connect the connectors for motors and sensors. The
connectors are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 from the
Home side. (Registration punches are always con-
nected to Nos. 3 and 4.)
Be careful not to misunderstand the relationships be-
tween actual punch attachment positions and connec-
tor numbers.The motor connectors are marked “M”.
PT-R4300 with punches attached

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
5-2.Setting the punch name (Service menu)
Punch settings can be made on the main unit with the

procedure described below.
0301 1) Turn ON the power to the main unit, select
[Service] and then press [OK]. (Password: 4000
or 4300)
Infomation
Set punch name
Service
ONLINE OK NEXT
3051 2) Select Input parameter and press [OK].

Input parameter
I/O Read/Write
Initialize data
Special action
ESC OK NEXT
3706 3) Select Set punch data and press [OK].

Punch adjust
Calibration position
Set punch data
RH parameter
Drum parameter
ESC OK NEXT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
3880
Block Width 4) Move the cursor to the Block field next to the
No.1
A CLR
0 0
No.2 0 0
punch number and enter the connector numbers
B 7 8 9
No.3 0 0 to which the punches are connected, then press
No.4 0 0
No.5 0 0
C 4 5 6 the [ENT] key.For example, when you wish to
No.6 0 0
No.7 0 0 D 1 2 3 attach the punches to the connectors Nos. 2 and
No.8 0 0
E 0
5, enter “25”.
No.9 0 0 •
ESC SAVE F ENT Enter “25” in this field, for example.
3880
Block Width 5) Enter the punch width in the Width field and
No.1
A CLR
0 0
No.2 0 0
press the [ENT] key, then press [SAVE].
No.3 0 0
B 7 8 9
No.4 0 0 Enter “425” in this field, for example.
No.5 0 0
C 4 5 6
No.6 0 0
No.7 0 0 D 1 2 3
No.8 0 0
No.9 0 0 E 0 •
ESC SAVE F ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
5-3.Tilt correction method

• Required items
Bacher register pins
Parts code: 030100072
Name: Register pin
Plate
Loupe
.3 5 1) Have two plates with punched holes ready. Turn
φ6
OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove the rear
cover.
Em ulsion
surface
2) Set these plates with their emulsion surfaces facing
each other as shown in the figure on the left and slide
the Bacher register pins into the registration pin holes
Bacher register
pin( φ6.35) (round).
A 3) Using a loupe (10x), measure the difference between

the layered outer punch holes (indicated as “A” in the
figure on the left) to check the deviation of these
plates.
Correct the measured deviation (A) following the
procedure described below.
Stopper pin Stopper pin 4) Assume that the measured deviation (A) was 50 µm.
As the deviation can be corrected by shifting the
Home-side punch by 50 µm, remove the punch on
which the Home-side option punch is attached and
replace the parallel pins (stopper pins) with tilt pins
Side stopper pin Tem plate Side stopper pin with a 4.9 mm outer diameter.
Hom e-side option punch Away-side option punch
φ4.6
• Set the tilt pins to the surface of the punch so

that the end of the pin with the required outer
φ4.7
diameter is facing upward.

• Be careful not to use an incorrectly sized tilt pin
φ4.8
as the diameters vary depending on the shape

φ4.9
of the tilt pin, as shown in the figure on the left.

Shape of tilt pins • Use of a tilt pin allows you to shift the punch po-
sition in increments of 50 µm.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Punch 5) Restore the option punch to its original position.
Ensure that
the punch
edge touches When restoring the punch, always ensure that
the tilt pins.
the punch edge touches the tilt pins.
6) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and make

Tem plate Tilt pin
punch holes on the plate. Then check the plate devia-
tion following step 3) above.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
6.Relocation
This section describes the procedure for relocating the PT-R4000II/PT-R4300 and the relevant
operational precautions.
1) Prior to removing the power cable

• Move the recording head using the Service/Maintenance Menu screen so that the record-
ing head fixing bracket can be attached.
Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
→ Enter the Recording unit test screen.
→ Enter the RH positioning screen.
→ Move the recording head by 365 mm.
(The point where the recording head fixing bracket is attached.)
• Ensure that the transfer path is in a horizontal position. (If not, the transfer path fixing
bracket cannot be attached.)
• Confirm that there is no plate loaded on the recording drum and then confirm that the
trailing edge clamps are located at the clamp driver section.
2) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove the power cable, signal cable, blower
power cable, blower signal cable, and blower hose.
3) Cleaning
Remove the external cover and clean the inside of the machine.
<Points to be cleaned>
• Feed guides (front and rear of the nip roller)
• Nip roller, discharge roller
• Discharge guide
• Punch sections (If the punches have been used for a long time, some aluminum particles
will be left around them.)
• Surface of the recording drum
• Recording head (cover top and objective lens)
4) Attaching fixing brackets

Attach the fixing brackets according to the following procedure.
1. Attach the fixing brackets to the squeeze roller
and the cleaning roller.
Squeeze roller fixing brackets
(HOME side)
Cleaning roller fixing brackets • The fixing brackets for the squeeze roller and
the cleaning roller should be located symmetri-
cally.
• Each fixing bracket for the squeeze roller is se-
cured with a nut. Be careful not to drop the nut.
<HOME side> <AWAY side> • Ensure that the fixing brackets for the squeeze
roller properly touch the squeeze roller shaft.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Make sure that the end of each fixing bracket’s

screw touches the bearing section of the cleaning
roller.
<Fixing screws>
Squeeze roller fixing brackets
Spring washer and thick washer (for M4)
Nut (for M4)
Cleaning roller fixing brackets
M4 x 10 cap bolt
2. Attach the fixing brackets to the transfer path.
The fixing brackets should be located symmetrically.

Transfer path fixing brackets <Fixing screws>
M4 x 10 cap bolt
M5 x 12 cap bolt
M6 x 15 cap bolt
<HOME side> <AWAY side>
Squeeze sideplate fixing brackets 3. Attach the fixing brackets to the clamp arm and
the squeeze sideplate.
• The fixing brackets should be located sym-

metrically.
<HOME side> <AWAY side> • Note that if a longer screw is mistakenly used
Clamp arm fixing brackets for securing the fixing brackets for the squeeze
sideplate, it will contact the clamp driver frame.
• Firmly secure the clamp arm.
<Fixing screws>
Clamp arm fixing brackets
M5 x 12 cap bolt
M6 x 15 cap bolt
Squeeze sideplate fixing brackets
M5 x 8 cap bolt

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
4. Attach the fixing brackets to the engine base.
Be sure to secure the fixing screws in the order shown in the figure below. If you mistak-
enly secure the screws on the frame side first, the engine base may move during trans-
portation of the machine, which could result in misregistration and front sensor error.
Home side on the front side Away side on the front side Center of the rear side
<Fixing screws>
M10 x 25 cap bolt
<Procedure for securing the engine base fixing brackets>

a. First secure the four screws by hand.
b. Gradually tighten the four screws using a hexagonal wrench. (Tighten the screws in 60 degree
increments.)
c. Finally, tighten the screws on the engine base side and then tighten those on the frame side.
While tightening the screws, check the contact between the engine base and the fixing bracket.
1 2
Engine base side
Engine base fixing 3

4
bracket Gradually tighten each
screw in 60 degree Finally, secure the
increments. (4 places) screws in num erical
order (from 1 to 4).
Frame side
Recording head fixing brackets 5. Attach the fixing screws for the recording head.
The fixing brackets are attached to the recording
head base and the electrical system section.
• If the fixing bracket positions have shifted later-

Left side Right side
ally, adjust them by turning the knob for the lat-
eral feed motor.
• Do not touch the ball screw or rail. (This can
cause rust.)
Reference) Rust preventive lubricant for the rail
Electrical system sec- For PT- R4300 (s/n:
tion fixing brackets 7, 9 onward) only ThreeBond 1804
Upper side
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
<Fixing screws>
Recording head fixing brackets
M6 x 15 cap bolt
Electrical system section fixing brackets
M5 x 12 cap bolt
Ball screw 6. Attaching the fixing bracket to the ball screw

fixing bracket <Fixing screws>
M4 x 10 cap bolt
7. Attaching the fixing bracket to the blower

<Fixing screws>
M10 x 25 cap bolt
M6 x 15 cap bolt
Blower fixing bracket
Cushioning material for nip roller 8. Attaching the cushioning materials

Open the door of the PT-R4300 and remove the
discharge tray. Attach each piece of cushioning
material with tape to the positions indicated in
the figure.
Left side Right side Next, replace the discharge tray, attach cushion-
Cushioning material for discharge tray ing materials for the discharge guide with tape,
and then tape the fixing screws for the discharge
guide.
Fixing screws
Left side Right side

Discharge tray

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
9. Protecting the discharge roller
Iinterleaf
Cover the discharge roller of the transfer path with
interleaf or other material.
If you do not cover the discharge roller, it may

press tightly against the lower roller and an ab-
normal sound may be heard when a plate is dis-
charged.
Filter
10. Attaching the filter protection tape
Tape the filter onto the left side cover of the PT-
R4300.
Tape
11. Packing the punch debris receptacle

Remove the punch debris receptacle from the rear
Punch debris
receptacle cover and pack it.
12. Attaching the hoist attachments

Attach the hoist attachments and the connecting
beam to the lower section of the machine.
Hoist attachments
connecting beam
13. Others
Protect the operation panel, connector connecting
sections, and other parts with vinyl bags.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V1.0 B.Installation
7.Installation check sheet
Installation data:
Person in charge:
Mfg. No.: PT-R4300E/S (s/n: )
Firmware: Ver.
Customer name:
Customer address:
Option: SA-L4300E/MA-L4300E/AT-T4000/Others ( )
Media type and plate size to use:
Optional punch: mm (Margin mm)
Work descriptions Check items Remarks Check

Minimum delivery Width: 1760 mm or more,
path dimensions Depth: 1150 mm or more,
Height: 1185 mm or more
Floor load capacity 3920N/m2 (400kgf/m2)
Power supply Single-phase 200 V to 240 V +6% Main unit only (common to the PT-R4000 (II) and
-10%, 15 A PT-R4300)
Single-phase 200 V to 240 V +6% SA-L/MA-L included
-10%, 20 A
Components Check the items on the packing list.
Installation of
main unit
Removal of the Transport fixing bracket: 17 pcs.,
transport fixing cushioning material: 5 pcs.
brackets
Level adjustment
Blower connection
Power connection
to main unit
Energization
Version check Main unit, panel, recording head
Initial settings Plate type
Plate
Printing machine information
Exposure conditions
Operation checks Lowest position of the transfer path Ensure that the distance between the transfer path
and the stopper is within 0.5 mm.
Plate loading position onto the drum Ensure that the largest size and sickness plate
comes into contact with the drum in front of 10 mm
from the leading edge clamp position.
Positional relationship between the Ensure that the Away side of the plate is inclined
plate and the registration pins while 0.5 to 1.0 mm with respect to the Home side of the
the plate is being transferred. plate. (Up to 420)
Plate side alignment Ensure that the centering unit bearing is in touch
with the plate.
Left/right position of the plate with Ensure that the center of the registration pins aligns
respect to the registration pins of the with the center of the plate punches or are slightly
recording drum shifted to the right (within 0.5 mm).
Timing when the nip roller is Ensure that, during plate winding, the plate momen-
released tarily stops approximately 3 mm before reaching
the registration pins.
Plate winding condition Ensure that the plate is in touch with the registra-
tion pins.
Operation of the leading edge
detection sensors
Front sensor offset value
Displacement sensor offset value

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation
Work descriptions Check items Remarks Check
Operation checks Leading edge clamp grip margin 13.2 mm (for the standard 15 mm type)
Trailing edge clamp grip margin 7 mm
Teaching of plate lengths in the Y Ensure that an error occurs when the plate length is
direction ± 2.5 mm of the specified length.
Laser calibration
Registration punch positions Modify the Punch adjust value, if necessary.
Processor setting Mitsubishi: 30 °C, 20 S; Fuji: 30 °C,
checks 12 S; KPG: 30 °C, 25 S
Exposure adjust- Focus, zoom, light intensity
ment
Exposure checks Exposure of the line and space Checking for the plate looseness (all sizes)
pattern on the entire plate
Any scratches on unexposed plates
Exposure of tint images Checking positive plates by exposing 85% (0%) tint
and negative plates 100% tint.
Exposure of the grid pattern Checking for tilt of the exposed grid pattern and
confirmation of correct exposure size and plate reg-
istration
Installation of the Checking the margins and left/right
punch system for positions
printing machine
RIP connection
Exposure checks Effective image area
from the RIP Grip margins and left/right exposure
positions
Screen gradation Checking the resolution (dpi) and screen ruling that
are used by the user.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
B.Installation

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
C. Replacement & Adjustment

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
C.Replacement & Adjustment
Index
1. Main belt replacement ............................................................................................. C-1
2. Encoder replacement .............................................................................................. C-4
3. Balancer weight replacement procedure. ................................................................ C-6
4. Balancer motor unit replacement procedure. ........................................................... C-7
5. Balancer sensor replacement procedure. ................................................................ C-7
6. Adjusting the automatic balancer weight detection sensors .................................... C-8
7. Removing the trailing edge clamps ........................................................................ C-10
8. Attaching the trailing edge clamps ......................................................................... C-11
9. Replacement procedure for the trailing edge clamp arm drive motor (M20) .......... C-14
10. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp arm origin and end sensors ............................ C-16
11. <Reference> PT-R4x00 Clamp driving bar adjustment procedure ....................... C-19
12. Adjusting the leading edge clamp open/close sensors ........................................ C-28
13. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate side edge detection sensors for
side alignment (PH61H, PH61A) ........................................................................... C-30
14. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp hook sensor .................................................... C-34
15. Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate (PH51) ....................... C-37
16.Replacement procedure for PH29H Sensor base bracket and PH29H/A Sensor adjust-
ment procedure (Rev 2.0) ..................................................................................... C-38
17. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the drum vacuum pressure sensor (P1) .
.............................................................................................................................. C-45
17-1.Checking and setting initial value of the vacuum pressure sensor ............................. C-45
17-2.Zero clear of the vacuum pressure sensor and setting threshold level ...................... C-47
18. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate sensor (PH6)(2 plates wind,or
float) ...................................................................................................................... C-48
19. Path driving motor replacement procedure. ......................................................... C-50
20. Squeeze roller height adjustment ........................................................................ C-51
21. PT-R4300E/S Ball screw for Sub-scanning Replacement Procedure .................. C-54
22. PT-R4300E/S strike adjustment .......................................................................... C-57
23. Countermeasures for Registration Deviation on PT-R4XXX (additional information) ...
.............................................................................................................................. C-63
24. Procedure for replacing the PT-R4XXX transfer path spring ................................ C-66
25. Air flow adjustment procedure of VP41 ................................................................ C-69
26. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the power supply ..................................... C-71
27. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the pulse motor driver .............................. C-71
28. Procedure for replacing the AC servo driver (E1A) .............................................. C-72
29. Procedure for replacing and setting the inverter (U8) for the suction blower ....... C-73
30.Replacement of the electrical boards and the operation panel ............................. C-76
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) C-i
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

30-1.Replacement procedure of the RCP3(E) board ......................................................... C-76
30-1-1.The cautions when exchanging ............................................................................... C-76
30-1-2.Replacement procedure .......................................................................................... C-77
30-2.Replacement procedure of the PIO-PTR4XE board .................................................. C-80
30-3.Replacement procedure of the CON86-XE board ...................................................... C-80
30-4.Replacement procedure of the operation panel ......................................................... C-81
30-5.Replacement procedure of the CPU board for RH. .................................................... C-82
30-5-1.Head-CPU3E board (CAN type LD head : PTR4300E/S) ....................................... C-82
30-5-1-1.The cautions when exchanging ........................................................................... C-82
30-5-1-2. Replacement procedure ...................................................................................... C-82
30-6.Replacement procedure of the DRV board for RH. .................................................... C-84
30-6-1.Head-DRV3E board (CAN type LD head : PTR4300E/S) ....................................... C-84
30-6-1-1. The cautions when exchanging ........................................................................... C-84
30-6-1-2.Replacement procedure ....................................................................................... C-84
30-7.Replacing the other boards on the recording head .................................................... C-86
31.Procedure of additional the washer to the transport belt roller shaft. ................... C-87
1.Confirm the roller shaft position on the support bracket. ................................................. C-87
2.Procedure. ....................................................................................................................... C-88
32.Recording head unit (PT-R4300E/S) .................................................................... C-93
32-1.Procedure for replacing and adjusting the 32ch LD block (PT-R4300E/S) ................. C-93
32-1-1.Preparation .............................................................................................................. C-93
32-1-2.Attention for the LD replacement. (PT-R4300E/S) ................................................... C-94
32-1-3.Replacement procedure (PT-R4300E/S) ................................................................. C-95
32-2.Recording head replacement procedure (PT-R4300E/S) ......................................... C-101
32-2-1.Preparation ............................................................................................................ C-101
32-2-2.Replacement procedure (PT-R4300E/S) ............................................................... C-102
32-3.Replace the peltier unit (PT-R4300E/S) ................................................................... C-116
32-3-1.Attention for the peltier unit replacement (PT-R4300E/S) ..................................... C-116
32-3-2.Replacement procedure for the peltier unit (PT-R4300E/S) .................................. C-116
32-4.Calibration sensor (PT-R4300E/S) ........................................................................... C-118
32-5.Procedure for replacing the focus coupling. (PT-R4300E/S) .................................... C-119
32-6.Upgrade procedure for recording head (PT-R4300E:16ch -> PTR4300S:32ch) ...... C-120
32-6-1.Preparation ............................................................................................................ C-120
32-6-2.Parts replacement ................................................................................................. C-123
32-6-3.Down load the firmware, FPGA data and chenge the head data. ......................... C-134
32-6-4.Check list ............................................................................................................... C-138
C-ii PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) C-iii

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
C-iv PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V1.0 C.Replacement & Adjustment
1. Main belt replacement

1) Confirm that the power to the PT-R4300 has been
Motor plate turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover.
2) Loosen the motor plate screw.
Next mortor plate move to up.
3) Remove the encoder fix plate.

(Not need remove encorder)
Replacement main belt.
• Do not need oil for belt.

• When replacement belt,cut the tie band(down
side).
Encoder fix plate
4) The proper belt tension of PT-R4300 is 200 - 240N.

Adjustment is made by the belt tension meter to become
proper tension.
Tension meter :U-505 , U-507 (UNITA)

Adjustment range :190N - 240N
Setting parameter :WEIGHT 5.2, WIDTH 20.0, SPAN 162
*Draw a belt in about 270N-300N first, and load plate, and repeat high-speed rotation, a
stop, and measure tension again.
Measure it again after exposing 20-30 plate if you can do it.
*When tension becomes weaker than 190N, it causes "a SVC error".
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) C-1

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
The right and left of the belt is measured

with tension meter.
5) Fix the encoder fix plate.And remove the belt tension

jig.
Next fix the encoder cable,turn ON the power to the
PT-R4300.
6) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen to ad-

just the drum home position.
<Drum home position adjustment method>
Simultaneously press the two areas marked
0101
with circles on the screen shown on the left.
P T- R 4 X X X → Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu
screen.
Please press [START] → Enter the Drum Test screen and press Zero
Return. (The pulse at the encoder home po-
sition will be checked.)
’01.05.01
START V1.00 → Rotate the drum by hand until it reaches the
position where lock pins can be inserted.
(The drum can be rotated in the either direc-
tion.)
→ Execute the Actuator test command to insert
the lock pin into the drum on both the Home
and Away sides.
→ Enter the Drum base position screen from
the Input parameter screen then read and
save the drum home position.
(Save the setting.)
Position where the lock pin can be in- → It is also possible to initialize the main unit.
serted into the drum
C-2 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

7) Confirm the grip value of trailing clamp.
• Hook punch ON (Max900pm)11 mm -/+ 0.5 mm
• Hook punch OFF (Max600pm)6.5 mm -/+ 0.5 mm
8) Load a plate onto the drum and perform exposure of a test pattern to check that the image is output with
no problem.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2. Encoder replacement
turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover.
Encoder
2) Remove the encoder cover.
3) Loosen the two M3 set screws which are used to fix

the encoder to the drum shaft.The encoder is hollow.
A drum shaft goes into the encoder center hole and
connects it with the encoder.
4) Remove the encoder fixing screws and replace the

encoder with a new one. Also replace the cable tie
band with a new one.
Positions for encoder fixing screws
5) Insert the drum shaft into the encoder hole until the
plate spring bracket used for the encoder attachment
comes into contact with the attachment plate.
One of the set screws must be set against the shaft’s
D-cut portion.
Push the encoder to the
parts contact point.
Attachment plate
Attachment plate
Encoder
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

6) Fix the set screws while the drum is rotating.Install
the encoder so that any distortion of its rear side
caused by rotation of the drum is within 50 µm. If the
amount of distortion exceeds 50 µm, it will result in
deterioration of the image quality.
If the centers cannot be adjusted precisely, set

the shaft’s D-cut portion with the other set screw.
Set the encoder distortion to within
50 µm with a micro gauge.
0101 7) Re-attach the encoder cover and turn ON the power.
P T- R 4 X X X 8) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen to ad-

just the drum home position.
Please press [START] <Drum home position adjustment method>
Simultaneously press the two areas marked
with circles on the screen shown on the left.
’01.05.01
START V1.00 → Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu
screen.
→ Enter the Drum Test screen and press Zero
Return. (The pulse at the encoder home po-
sition will be checked.)
It is also possible to initialize the main unit.

→ Rotate the drum by hand until it reaches the
position where lock pins can be inserted.
(The drum can be rotated in the either direc-
tion.)
→ Execute the Actuator test command to insert
the lock pin into the drum on both the Home
Position where the lock pin can be in-
serted into the drum and Away sides.
→ Enter the Drum base position screen from
the Input parameter screen then read and
save the drum home position.
→ Turn OFF and ON the power to the PT-
R4300 to initialize the machine.
9) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and re-attach

the right side cover.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
3. Balancer weight replacement procedure.

1) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300.
→ Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
→ Enter the Recording head test screen.
→ Input 200 mm and press OK.
(This facilitates observation of the balancer
movement.)
Calibration Sensor It is not necessary to do this procedure when re-

placing the balancer weights at Away side.
2) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove
the front cover and the right side cover.
Then, remove the calibration sensor.
3) Remove the inside ring from the drum, which has the
embossment going to the drum side near the screw.
4) Remove the outside ring in combination with the in-
side ring removed.
5) Replace the balancer weight.
Emboss
6) Put back the rings. Press the balancer weights against
the outer side of the guide groove.
Inside Ring
7) Put back the calibration sensor.
Outside Ring
8) Turn on and initialize the machine.
Input thebalancer weight value.
• Input parameter/ Set weight / balancer
And turn the drum by hand to confirm that the sensor
detects the sensor dog with the weight.
(The sensor lamp turns on when detecting.) If the
sensor does not seem to work correctly, the sensor
dog might be bent or its position is incorrrect, so ad-
Balancer Weight just the dog.
9) Make sure that it works following procedure “3.
Auto balacner weight detecting sensor adjustment”.
10) Put back the covers.
<Required tools and jigs>
L-shaped wrench (for M4 screws)
Screwdriver (cross-slot type)
Interlock release jig
<Required work time>
Approximately 30 minutes
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
4. Balancer motor unit replacement procedure.

1) Make sure that the machine is turned off and remove
Balancer motor unit the right side cover.
when replacing the away side motor, remove the

front cover.
2) Remove the sensor unit first and then remove the bal-
ancer motor unit.
3) Install the new balancer motor unit.
When installing the motor, it might be little hard

Sensor Unit
because the spring of the balancer unit pushes
out, but install it with pushing.
4) Put back the sensor unit.
6) Enter the service/maintenance mode.
→ Actuator test
→ Confirm that Lock pin and Balancer pin work.
5. Balancer sensor replacement procedure.

1) Make sure that the machine is turned off and remove
the right side cover.
Remove the front covert when replacing the

away side sensor.
2) Remove the sensor unit and replace the sensor.
3) Put back the sensor unit.
<Required tools and jigs> → Actuator test
L-shaped wrench (for M3 screws) → Confirm that Lock pin and Balancer pin work.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
6. Adjusting the automatic balancer weight detection sensors

(Perform this procedure when the operations such as weight replacement, sensor replacement/
adjustment, etc. are required.)
3505
RH zero return
turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover,
RH positioning front cover, front left cover and rear cover.
Focus zero return 2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300.
Focus positioning → Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Zoom zero return → Enter the Recording head test screen.
ESC OK NEXT
→ Input 350 mm and press OK.
(This facilitates observation of the balancer
movement.)
Weight 3) Weights will not be positioned against the outer side
of the guide groove of the drum immediately after
being moved (or attached) by hand (for example after
a weight replacement.)The weights are normally
pressed against the outer side of the guide groove
because they are moved there by centrifugal force.
If the weights are not correctly pressed against the
outer side of the guide groove, the hole of each
Weight weight will be positioned inwards (or downwards) in
respect to its correct position and thus, will be mis-
aligned with the pushpin position. If this occurs,
Guide groove push the weights up toward the outer side by hand.
4) Sensor adjustment
Bracket
→ Enter the Special action 2 screen.
→ Enter the Balancer test screen.
→ Specify the printing machine setting number in
the Printing No. *> screen and press OK.
(Enter the setting number from among 1 to 15 to
“*”)
→ According to the setting selected above, the PT-
R4300 automatically moves the weights on the
Adjust the brackets for the balancer Home side first. (After the Home side weights are
weight position detection sensors in
completely moved, the Away side ones will be
the front and back directions (as indi-
cated with an arrow in the figure moved.)
above.) When the weights are moved, check whether or
not the tip of the moving pin properly enters the
center hole of each weight.
If it is misaligned, adjust the bracket for the bal-
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

ancer weight position detection sensor in the front
and back directions.
An error will occur if the weight detection sensors
are defectively positioned.
• If the same printing machine setting is repeat-

edly selected, the weights will move only the
first time. Therefore, select a different setting
number every time.
• The drum rotates clockwise when viewed from
its right.
5) Confirmation
4460 → Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Initialize
→ Enter the Special action 2 screen.
Balancer test → Enter the Balancer test screen.
Mail test → Specify the printing machine setting number in
Auto loader test the Printing No. *> screen and press OK.
(Enter the setting number from among 1 to 15 to
Plate pad test
“*”) Repeat the selection several times to confirm
ESC OK NEXT that the weights are smoothly moving.
6) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and reattach
the removed covers.

Ball driver (for M3 screws)
(for sensor adjustment)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
7. Removing the trailing edge clamps

turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover and
rear cover.
4450
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and enter the
Initialize
Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Initialize machine status → Enter the Special action screen.
Pick up clamp → Select Put clamp on drum and press OK.
→ Mount the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum
ESC OK NEXT
Trailing edge clamp
3) Rotate the drum by hand until the trailing edge

clamps faces the rear side, then execute Servo ON.
→ Enter the Drum test screen.
→ Select Servo (ON) and press OK
It is easier to remove the clamps when

they are positioned as shown in the
figure above.
Hold down here to release the tabs.
4) While holding the center of the trailing edge clamp

spring section push the tabs with your fingers to re-
move an individual trailing edge clamp from the
drum.
• Carefully conduct this operation to maintain the

flatness of the trailing edge clamps.
If any of them are not flat, a plate may detach
from the drum during exposure.
• Do not wind plates while the trailing edge
Spring section
clamps are removed.

None
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
8. Attaching the trailing edge clamps
Before attempting to replace the trailing

edge clamps, note down the weights which turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover and
are written on the back side of each trail- rear cover.
ing edge clamp.
Positioning bolts
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and rotate the

drum by hand until the positioning bolts on the drum
faces the rear side, then execute Servo ON.
→ Select Servo (ON) and press OK.
3) Attach the trailing edge clamps on drum which is lo-

cated on upper side of positioning bolts.
1. Touch the trailing edge clamps to the positioning
bolts. (The spring section of each clamp is on
the upper side.)
2. Slide the trailing edge clamps laterally while they
are lightly touching the drum and then position
them when the tabs come evenly into contact with
the clamp rails.
In this state, the surfaces of the clamp tabs are
horizontal with respect to the clamp surface.
• When the clamp is shifted to the right, the right
tab appears as if it is being pressed down.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

3. Press the upper position (center of the spring sec-
tion) of each trailing edge clamp to secure it to the
drum.
Be aware of the following points when attaching
the trailing edge clamps.
• The trailing edge clamps are marked with H, M
or A on their respective back sides.
An “H” marked one should be used for the
Home side.
An “M” marked one should be used for center.
An “A” marked one should be used for the Away
Completed trailing edge clamps
side.
• Attach the trailing edge clamps so that each
spring section is positioned on the upper side
and each plate retaining section is positioned
on the lower side.
Attach the trailing edge clamps while the outer
side of the plate retaining section touches the
positioning bolts.
• Since the PT-R4300 supports wider plate sizes,
the grooved plate attachment screws interfere
with the trailing edge clamps. This makes the
attachment of the trailing edge clamps rela-
tively difficult.
Place the spring section onto the area above
the screws and secure each clamp. Then, align
the clamps with the positioning bolts.
4) Input the total weight of the new trailing edge
4130
CLR clamps.
7 8 9 Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Clamper: 381.2[g] → Enter the Input parameter screen.
4 5 6
Balancer: 165.0[g] → Enter the Set weight screen.
1 2 3
→ Input the total weight of the three trailing edge
0 • clamps into the “***.**” field of “gclamper
ESC SAVE ENT ***.**”.
→ After the total weight input is complete, press
ENT and SAVE.
Always replace the three clamps at the same

time.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4450
Initialize 5) Mount the trailing edge clamps to the drive bar.
Initialize machine status
→ Enter the Special action screen.
Pick up clamp
→ Select Pick up clamp and press OK.
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum the removed covers.
ESC OK NEXT

None
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
9. Replacement procedure for the trailing edge clamp arm drive mo-
tor (M20)
* Refer to the ‘11. PT-R4x00 Clamp driving bar check/adjustment procedure’ for the detail of tailing
clamp arm adjustment.
When the motor (M20) is operating
4450
Initialize 1) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove
Initialize machine status the right side cover and the rear cover.
Pick up clamp 2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300.
Check ORG-EZ Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Put clamp on drum
→ Select Put clamp on drum and press OK.
ESC OK NEXT → Attach the trailing edge clamps to the drum.
3) Rotate the drum by hand until either the leading or
trailing edge clamps are positioned under the clamp
arm and then execute Servo ON.
4) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
→ Enter the Actuator test screen.
→ Select Trail edge clamp arm “DOWN” and press
OK.
Ensure that, at this moment, the clearance be-

tween the end of the hook pin and the drum sur-
face is approximately 1 mm.
5) Remove the trailing edge clamp arm drive motor
(M20), which is attached to the Home side, together
with the gear box (8DG150).
6) After replacing the motor, turn ON the power to the
PT-R4300.
Motor with gear box → Enter the Actuator test screen.
→ Select and execute Trail edge clamp arm “UP”
and “DOWN” repeatedly to confirm proper op-
eration.
Sensor adjustment is not necessary at this stage.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

When the motor (M20) is not operating
1) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove
the right side cover and the rear cover.
2) Rotate the drum by hand until the leading edge
clamps are positioned at the lower side of the drum
and then execute Servo ON.
Bolt Cam follower flange
3) Insert a bolt into a hole on the cam follower flange on
both the Home and Away sides. Remove the trailing
edge clamp arm drive motor (M20), which is at-
tached to the Home side, together with the gear box
(8DG150).
• Take care during the above removal operation.

Removing the drive motor attachment screws
detaches the motor gear from the other gear. At
this moment, the weight of the clamp arm will
cause it to fall onto the drum side. Support the
clamp arm by hand until it lowers to the screw
position and is settled.
• Use an M6 bolt.
4) Replace the motor with a new one.
5) After replacing the motor, turn ON the power to the
PT-R4300.
→ Select and execute Trail edge clamp arm “UP”
and “DOWN” repeatedly to confirm proper op-
eration.
Drive motor and Gear box

Sensor adjustment is not necessary at this stage.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
10. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp arm origin and end sensors
* Refer to the ‘11. PT-R4x00 Clamp driving bar check/adjustment procedure’ for the detail of tailing
clamp arm adjustment.
Adjustment of the trailing edge clamp arms turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover and
is not required when only the sensors are
replaced. However, the procedure in this rear cover.
section includes an explanation of sensor-
related operation checks. 2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and enter the
Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
4450
Initialize
→ Select Put clamp on drum and press OK.
Initialize machine status → Mount the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Pick up clamp 3) Rotate the drum by hand until either the leading or
Check ORG-EZ trailing edge clamps are positioned under the clamp
Put clamp on drum
arm and then execute Servo ON. Enter the Service/
Maintenance Menu screen.
ESC OK NEXT
→ Select Trail edge clamp arm “DOWN” and press
OK.
Ensure that, at this moment, the clearance be-

tween the end of the hook pin and the drum sur-
face is approximately 1 mm.
5) Together with the gear box (8DG150), remove the
clamp arm drive motor (M20) which is attached to
the Home side.
6) Move the sensor bracket to a position where the trail-
Drive motor and Gear box ing edge clamp arm end sensor (PH21) reacts when
Sensor dog the clamp arm is positioned at its lower limit point
while the motor is detached, and then fix the bracket
there.
This adjustment is required only when the sensor

bracket fixing screws are loosened, for example,
when only the sensor is replaced.
In addition, this adjustment is not required when
only the motor or sensor is replaced.
Trailing edge clamp arm end sensor (PH21) Point: The positions of origin and end sensors
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

for the trailing edge clamp arms are ap-
propriate when each cam follower is hori-
zontally set, each sensor detects a sensor
dog, and there is clearance when the area
circled in the figure on the left is pressed
on both the left and right sides.
Press this area by hand. Cam follower
7) Once the adjustment has been completed, reattach

Trailing edge clamp arm origin sensor (PH20) the motor.
→ Select Initialize and press OK to initialize the ma-
chine. Set Traid edge clamp arm to Up.
Adjust the position of the sensor bracket so that the
clamp arm unit stops at the upper limit point (visu-
ally confirmed).
This adjustment is required only when the sensor

bracket fixing screws are loosened, for example,
when only the sensor is replaced.
In addition, this adjustment is not required when
only the motor or sensor is replaced.
9) Attach the clamps to the clamp arm in accordance
with the instructions in “Removing the trailing edge
clamps” and “Attaching the trailing edge clamps”.
→ Repeatedly set Trail edge clamp arm to Up and
Down to confirm the smooth operation of the
clamp arms.
the removed covers.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
<Reference>: About drive cam position and tailing clamp arm position. (From the away side drawing.)
Clamp arm
Cam Drum
Drive cam position: 10 o’clock Drive cam position: 3 o’clock

The lowest position of clamp arm. The highest position of clamp arm.
Drive cam position: 6 o’clock Drive cam position: 12 o’clock

Middle position of clamp arm. Do not set this position.
Clamp arm should will broken.

Screwdriver (cross-slot type)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
C.Replacement & Adjustment V1.0

11. <Reference> PT-R4x00 Clamp driving bar adjustment procedure
To Prepare
PC + serial cable(For Hyper terminal)
Clamp JIG(J-2192) 100111060V00
Motor diving JIG(J-2191)
Pick tester (0.01mm) + Magnet stand
1.Procedure
1:Perform “Put clamp on drum” in Special action and be set Trail clamp on Drum from
clamp bar
2:Move recording head to 900mm by using Recording head test->RH position->
“900”->ENT->START.
2.Remove Trail clamp

1:Turn power off please.
2:Remove outside cover as following please.
3:Take out punch dust box please.
4:Remove Trail clamp(X3) from Drum
3:Remove cleaning roller,leading clamp release arm and squeeze roller

1:Loosen lock screw and remove cleaning roller please
Lock screw
Shaft
base
2:Remove shaft base of home side only

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

3: Remove connector M30MH of M30H motor and connect motor driving JIG there please.
You can take gear fitting off between leading clamp release arm and driving motor if JIG
SW’s Up/Down lever is turned to”UP”.
At next, remove Jig connector from M30MH and connect it to M30A(Away),and take that
gear fitting off as well.(SW lever to “DOWN”)
This makes leading clamp release arm free so please take it out completely.

Caution: Please drive motor jig a little by a little and confirm the way to drive.
Motor drive jig(J-2191) JIG connection
Gear fitting at leading clamp Gear fitting at leading clamp

release arm(Home) release arm(AWAY)
4.Please remove squeeze roller after removing E-ring,spacer and bearing at both side of
squeeze roller.
Caution: Please do not drop E-ring or spacer.Especially be careful at Away side because space is
not enough.
Shaft base of squeeze roller

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4.Mount positioning jig
1.Please remove 2 set only at center of roller unit under clamp driving bar.
Roller unit Screw to mount roller unit
2.Fix positioning JIG(J-2192) under clamp driving bar with positioning pin and hole.
Fixed by M4x3 pieces. (Pull it to forward.)
Positioning JIG(J-2192) Screw to fix JIG
5. Adjust and confirm parallelfor vertical direction(Y) of clamp driving arm
1.Remove X20M connector on M20, connect motor driving JIG connector there and
turn UP/DOWN SW lever of JIG to”Down”and clamp driving arm closes to Drum.
Move the JIG to Drum till reference block comes to positioning area on Drum.
The please Down clamp arm with driving JIG till positioning JIG gets just contact with
drum
Clamp arm driving motor (M20)

Reference block comes to positioning
area on Drum. (It is bit thinner.)
2.Disconnect JIG connector and remove clamp arm driving motor(M20)

Caution: Remove motor with gear head only.Do not remove from the whole bracket.Take 4
screws out shown on picture.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

3. Turn driving shaft by hand and bring sensor flag located on driving shaft(Away) till PH21
sensor turns on.
At this position, cam can be on “R” area of arm block. That is position that clamp arm
becomes free.
R area
Clamp arm down sensor(PH21)

Cam
4.In this condition, it should be no space between 3 blocks(Front:1,rear:2 pieces) in positioning

JIG and drum surface. Please confirm with 0.1mm thickness gauge.
Confirm space
5.In case there are some space, loosen screws(Home/Away M4x4) that are fixed both
side of clamp driving bar,fix them again with pushing clamp driving bar for drum by
hand.(At that time, fix 2 screws completely and others temporaryily on diagonal line for each
side). Please confirm no space again.
Caution: Confirm cam is still free at R area at that time.
Push arm bar
Adjustable screw

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

6.Adjust and confirm a parallel for horizontal direction(X) of clamp driving bar.
1.Mount pick-tester with magnet-stand on a stay that fixes head driver PCB BOX
Set pick-tester side-face of positioning JIG
2.Rotate sub-motor(M2) by hand, measure the whole area of the JIG and confirm if
the value is within 0.04mm
Rotate by
hand
Stay
Set pick-tester Sub-motor(M2)
3.If it is more than 0.04mm, loosen screws at one side only, adjust clamp driving bar and fix
again. Adjust this repeatedly till it reaches within 0.04mm.
Then confirm all screws(M4x8pieces) are fixed definitely.
Parallel adjustment of clamp

driving bar
Caution: Adjust with 3 positioning blocks gets contact with drum

4. If you finish adjustment, take magnet-stand and pick-tester out. Then install clamp arm
driving motor(M20), gear head and connect motor driving JIG.
Turn UP/DOWN SW of JIG to”UP”till trail clamp arm original sensor(PH20) turns on and
raises clamp arm.
PH20

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

5.take motor driving JIG and positioning JIG out and install 2 roller units.
6.Install squeeze roller
7.Connect motor driving JIG with M30H and make gear for leading clamp release bar fit
with turning UP/Down SW to•gDown•h.Then stop if sensor flag comes between PH30H
and PH31H .Connect driving JIG with M30A and make gear fit at away side as well.
Stopping position is also between PH30A and PH31A.

Leading clamp Open/Close

sensor
8.Install cleaning roller
9.Mount trail clamp to pick-Up position on Drum
10.Confirm if M20,M30H and M30A are connected correctly and if it is not connected,
please connect.
7. Correction of clamp position by parameter

7-1. Correction of pick-Up clamp position
1. Set DipSW 1 bit 1 “ON”on RCP2 PCB or set DipSW 2 bit 1 “ON”on RCP3E PCB.
Connect PC to PTR and boot Hyper terminal.
Castion while Hyper terminal connection

Input name for this setting while connecting and push”OK”.
Push OK after selecting Com-port connecting serial cable in memu.
Port setting (Nomally COM1)
Bit/sec 9600 (RCP2 PCB) / 19200 (RCP3E PCB)
Data bit 8
Parity None
Stop bit 1
Flow control Hardware
2.insert jig in inter-lock SW

3.Please raise clamp arm
Power ON->Skip initialize->Actuator test->Tail edge clamp arm->Up

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4.Perform Zero Return in”Drum test” menu
5.Fix drum by lock-pin

-Perform as following (insert lock-pin)
Actuator test->M11H:Lock pin(Home)->In,M11A:Lock pin(Away)->In
-Perform as following then Read and note”drum original position”
Input parameter->Drum base position->Read
-Perform as following (pull lock-pin)
Actuator test->M11H:Lock pin(Home)->Out,M11A:Lock pin(Away)->Out
6.Connect motor driving JIG to clamp driving motor(M20)
7.Perform as following (Move driving hook to “HOOK” position)

Actuator test->M24:Tail edge clamp hook->Hold->Hold
8.Move drum to trail clmap pick-up position by hand and move clamp arm unit down till
just in front of bottom point with confirming head of hook does not interfere with hole on
trail clamp and also reference block does not with trail clmap itself.
(In case of interfering, perform with adjusting drum position a little by little)
Caution!
Please stop clamp arm unit at just in front of bottom point otherwise drum does not turn
due to pressure of clmap spring when you make clamp arm down.
9.Let trail clamp contact a reference block slightly and get and note drum position
by “CP” command from PC. That value <A>
Caution! If drum is turned too much, clamp could shift from”Pick up position” becausue reference
block pushes. So please be careful for that.
Space
No contact between clamp and Contact with reference block

reference block
10.Perform as following.
Actuator test->M24:Tail edge clamp hook->Rele
11.Turn motor driving JIG to”UP”, raise clamp arm a little by little then take trail clmap out.
(At that time,please confirm there are some space between clmap nail and rail on drum.)


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

12.With taking clamp out from drum, perform as following.
Actuator test->M24:Tail edge clamp hook->Hold
Then perform “M24:Tail edge clamp hook->Rele”again.
13.Move clamp arm down with motor driving JIG a little by little till Drum surface.
Then confirm there are some space between clamp nail and drum’s rail.(Load sequence)
Nearly equal at A and B
A B
space check
14.After confirming, please raise clamp arm till PH20(Trail clamp arm original sensor)
turns on then take motor driving JIG out and connect motor connector.
15.Please power Off/On and initialize.
16.Perform as following
Special action->Put clamp on drum
Then remove the clmap from Drum and mount them Pick-up position.
17.How to calcurate and input correction data.

Calcuration
Correction of Pick up clamp=(A+1)-B
PTR4000,4000II :B=Drum base position+851
PTR4300E/S,4300 :B=Drum base position+740
(Sample1) A=3255,Drum base position=2401

Pick up clamp=(3255+1)-(2401+851)=4
(Sample2) A=370,Drum base position=3518

Pick up clamp=(370+1)-(3818+851)
=371-(4369-4000)=2
Caution! In case B is more than 4000, please assume a value which is
reduced 4000 from B.
Input correction value calcurated at the above.
Input parameter->Drum position->”Pick up clamp”
18.Perform as following. Special action->Pick up clamp

Then initialize and at that time please check no strange sound and hook pin moves smootly by
eyes while picking clmap up.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

7-2.Correction value of trail clamp unload position
1.Load a plate customer uses so often or middle size in plate cutsomer uses.
2.Serch as following from LOG on PC after loading

“Drum position after tail clamp put on drum”=<C>
Then note the value<C>
3.Connect motor driving JIG with clamp driving motor and perform as following.
Drum test->Servo(OFF)
4.Move drum by hand till trail clamp position, turn motor driving JIG SW to “DOWN”and
move it down till bottom a little by little with confirming clamp head does not interfere with
hole on trail clamp and reference block does not with clamp.
(In case of interfering, please do with controlling drum position by hand.)
Caution! If drum is turned too much, clamp could shift from”Pick up position”becausue
reference block pushes. So please be careful for that.
5.Get a value by typing”CP” command from PC with slight contact between trail
clamp and reference block and note it-><D>
6.Calculate correction value and input

Calculation
Correction value of tail clamp unload =(D+1)-C
(Example) B=670,C=669
Correction value of tail clamp unload =(670+1)-669=2
Input correction value calculated at the above to following location and save.
Input parameter•¨Drum position:Tail clamp(unload)
7.Please confirm no interfering between clamp arm and trail clmap during unloading
plate.(Whether no strange sound and pick-up pin in clamp hole definitely by eye.)
Please load and unload for all size plate cutsomer uses. If hook head interfere with
trail clmap with small size plate as rare case, please input “correction value -1”

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
12. Adjusting the leading edge clamp open/close sensors

<Introduction>
The type of compression springs used for the leading edge clamps have been changed. This is
due to an engineering change to facilitate adjustment of the opening width of the leading edge
clamps and to stabilize the open/close operation.
(For details, refer to technical information No. 0009. PT-R4300s with serial No.: 0071 and on-
ward.) Note that different types of compression spring cannot be used together.
turned OFF, and then remove the right side cover,
rear cover and front cover.
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 and rotate the
3202
M20:Squeeze roller Up Down

drum by hand until the leading edge clamps are posi-
tioned at the lower side of the drum. Then, follow the
M20:Tail edge clamp arm Up Down
procedure below. Enter the Service/Maintenance
M24:Tail edge clamp hook Hold Rele Menu screen.
M30:Leading edge clamp Up Down
ESC OK 3) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
→ Set Leading edge clamp to Down.
Then, move the attachment position of the brack-
ets for the leading edge clamp open sensors
(PH31H, PH31A) in the front/back directions so
that the clearance between the leading edge clamp
release bar and the drum can be adjusted.
Adjustment values
PT-R4000 (up to serial number 70): 5 mm
PT-R4000 (serial numbers 71 to 420): 4.5 mm
PT-R4000II (serial number 421 and onward):
4.5 mm
Point: Use a 5 mm diameter hexago- PT-R4300E/S,4300 (serial number 1 and on-
nal wrench to check the 5 mm
clearance. ward): 4.5 mm
→ Set Leading edge clamp to up.
→ Select Leading edge clamp and press OK.
Rotate the drum to the plate winding start posi-
tion.
For 4.5 mm: Adjust using a 4 mm hex-

agonal wrench and a 15
cm scale.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

→ Set Lock pin (Home) to In.
→ Set Lock pin (Away) to In.
Perform the drum positioning.
→ Select Servo (OFF) and press OK.
→ Release the servo function.
View the machine from the front or the side to con-
firm that the leading edge clamps open by approxi-
mately 4 mm.
And also make sure that the gear of the motor should
not reverse when its movement stopped.
Leading edge clamp
The width of the opening for the lead-

ing edge clamp should be approxi-
mately 4 mm.
Bracket for leading edge clamp open/

close end sensor (PH31H)

→ Set Leading edge clamp to Down.
→ Set Leading edge clamp to Up.
Repeat this process to confirm smooth operation.
→ Select Initialize and press OK to initialize the ma-
chine.
the removed covers.

L-shaped wrench (for M5 and M4 screws)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
13. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate side edge
detection sensors for side alignment (PH61H, PH61A)
After replacing the plate side edge detection sensors, the following sensor offset values need to be
adjusted.Use the 510 x 400 x 0.15 plate. (If it is not available, use the thinnest plate from among
the customer’s plates.)
1. Coarse adjustment
turned OFF, and then remove the upper rear cover
and rear cover.
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 to initialize the
machine.
Graduated scale Plate
3) Open the operation door and set a plate on the trans-
fer path.The plate must be aligned with the graduated
scale on the transfer path.
→ Select Centering test
→ Select “plate size” and OK
If an error occurs, perform the operation in
Set the plate center within 10 mm of “Countermeasure for errors” described later and
the path center. then go back to step 3) above.When the test has
been successfully completed with no error, press
“ESC” key .
4451
Front sensor offset
The first parameter in “Punch Adjust” has to be
determined by changing this value every 0.5 mm,
Centering test
and then the maximum and the minimum value
Adjust displacement sensor
will be detemined without error.
NVRAM backup And then the middle value betweeen them has to
NVRAM restore be set.
ESC OK NEXT 5) Shift the plate 10 mm to the Home side (Away side)
and execute the Centering test command to confirm
that no error occurs.
The cam follower pushing against one side of the

plate at this moment will not affect the operation.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

2. Fine adjustment
1) Move the plate 10 mm toward the Away side and
enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
→ Select Centering test and press OK. At this time,
be sure that the distance between the plate center
and the path center does not exceed 10 mm.
2) If an error occurs, perform the operation in “Counter-
Move the plate to the Away side.
measure for errors” described later and then go back
to step 1) above. When no error occurs, go on to step
3).
3) When the plate stopper (Home side cam follower)
has pushed the plate to the farthest point on the Away
side during the centering operation, confirm with
your hands and eyes that the plate is properly cen-
tered.
Then check the following points.
• When the plate stopper has pushed the plate
too far:
Confirm here. → Enter the Input parameter screen.
3860
Punch adjust CLR → Reduce the second parameter value for Punch
7 8 9 adjust, execute the Centering test command
0.000 [mm] Change the
0.000 [mm]
4 5 6
value here. again to cancel the test mode and then go back
1 2 3
0.000 [mm] to step 1) above.
0 •
• When the plate stopper does not reach the
ESC SAVE ENT
plate:
Increase the second parameter value for Punch ad-
just, execute the Centering test command again to
cancel the test mode and then go back to step 1)
above.
• When the plate stopper pushes the plate cor-
rectly:
(Although you will feel some resistance when
attempting to move the plate by hand, the
plate can be moved.)
Execute the Centering test command again to can-
cel the test mode and then go on to step 4) below.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4) Move the plate 10 mm toward the Home side and
enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
→ Execute the Centering test command. At this mo-
ment, be sure that the distance between the plate
center and the path center does not exceed 10 mm.
5) If an error occurs, perform the operation in “Counter-
measure for errors” described later and then go back
Move the plate to the Home side.
to step 4) above.When no error occurs, go on to step
6).
6) When the plate stopper (Away side cam follower)
has pushed the plate to the farthest point on the Away
side during the centering operation, confirm with
your eyes that the plate is properly centered.
Then check the following points.
• When the plate stopper has pushed the plate
too far:
→ Enter the Input parameter screen.
Confirm here.
→ Reduce the third parameter value for Punch ad-
3860
Punch adjust CLR just, execute the Centering test command again
7 8 9 to cancel the test mode and then go back to step
0.000 [mm]
4 5 6 Change the 4) above.
0.000 [mm] value here.
1 2 3
0.000 [mm] • When the plate stopper does not reach the
0 •
plate:
ESC SAVE ENT
Increase the third parameter value for Punch ad-
just, execute the Centering test command again to
cancel the test mode and then go back to step 4)
above.
• When the plate stopper pushes the plate cor-
rectly:
(Although you will feel some resistance when
attempting to move the plate by hand, the
plate can be moved.)
Execute the Centering test command again to can-
cel the test mode and then go on to step 7) below.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

7) Align the plate center and the path center and execute
the Centering test command again.Check the plate
centering condition, when the plate stopper pushes
the plate farthest at this moment.When the plate has
been properly pressed (Although you will feel
some resistance when attempting to move the
plate by hand, the plate can be moved.), execute
the Centering test command again to cancel the test
mode and then complete the adjustment operation.If
the plate has been pressed too far or insufficiently,
go back to step 2. – 1) above.
And the plate size must be back to the catalogue size
in the end.
8) After completing the adjustment, check the amount
that each plate stopper pushes all of the different
plate sizes.
Smaller plates are likely to be pushed excessively.
the removed covers.
[Countermeasure for errors]

3860
Punch adjust CLR • When the “The size check program of the centering
7 8 9 function detects that the measured plate size is
0.000 [mm] shorter than expected one” error message is dis-
4 5 6
0.000 [mm] played, increase the 1st parameter value in the
1 2 3
0.000 [mm] Punch adjust of the Input parameter in the service/
0 • maintenance mode.
ESC SAVE ENT • When the “The size check program of the centering
function detects that the measured plate size is
longer than expected one” error message is dis-
played, reduce the 1st parameter value in the Punch
adjust of the Input parameter in the service/mainte-
nance mode.
• When the “When alignment is performed, plate set
position is out of range” error message is displayed,
set the plate so that the plate center will be posi-
tioned within 10 mm of the path center.

None
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
14. Adjusting the trailing edge clamp hook sensor

1) Remove the right side cover, front cover and rear
cover.
2) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300.
4450
Initialize → Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.
Initialize machine status → Enter the Special action screen.
Pick up clamp → Select Put clamp on drum and press OK to mount
the trailing edge clamps on the drum.
Check ORG-EZ
Put clamp on drum
ESC OK NEXT
3) Rotate the drum by hand until the leading edge

clamps are positioned at the lower side of the drum
and then fix the drum.
→ Enter the Drum screen.
Sensors (PH24-2, PH24-1)

→ Set Trail edge clamp hook to Rele and adjust the
tab positions for the trailing edge clamp hook sen-
sors (PH24-1, PH24-2.) Each hook lever that
moves up and down is positioned at its lower
limit, where a bearing cam lightly mounts the top
surface of a slide-shaped part.
Tab: A metal plate to attach the clamp hook sensor
Tab

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
The drive bar has been removed in the <Reference>

photo above to make it easier to observe PH24-1 PH24-2
the unit. Do not remove it, however, dur-
ing actual operation. Otherwise the accu- Rele on on
rate adjustment of the drum and the drive Hold (one pressing) off off
bar will be lost. Hold (two pressings) on off
on→The light passage to the sensor is not ob-
structed.
3202 5) Enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen.

M20:Squeeze roller Up Down → Enter the Actuator test screen.
→ Repeatedly set Trail edge clamp to Rele and Hold
M20:Tail edge clamp arm Up Down
to confirm the smooth operation of the clamp
M24:Tail edge clamp hook Hold Rele
hook.
M30:Leading edge clamp Up Down 6) Re-attach the sensor unit which was removed in step
4) above. Re-attach the cleaning roller.
ESC OK
Activate the clamp hook to confirm that it does

not catch with the sensor cable.
7) Attach the trailing edge clamps to the drive bar fol-
lowing the procedures described in “Removing the
trailing edge clamps” and “Attaching the trailing
edge clamps” sections.
the removed covers.
The sensor bracket has been attached to the

Home side when the machine is delivered.

Nipper
Approximately 1 hour

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

Clamp mechanism(Reference)
Sensors (PH24-2, PH24-1)
Hook lever
Jig

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
15. Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the back of the plate (PH51)
The following sensitivity adjustment is required after the sensor for detecting an interleaf on the
back of the plate is replaced.
1) Turn ON the power to the PT-R4300 to initialize the
Detection hole
machine and open the operation door.
2) Place a plate over the detection hole of the transfer
path.
3) Press the SET button for the sensor amplifier unit.At
this moment, the tuning indicator for the sensor am-
plifier unit will be ON (yellow LED).
Transfer path
4) Remove the plate placed over the detection hole and
place an interleaf over the detection hole.
5) Press the SET button for the sensor amplifier unit.At
this moment, the tuning indicator for the sensor am-
plifier unit will be ON (yellow LED).
6) Confirm that the amplifier operation indicator (red
LED) is ON when an interleaf that has been layered
with a plate is placed over the detection hole. The
Plate
indicator should be OFF when a plate alone is placed
over the detection hole or the detection hole is left
uncovered.
7) Turn OFF the power.
operation indicator
OFF.D
ON.D
DON
Lock
LON
OFF
SET Lamp
Interleaf
Sensor amplifier unit.
(Away side on path.)
SET button
Sensor amplifier

None
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
16.Replacement procedure for PH29H Sensor base bracket and

PH29H/A Sensor adjustment procedure (Rev 2.0)
• Reason
• Improve sensor activation margin for Toray Waterless plate.
• Change PH29H sensor direction as same as Away side sensor.
• Exchange Part
• New Sensor Base Bracket for PH29H Sensor Cover.
• Away side Sensor Base Bracket and Cover did not change.
New type Home side sensor cover

* 100101154V00: Sensor bracket H2
Old model PT-R4xxx
* 100004132V00: Protect cover A
Re-Model PT-R4300E/S * 100101060V01: Sensor bracket 2
Applied serial.
PTR4300S: 219-225, 241-255, 266-285, 296-305, 311-
PTR4300E: 10198-207, 10218-227, 10243-252, 10258-
1. Exchange Procedure for PH29 New sensor base bracket

1) Open back side panel after power off machine.
2) Remove sensor cover from PH29H and PH29A.
3) Disconnect connector at PH29H and remove sensor base bracket with PH29H.
Old PT-R4xxx
Sensor Cover PH29H
PH29H PH29A Sensor base bracket

* Sensor cover was removed.
Re-model PT-R4300E/S

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4) Remove PH29H from original sensor base bracket, then set PH29H to the new sensor base bracket as
changing sensor direction from inside direction to outside.
• PH29H must be same direction and same surface on base bracket with PH29A when set
it.
Old PT-R4xxx

Befor: PH29H sensor angle is right. After: PH29H sensor angle is left.
Old bracket New bracket
Re-model PT-R4300E/S
Befor: PH29H sensor angle is right. After: PH29H sensor angle is left.
Old bracket New bracket
5) Mount new sensor base bracket which has set PH29H at stay which removed original position.
Then connect PH29H cable and fix cable by cable tie at tie mount.
6) Adjust the distance of screws for sensor and drum surface like below drawing.
• Sensor angle: 4 mm
37 mm
41 mm

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

2. Adjustment procedure for position of PH29H and PH29A.
1) Enter the Drum test menu. (Sensors are lighted up.)
• Service / Drum test [OK]
2) Off the drum servo.
• Service / Drum test / Servo [On/Off]
3) Adjust the sensors height (PH29H and A) to the level to reference the vacuum guide.
4) Load the plate.

• In case of Re-model PTR4300E/S. (Ver.1.11 or later.)
• Disable to leading edge detection.
• User Maintenance/ / /No front check [ON]
• Load the new plate.
• In case of old PTR4xxx / Re-model PTR4300E/S (Ver.1.10 or before)
1) Without back side panel and side panel (at home side), set maintenance key at “on” position.
Skip Machine initialization after power on the machine.
2) Prepare plate for adjustment. It must be punched registration and cut 50~70mm height as below
picture.
3) Position drum at “Lead Clamp” by Drum test at service mode after activate ZeroReturn for
drum by Drum test at service mode.
• Service/Drum test/ZeroReturn
• Service/Drum test/Leading Clamp
4) Insert Drum Lock Pins (Home/Away) by actuator test at service mode.
• Service/Actuator test/LockPin(Home) [IN]
• Service/Actuator test/LockPin(Away) [IN]
5) Open the Leading edge clamp by actuator test at service mode.
• Service/Actuator test/Leading edge Clamp [Down]
Then set a prepared plate to fit plate registration hole and registration pins at drum.
6) Close the Leading edge clamp by actuator test at service mode.
• Service/Actuator test/Leading edge Clamp [Up]
7) Pull Drum Lock Pin out (Home/Away) by actuator test at service mode.
• Service/Actuator test/LockPin(Home) [Out]
• Service/Actuator test/LockPin(Away) [Out]

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

5) Enter the Drum test menu. (Sensors are lighted up.)
• Service / Drum test [OK]
6) Off the drum servo.
• Service / Drum test / Servo [On/Off]
7) Light the sensor beam to the plate surface on the plate detection hole moving the drum by hand. Then
servo is ON.
Plate
Target
Plate detection hole
8) Move the stay for the sensor bracket position to left or right side which is adjusted the PH29A sensor
beam and center of the plate detection hole at horizontal way. (PH29A sensar bracket can not move to
left or right side.)
* In this case, make sure to keep the angle 4 mm. (Do not rotate the sensor.)
Plate
Center
37 mm
41 mm
Stay for the sensor bracket.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

9) Move the PH29H sensor position to left or right side which is adjusted the sensor beam and center of
the plate detection hole at horizontal way
Plate
Target
* In this case, make sure to keep the angle 4 mm. (Do not rotate the sensor.)
37 mm
41 mm
3. Adjustment the sensor sensitivety of PH29H and PH29A.
* There are same procedure for each sensor.

1) Confirm the sensor volume position which is rotated clockwise from minimum side to sensor ON.
(Position A.)
2) Off the servo. Then light the sensor beam to without plate area on the plate detection hole moving the
drum by hand. Then servo is ON.
Plate
No plate area

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

3) Confirm the sensor volume position which is rotated counterclockwise from maximum side to sensor
OFF. (Position B.)
4) Rotate the sensor volume counterclockwise from B to middle of A and B. (Position C.)
* The ON/OFF condition of the sensors can be checked by the indication of the LED lamps that
are attached to the sensors.
5) Confirm the sensors whitch are keeping turn ON on the drum groove. If sensor turn OFF on the groove,
rotate the sensor volume to clockwise bit. (Increes the sensor sensitivity bit morer.)
* The ON/OFF condition of the sensors can be checked by the indication of the LED lamps that
are attached to the sensors.
In case of sensor have green led for stable condition, confirm to light up it with ON and OFF
area.
• Stable ON -> Green ON + Orange ON
• Stable OFF -> Green ON + Orange OFF
Drum groove
6) Up / down the drum by hand, confirm the sensors stable turnig ON / OFF. (ON: plate surface / OFF: no
plate on the detection hole.) Plate
Plate surface
No plate area
7) Perform the Front Check command.

• Service/Drum test/Front Check
Adjust the plate edge and beam position of PH29H by drum parameter.
• Service/Input Parameter/Drum Position/front sensor
Plate
* 0.2 mm / 1 pulse
Beam spot

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

8) A leading edge detection function is changed effectively.
• User Maintenance/ / /No front check [OFF]
Teach the front sensor offset value.
• Service/Special action/Front sensor offset/ Select Plate
9) Enter the set media type screen again. And check the [Front offset] value.
PH29A sensor position is adjusted to the [Front offset] value within +/- 2.
• In case of Front offset value is + -> Up the PH29A position.
• In case of Front offset value is - -> Down the PH29A position.
10)If customer has another media, follow same procedure from 10).
<Reference>
Plate That is the detection area which is -15 to +20

from the Front check position.
20
detection
area
Front check position
15
1 plus =0.2mm
Front offset
= Turn on position of PH29H - PH29A
Plate
Front offset: +
(PH29H is faster than PH29A)
Sensor beam
H om e A w ay
Front offset: -
(PH29A is faster than PH29H)
H om e A w ay
Err*139 In case of sensor is not turn ON within - / + 5 pulse from the Front offset value.
Err*1b9 In case of sensor is not turn ON with detection area.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
17. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the drum vacuum

pressure sensor (P1)
A vacuum pressure sensor is a change with Re-model 4300E/S in the one manufactured by
SMC.
Plesae initialize the vacuum pressure sensor and check the initial value and set the adjustment
value at the time of the exchange.
SIVIC PRESSURE kPa
SET
17-1.Checking and setting initial value of the vacuum pressure sensor

Please check and set the initial value when you replace a vacuum pressure sensor.
Color Mode Output Response Preset n-1 H

Setting Sor Hsy nC 2.5 mAn blowerON/2 0
Contents red/ON hysteresis nomal close ms manual set Treshold hysteresisi
1:Setting and confirmation of the indication color
SIVIC PRESSURE kPa
SET
It keeps pushing an SET key for two seconds.
SIVIC PRESSURE kPa SIVIC PRESSURE kPa SIVIC PRESSURE kPa SIVIC PRESSURE kPa
Sor SoG rEd Grn

SET SET SET SET
P101 is set up in "Grn", P102 "rED" with key.
Push the SET key

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

2:Mode setting
SIVIC PRESSURE kPa SIVIC PRESSURE kPa
Hys Wnd
SET SET
It is set up in "Hys" with the key.
Push the SET key

3:Switch output setting
nC nO
SET SET
It is set up in "nC(nomal close)" with the key.
Push the SET key
4:Response time setting

SIVIC PRESSURE kPa
2.5
SET
It is set up in "2.5" with the key.

Display changing 2.5ms->20ms->160ms->640ms->1280ms->2.5ms
Push the SET key

5:Method of data setting
nAn AUt
SET SET
It is set up in" mAn (the manual mode)" with the key.
Push the SET key
SIVIC PRESSURE kPa
SET
It is returned to the usual measurement mode.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

6:Key lock function
SIVIC PRESSURE kPa
SET
It keeps pushing the SET key for four seconds
UnL LoC
SET SET
It is set up with the key.
(When it is set up in "LoC", it can't go even into the setup change menu.)
17-2.Zero clear of the vacuum pressure sensor and setting threshold level
1)Indication value is reset in the zero when it keeps pushing key at the same time.
2)Turn on the blower by the service maintenance“Actuator test/blower(drum)/ON”, and record

the indication value of the sensor.
1/2 of this value is inputted as thresholdvalue.
*As for the pressure value, a minus is indicated.
(EX : thresholdvalue becomes -2.7 in the case of -5.4.)
3)Press the SET button in the Measurement mode to display set values. ” n_1 ” and the cur-
rent set value will flicker alternately.
4)Make it moderate numerical value with the key, and set it up.
flicker
n_1 -2.7
SET SET
5)Press the SET button to display the next set value.

Press the or button to enter into “0”.and push the SET again.
flicker
H 0
SET SET

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
18. Replacement and adjustment procedure for the plate sensor

(PH6)(2 plates wind,or float)
4451 1) Adjusting the sensor height

Front sensor offset
Adjust the sensor height using the following com-
Centering test mand.
Adjust displacement sensor Enter the Service/Maintenance menu screen.
NVRAM backup → Enter the Special action screen.
→ Adjust Displacement sensor
NVRAM restore
Once the drum has stopped rotating, loosen the sen-
ESC OK NEXT
sor fixing screws (2 pcs.) and move the sensor up and
down until a buzzer sounds. Then, tighten the fixing
Don’t loosen
screws.
The buzzer sounds near the point at which the con-
trol panel shows “A0”.
Finally, press “cancel” on the panel to complete.
Point:The height is showed as two digits on the
operation panel. The appropriate value is
within the range 9b to A5. One pulse is 10
microns.
Adjust this
way Note that when “Adjust Displacement sensor” is
executed, the recording drum starts rotating to-
ward the predetermined position.
Loosen this screw

2) Re-obtaining the offset value
1101 Set media type
CLR
Thickness 0.24 mm → Input -9.99 to Displacement offset and save it.
7 8 9 (This brings you into the mode to obtain the offset
Front offset
0.00
4 5 6 value.)
1 2 3 → Load a plate onto the drum.
displacement offset
-9.99 → Reenter the Set media type screen and then the
0 •
Displacement offset screen to check that the off-
ESC OK ENT
set value has been changed.
(The offset value should have been changed to 0.1
or lower.)
Inputting -9.99 here brings you into
the mode to obtain the offset value.
• Adjust the offset value when you use plates of
the same size which have different thick-
nesses.
• To clean the seal, wipe it using alcohol. Do not
use thinner.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
About attaching a seal
Attach a black delustering seal to the surface of the drum beneath the third leading edge clamp
from the Home side.
*Choose the attachment position of the seal carefully to prevent it from being covered by
the leading edge clamps.
*The surface of the recording drum must be cleaned prior to attaching the black delustering
seal.
Leading edge clamp

(third clamp from
Black delustering the Home side)
seal
Reference)
Parts code: 100005768V00
30mm 35mm Name: Black delustering seal (55 x 30 mm)
Plate top side detection Recording drum

sensor (PH29H)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
19. Path driving motor replacement procedure.

1) Make sure the machine is turned off and remove the
left side, the back, the front the top covers.
To ensure safety, secure the transfer path with

Drive Motor Unit the fixing brackets before the operation.
2) Remove the drive motor unit.
The screws are under the motor unit.

3) Remove the gear from the old motor and install it on
the new motor.
4) Install the drive motor unit on the main unit.
→ Actuator test
→ Confirm that the path unit goes up and down.
Adjust the drive motor gear engage.
• If it is noisy during it going up and down, adjust

the drive motor gear engage.
• Do not touch the gears while the path is operat-
ing.
7) Put back the all covers.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
20. Squeeze roller height adjustment

<Introduction>
One of the possible causes of plate looseness on the leading edge side is that the full length of the
squeeze roller may not contact the plate at the same time.
In this case, adjust the squeeze roller height according to the following procedure.
1) Preparation
Fulcrum bracket (Home side)
Squeeze sideplate (Home side) Turn OFF the power to the PT-R4300 and remove
the right cover and the rear cover.
2) Check that the distance between the squeeze
sideplate and the rectangular hole of the fulcrum
bracket, as shown in the figure on the left, is the same
on the Home and Away sides.
<Tolerance>
Measure the distance The distance on each side should be from 11
here.
to 15 mm and the difference between the
Home side distance and the Away side dis-
Squeeze sideplate (Away side) tance must be less than 0.5 mm.
Fulcrum bracket (Away side) * The height from the recording drum to the
squeeze roller is checked and adjusted by ad-
justing the distance between the squeeze
sideplate and the rectangular hole of the ful-
crum bracket.
Measure the distance

here.
Put an M4 flat washer here.

3) Rotate the cleaning roller by hand to check whether it
rotates smoothly.
Next, remove the cleaning roller and rotate the
squeeze roller by hand to check that there is no prob-
lem in the bearings.
When the cleaning roller If you feel that the movement is abnormally heavy,
shaft is put under heavy
load. the bearings probably need to be changed.
Also ensure that the bearings are not detaching from
Cleaning roller
the respective squeeze sideplates.
<Reference>
Name: Ball bearings
Parts code: 70584384-00
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4) If the actual difference between the Home side dis-
tance and the Away side distance is outside of the
range of tolerance mentioned in step 2), adjust the
position of each bearing engaged with the clamp arm
until the difference is within the tolerance.
The distance can be adjusted independently on the
Home and Away sides.
Clamp arm
Loosen these screws to change the bear-

ing position.
(Changing the bearing position alters the Bearing
position of the arm that is engaged with
the bearing and this affects the height of
the squeeze roller.)
Adjust in this direction (Home side)
Clamp arm
Loosen these screws to change the bear-

ing position.
(Changing the bearing position alters the
position of the arm that is engaged with
the bearing and this affects the height of
Bearing the squeeze roller.)
Adjust in this direction (Awayside) Point: When adjusting the squeeze roller height,
first shift the bearing so that the squeeze
roller moves away from the recording
drum. Then tighten the bearing fixing
screws firmly, and move the squeeze
sideplate by hand until the bearing
reaches the appropriate position.
Squeeze roller 5) Rotate the recording drum by hand, while viewing

the squeeze roller from the right side (encoder side)
of the machine, to check the following.
• The recording drum does not contact the leading
edge clamp.
• The distance between the leading edge clamp and
the squeeze roller is at least 5 mm.
When the distance between the squeeze roller

Leading edge clamp The distance
here must be 5
and the drum is narrower, you will hear some air-
mm or more. flow noise during high-speed rotation of the re-
cording drum.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

→ Execute initialization of the PT-R4300.
each cover and the cleaning roller.
<Other>
There is another possible cause of plate looseness in addition to that relating to the height of the
squeeze roller. This occurs if you have used the PT-R4300 for a long time.
Aluminum particles from the plate and also tape adhesive on the plate edge may have adhered to
the squeeze roller, cleaning roller, and surface of the recording drum.
Therefore, ensure that the following items are cleaned at the same time as you adjust the height of
the squeeze roller.
• Cleaning roller
• Squeeze roller
• Recording drum

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

21. PT-R4300E/S Ball screw for Sub-scanning Replacement Procedure
Even if recording head isn't removed, a connection can be removed with PT-R4300E/S.
1)Recording head test/RH zero return,Move RH to the zero point, and turn off a power supply.
2)Remove a joint fixed screw (two screw) with RH.
3)Next, loosen a motor cup ring, and remove a motor.

*The screws of the cup ring are two points respectively in the feed screw side, the motor side.
*The set screws are used on the feed screw side double.
Cupring
Remove the motor bracket fixed
screw
Positioning pin

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4)Remove three points of screws which fix the control ring of the bearing.
Never loose these

screws
5)Remove the away side bearing support bracket.

6)Move a feed screw on the AWAY side, and pull it out from motor housing.
Next, pull out a screw on the HOME side(from under the RH).
2:It is moved to the HOME

side, and pulled out from 1:It is pulled on the AWAY
under RH. side, and pulled out from
motor housing.
7)Put a new screw under the head from the HOME side, and insert it in motor housing.
The ball screw supplied as a part.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

8)Attach the away side bearing support bracket temporary.
9)Three screws are to fasten a bearing control ring equally. It is normal that a gap occurs
between housing.
10)Install a cup ring and a motor.
11)Fix universal joint and a head temporarily on the HOME origin side.
12)Once, move the head to away side, then return it in the HOME side origin again, and
tighten after you send a head to the AWAY side once.
13)Move the head to away side, then fix the away side bearing support bracket.
14)Move the head between home and away side several time. At this moment, make less stress
on bearing ring, universal joint and the away side bearing support bracket which are fixed again.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
22. PT-R4300E/S strike adjustment
A punch unit is fixed on the drum base with PT-R4300E/S.And, the function which can adjust
the release point of plate to every plate thickness is added, too.
1)Remove Dust shoot of punch on the HOME side.
Dust shoot
2)Remove a leading clamp (the second from HOME side, a small size machine are the third.).
A clamp is removed so that it can

see a drum pin.
Drum pin
3)Open a door, and set plate(Actuator test/Door/OPEN).

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4)Choose plate set by Specialaction/Registertest, and do it.
4451
Register test
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore
Adjust Displacement sensor 2
ESC OK NEXT
5)Check the release position of plate and a strike.
Check the release point
*2mm-3mm is an ideal in the release position of plate.How many times are to check even the
same plate size, plate thickness in the release position because it isn't satabile.
2mm 3mm
*The function which can adjust the release point of plate to every plate thickness is added
at PT-R4300E/S.
3742
CLR The parameter which influences all
plate thickness.
Grip adj. [0.1mm] 0
A-Grip adj. [0.1mm] -15
7 8 9
Temp. offset [x0.1] -3
0 4 5 6
to Clamp [0.1mm] -80
t=0.24 0 1 2 3 The compensation parameter of each
t=0.20 0 plate thickness.
t=0.15 0
0 · —
ESC OK ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

Check the Strike
A punch unit faces a drum, and it is the inclination of 1.5mm with PT-R4300E/S.
*It is the inclination of 0.5mm in a 302mm pace of the referance punch.
The right and left of the punch unit is only located, and strike adjustment is adjusted.
6.35
5.35mm
A B
A = B = 0.5mm A<B A>B

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

Adjustment of punch unit
Make this adjustment when you confirm a strike and there is a deviation.
1)Remove a punch unit location plate.
2)Loosen the fixed left-right screw of the punch unit, and adjust the left-right position of the
punch unit.
3)Fix the punch unit, and do strike confirmation again.
4)Put a punch unit location plate on the unit at the end, and fix it if adjustment is OK.
*A punch unit location board becomes a standard for the position reappearance of the
punch unit after that.
punch unit location plate
Fix screws of AWAY side

Fix screws of HOME side

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

[How to identify whether the PT-R4300 or the printing machine is the cause of the registration de-
viation]
This section explains how to determine whether or not the registration deviation has occurred
in the PT-R4300.
Since the PT-R4300 uses only plates, it is not possible to measure it on the light table using a
graduated microscope, which is the method used for the film setter. As the PT-R unit uses
registration punch holes as a reference for checking registration deviation, observe the grid
lines of overlaid plates on the Home-side and Away-side using a low power loupe (5x to 10x).
Required items:
6.35 dia. register pin x 2 pcs., loupe (5x to 10x)
Sample exposure:
Expose (local exposure at 2400 dpi) the grid pattern over the full surface of a plate of
the size used by the user. At least four plates are required per job. (Add more plates if
necessary.)
Align the plate with the registration pins as described below.
Secure the register pins and secure the output plate that will be used as a reference. For the
second plate and thereafter, cut out the leading edge corners on the Home and Away sides and
overlay the plates on the reference plate. Then, using the loupe, measure the difference be-
tween the grid lines in the Y direction on the plate and the grid lines on the reference plate.
When the grid pattern has been exposed at 2400 dpi, the width of each line is approximately
30 micron.
Criterion for judgment: As plates are positioned in reference to the Home-side pin, if a plate
is misaligned in the Y direction, it is also consequently misaligned in
the X direction Therefore, you only need to check the alignment in
the Y direction.
Since the line width is approximately 30 micron., you can consider the registration in the
PTR4000 to be accurate when the corresponding grid lines are aligned within one grid line
width. If the above criterion is not satisfied, perform the corrective procedure for the registra-
tion deviation. Itmay be difficult to identify the registration deviation depending on the num-
ber of plates to be checked. Therefore, registration deviation may be discovered at the user’s
site even though it did not occur during local exposure. In this case, check the sample of the
registration deviation from the user and ask about the frequency of the problem in order to
determine whether or not to conduct a corrective procedure.
X direction
AWAY HOME
Approximately
30mm
Tilt Y direction Tilt Y direction
Cut along the line from

the second plate.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

How to check the release position of the nip roller statically
1. Set a plate on the conveyor unit.

2. Actuator Test → Path Down
3. Special Action → Register Test (Centering, punching, and nip operation are executed.)
4. Actuator Test → Path Down (The lowest place)
Drum Test → Leading Clamp
Actuator Test → Lock Pin (Home/Away) IN
Drum Test → Servo OFF
Actuator Test → Leading Edge Clamp Down → Shutter Open
Motor Test → M50: Transport Roller (IN)
Set the feed amount (standard distance 130 mm) by changing “pulse” to “mm”.
Set 50 at Speed mm/sec and execute it.
Measure the distance between the reference pin (Home side) and the plate, and get the com-
pensation.
This + or – value is the compensation for the feed amount 130 mm.
This is the ideal that a plate reaches the drum 3 mm before the reference pin when the plate feed
amount is set 130 mm.
For example, if the feed amount is 130 mm and the plate reaches the drum 3 mm before the
reference pin, the compensation value is –3 mm.
However this procedure is just like a rule of thumb. Therefore, you should check by eye and
adjust it by loading a plate actually.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
23. Countermeasures for Registration Deviation on PT-R4XXX (addi-

tional information)
Revision of the twist of the conveyor unit

Normally the Home side and the Away side of the conveyor path are parallel.
If either of the two sides does not hit the hexagonal bolt on the engine base or a plate being loaded
on the conveyor path is skewed more than 1 mm against the drum, the conveyor path must be
adjusted to be the same height.
(Hexagonal Bolt)
(The height of the left portion and the
right portion of the guide before the
punch are different.)
To see the difference between the right and the left at the punch unit or the drum, you should put
a plate on the conveyor path and lower the nip roller. At this time, the plate does not have any
curl.
The revised portion should be the conveyor drive unit at the Home side basically.
(Revised portion: Conveyor

Drive Unit at Home side)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

Confirmation of adjustment amount
Scale
Fulcrum Pin
1. Measure the distance between the this side of the frame and the pin of the conveyor drive
unit.
2. After adjusting, confirm if the target amount changed.
If you want to decline the Home side, shorten the distance.
(If the distance is longer, the Home side is higher.)
Adjustment (Revision)
Be sure that the conveyor path is at the origin point (the highest position) when adjusting.
1) If the amount to be adjusted is less than 2mm, adjust the nut portion of the ball screw.
1. Loosen the hexagonal nut and the hollow set (set screw).
2. Loosen the adjusting bolt for the nut plate, rotate it along the semicircular oblong.
3. Tighten the adjusting bolt for the nut plate and then tighten the hollow set and the hexago-
nal nut.
Adjusting bolt for the nut plate
The nut part of the ball screw
The hollow set and the hexago-

nal nut.
Criterion for Adjustment (Ldeal designed value)

The nut of the ball screw can rotate a maximum of ± 44 degrees. The height of the transfer
path can be moved vertically by approximately ± 0.6 mm at the nut position, approximately ±
1.6 mm at the punch position, and approximately ± 1.9 mm at the drum position.
But in reality, it might be a little different because each machine has different spring reaction,
gap or something.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

2) If the amount to be adjusted is more than 2mm or it has already been adjusted at 1).
1. Remove the four screws.
2. Grab the ball screw portion and pull it to the arrow side to release the bevel gear engage-
ment.
3. Rotate the ball screw and change the engagement, and then push the ball screw to engage
the gear.
4. Fix the screws.
Screws
Screws
(Engagement
portion)
Pull and release the bevel
gear engagement
Criterion of Adjustment: (Ldeal designed value)

The one tooth shift of the bevel gear makes the height of the conveyor path change approxi-
mately 1mm at the punch unit and approximately 1.3mm at the drum up or down.
But in reality, it might be a little different because each machine has different spring reaction,
gap or something.
When either 1) or 2) is adjusted, the sensor (PH57) to detect the middle position of the
conveyor path and the sensor (PH55) to detect the lower position of the conveyor path
may be adjusted.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
24. Procedure for replacing the PT-R4XXX transfer path spring
Rear section stay Weld nut
Arm side
Transfer drive spring
Tension bolt
Compression spring
Tension plate
<Transfer drive section> Transfer drive stay
1. Set the transfer path at its highest position and secure it with the transfer path fixing brackets
(transport fixing brackets).
2. Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and pull the fulcrum pin on the arm side of the transfer
path until one side of the spring is freed. Be careful during this process not to drop the
bearing and the washer.
(In some cases, a thrust washer may be used in the E-ring section.)
Fulcrum pin E-ring Washer Bearing Fulcrum pin
3. Remove the rear cover of the machine to bring the rear side of the transfer drive stay into
view.
4. Peel off the tape to remove the roll pin of the weld nut.
Tape
Home side Away side

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

5. Loosen the nut and two cap bolts to remove the weld nut.
6. Remove the rear section stay that secures the transfer drive stay.
7. Pull out the tension bolt, tension plate, compression spring, and spring from inside the trans-
fer drive stay.
Weld nut
Nut
Rear section stay
Nut Hooked part

Roll pin
8. Replace the damaged (old) spring with a new one. Make sure to orient the new spring cor-
rectly (the hooked parts should be at the bottom).
The size of the opening of the hooked parts varies. Attach the hooked part with a wider
opening to the tension plate.
Wider opening
9. Hook the other side of the compression spring on a piece of thin cord (e.g., vinyl).
Cord Compression spring
10. Set the compression spring and the tension plate section into the transfer drive stay.
11. Attach the rear section stay. In this step, pull the cords that were attached to the tension bolt
and the compression spring through their respective holes in the rear section stay.
12. Slide the weld nut onto the tension bolt temporarily. (This is to prevent the tension bolt from
dropping.)
13. Slide the arm-side fulcrum pin through the spring and then secure it together with the bearing
and the washer.
Ensure that the fulcrum pin is set in the loop of the compression spring.
14. Screw the weld nut onto the tension bolt until the thread portion of the bolt that is coming
through the nut is the same length as the nut. Then, draw a cord through the oblong hole in
the weld nut.
15. Secure the weld nut with the cap bolt and then secure the end of the thread portion of the
tension bolt with the nut.
Be sure to align the face of the nut and the end of the thread portion.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

16. Pull out the cord that is secured to the compression spring to create a loop on one side of the
compression spring, and then insert the roll pin into it.
This inserted roll pin goes into the oblong hole of the stopper.
17. Cut the cord and affix a piece of tape over the roll pin to prevent it from falling off.
18. Finally, remove the transfer path fixing brackets.
<Precautions>
1. When pulling or inserting a fulcrum pin, it may be hooked by the burr of the E-ring
groove. In this case, lightly tap only the fulcrum pin to move it through.
2. Remove the fulcrum pin from inside to facilitate attachment of the E-ring and
washer.
3. When the Away-side rear section stay is removed, the transfer drive stay lowers a
few mm due to its own weight.
Therefore, remove the rear section stay while supporting the transfer drive stay.
4. The replacement procedure is the same on the Home and Away sides, however, do
not perform the procedure simultaneously on both sides. Be sure to replace each
spring individually.
The design of the transfer drive spring has been improved from the machine with serial
number 516. Order the spring using the new parts code when you replace it.
New parts code: 70516755-01 (tension spring <balance>)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
25. Air flow adjustment procedure of VP41
VP41 is changed to the new type (type 9L) with PT-R4300E/S.

The output of VP41 is branched off, and air pressure is being sent to cover glass and the inside
of RH .
It aims at reducing dirt inside RH by this.
Do air pressure confirmation, adjustment by using flow-meter at the time of the check or at the
time of the pump exchange.
1)Please ON VP41(Service/Actuator test/VP41 Complesser(Gus)[ON]
2)It confirms that there is air-pressure beyond 6L in the measurement point of 1. (at the time
of the exchange, about 8L).
3)Speed controller (SC2) is adjusted to become 3L in the measurement point of 2.

*SC1 is opening all the way.
VP41
SC1
RH 2
SC2
Completely open
Connect hose here
Flow meter

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
VP41
Speed controller(SC2)
Speed controller(SC1)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
26. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the power supply

After replacing the DC power supplies, be sure to adjust the output voltages as follows.
NAME Model No. manufacture Setting voltage Mesurement piont Measurement point(board)
U1 ZWS75AF-5/J 5.25±0.05V connector XU12 of U1 1- 4pin LRB32E Board TP1-TP7
U2 ZWS50-15 +15.05±0.05V connector XU22 of U1 1- 4pin
U3 ZWS50-15 -15.05±0.05V connector XU32 of U1 1- 4pin
U4 HWS300-24 DENSEI- 24.30±0.05V terminal of U4
U5 HWS300-24 LAMBDA 24.05±0.05V terminal of U5 CON-PTR4E Board TP3-TP8
4300E :HWS150-5/RA
U6 -5.30±0.01V terminal of U6
4300S :HWS300-5
U9 ZWS30-24/J 24.05±0.05V connector XU92 of U1 1- 3pin CON-PTR4E Board TP3-TP6
27. Procedure for replacing and adjusting the pulse motor driver
Confirm the setup of the DIP switch when you do the exchange of the pulse motor driver.
*M50 (transport roller drive motor) and M61 (centering unit motor) are changed to one motor
driver (2 circuit type) with PT-R4300E/S.
ON
DSW1 OFF
PMD2 1 2 3 4 5 6
RSW1 S_model:9 ,E_model:B
RSW2 S_model:9 ,E_model:B
RUN1 0
S'S1 5
PMD50
RUN2 9
S'S2 3

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
28. Procedure for replacing the AC servo driver (E1A)

Perform the parameter setting and necessary adjustments as follows after replacing the AC servo
driver.
1. Parameter setting for the driver

Turn ON the power to the machine and enter the service maintenance mode without
performing initialization.
Access the [Input parameter] screen. → Access the [Drum parameter] screen. →
Execute [Initialize].
Turning OFF the power to the machine during the parameter setting may dam-
age the driver, so do not turn OFF the power during the [Initialize] operation.
Since some parameters become active after the machine power is restored,
always turn OFF the power to the machine and turn it ON again after the
parameter setting is finished.
2. Speed command offset adjustment

Turn ON the power to the machine and enter the service maintenance mode without
performing initialization.
Access the [Input parameter] screen. → Access the [Drum parameter] screen. → Ex-
ecute [Adjust Offset].
3. Gain adjustment for the PIO board (SVC circuit)

Access the service maintenance mode. → Access the [Drum test] screen. → Execute
[Zero return].
Access the [Input parameter] screen. → Access the [Drum parameter] screen. → Ex-
ecute [Adjust Gain].
Adjust the “VR1” trimmer resistor on the PIO board until the buzzer sounds.
Press [Cancel] on the screen to complete the operation.
* Target value is 1A0 - / + 1

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
29. Procedure for replacing and setting the inverter (U8) for the suc-
tion blower
Perform the following setting after replacing the inverter for the suction blower.
Make sure to complete the setting described below.
1. Turn OFF the power to the machine and disconnect the “XBU1” connector in the blower
unit.
2. Turn ON the power to the machine and change the “C13” parameter.
“00”: a contact (normal open) [NO]
↓
“00”: a contact (normal close) [NC]
3. Turn OFF the power to the machine and re-connect the “XBU1” connector.
4. Turn ON the power to the machine and change the “A01” (Frequency destination setting)
parameter.
“01” → “00”
5. Change the “A04” (Maximum frequency setting) parameter.
“50”Hz → “60”Hz
6. Change the “A03” (Base frequency setting) parameter.

“50”Hz → “60”Hz
7. Change the “B12” (Level of electronic thermal setting) parameter.
“2.60” 2.6A → “3.10” 3.1A
8. Change the “B21” (Selection of overload restriction operation mode) parameter.
“01” : “ON” during acceleration and deceleration only
↓
“00”:Normally “OFF”
9. Change the “95” (No-load current) parameter.
“3a” 58% → “23” 35%
Follow the procedure below to change the “C95” parameter as simply selecting it cannot
change it.
• First, change the “C91” parameter from “00” to “01”.
• Change the “C94” parameter from “0000” to “fb0a”.
• Then, change the “C95” parameter from “3a” to “23”.
• Reset the “C91” parameter from “01” to “00”.
10. Change the “C03” (Function of terminal 3 setting) parameter.
“02” CF1 (multispeed 1) → “12”EXT (external trip)
11. After setting all the parameters, remove the duct cover.
12. On the inverter operation panel, set the volume to MAX (maximum value in the clockwise
direction).

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
When you check the input data after completing the setting, be aware of the following
points.
• When confirming the data that was input in step 9), the data will be initialized when you
exit the mode for changing the data and this disables the operation. Therefore, be sure
to input the data again.
• When confirming data other than that input in step 9), the data will not be initialized
when you exit the mode for changing the data.
The procedures for changing the data are shown below. The following procedures show b84 data
as an example in which the current value is changed from 00 to 01. The descriptions in appear in
the inverter display.
0.0
Func.
d01
(2)
c--
(2)
b--
Func.
b01
(1)
b21
Func.
The current value is displayed here. Change the data.
01
(1) Increase the value by pressing the key and decrease the
00 value by pressing the key.
STR Press the [STR] store key to store the setting data.
b21
Func. Press the [Func.] function key to recheck the setting data that
00 has been changed.
Func.
b--
(1)
c--
(1)
d01
Func.
0.0
Be sure to return to this status after changing the panel dis-
play on the inverter.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

Error displays for the inverter
If troubles occur with the inverter, the errors shown below appear on the panel and the inverter
output is cut off. “Motor” in the following table implies a blower.
Error
Trip Contents
display
Over-current During constant speed, excessive current was applied to the inverter. This
E 01 protection during was caused by a short circuit of the inverter output, a locking of the motor
constant speed or another reason. The protection circuit went into operation and the
inverter output was cut off.
Over-current During deceleration, over current protection went into operation and the
E 02 protection during inverter output was cut off.
deceleration
Over-current During acceleration, over current protection went into operation and the
E 03 protection during inverter output was cut off.
acceleration
Over-current Due to a cause other than those indicated by E01 to E03, over current
E 04 protection due to protection went into operation and the inverter output was cut off.
another cause
Overload The motor became overloaded due to the detection of the inverter output
E 05 protection current, the inverter?s built-in electronic thermal function detected the
situation, and the inverter output was cut off.
Over-voltage The voltage of the converter section exceeded a certain level because
protection excessive regenerative energy or excessive input voltage was supplied
E 07
from the motor, or the load lessened rapidly during the operation of the
overload control, and the inverter output was cut off.
EEPROM error An error has occurred with the built-in memory of the inverter. This was
E 08 caused by outside noise, abnormal temperature or another cause, and the
inverter output was cut off.
Under-voltage The inverter voltage lowered below the 150V to 160V range, and the
E 09
protection inverter output was cut off.
CPU error The built-in CPU operated improperly, an error occurred, and the inverter
E 11
output was cut off.
External trip The motor thermal function detected an error and the inverter output was
E 12
cut off.
USP error The power supply was turned ON while the inverter was being run, and
E 13
the inverter output was cut off.
Ground fault A ground fault was detected between the inverter output and the motor
E 14
protection when turning ON the power supply, and the inverter output was cut off.
nput over-voltage 100 seconds after the power supply was turned ON, an input voltage
E 15
higher than the specified value was detected, and the inverter was cut off.
Temperature trip The temperature of the inverter module is higher than the specified value
E 21
and the inverter output has been cut off.
CPU error The built-in CPU operated improperly, an error occurred, and the inverter
E 22
output was cut off.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
30.Replacement of the electrical boards and the operation panel
* Refer to Chapter E Maintenance software and RMLight6 for how to use maintenance software.
30-1.Replacement procedure of the RCP3(E) board

30-1-1.The cautions when exchanging
1.About RCP3(E) board
1) The RCP3(E) board is compatible among the PT-R4300E/S in regard to hardware. However, according
to the model of the machine, to which the board is to be attached, the following settings are required.
+ Setting of PRODUCT ID
The default of the PRODUCT ID for the RCP3(E) board to be provided is PT-R8xxx.
When the PRODUCT ID does not match to the model of the machine, download the PRODUCT ID
data for the applicable model from the terminal using the RM Light 6.
PRODUCT ID of each machines are as follows.
• PT-R4300E/S : ProductID_4xxx.dat
+ Downloading of the firmware for the model of the machine, to which the board is to be attached.
The PT-R8300E/S 8600E/S-R/Z common firmware is downloaded to the RCP3(E) board to be
provided.
+ Downloading of the FPGA for the model of the machine, to which the board is to be attached.
The common FPGA data for all RCP3(E) machine is downloaded to the RCP3(E) board to be
provided.
* When the PRODUCT ID or firmware of the NVRAM on the new board does not match to the
machine, and initializing the machine in this condition, the data of the flash memories is to be
overwritten with the default value of that PRODUCT ID’s machine.
2.The cautions when exchanging

1) When possible, up load the data before PCB exchange is recommended.
2) When the firmware of which machine is already installed in the RCP3(E) and the installed firmware
does not match to the model of the machine, DSW2 bit8 of the RCP3(E) should be set to ‘ON’ for
installing firmware.
Moreover, information on the BOOT area is preserved in NV-RAM. Therefore, please download the
firmware to both areas.
When the installed firmware match to the model of the machine, both ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ are acceptable as
DSW2 bit8 of the RCP3(E).
3) Make sure to attach the removed flash memories on the new board at the same locations where they
were attached on the old board. If the flash memories are attached to inappropriate locations, the
contents of the flash memories are to be overwritten with the default value.
The contents of the flash memories are the user data and the machine's specific data (the data other than
that which was saved in the NVRAM). However, the data related to the recording head is not included.
4) When bit1 and bit2 of DSW2 on the RCP3(E) board is turned ON, the programs cannot be downloaded
correctly.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

3.About ‘NVRAM backup’ and ‘NVRAM restore’ menu
1) When executing ‘NVRAM backup’ or ‘NVRAM restore’, DSW2 bit2 of RCP3(E) should be set to
‘ON’. However, when setting DSW2 bit2 of RCP3(E) to ‘ON’, the machine must be in the state of
turning ON, after that executing ‘NVRAM backup’ or ‘NVRAM restore’.
2) The data that can be backed up from the NVRAM, using the above command, are consumable timers
and error logs.
The NVRAM contains the data shown below in addition to the above data. However, the following
data cannot be backed up to the flash memories using NVRAM backup
+ PRODUCT ID
+ MAC address
The MAC address cannot be changed, but the PRODUCT ID can be changed from the termi-
nal using the RM Light 6.
30-1-2.Replacement procedure
1) Choose an Information/Version screen. Confirm a present version.
2) Select Service / Special Action / NVRAM backup to back up the data stored in the NVRAM on the
RCP3(E) board to the flash memory of the RCP3(E) board.
3) Turn ON bit2 of DSW2 on the RCP3(E) board.
4) When OK button is pushed, taking shelter to the flash memory of the data on NVRAM is carried out.
5) Be sure to return the bit 2 of DipSW2 of the RCP3(E) circuit board to off after a backup is completed.
6) Remove the RCP3(E) board from the machine and attach the new RCP3(E) board to the machine.
* Do not replace the flash memories at this time.

7) Turn ON bit8 of DSW2 on the RCP3(E) board.
8) Turn ON the power to the machine. The following screen is displayed on the panel.
Check PRODUCT ID
PRODUCT ID
PT-R4300E/S : PT-R4xxx
Download mode.
Please download control program.

ProductID in NVRAM is "PT-R8xxx".
The DHCP server is started.

Don't connect the engine with user's
LAN.
9) When the PRODUCT ID does not match to the model of the machine, download the PRODUCT ID
data for the applicable model from the terminal using the RM Light 6.
• PT-R4300E/S : ProductID_4xxx.dat
About the PRODUCT ID data download procedure, refer to chapter E : Procedure for downloading the
PRODUCT ID data’.
10)After turning OFF the power to the machine, keep turn ON bit8 of DSW2 on the RCP3(E) board and
then turn ON the power to the machine.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

11) Using the RM Light 6, download the following programs.
+ Firmware
Latest firmware version for each machine (jun. 23th. 2006 present)
• Common for PT-R4300E/S : Version 1.01 Firm4KR_V101.dat
About the firmware procedure, refer to chapter E: ‘Procedure for downloading the firmware’.
12) Once, turn off the power supply of this machine and turn OFF bit8 of DSW2 on the RCP3(E) board.
Then turn on the power supply of this machine again. then download the firmware again.
13) After turning OFF the power to the machine and then turn ON the power to the machine. Either
following screens are displayed.
0101
Could not initialize due to error (Ex880).

P T- R 4 3 0 0 S
Product-key data is not matched.
Please call a serviceman.

Please press [START]
START V1.00
If backup of Data of NVRAM was succeeded according to procedure (2), go to procedure (14).
If backup of Data of NVRAM was not succeeded according to procedure (2), select the brand and
name to machine. (Refer to the following purocedure.)
• Bypass the initialization, then enter the [Select brand] screen.
• Service / Input parameter / Initialize data / Select brand
3000
• Enter the password [7270].
CLR
7 8 9
Pass Word
4 5 6
0
1 2 3
0 ·
ESC OK ENT
• Select the machine name.

PT-R 4300S
PT-R 4300E
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

• Select the [Yes] (Initialize all data.).
Initialize all data ?

YES NO
ESC OK
• Confirm the setup, then press [START]

Brand code : SCREEN
Product key : PT-R4300S
Initialize? : YES
ESC START CANCEL

• Re-boot the machine after process is finished.
14) Using the RM Light 6, download the following programs.

+ FPGA data
Latest FPGA version for each machine (Feb. 23th. 2006 present)
• Common Version 0.22 FPGA_V022.dat
About the firmware procedure, refer to chapter E: ‘Procedure for downloading the firmware’.
15) After turning OFF the power to the machine, turn ON the power to the machine and start up the
machine without performing initialization. After initialization has been completed, check the version
of the downloaded programs in the information screen. Refer to chapter E: ‘Procedure for download-
ing the firmware’.
16) Turn OFF the power to the machine and remove the flash memories from locations U6 and U14 of the
RCP3(E) board, and then attach the removed parts to the new RCP3(E) board.
* Make sure to attach the removed flash memories on the new board at the same locations
where they were attached on the old board. If the flash memories are attached to inappropri-
ate locations, the contents of the flash memories are to be overwritten with the default value.
17) Turn ON the machine. And select the following menu.

• Service / Special Action / NVRAM restore
18) Turn ON bit2 of DSW2 on the RCP3(E) board .
19)Press "OK". Then restore the NVRAM data that was backed up to the flash memories to the NVRAM
of the new RCP3(E) board.
20) Be sure to turn OFF bit2 of DSW2 on the RCP3(E) board.
21)Once turn off the power, then disconnect the X172 on the RCP3(E). And turn on the power again.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
C.Replacement & Adjustment V10

22)Adjust gain of TH1 (Environment temperature sensor).
• The voltage between TP43 (SPAN) and TP40 (15VE) is adjusted to -0.50V -/+ 0.02V by VR1.
23)Adjust offset of TH1 (Environment temperature sensor).
• The voltage between TP44 (OFFSET) and TP40 (15VE) is adjusted to 1.70V -/+ 0.02V by VR2.
24) Turn OFF the power to the machine and connect X172 on RCP3(E)
25) Turn ON the power to the machine and initialize the machine. And check operation of the machine.
30-2.Replacement procedure of the PIO-PTR4XE board

• The FPGA ROM which is common for PT-R4300E/S on the location B13 is attached to the PIO-
PTR4XE board to be provided.
• PT-RN4300E/S common FPGA : 100097517Vxx
1) Remove the PIO-PTR4XE board.
2) Remove the FPGA ROM from the location B13 of the PIO-PTR4XE board and then attach it to the
new PIO-PTR4XE board.
3) Attach the PIO-PTR4XE board to the machine.
* After tuning ON the power to the machine, do not perform initialization.

4) Execute the following command and adjust the offset value of the primary-scanning motor pack.
• Service/Input parameter/Drum parameter/Adjust Offset
5) Execute the following command and adjust the gain value of the primary-scanning motor pack.
• Service/Input parameter/Drum parameter/Adjust Gain
30-3.Replacement procedure of the CON86-XE board

1) Remove the CON-PTR4XE board.
2) Set JP3 to the following setting.
• JP3 1-2 Short
3) Attach the CON-PTR4XE board to the machine.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V10 C.Replacement & Adjustment

30-4.Replacement procedure of the operation panel
i) Panel data is completely compatible among the PT-R4300E/S.
ii) When replacing the operation panel of the PT-R4300E/Suse the following type of panel.
• S100093560V00 Panel unit (RC) PT-R8300 GP2301L
The operation panel data for the PT-R4300E/S is installed in the above operation panel
before shipment of the panel.
iii) The latest update data for the panel have all difference data from the released version data.
1) Select “Information/Version” screen. Check the firmware version and the panel data version, if pos-
sible to check the versioon.
2) Replace the operation panel.
3) Turn ON the power to the machine.
* Do not perform initialization.
4) Install the panel data of target version by RMLight6.

Apr. 27th. 2006 present
• Latest differ panel data for each machine PanelDif_a200_a202.dat
• Latest all panel data for each machine Panel_a202.dat
Note: Release version is A2.00.
5) Confirm the operation panel system setting. (Refer to the Chap.E: Panel system.)
6) After downloading has been completed, check the version of the downloaded panel data in the infor-
mation screen.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
30-5.Replacement procedure of the CPU board for RH.

30-5-1.Head-CPU3E board (CAN type LD head : PTR4300E/S)
30-5-1-1.The cautions when exchanging
1.About Head-CPU3E board
1) The Head-CPU3E board is compatible among the 16ch and 32ch recording head in regard to hardware.
If different firmware of LD ch number was downloaded Head-CPU3E board which is to be attached,
applicable firmware of LD ch number is required to download to Head-CPU3E board.
2) FPGA data is common to 16ch / 32ch recording Head.
3) New board is required to input the unique data itselfe.
* When the firmware of LD ch number on the new board does not match to the recording head,
and initializing the machine in this condition, the data of the flash memories is to be overwrit-
ten with the default value.
2.The cautions when exchanging
1) When possible, up load the data before PCB exchange is recommended.
30-5-1-2. Replacement procedure

1) Choose an Information/Version screen. Confirm a present version.
2) Remove the Head-CPU3E board from the machine and attach the new Head-CPU3E board to the
machine.
* Do not replace the flash memories (U2) at this time.

3) Turn ON the power to the machine.
* Do not perform initialization.
4) Check the version of the firmware and the FPGA for the new Head-CPU3E board in the information
screen. Check that the version matches to that of the software for other sections of the machine. If
necessary, download the firmware and the FPGA data using RM Light 6.
Refer to chapter E: ‘Procedure for downloading the recording head firmware’.
* The time of download of Head CPU and FPGA data, please do not turn off the power until the
display [Down load complete] appears in the operation panel. Because once these data transfer
in RCP3(E) board, and then it is transmitted to a Head-CPU3E board.
• Latest firmware version for Head CPU (Feb. 23th. 2006 present)
• PT-R4300E (16ch) : Version 3.13 HeadFirm_313_16.dat
• PT-R4300E (32ch) : Version 3.13 HeadFirm_313_32.dat
• Latest FPGA version for Head CPU (Feb. 23th. 2006 present)
• PT-R4300E/S common: Version EP1K30V4 HeadFPGA_EP1K30V4.dat

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

5) After turning OFF the power to the machine, turn ON the power to the machine and start up the
machine without performing initialization. After initialization has been completed, check the version
of the downloaded programs in the information screen. Refer to chapter E: ‘Procedure for download-
ing the firmware’.
6) Turn OFF the power to the machine and remove the flash memories from locations U2 of the Head-
CPU3E board, and then attach the removed parts to the new Head-CPU3E board.
7) Input the unique data itself which data sheet is attached to new board.
• Service/Recording Head/RH parameter/Board constant setting
3970
CPU Board Temperature Sensor
Temparature sensor
CLR
Tm1 Tm2
Tm1 Tm2
7 8 9 50C
50C 19.4 30.0
100C 30.2 59.5
4 5 6 100C
Dew condensation sensor
R1 10 R2 101 1 2 3
Calibration sensor
Calibration Sensor
Cal1 488 Cal2 3965 0 . - Cal1
ESC NEXT ENT
Cal2
Dewcondensation Sensor
R1
R2
8) Turn OFF and turn ON the power to the machine and initialize the machine. And check operation of
the machine.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
30-6.Replacement procedure of the DRV board for RH.

30-6-1.Head-DRV3E board (CAN type LD head : PTR4300E/S)
30-6-1-1. The cautions when exchanging
1) Each HEAD DRV board have unique data. Therefore, make sure to input these data after replacement.
2) Each HEAD DRV board (2 pieces on E model, 4 pieces on S model) are common. However, they have
unique data as shown in the above-mentioned.
3) All HEAD DRV board connector are disconnected during replacement the HEAD DRV board. In case of
this time, all LD are not granding on the Head. Therefore, make sure to attach the jumper connector to
connection board to anti-static.
30-6-1-2.Replacement procedure
1) Connect the jumper connector to X849 on the RH conection board.
* This connector maintains identical electric potentials between all the pins on the LD block. De-
taching cables from the LD block without first attaching this connector to the RH connection
board could cause electro-static damage to the LD.
Jumper connector A/S 32ch_Head: 86401386-00
2) Open the covers to Head driver box, then disconnect all connectors to the HEAD DRV board.
3) Replace the target board.
4) Connect cables to original and close the covers. Finally, take off the jumper connector to X849 on the
RH conection board.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V10
V02->V05 C.Replacement & Adjustment
5) Turn ON the power, then enter the OFF-Line screen bypassing initialize.
6) Select bilow menues.
• Service Maintenance/Recording head/RH Parameter/Baord constant setting
4th display to 7th display.
3972 3973 Driver Board 2

Driver Board 1
CLR CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA] Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.26 235 949 ch.28 248 969
7 8 9 7 8 9
ch.19 267 966 ch.21 264 986
ch.12 265 993 ch.14 235 955
ch. 5 4 5 6 ch. 7 246 970
4 5 6
242 969
ch. 6 251 982 ch. 0 258 972
ch.13 261 994 1 2 3 ch.15 251 971 1 2 3
ch.20 242 966 ch.22 238 971
ch.27 251 970 0 . - ch.29 256 973 0 . -
ESC OK ENT ESC OK ENT
Parameter for HEAD DRV-1 Parameter for HEAD DRV-2
3974 Driver Board 3 3975 Driver Board 4

CLR CLR
ch. 8 243 960 ch.24 254 968
7 8 9 7 8 9
ch. 1 239 957 ch.17 249 971
ch.30 251 974 ch.10 243 966
ch.23 263 988
4 5 6 ch. 3 254 967
4 5 6
ch.16 237 958 ch. 4 258 978
ch. 9 262 979 1 2 3 ch.11 257 958 1 2 3
ch. 2 254 977 ch.18 249 975
ch.31 272 1001 0 . - ch.25 258 968 0 . -
ESC OK ENT ESC SAVE ENT
7) Then, input unique data of replaced board. Each board data are attached to each board.
Parameter Input position Parameter Input position
0 LB1 -> lm1 of line no.1 0 LB2 -> lm2 of line no.1

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
30-7.Replacing the other boards on the recording head

For the boards listed below, special settings are not required. Therefore, just replace them.
• LRB32E (PTR4300E/S)
• HEAD MB2E-16/32 (PTR4300E/S)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
31.Procedure of additional the washer to the transport belt roller shaft.

According to a mechanical assembly tolerance, the bearing of the roller that is supporting
the transport belt may out of place from a bearing hole.
Then, a washer is added between a belt roller shaft and a bearing.
If a roller bearing out of place from a bearing hole, it will become the cause of registration
problem. When a registration problem occurs, please check this part collectively as well.
<Require parts.>
* 620511: POLY SLIDER t=0.5mm 1 piece.
<For the spare, just in case.>
* 100103445V00: RETAINING RING E-TYPE Nominalsize 6
<Applied serial. (A plan)>
* PT-R4300S: 325 -
* PT-R4300E: 10280, 10284 -.
1.Confirm the roller shaft position on the support bracket.
Home side
Bearing is inserted on the support bracket. Bearing is shifted on the suppor t

bracket.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

Away side Bearing is shifted on the support bracket.
Bearing is inserted on the support bracket. Bearing position is shifted onto tensioner.
2.Procedure.
(1) Move the cam plate of nip roller to the belt maintenance position.
• Service / Special action / Belt maintenance
(2) Turn off the power. Then remove apron guide and green roller.
(3) Remove the discharge nip roller.
* Make sure to keep the coil springs and them position.
(4) Remove the discharge nip roller guide.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(5) Remove the discharge guide plate. At this moment, take care to the cable connector that is located
on right side of under side.
Once, move it to the inner side,

then up it to forward. Take care to the cable connector.
(6) Once, loosen the away side belt tension. (Pull up the away side tension bracket to upper.)
(7) Remove the bearing support bracket for home side.
The bearing support bracket for home side.
Remove the two fixing screws for the support plate. Then rotate it to upper side like the picture.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(8) Remove the snap ring. Then confirm the number of washers.
Machine has 2 kind of case. (Case A or B). So, modify to the case C from A or B.
* Require the 1 piece of washer of t = 0.5mm at case A.

620511: POLY SLIDER t=0.5mm 1 piece.
The snap ring
Case A: t=0.25mm Case B: t=0.25 mm t=0.5 mm
Case C: t=0.5 mm + 0.25 mm

(9) Attach the snap ring.
(10) Attach the support plate. At this moment, confirm the away side bearing position on the punch side
belt roller shaft that is inserted to a support bracket.
The fixing screws
Positioning pins.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(11) Attach the bearing support bracket for home side. At this moment, confirm the away side bearing
position on the belt roller shaft that is inserted to a support bracket.
(12) Loosen the fixed screw of transport guide. Then fix that guide at the highest position.
Transport guide
Fixed screws

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(13) Confirm the each belt position on the roller. Then tighten the belt tension.
The tension bracket
The bearing bracket
(14) Return the all parts back to the original.

(15) Finally, confirm the plate transport condition (strike adjustment). Refer to the service manual.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
32.Recording head unit (PT-R4300E/S)

32-1.Procedure for replacing and adjusting the 32ch LD block (PT-R4300E/S)
32-1-1.Preparation
Jigs, tools
• Jumper connector A/S 32ch_Head: 86401386-00
• Allen wernch (1.5) GX-15: 70585359-00
• The chip replacement jig A/S(RC) 32CH HEAD: U1154037-00
• Wrist band: Commercial item
The chip replacement jig A/S(RC) 32CH HEAD
Allen wernch (1.5) GX-15
Jumper connector A/S 32ch_Head
* Wear the wrist band and connect the wrist band to the ground point during LD replacement.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-1-2.Attention for the LD replacement. (PT-R4300E/S)
(1) About electro-static.
The laser diode is very sensitive to static electricity. There is a possibility that longevity shortens very
much when suffering.
* Wear the wrist band and connect the wrist band to the ground point during LD replacement.
(2) About LD block.

Do not tuch the screw directed the following halftone screen when you replace the LD block.
Set the chip replacement jig on the LD block, then put on the allen wernch in this hole. And then
loosens this screw.
Do not tuch!!
Socket
Pin of the LD.
Not useed this hole.
And, LD has two pins, but socket has three holes. One of the hole is not used.
New LD block has short pin which is anti-static electricity. (Refer to the replacement procedure.) Wear
the wrist band then remove that pin for the safty.
(3) About LD unique data
Each LD have unique data which is rated current (Iopd) of the LD. After replace the LD, Iopd data is
needed to input.
(4) About the processing of the connection board when LD replacement.

When LD is replaced, jumper connector should be putted on the connection board on the RH. When
LD is replaced, LD driver box is moved. At that time LD driver cables are unpluged. They are con-
nected to each LD. Each LD are not grounding when unplug the cables. In that case, there is a possibil-
ity that longevity shortens very much when suffering the electro-static.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-1-3.Replacement procedure (PT-R4300E/S)
(1) Turn on the power and initialize machine.
(2) Move the RH to the AWAY side 300mm.
• Recording head test / RH positioning [300mm]
(3) Turn off the power to the machine.
* Performing the procedures escribed below while the power is ON could severely injure your
eyes. Therefore, ALWAYS be sure to turn OFF the power.
(4) Connect the jumper connector to the RH conection board.
(5) Remove the gas suction hose from the main unit after releasing the clamps.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(6) Remove the 2 screws securing the connection board, and then lift the board to the right.
(7) Remove the head cover. This cover is fixed by 7 screws.
4 screws at front.
1 screw on left side on top. 2 screws on right side on top.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(8) Detach the head cover. (Through out to front side.)
(9) Move the white acrylic part on the chip replacement jig to the arrow side which is drawing right side.
(10) Attach the chip replacement jig to the LD block like a right side drawing. Then move the white acrylic
part on the chip replacement jig to the arrow side which is drawing right side.
(11) Put on the allen wernch in the hole of the chip replacement jig. And then take off the fixing screw on the
LD block.
* Whenever you remove an LD chip, be sure to

use the Allen wrench provided with the chip
replace ment jig. Using a conventional Allen
wernch could damage the screw head.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(12) Put the short bar on the replaced LD block. That shrot bar is include the new LD block unit.
Short bar
(13) Attach the chip replacement jig to the new LD chip, and then mount it on the LD base. In this time,
cleanup the LD base and LD block by air.
* At this time, be sure to comfirm that there is no dust between the contact surfaces of the new LD
chip and the LD base. Any gaps between these contact surfaces may amplify small initial devia-
tions in the resulting light path up to 200 times. If there is any dust between the contact surfaces
when the LD chip is mounted on its base, it could cause a calibration error or require higher
current. New LD block has the short-circuit sheet jig on the pins. Do not remove the short-circuit
sheet jig before securing the LD chip with a screw. Failure to heed this instruction could damage
the LD chip with static electricity.
Short sheet
(14) After finish to attach the LD block, then pull out that sheet from the chip.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(15) Since the following components the recording head can be easily contaminated, be sure to clean them
completely.
• Stereographic projection lens
• No.1 Lens
• Reflective mirror
• Zoom lens collar
* For cleaning, use a mixed solution of alcohol and ethanol at a ratio of 1:2.
For cleaning the lens surface, use a lens cleaning paper, not a cotton swab. Using a cotton swab
could mar the lens surface.
Stereographic projection lens
No.1 Lens
Reflective mirror
Zoom lens collar
(16) Secure all the cables and plates as they were previously.
(17) After finish the befor procedure, remove the LD short-circuit connector jig from the connection board.
Forgetting to remove the jig above will damage the LD block and/or boards (connection board and
head drive boards).
(18) Turn ON the power to initialize.
(19) Input the Iopd value which is written on the new LD block data sheet. Then clear the [Laser runningtime].
• Recording head / RH parameter / LD exchange
4000 4001
LD change CLR
LD No. (0-31)
7 8 9
07 Laser running time clear?
Iopd(mA) xxxx 4 5 6
YES NO
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC SAVE ENT ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(20) Perform the [Laser caribration] to necessary resolution for only the replaced laser diode chan-
nel.
• Recording head / RH test / Laser caribration / Select dpi / [Select ch]
3581
CLR
7 8 9
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL)
4 5 6
07
1 2 3
Input the number of new LD block.
0 · —
ESC START ENT
(21) Confirm the IopI value.

• Recording head / RH parameter / Reference laser power / Select dpi
3933
IopI IopMAX Iopd
CLR
ch.0 540 629 729
ch.1 540 629 729 7 8 9
ch.2 540 629 729
ch.3 540 629 729 4 5 6
ch.4 540 629 729
ch.5 540 629 729 1 2 3
ch.6 540 629 729
ch.7 540 629 729 0 . -
ESC OK ENT
(22) Perform the [Laser caribration] to necessary resolution for only the all laser diode channel.
• Recording head / RH test / Laser caribration / Select dpi / [32: ALL]
* Make sure to perform the [Laser caribration] all ch. If machine exposed by half ch mode, machine
does not return to all ch exposure mode by shingle ch laser caribration.
And error is occurred if expose by un-caribrated resolution.
3581 Caribration time is 1 to 2 minute.
CLR
7 8 9
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL)
4 5 6
32
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC START ENT
(23) Check if there is any problem with the exposed results.

• Focus adjustment
• Zoom adjustment
• Exposure power adjustment

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-2.Recording head replacement procedure (PT-R4300E/S)
32-2-1.Preparation
Jigs, tools
• Jumper connector A/S 32ch_Head 86401386-00
• The handle A/S(RC) 32ch_Head U1154038-00
• Gap gauge (10 micron) Commercial item
• Wrist band Commercial item
The handle A/S(RC) 32ch_Head

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-2-2.Replacement procedure (PT-R4300E/S)
(1) Turn on the power and initialize machine.
(2) Move the RH to the AWAY side 300mm.
• Recording head test / RH positioning [300mm]
(3) Turn off the power to the machine.
* Performing the procedures escribed below while the power is ON could severely injure your
eyes. Therefore, ALWAYS be sure to turn OFF the power.
(4) Connect the jumper connector to the RH conection board.
(5) Remove the gas suction hose from the main unit after releasing the clamps.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(6) Remove all the cables connected to the power terminals for the Peltier cooler.
32ch head 16ch head
(7) Remove the connectors from the RH connection board.

X846: Temperature sensor
X840 X840
X844
X843 X843
X842
X841 X841
16ch head 32ch head
(8) Remove the connectors on Head CPU3(E) and Head mother board.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(9) Remove the screws witch are fixed metal stay for LD Driver box. Then deposit LD Driver box.
LD Driver box
This side is mounted Metal stay Screw
(10) Remove the 2 screws securing the connection board, and then lift the board to the right.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(11) Remove the head cover. This cover is fixed by 7 screws.
4 screws at front.
1 screw on left side on top. 2 screws on right side on top.
(12) Detach the head cover. (Through out to front side.)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(13) Unfasten the screws on the flexible cable holder plate located on the side cover(R), and then slide the
side cover towards.
(14) Detach the side cover (R). There are two screws at the bottom of the side cover and two screws in the
upper section at the back of the cover.
* Detach the side cover(R) by lifting it slightly upward. At this time, be careful not to damage the
flexible cable.
(15) Remove the following connectors for sensors and motors on the right rear of the RH unit.
Sensor connectors:
X863, X864, X865, X871, X872
Motor connectors:
X862, X870
The figure shows the number of connectors to be

remove for each sensor and motor in the RH unit.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(16) Detach the air piping (from the compressor) by the side of the lens guard.
(17) Remove the 5 screws ((1) to (5) on the left) securing the RH unit to the RH base.
Since the screw(5) cannot be removed due to its location, be sure to simply unfasten it as far as pos-
sible, but not remove it.
* When you unfasten screw(5), be sure to never use a ball-type Allen wrench. Failure to heed this
instruction could defeat any RH adjustments if the wrench accidentally hits a sensor bracket.
RH base
RH
(18) Secure the RH connection board to the mounting holes (B,C) in the RH unit.
The mounting holes (B,C)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(19) Attach the handles to the RH unit.
(20) Loosen the fixing screws of head front cover, then shift it to the drum side.
Head front cover
(21) Use these handles to lift the RH unit slightly upward (approximately 3 to 4cm), and then pull the
unit toward and remove it.
* At this time, be sure that screw(5) (described in step 5

before) is completely unfastened. If it is not, the RH
unit cannot be pulled toward or removed. Since the
RH unit weighs approximately 10kg, be careful not to
injure yourself when handling it.
(22) Detach the lens guard from the already removed RH unit, and then mount it on the new RH unit.
* Be sure to position the lens guard where the objective lens will face the center of the lens guard•fs
aperture.
Lens guard
Objective lens
Allen wrench 2.5mm
(23) Clean the bottom surface of the new RH unit and the surface of the RH base, and then mount this unit
on the RH base.
* Before mounting the RH unit on the RH base,

be sure to secure fixing screw(5) in its specified
RH base location beside the zoom unit.
RH

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(24) While contacting and aligning the RH unit with the parallel positioning pins above, secure the unit to
the RH base using the 5 fixing screws ((1) to (5)).
* Note that pin C is a horizontal refer ence for aligning the RH unit, while pins A and B are used for
vertical reference. Whenever you fasten screw(5) with a wrench, be sure not to hit or deflect any
sensor brackets. Never use a ball-type Allen wrench for this work. Confirm that there is no gap
between the parallel positioning pins and the RH unit base contact reference surface.
(25) Remove the RH connection board from the right side of head unit, then attach it to the RH base tempo-
rary.
Screw (fixed temporary)
(26) Detach the handles from the RH unit, and then attach the piping for gas suction.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(27) Re-attach side covers (R).
* At this time, press the front cover against the RH unit lens guard (by pulling the bottom of the front
cover toward) so that the front cover matches both side cover (L) and (R). Use the flexible cable
holder on side cover(R) to fix the flexible cable securely.
(28) Connect the connectors inside the RH unit.
Sensor connectors:
X863, X864, X865, X871, X872
Motor connectors:
X862, X870
The figure shows the number of connectors to be

remove for each sensor and motor in the RH unit.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(29) Attach the head cover.
4 screws at front.
1 screw on left
side on top.
2 screws on right
side on top.
(30) Connect the power cable to the Peltier unit, and then carefully tip the connection board and fix it to the
lower cover.
32ch head 16ch head

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(31) Return the LD drive box to its original position, and then secure it.
LD Driver box
(32) Connect the connectors on Head CPU3(E) and Head mother board.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(33) Connect the gas suction hose from the main unit after releasing the clamps.
(34) Connect the connectors from the RH connection board.
X846: Temperature sensor
X840 X840
X844
X843 X843
X842
X841 X841
16ch head 32ch head
(35) Remove the LD short-circuit connector jig from the connection board.
* Forgetting to remove the jig above will damage the LD block and/or boards (connection board
and head drive boards).

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(36) Reattach all the plates to their original positions, and then turn ON the power to initialize.
(37) Input all the LD block Iopd value which is written on the new head data sheet. (totaly 32ch) Then clear
the [Laser runningtime].
• Recording head / RH parameter / LD exchange
4000
LD change CLR
LD No. (0-31)
7 8 9
07
Iopd(mA) xxxx 4 5 6
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC SAVE ENT
SAVE
4001
Laser running time clear?
YES NO
ESC OK
YES
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(38) Adjust the position of the calibration sensor board.
• Recording head / RH test / Calibration position [SEARCH]
3600
SEARCH CLR
7 8 9
Caribration position
4 5 6
-0.6 1.0 [mm]
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC SAVE ENT
Current value SEARCH result
(39) Perform the [Laser caribration] to necessary resolution for the all laser diode channel.
3581
CLR Make sure to perform the [Laser caribration] all ch.
7 8 9 Caribration time is 1 to 2 minute.
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL)
4 5 6
32
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC START ENT
(40) Confirm the IopI value of each ch.

3933 3934
IopI IopMAX Iopd IopI IopMAX Iopd
CLR CLR
ch.0 540 629 729 ch.8 540 629 729
ch.1 540 629 729 7 8 9 ch.9 540 629 729 7 8 9
ch.2 540 629 729 ch.10 540 629 729
ch.3 540 629 729 4 5 6 ch.11 540 629 729 4 5 6
ch.4 540 629 729 ch.12 540 629 729
ch.5 540 629 729 1 2 3 ch.13 540 629 729 1 2 3
ch.6 540 629 729 ch.14 540 629 729
ch.7 540 629 729 0 . - ch.15 540 629 729 0 . -
3935 3936
CLR CLR
ch.16 540 629 729 ch.24 540 629 729
ch.17 540 629 729 7 8 9 ch.25 540 629 729 7 8 9
ch.18 540 629 729 ch.26 540 629 729
ch.19 540 629 729 4 5 6 ch.27 540 629 729 4 5 6
ch.20 540 629 729 ch.28 540 629 729
ch.21 540 629 729 1 2 3 ch.29 540 629 729 1 2 3
ch.22 540 629 729 ch.30 540 629 729
ch.23 540 629 729 0 . - ch.31 540 629 729 0 . -

• Zoom adjustment

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-3.Replace the peltier unit (PT-R4300E/S)
32-3-1.Attention for the peltier unit replacement (PT-R4300E/S)
(1) Unit of replacement the peltier unit
Unit of replacement the peltier unit is assembled like below which does not have temperature sensor of
cooling fin.
Temperature sensor
(2) Attention for the peltier unit attachment procedure.

At the time of attaching the peltier unit, if the peltier have a gap with LD block base, peltier cannot cool
the LD. In case of this, LD take the damage for the life time. Therefore, make sure to attach no bap
between the peltier and LD block base.
32-3-2.Replacement procedure for the peltier unit (PT-R4300E/S)

(1) Remove the head top cover. (Refer to the [procedure (1) to (8) of 32-1-3. Replacement procedure for LD
block (PT-R4300E/S)
(2) Remove the cables from the driver board and mother board to the terminal on the top of peltier unit.
16ch 32ch
+24V (to X802)

M24 (to X802)
S12V (to X831-1)
M12 (to X831-1)
S12V (to X831-2)
M12 (to X831-2)
S12V (to X831-3)
M12 (to X831-3)
S12V (to X831-4)
M12 (to X831-4)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(3) Remove the side cover (R) on the head.
(4) Remove the screw on the LD base unit. (Circle mark on the drawing)
16ch 32ch
* That screw have two pices of rabber washer between LD base.

(5) Remove the peltier unit from right side of head.
* Heat conduction seat is inserted between peltier unit and LD base.
(6) Attach the new peltier unit on the LD base.
1) Make sure to attach no bap between the peltier and LD block base.
2) make sure to attach no wrinkle to the heat con-
duction seat between the peltier and LD block
base.
3) Back side of LD base have the LD drive cables
like a picture. Do not pinch them between LD base
and peltier unit.
(7) Fix the peltier unit and return back the cables follow-
ing (1) to (6) procedure.
LD base

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-4.Calibration sensor (PT-R4300E/S)
(1) Replace to the new calibration sensor. (2 screws)
Screws
(2) Enter to the below menu.

• Recording head/RH parameter/Board constant setting
Input the gain value to the new calibration sensor.
3971
CLR
Cal. Sensor Gain

7 8 9
7759 4 5 6
1 2 3
0 . -
ESC OK ENT
2nd menu on the board constant setting.
Gain value
• Recording head/RH test/Calibration posiiton
3600 Adjust the calibration position.
SEARCH CLR
7 8 9
4 5 6
-0.6 -0.6 [mm]
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC SAVE ENT

• Recording head/RH test/Laser calibration
Perform the all channel LD calibration.
3580 3581
Resolution CLR
1200 2400 2540 7 8 9

dpi dpi dpi LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL)
4 5 6
32
--- --- --- 1 2 3
0 . -
ESC OK ESC START ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-5.Procedure for replacing the focus coupling. (PT-R4300E/S)
* Make sure to Keep LD turn off while this replacement procedure.

• Just after the initialized, error condition.
Do not make sure to Keep LD turn on while this replacement procedure.
1) Remove the head cover. (Refer to step 1) of “32-2. Procedure for replacing the focus motor (M80)”.)
2) Remove the motor fixed two screws. Loosen the motor side screw on coupling, and then take off the
motor unit.
3) Loosen the away motor side screw on coupling
4) Take off the coupling.
5) Attach the sensor flag (M) to the coupling.
6) Attach the coupling to the motor temporary. Then attach the motor unit. It has reference-positioning
pin.
7) Rotate the coupling by hand to the PH82 turned on by sensor flag (F).
8) Fined the position of PH82 to turn on to off to rotate reverse way of the coupling.
9) Then search the position of PH84 to on to keep rotating the coupling. Then check the rotation value to
on.
10) Target value is 180 deg +/- 45 deg. Once loosen the coupling fixed screw, then adjust the rotation value
by position between sensor flag (F) and (M).
* The worst case is same timing to turn on each sensor.
11) Attach the head cover.

12) Adjust and check the focus value by performing the test exposure for the focus adjustment with all
resolutions.
Sensor flag (F)
Sensor flag (M)
Motor unit

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-6.Upgrade procedure for recording head (PT-R4300E:16ch -> PTR4300S:32ch)
32-6-1.Preparation
RMLight6, Maintenance PC and communication cable.
• Latest firmware and FPGA data. (Feb.21th.2006 present)
• Head Firmware: HeadFirm_ldv313_32.dat FPGA: HeadFPGA_EP1K30V4.dat
Jigs, tools
• Jumper connector A/S 32ch_Head 86401386-00
• Allen wernch (1.5) GX-15 70585359-00
• The handle A/S(RC) 32ch_Head U1154038-00
• The chip replacement jig A/S(RC) 32CH HEAD U1154037-00
• Conductive sheet Include the head upgrade kit (16ch kit only)
• Gap gauge (10 micron) Include the head upgrade kit
• Wrist band Commercial item
The handle A/S(RC) 32ch_Head
The chip replacement jig A/S(RC) 32CH HEAD
Allen wernch (1.5) GX-15
* Wear the wrist band and connect the wrist band with the conductive sheet to the ground point
during LD replacement. Therefore keep the location for that procedure to connect the ground
point.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
C.Replacement & Adjustment V06_2

100096691V00: PTR4300E->S Head Upgrade (16ch) kit
Number Parts name Spec.

1.00 LD base A/S (16ch)
1.00 Head MB2 Board
2.00 Head DRV board
1.00 Power supply HWS300-5
10.00 Cable tie
1.00 Cable harness X842-X830-2
1.00 Cable harness U6-X807
1.00 Cable support
1.00 Side cover (R1)
1.00 Wiring sticker
1.00 Service tool kit
100096692V00: PTR4300E->S Head Upgrade (32ch) kit
Number Parts name Spec.

1.00 LD base A/S (32ch)
1.00 Head MB2 Board
2.00 Head DRV board
1.00 Power supply HWS300-5
10.00 Cable tie
1.00 Cable support
1.00 Wiring sticker

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

Kit parts list
LD base unit assembly(16ch)
LD base unit assembly(32ch)
Electrical unit for 4300E upgrade
Cover unit for 4300E upgrade
Service tools kit

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-6-2.Parts replacement
(1) Take a note of bilow data,and recommend to back up the machine data.
• Recording head / RH parameter / Reference laser power / Select dpi / [Select ch]
• Recording head / RH parameter / Board constant setting
Reference Laser power data do not need to take a note at 32ch replacement.
PT-R4300E
Reference Laser power @2400dpi Board constant setting
CPU Board
IopI IopMax Iopd Tm1 Tm2
ch.0 - 50C
ch.1 - 100C
ch.2 -
ch.3 - R1 R2
ch.4 -
ch.5 - Cal1 Cal2
ch.6 -
ch.7 -
ch.8 - Cal. Sensor Gain
ch.9 -
ch.10 -
ch.11 -
ch.12 -
ch.13 -
ch.14 - Driver Board 1
ch.15 - Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.12
ch.5
ch.13
ch.6
ch.15
ch.0
ch.7
ch.14
Driver Board 3
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.8
ch.1
ch.9
ch.2
ch.4
ch.11
ch.3
ch.10

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(2) Perform the Upgrade command.
• Input parameter / Initialize data / Upgrade
4411
PT-R4300E -> PT-R4300S
Yes No
ESC OK
Select the[Yes] button and then save.
(3) Turn off the power.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(4) Remove recording head. (Refer to the procedure (1) to (21) of 32-2-2.Replacement procedure (PT-R4300E/
S))
(5) Spread the conductive sheet on the table. And attach it to the ground point.
(6) Remove the LD base to keep connecting with the connection board from recording head. In this time, hold
the peltier unit, because it is heavy.
* Detaching cables from the LD block without first at-

taching this connector to the RH connection board
could cause electro-static damage to the LD.
* Make sure to Keep wearing the wrist band and replace the parts on the conductive sheet follow-
ing procedure.
When all 32ch are replaced, skip the procedure (7) and (8)
(7) Put the old (16ch) and new (32) LD base on the conductive sheet.
(8) Attach the chip replacement jig to the old LD base, and remove the LD block by allen wernch jig one by
one. Then attch it to fixed position on new LD base one by one. (totaly 16 pieces)
* Old LD block data are converted automatically during after procedure. Therefore, make sure to
confirm the transfer location. Also, be sure to comfirm that there is no dust between the contact
surfaces of the new LD chip and the LD base.If there is any dust between the contact surfaces
when the LD chip is mounted on its base, it could cause a calibration error or require higher
current. 4
3
2
1
0
Chip replacement jig
5
1
4
0
3

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(9) Attach new LD base with connection board to the recording head. In this time, make sure to contact them
to positioning pin without gap.
(10) Replace the sticker of wiring diagram of recording head and LD block drawing to 32ch recordhing
head.
(11) Attach the recording head unit. (Refer to the (23) to (24) of 32-2-2.Replacement procedure (PT-R4300E/
S))
(12) Remove the RH connection board from the right side of head unit, then attach it to the RH base tempo-
rary.
Screw (fixed temporary)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(13) Detach the handles from the RH unit, and then attach the piping for gas suction.
(14) Re-attach new side covers (R) which is included the kit.
* At this time, press the front cover against the RH unit lens guard (by pulling the bottom of the front
cover toward) so that the front cover matches both side cover (L) and (R). Use the flexible cable
holder on side cover(R) to fix the flexible cable securely.
(15) Folow the (28) to (29) of 32-2-2.Replacement procedure (PT-R4300E/S).

(16) Then carefully tip the connection board and fix it to the lower cover.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(17) Un-plug the fan connector X803 and X804,then remove the fan cover unit.
X803 X804
Fan cover unit.
(18) Remove the Head CPU3E PCB (X810-X815)

(19) Make a mark for the original location to two Head DRV2 PCB, then remove them. (X830-X831)
(20) Replace the Head MB2-16 PCB (16ch Mother board) to Head MB2 PCB (32ch Mother board). (X800-
X808)
Head CPU3
DRV2 upper
DRV2 lower
Head MB2-16
(21) Insert the head cpu3E PCB and two head drv2 PCB to head MB2 PCB. They are removed procedure
(18) to (19).
Upper side old Head DRV2 PCB: Insert the slot no.1.
Lower side old Head DRV2 PCB: Insert the slot no.3.
Head CPU3E
New power supply cable The slot no.1 for DRV2. (X841)
of peltier unit.
The slot no.2 for DRV2. (X842): Added
The slot no.3 for DRV2. (X843)
The slot no.4 for DRV2. (X844): Added

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(22) Attach the fan cover unit. (X803•AX804)
X803 X804
Fan cover unit.
(23) Return the LD drive box to its original position, and then secure it.
LD Driver box

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(24) Remove the cable duct. Then replace no.1 and no.2 cables bellow.
1. U6 (Terminal) <-> X800 (Head MB2E)
2. Old: XU61, XU62 (CN1 of U6) <-> X807 (Head MB2E)
New: XU61 (CN1 of U6) <-> X807 (Head MB2E)
(Old open connecter XU61 will not be used.)
Then, attach the cable duct.
-5v power -5v power supply Cable duct

supply cable control cable

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(25) Replace the head power supply (U6: -5v).
• Power supply (U6: -5v): HWS150-5/RA -> HWS300-5
* Discard the short connector on the new power supply unit.
(26) Connect the cables to new power supply.

1. -5V power supply: U6 (Terminal) <-> X800 (Head MB2E) and AC200v
* Right side cables are blue. Left side cables are black.
2. -5V power supply control: XU61 (CN1 of U6) <-> X807 (Head MB2E)
16ch 32ch
U6(-5V)
AC 200V AC 200V

8 8
#9)
7. #9)
7.
$.- 7$.- 8HQT'
7 6Q'#
.. *954#
&'05'+.#/$&#HQT'
(TQO:6 8 9*6 89*6 7 *95
&'05'+.#/$&#HQT5 8HQT5
2I
2I
#9)
7.
# 8
8
)40;'. ' 8' $.- #
#9)
7. ()
#9)
7. $.- $.- 7 8' $.-
(TQO5 7 .
#% 6Q*'#&/$
:
2I
$.- 9*6 8 8 $.7 2I

6Q5 7 0
#%
8 $.7

8
#9)
7.
#9)
7. :7HQT5
2*&485
,56
%0 52*&62
8O 5 8O 5
8O 8O
5 5
9*6 9*6 $.- $.- ' 2% %1/ 2% %1/
$ $
#9)
7.

8 8 7 7 8 8 7 7 %06 61) %06 61) 8HQT5
2( 61) 2( 61) #9)
7.
-# -# $.-
6Q*'#&/$
:
).#$7$&%8 ).#$7$&%8 219'45722.; $40
2.(%
1/410
1/410
1/410 2.(%
1/410 2I

:7HQT'
7 8' # 176 7 8 :*2
,56
$:*62 8HQT'
$.- 8 9*6 9*6 8 14) 4 8 (TQO:72I

4 4 6Q*'#&/$
:
5
3 5
3 : 2+1264:'$1#4& 2I

%
615*+$#
615*+$# *25*(##
,56
%
8 88
#9)
7. $*(655 : 7 *95
&'05'+.#/$&#
14) #9)
7.
7 8 7 8 )40;'. ' 7 8 14)
9*6 176 176 ()
$.- 7 .
#% 7 8 14) 6Q:6
9*6 8 8' $.-
8 0
#% 2I

8' $.-
#9)
7.
#9)
7.
9*6

$.- 6Q:6 %0 %0
#%%'5514;
2I
8O 5 8O 5
8O 5 8O 5
2% %1/ 2% %1/
& ' &
%06 61) %06 61)
2( 61) 2( 61)
7 <95,
&'05'+.#/$&# 219'45722.;
:7 :7
8 8*40
,56 219'45722.; 8*40
,56 8
#9)
7. $8*62 %0 %0 $8*62 #9)
7.
$.-
7 #%
. 7 8' $.- 7 8' $.-
(TQO7 )40;'. 7 8 14) 6Q:6 2I

7 8'
2I
9*6 8 14)
#%
0 7 8
:(7 :(7
8
)40;'. ' 5/28$%
,56 5/48$
,56
() #9)
7. $*(655 $;/6 #9)
7.
' #9)
7. #9)
7. 14) 7 8 14) (7
86# '
7 8
14) 7 8 14) (#
5#61QT(#
' ' 7 8 /:2
.+66'.
&'5+)0'& +#1-+
&4#90 +#1-+ 9+4+0)&+#)4#/

219'45722.;70+6
%*'%-'& '6#/$#
#22418'& E.Tamba (+.'
( &#6' /1&'. 2645' 4'8
%1&' &4#9
5;/ 4'8+5+10 #.601 &#6' 4'8+5'& #22418'& 01 01 8
#
2I


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

8 : %10264:'$1#4&

6Q*'#&/$ 8*40
,56
#9)
7.

: 2I
8
:6 #9)
7.
$8*6 :
4'& 8 8
5-,
# 8
;15*+&# 14) 7 8 7 8 #
4'& #9)
7. 4'& 4'& 8 14)
8 8 7 8# 7 8#
4'& 4'& #9)
7. 14)
(TQO7 8 7 8 7 8
2I
8' $.- $.-
8' $.- $.- 8' 8'
8 $.- 8'
$.- $.-
#9)
7. 8' 8'
7 8 14) 14) 14) 8
7 8
(TQO7 7 8' $.- 14) 7 8 14) #9)
7.
2I

$.- $.- :20. :20. :
7 8'
6;%1
6;%1 4%2
'$1#4&
8 $.- 7 8' $.- 8*40
,56
#9)
7.
(TQO7 7 8
14) 14)
7 8
14) 14) 14) $8*6 :
$ $.- $.- $.- 7 8 7 8 4'& 8 8 $
2I
7 8' 7 8' $.- $.-
14) 8' 8' $.- 8' 8'
7 8#
8 7 8 14)
14) #9)
7. 14) 14)
7 8 7 8
(TQO7 $.- $.-
2I
7 8' 78' :20. :20.
$.- 8
;'.
78'
6;%1
6;%1 8 12'2#0'.
8 ;'. #9)
7. ;'. #9)
7. #9)
7.
8 :6
(TQO7 $.- $.- $.- 14) 14)
8' 8' 7 8 7 8 7 8
2I
$.- #9)
7. $.- $.-
8' 8' $.- $.-
$40 8' 8' 8'
(TQO7 8 $40
8 $40
2I
14) 14)
'
7 8 8 #9)
7.)40
8 $.- $.-
#9)
7. 7 8' #9)
7.
14) 9*6 9*6
% (TQO:(7 : : %
(TQO:7 $.- 9*6 9*6
# 5/28$%
,565/48$
,56 :7 :7 8
2I
$*(655 $;/6
8 ;'. ;'. 5/28$%
,565/48$
,56 #9)
7.
14) #9)
7. 8 8 $*(655 $;/6
$.- $.- 4'& 4'&
6Q:7
(TQO5 9*6 8' 8' 8 8 2I

$40 $40 $.- $.-
2I
9*6 8 8 8' 8' 6Q:
8 2I

8 #9)
7.
9*6 #9)
7. HQT'/QFGN1PN[
(TQO-#
2I
$.- 8
#9)
7.
: %#.5'0514$ 1#4&
6Q:.52 *25*(##
,56
2I
$*(655 :
& : &
.4$'$1#4& %5 %5

6;%1 8 5*+'.& 8' 8'
8
: #9)
7.
#9)
7.
;'. 8 8
8 8 4'& 6Q%27 &3'8 $.-
$.- 8' 8'
8' 8' 6Q:.5
: $40
8 8 8
2I
#9)
7.
2+1264:'$ 1#4& :
8*40
,56 8 8
: $8*6 #9)
7. #9)
7.
8 8 4'& 88
$.- 6Q-# #9)
7.
8' 8'
14) 2I
6Q:(#0:(#0
7 8 7 8 2I

7 8' $.-
' 7 8' 8 '
8 8 ;'. #9)
7.
8 8 $40 6Q-#
8' 8' $.- 2I

8 &'5+)0'& +#1-+

4%2
'$1#4& #9)
7.
: 2I

&4#90 +#1-+ 9+4+0)&+#)4#/
: :
6'4/+0#.$.1%-+(
8 8
;'. %*'%-'& '6#/$#
8' $40
8'
8 8 $.- #22418'& E.Tamba (+.'
( &#6' /1&'. 2645' 4'8

(TQO77 ;'.
$.0 %1&' &4#9
2I

5;/ 4'8+5+10 #.601 &#6' 4'8+5'& #22418'& 01 01 8
#

*'#&/$
'$1#4&
8HQT' : 122#0'.
8HQT5
4%2
'$1 #4& )2.
&')+6#.
#9)
7.
9#)1 : : :20.
# $.7 8 8 : *+($#&%
*45 ,'
&
&&- #
$.- 8' 8'
*+(%5# ,'.*# :20.
$.7 # #
(TQO7
8 8
2I

$.- 8' 8' $ $ 4:& 4:&

$.7 8 8 # # 6:& 6:&
$.- 8' 8' $ $
8
$.7 8 8 # # #9)2 %65 %65
$.- 8' 8' $ $
7.5$
# # :20. :20. 8' 8'
$ $ 8 ,'
&
&&- ,'
&
&&-
: # # #9)2 ,'*#.# ,'*#
$ 8 8*40
,56
7.594 $
$ $
#9)
7. $8*6 : # 6:& # 6:& .$40࡮ 6:& 6:& .$40࡮

14) $ 4:& $ 4:& ;'.࡮ 4:& 4:& ;'.࡮
7 8 7 8
$.- 8' 8' # 465 # 465
4'& $ %65 $ %65 ;'.࡮࡮ 8' 8' ;'.࡮࡮
8 8
$.- # $.7
8'
&)0& 8'
&)0& &%& # &%& #9)
;'. $ &64 $ &64
7. .)40࡮ %65 %65 .)40࡮
8 8
$.- # 8' # 8' )4;࡮ 465 465 )4;࡮
r8'
#)0& r8'
#)0&
$40
(TQO:6
8 8 $ $
2I

$.- r8'
#)0& r8'
#)0& # # '
$ $ &64 &64

% %
:
:
8
#9)
7.
9#)1 : 7 8
14) 7 8 7 8 8'
$.-
8' 8'
:
*25*(##
,56
8
: $*(655 #9)
7.
14)
7 8 7 8
: $.- 6Q27
:6
8' 8' 2I

*25*(##
,56
$*(655 : :
& (TQO:7 $.- *25*(##
,56 &
4% 4%
$40 8
2I
4% 4% : $*(655 #%%'5514;9+4'
4'&
7 8 7 8
8HQT'
8' 8'
$.- / /
8HQT5
#9)
7. 2*$
5#0;1
:
*25*(##
,56
8
: $*(655 #%%'5514;9+4'
4'&
7 8 7 8
8' 8'
$.- / /
:
2*$
5#0;1 :

6;%1 .5
' *25*(##
,56 8 &/8.%
1/410 '
: $*(655 #9)
7. 0%
+0 +0 9*6 01 +0
8' 8' $.- % 8'
&'5+)0'& +#1-+
&4#90 +#1-+
9+4+0)&+#)4#/
%*'%-'& '6#/$#
#22418'& E.Tamba (+.'
( &#6' /1&'. 2645' 4'8
%1&' &4#9
5;/ 4'8+5+10 #.601 &#6' 4'8+5'& #22418'& 01 01 8
#

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(27) Follow the (32) to (35) of 32-2-2.replacement procedure. (PT-R4300E/S)
(28) Change the setting of PMD2 from 16ch to 32ch.
• 16ch setting
RSW2 RSW1 DSW1
B B 1 2 3 4 5 6
* * ON
* * * * OFF
• 32ch setting
RSW2 RSW1 DSW1
9 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
* * ON
* * * * OFF

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-6-3.Down load the firmware, FPGA data and chenge the head data.
(1) Turn on the power. Then enter the OFF-LINE mode bypassing the initialize. Then confirm the Head
Firmware, FPGA version.
• Information / Version
(2) Adjust the voltage of the power supply. (-5V (U6)). Refer to the Chap.C: Adjustment of the voltage of the
power supply.
(3) Down load the Head CPU3 firmware (32ch Head). (Refer to the Chap.E: RMLight6. Down load the
Firmware, FPGA to the recording head.)
• Latest firmware and FPGA data. (Feb.21th.2006 present)
• Head Firmware: HeadFirm_ldv313_32.dat FPGA: HeadFPGA_EP1K30V4.dat
Download time is about 6 min.
(4) Turn off the power and turn on again.

(5) Perform the Upgrade command.
• Input parameter / Initialize data / Upgrade
4410 • Select the replaced LD number.
Select exchanged channels.
16ch 32ch
ESC OK
(6) Input the new LD data. (Refer to the data sheet.)

This display for 16ch replacement.
The data of transplanted old LD are converting automatically. (Unnecessary to input.)
4412 4413
Iopd[mA] Iopd[mA]
CLR CLR
ch.0 729 ch.16 729
ch.2 729 7 8 9 ch.18 729 7 8 9
ch.4 729 ch.20 729
ch.6 729 4 5 6 ch.22 729 4 5 6
ch.8 729 ch.24 729
ch.10 729 1 2 3 ch.26 729 1 2 3
ch.12 729 ch.28 729
ch.14 729 0 . - ch.30 729 0 . -
ESC NEXT ENT ESC NEXT ENT
(7) Input the new Drv board data. (Refer to the data sheet.)
The data of transplanted old Drv board are converting automatically. (Unnecessary to
input.)

CLR CLR
ch.28 248 969 ch.24 254 968
7 8 9 7 8 9
ch.21 264 986 ch.17 249 971
ch.14 235 955 ch.10 243 966
ch. 7 246 970
4 5 6 ch. 3 254 967
4 5 6
ch. 0 258 972 ch. 4 258 978
ch.15 251 971 1 2 3 ch.11 257 958 1 2 3
ch.22 238 971 ch.18 249 975
ch.29 256 973 0 . - ch.25 258 968 0 . -
ESC NEXT ENT ESC SAVE ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

Parameter Input position Parameter Input position
(8) Turn off the power and turn on again.
(9) Confirm the data of each ch.
IopI of new LD ch must be 1601.
Iopd of new LD ch must be inputted value.
The data of transplanted old LD must be substituted correctly.
3933 3934
CLR CLR
ch.0 1601 629 729 ch.8 1601 629 729
ch.1 540 629 729 7 8 9 ch.9 540 629 729 7 8 9
ch.2 1601 629 729 ch.10 1601 629 729
ch.3 540 629 729 4 5 6 ch.11 540 629 729 4 5 6
ch.4 1601 629 729 ch.12 1601 629 729
ch.5 540 629 729 1 2 3 ch.13 540 629 729 1 2 3
ch.6 1601 629 729 ch.14 1601 629 729
ch.7 540 629 729 0 . - ch.15 540 629 729 0 . -
3935 3936
CLR CLR
ch.16 1601 629 729 ch.24 1601 629 729
ch.17 540 629 729 7 8 9 ch.25 540 629 729 7 8 9
ch.18 1601 629 729 ch.26 1601 629 729
ch.19 540 629 729 4 5 6 ch.27 540 629 729 4 5 6
ch.20 1601 629 729 ch.28 1601 629 729
ch.21 540 629 729 1 2 3 ch.29 540 629 729 1 2 3
ch.22 1601 629 729 ch.30 1601 629 729
ch.23 540 629 729 0 . - ch.31 540 629 729 0 . -
• Service Maintenance/Recording head/RH Parameter/Baord constant setting

The data of transplanted Head CPU3E board must be substituted correctly.
New Drv board data must be inputted value.
The data of transplanted old Drv board must be substituted correctly.
3970 3970
CPU Board CPU Board
Temparature sensor
CLR Temparature sensor
CLR
Tm1 Tm2 Tm1 Tm2
7 8 9 7 8 9
50C 19.4 30.0 50C 19.4 30.0
100C 30.2 59.5 100C 30.2 59.5
4 5 6 4 5 6
Dew condensation sensor Dew condensation sensor
R1 10 R2 101 1 2 3 R1 10 R2 101 1 2 3
Calibration sensor Calibration sensor
Cal1 488 Cal2 3965 0 . - Cal1 488 Cal2 3965 0 . -

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

3971
CLR
Cal. Sensor Gain

7 8 9
7759 4 5 6
1 2 3
0 . -
ESC OK ENT
3972 3973 Driver Board 2

Driver Board 1
CLR CLR
ch.26 235 949 ch.28 248 969
7 8 9 7 8 9
ch.19 267 966 ch.21 264 986
ch.12 265 993 ch.14 235 955
ch. 5 4 5 6 ch. 7 246 970
4 5 6
242 969
ch. 6 251 982 ch. 0 258 972
ch.13 261 994 1 2 3 ch.15 251 971 1 2 3
ch.20 242 966 ch.22 238 971
ch.27 251 970 0 . - ch.29 256 973 0 . -

CLR CLR
ch. 8 243 960 ch.24 254 968
7 8 9 7 8 9
ch. 1 239 957 ch.17 249 971
ch.30 251 974 ch.10 243 966
ch.23 263 988
4 5 6 ch. 3 254 967
4 5 6
ch.16 237 958 ch. 4 258 978
ch. 9 262 979 1 2 3 ch.11 257 958 1 2 3
ch. 2 254 977 ch.18 249 975
ch.31 272 1001 0 . - ch.25 258 968 0 . -
(10) Adjust the position of the calibration sensor board.

• Recording head / RH test / Calibration position [SEARCH]
3600
SEARCH CLR
7 8 9
4 5 6
-0.6 1.0 [mm]
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC SAVE ENT
Current value SEARCH result

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(11) Perform the [Laser caribration] to necessary resolution for the all laser diode channel.
3581
Caribration time is 1 to 2 minute.
CLR
7 8 9
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL)
4 5 6
32
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC START ENT
(12) Confirm the IopI value of each ch.

3933 3934
CLR CLR
ch.0 540 629 729 ch.8 540 629 729
ch.1 540 629 729 7 8 9 ch.9 540 629 729 7 8 9
ch.2 540 629 729 ch.10 540 629 729
ch.3 540 629 729 4 5 6 ch.11 540 629 729 4 5 6
ch.4 540 629 729 ch.12 540 629 729
ch.5 540 629 729 1 2 3 ch.13 540 629 729 1 2 3
ch.6 540 629 729 ch.14 540 629 729
ch.7 540 629 729 0 . - ch.15 540 629 729 0 . -
3935 3936
CLR CLR
ch.16 540 629 729 ch.24 540 629 729
ch.17 540 629 729 7 8 9 ch.25 540 629 729 7 8 9
ch.18 540 629 729 ch.26 540 629 729
ch.19 540 629 729 4 5 6 ch.27 540 629 729 4 5 6
ch.20 540 629 729 ch.28 540 629 729
ch.21 540 629 729 1 2 3 ch.29 540 629 729 1 2 3
ch.22 540 629 729 ch.30 540 629 729
ch.23 540 629 729 0 . - ch.31 540 629 729 0 . -

• Zoom adjustment

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

32-6-4.Check list
Check list
Check box
<Power supply>
Power supply unit are fixed completely.
Bracket of power supply unit are fixed completely.
<Wiring>
　　AC 200v line are wired correctly.
　　AC 200v line have no stress.
　　Check AC 200v line by tester before turn on the power.
　　Earth line are connect to grand level correctly.
　　DC line are wired correctly.
　　DC line have no stress.
　　Check DC line by tester before turn on the power.
　　Remote control signal line are wired correctly.
<Added parts>
　　When install LD unit, make sure to use the anti-static tools.
　　New LD are fixed correctly.
　　New boards are fixed correctly.
　　New cables are wired correctly.
　　Assembled RH is installed completely.
<Settings>
　　Dip-Sw, jumper or etc. setting are set correctly.
　　Firmware、FPGA data are downloaded correctly.
　　Machine data are inputted correctly.
　　Make sure to adjust the voltage to install power supply.
<Confirm the operation>

　　Calibration has no problem.
　　Result of IopI value are normal, after calibration.
　　Set the best focus value.
　　Set the best zoom value.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D. Operation panel
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Contents
1. Screen flow diagram ................................................................................ 1
1-1.Service menu ........................................................................................................ 1
2. Startup of the main unit without performing initialization ......................... 4
3. Detailed descriptions of the Service/Maintenance screens ..................... 5
3-1.How to enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen ........................... 5
3-2.Service/Maintenance Menu screens ..................................................................... 6
3-3.Sensor Test ........................................................................................................... 7
3-4.Actuator Test ....................................................................................................... 12
3-5.Drum Test ............................................................................................................ 16
3-6.Pulse Motor Test ................................................................................................. 18
3-7.Recording Head .................................................................................................. 21
3-7-1.RH test (Recording head) ................................................................................ 22
3-7-1-1.Zero Return screen for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor (Record-
ing head/RH test) .................................................................................................. 24
3-7-1-2.Positioning screens for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor (Record-
ing head/RH test) .................................................................................................. 25
3-7-1-3.Peltier Test (Recording head/RH test) ........................................................... 26
3-7-1-4.Laser Calibration (Recording head/RH test) ................................................. 27
3-7-1-5.LD ON (Recording head/RH test) ................................................................. 28
3-7-1-6.Calibration Position (Recording head/RH test) ............................................. 30
3-7-1-7.Moving to Calibration Position (Recording head/RH test) ............................. 31
3-7-1-8.Temperature (Recording head/RH test) ........................................................ 32
3-7-1-9.Laser Power Measurement (Recording head/RH test) ................................. 34
3-7-1-10.Iop/IopMAX (Recording head/RH test) ....................................................... 36
3-7-1-11.Iop/IopMAX graph (Recording head/RH test) ............................................. 37
3-7-2.RH parameter (Recording head) ...................................................................... 38
3-7-2-1.Laser power setting (Recording head/RH parameter) .................................. 40
3-7-2-2.Laser power adjust (Recording head/RH parameter) ................................... 41
3-7-2-3.Laser power confirm (Recording head/RH parameter) ................................. 42
3-7-2-4.Reference laser power (Recording head/RH parameter) .............................. 43
3-7-2-5.IopMAX-Iop, Iop/IopMAX (Recording head/RH parameter) .......................... 44
3-7-2-6.Temperature setting (Recording head/RH parameter) .................................. 45
3-7-2-7.Laser running time (Recording head/RH parameter) .................................... 46
3-7-2-8.Writing time clear (Recording head/RH parameter) ...................................... 47
3-7-2-9.Board constant setting (Recording head/RH parameter) .............................. 48
3-7-2-10.Auto calibration (Recording head/RH parameter) ....................................... 50
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) D-i
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-11.Set temp. warning (Recording head/RH parameter) ................................... 53
3-7-2-12.Focus temp adjust. (Recording head/RH parameter) ................................. 54
3-7-2-13.LD exchange (Recording head/RH parameter) .......................................... 56
3-8.Input parameter................................................................................................... 57
3-8-1.Set correction data (Input parameter) .............................................................. 59
3-8-2.Set preset Plate type (Input parameter) ........................................................... 62
3-8-3.Drum base position (Input parameter) ............................................................. 63
3-8-4.Drum position (Input parameter) ...................................................................... 65
3-8-5.Punch adjust (Input parameter) ....................................................................... 66
3-8-6.Set punch data (Input parameter) .................................................................... 67
3-8-7.Set Focus / Zoom (Input parameter) ................................................................ 68
3-8-8.Drum parameter (Input parameter) .................................................................. 69
3-8-8-1.Parameter set (Input parameter/ Drum parameter) ...................................... 70
3-8-8-2.Status read (Input parameter/ Drum parameter) .......................................... 71
3-8-8-3.Initialize (Input parameter/ Drum parameter) ................................................ 73
3-8-8-4.Adjust Offset (Input parameter/ Drum parameter) ........................................ 74
3-8-8-5.Adjust Gain (Input parameter/ Drum parameter) .......................................... 75
3-8-9.Set misc. data (Input parameter)...................................................................... 76
3-8-10.Set resolution (Input parameter) .................................................................... 77
3-8-11.Set weight (Input parameter) ......................................................................... 78
3-8-12.Set cassette data (Input parameter) .............................................................. 79
3-8-13.Password for spec. func (Input parameter) .................................................... 83
3-8-14.Test pattern (Input parameter) ....................................................................... 84
3-8-15.Option for engineering (Input parameter) ....................................................... 86
3-8-16. Initializes data (Input parameter) ................................................................... 87
3-8-16-1. Initialize all data / Initialize user data (Input parameter) ............................. 88
3-8-16-2.Select brand (Input parameter) ................................................................... 89
3-8-16-3.Consumable Timer (Input parameter / Initialize data) ................................. 90
3-8-16-4.Upgrade (Input parameter / Initialize data) ................................................. 91
3-8-17. DHCP (Input parameter) ............................................................................... 92
3-9.Machine option select ......................................................................................... 93
3-10.I/O Read / Write ................................................................................................ 95
3-11.Special action .................................................................................................... 96
3-11-1.Initialize / Initialize machine status (Special action) ....................................... 98
3-11-2.Pick up clamp / Put clamp on drum (Special action) ...................................... 99
3-11-3.Register Test (Special action) ...................................................................... 100
3-11-4.NVRAM backup (Special action) .................................................................. 101
3-11-5.NVRAM restore (Special action) .................................................................. 102
3-11-6.Adjust Displacement sensor (Special action) ............................................... 103
3-11-7.Adjust Displacement sensor 2 (Special action) ............................................ 104
D-ii PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-11-8.Front sensor offset (Special action) ............................................................. 105
3-11-9.Centering test / Centering test2 (Special action) ......................................... 106
3-11-10.Belt maintenance (Special action) ............................................................. 107
3-12.Special action 2 ............................................................................................... 108
3-12-1.Initialize (Special action 2) ........................................................................... 109
3-12-2.Balancer test (Special action 2) ................................................................... 110
3-12-3.Mail test (Special action 2) ........................................................................... 111
3-12-4.Auto loader test (Special action 2) ............................................................... 112
3-12-5.Plate pad test (Special action 2) .................................................................. 113
3-12-6.Paper pad test (Special action 2) ................................................................. 114
3-12-7.Multi auto loader test (Special action 2) ....................................................... 115
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) D-iii

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
D-iv PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
1. Screen flow diagram

1-1.Service menu
Service menu
Senser test
Actuator Test
Drum Test
Pulse Motor Test
Recording Head
RH test
Zero Return screen for recording head unit
Zero Return screen for focus motor
Zero Return screen for zoom motor
Positioning screens for recording head unit
Positioning screens for focus motor
Positioning screens for zoom motor
Peltier Test
Laser Calibration
LD ON
Calibration Position
Moving to Calibration Position
Temperature Display
Laser Power Measurement
Iop/IopMAX Display
Iop/IopMAX graph
RH parameter
Laser power setting
Laser power adjust
Laser power confirm
Reference laser power
IopMAX-Iop, Iop/IopMAX
Temperature setting
Laser running time
Writing time clear
Board constant setting
Auto calibration
Set temp. warning
Focus temp adjust.
LD exchange
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) D-1

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Service menu
Input parameter
Set correction data
Set preset Plate type
Drum base position
Drum position
Punch adjust
Set punch data
Set Focus / Zoom
Drum parameter
Parameter set
Status read
Initialize
Adjust Offset
Adjust Gain
Set misc. data
Set resolution
Set weight
Set cassette data
Password for spec. func
Test pattern
Option for engineering
Initialize data
Initialize all data
Initialize user data
Select brand
Consumable Time
Upgrade
DHCP
I/O Read / Write
D-2 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Service menu
Special action
Initialize
Initialize machine status
Pick up clamp
Put clamp on drum
Register Test
NVRAM backup
NVRAM restore
Front sensor offset
Centering test
Centering test 2
Belt maintenance
Special action 2
Initialize
Balancer test
Mail test
Auto loader test
Plate pad test
Paper pad test
Multi auto loader test

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
2. Startup of the main unit without performing initialization
0101 After turning ON the power to the main unit, simultaneously

press the two areas indicated by circles on the screen shown on
P T- R 4 3 0 0 S
the left.
Please press [START] The OFF-LINE screen shown appears without an initialization
of the main unit being performed.
START V1.00
When starting up the main unit without performing initial-

ization, the main unit does not operate normally.
To operate the main unit normally, make sure to turn OFF/
ON the power to the main unit or perform initialization from
the operation panel.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3. Detailed descriptions of the Service/Maintenance screens

3-1.How to enter the Service/Maintenance Menu screen
0301
Service
Pressing the OK key after selecting the

Infomation Service key brings up the Password Input
Set punch name screen.
Service When the screen shown on the left appears, enter the
ONLINE OK NEXT password, press the ENT key and then press the
OK key again. The following Service/Mainte-
nance Menu screen appears.
3000
CLR
7 8 9
Pass Word The password
4 5 6
0 PT-R4300E/S: 4302
1 2 3
0 ·
ESC OK ENT
If you enter the wrong password, the screen re-
turns to the upper layer Menu screen (as indi-
3050 cated above).
Sensor test
Actuator test You can set the maintenance parameters using the
Drum test screens shown on the left.
Motor test
Recording head
ESC OK NEXT
NEXT NEXT
3051
Input parameter
I/O Read/Write
Special action
Special action 2
ESC OK NEXT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-2.Service/Maintenance Menu screens
3050
Sensor test Sensor test
Actuator test Allows you to execute a sensor test.

Drum test Actuator test
Motor test
Allows you to execute an actuator test.
Recording head
Drum test
ESC OK NEXT
Allows you to execute tests for drum positioning and
drum rotation.
NEXT NEXT
Motor test
Allows you to test the transport/discharge motors and

3051
Input parameter
the plate side alignment motors.
Machine option select Recording head
I/O Read/Write Allows you to execute tests and operations related to

Special action the recording head.
Special action 2 Input parameter
ESC OK NEXT Allows you to input and check parameter settings.

Allows you to set optional parameters for the machine.

I/O Read/Write
Allows you to execute I/O port data reading and writ-

ing.
Special action
Allows you to execute special actions, including

trailing edge clamp installation and initialization of
the machine status.

This is a jig command for the auto loader.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-3.Sensor Test
3050
Sensor test Sensor test
Actuator test With this command, you can check the operating sta-
Drum test tus of each sensor.
Motor test Pressing the Sensor test key after selecting the
Recording head OK key brings up the Sensor Operation Check
ESC OK NEXT screen.
In this screen, the indicators for the sensors that are
currently ON appear highlighted.
Sensor indications after the PT-R is initialized.
Transmission type sensor:
Turns ON when the light is blocked.
Reflection type sensor:
Turns ON when the sensor detects the specified
conditions.
ESC

NEXT
Switches to the next screen. (The NEXT key

switches the display among the Sensor Selec-
tion screens.)
After selecting the number of the sensor for
which you want to check the operating state and
pressing the OK key, you will hear a beep
sound when the selected sensor turns ON.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3100
11 PH10H 6 PH11A2 11 PH27-1 16 PH30H
PH10H : Balancer weight detection sensor (Home)
2 PH10A 7 PH20 12 PH27-2 17 PH30A
PH10A : Balancer weight detection sensor (Away)
3 PH11H1 8 PH21 13 PH27-3 18 PH31H PH11H1 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 1
4 PH11H2 9 PH24-1 14 PH29H 19 PH31A (Home)
5 PH11A1 10 PH24-2 15 PH29A 20
PH11H2 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 2
ESC OK NEXT
(Home)
PH11A1 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 1
(Away)
PH11A2 : Balancer pin position detection sensor 2
(Away)
PH20 : Trailing edge clamp arm origin sensor
(Home)
PH21 : Trailing edge clamp arm end point sensor
(Away)
PH24-1 : Trailing edge clamp hook sensor 1
PH24-2 : Trailing edge clamp hook sensor 2
PH27-1 : Trailing edge clamp presence detection
sensor 1
sensor 2
sensor 3
PH29H : Plate top side detection sensor (Home)
PH29A : Plate top side detection sensor (Away)
PH30H : Leading edge clamp close origin sensor
(Home)
PH30A : Leading edge clamp close origin sensor
(Away)
PH31H : Leading edge clamp close end point sen-
sor (Home)
PH31A : Leading edge clamp close end point sen-
sor (Away)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel V08
3101
PH55 PH62
PH50 : Plate pass sensor on the plate-loading path
11 PH50 6 11 16 SB60-4
2 PH51 7 PH56 12 PH63 17 SB60-5

PH51 : Sensor for detecting an interleaf on the
3 PH52 8 PH57 13 SB60-1 18 SB60-6 back of the plate
4 PH53 9 PH61H 14 SB60-2 19 SB60-7 PH52 : Nip roller origin sensor
5 PH54 10 PH61A 15 SB60-3 20 SB604L PH53 : Shutter origin sensor
PH54 : Plate pass sensor on the plate transport path
ً
ً
ESC OK
PH55 : Transport path change lower limit sensor
PH56 : Transport path change upper limit sensor
PH57 : Transport path punch position sensor
PH61H : Sensor for detecting the Home side edge
of a plate for side alignment
PH61A : Sensor for detecting the Away side edge
of a plate for side alignment
PH62 : Plate edge detection sensor for the punch
unit
PH63 : Side alignment origin sensor
SB60-1 : Punch 1 origin sensor
SB604L : Origin sensor for 610mm position punch
3102 PH58 : Origin sensor of the motor for opening/
11 PH58
PH2 6 LS4A 11 P1 16 +15V
closing the operation door (for PT-R4300
2 PH59 7 LS56 12 INVALM 17 -15V
3
only)
PH2 8 LS57-1 13 PD_ERR 18 S1
4 PH6 9 LS58 14 PD_BSY 19

PH59 : Discharge path plate pass sensor 2 (for PT-
5 LS4H 10 PH70 15 24V 20 R4300 only)
PH2 : Scanning origin sensor
ً
ً
ESC OK
PH6 : Sensor for detecting multiple plate feeding
or loose plate
LS4H : Scanning start point limiter
LS4A : Scanning end point limiter
LS56 : Operation door interlock switch
LS57-1 : Cover interlock switch
LS58 : Main cover servo stop switch
(LS58-1,2,SW58)
PH70 : AT unit plate detection sensor
P1 : Drum vacuum pressure sensor
INVALM : Inverter alarm
PD_ERR : Processor error
PD_BSY : Processor busy
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
+24V : 24V voltage check
+15V : +15V voltage check
-15V : -15V voltage check
S1 : Key switch for maintenance
3103 PH90 : Interleaf detection sensor 1
11 PH90 6 PH92-3 11 PH97-3 16
PH91-1 : Plate pad home position sensor
2 PH91-1 7 PH92-4 12 PH98-1 17
PH91-2 : Plate pad middle position sensor

3 PH91-2 8 PH93-1 13 SB98 18
PH92-1
PH92-1 : Plate underside interleaf detection sensor
4 9 PH97-1 14 19
5 PH92-2 10 PH97-2 15 20
amplifier
PH92-2 : Plate surface interleaf detection sensor and
ESC OK NEXT
plate length detection sensor amplifier (in
plate transportation section)
PH92-3 : Plate detection sensor 1
PH92-4 : Plate detection sensor 2
PH93-1 : Interleaf nip motor home position sensor
PH97-1 : Cassette No. detection sensor
PH98-1 : Interleaf pad home position sensor
SB98 : Plate detection proximity sensor
3104 LS94-2 : Bridge section cover 2 interlock switch
11 LS94-2 6 IN92 11 16
LS94-3 : Maintenance cover interlock switch
2 LS94-3 7 S90 12 17
LS94-4 : Cassette existence detection sensor

3 LS94-4 8 13 18
P101-1 : Pressure sensor

4 P101-1 9 14 19
5 P101-2 10 15 20
P101-2 : Pressure sensor
IN92 : Single/multi identification signal
ESC OK NEXT
H : Single
L : Multi
S90 : Key switch for maintenance

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3105
SQ200 : Chain drive home position sensor
11 SQ200 6 SQ212A 11 SQ213D 16 LS210E
2 SQ200A 7 SQ212C 12 LS200E 17

SQ200A : Chain drive positioning sensor
3 PH93-1
SQ211A 8 SQ212D 13 LS206 18
SQ211A : Cassette tray 1 positioning sensor
4 SQ211C 9 SQ213A 14 SQ210A 19 SQ211C : Cassette 1 storage checking sensor
5 SQ211D 10 SQ213C 15 SQ210 20 SQ211D : Arm activation sensor for storage of first
cassette
ESC OK NEXT
SQ212C : Cassette 2 storage checking sensor
SQ212D : Arm activation sensor for storage of sec-
ond cassette
SQ213C : Cassette 3 storage checking sensor
SQ213D : Arm activation sensor for storage of third
cassette
LS200E : Chain drive second end point switch
LS206 : Cassette door sensor
SQ210A : Arm travel end point sensor
SQ210 : Arm home position sensor
LS210E : Arm protrusion detection sensor
3106 LS220U : Lift’s over-travel upper switch
11 LS220U 6 AC-P8 11 AC-AL 16 SQ200D
LS220L : Lift’s over-travel lower switch
2 LS220L 7 AC-P4 12 AC-BU 17 LS206A
SQ221B
SQ220 : Lift home position sensor
3 PH93-1
SQ220 8 AC-P2 13 18 LS206B
4 AC-Z 9 AC-P1 14 SQ222B 19

AC-Z : AC servo motor Z phase detection
5 AC-P16 10 AC-C0 15 SQ223B 20
AC-P16 : Lift position output 5
ESC OK NEXT
Sensors displayed in screens
3105 and 3106 are for the SA-L/
AC-C0 : Lift positioning end
MA-L.
AC-AL : Lift drive motor error
AC-BU : Lift is moving.
SQ221B : Lift interlock 1 sensor
SQ200D : Chain drive slowdown sensor
LS206A : Cassette door 1 switch
LS206B : Cassette door 2 switch

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-4.Actuator Test
Actuator test
3050
Sensor test With this command, you can check the operation of
Actuator test each actuator.
Drum test
Motor test
key brings up the Actuator Opera-
Actuator test
Recording head
tion Check screen.
ESC OK NEXT
ESC

NEXT
Switches to the next screen. (The key

tion screens.)
Pressing the OKkey after selecting any of
On keys for the actuators you want to check
Off
performs the check(s).
3200
MBL1 : Blower (Drum)
MBL1:Blower (Drum) On Off Turns on/off the blower for the plate suction on the drum.
On Off
BL40 : Blower (Gas)
BL40:Blower (Gas)
Turns on/off the blower for the exhaust gas suction.
M41:Compressor (Gas) On Off
M41 : Compressor (Gas)
Turns on/off the compressor for the exhaust gas collec-
ESC OK
tion when exposing.
3201
M11H : Lock pin (Home)
M11H:Lock pin (Home) Out In
Activates the lock pin on the Home side.
M11H:Blancer pin (Home) Out In
M11H : Balancer pin (Home)
M11A:Lock pin (Away) Out In Activates the balancer pin on the Home side.
M11A:Blancer pin (Away) Out In
M11A : Lock pin (Away)
Activates the lock pin on the Away side.
ESC OK
M11A : Balancer pin (Away)
Activates the balancer pin on the Away side.
M20 : Squeeze roller
Activates the squeeze roller.
3202
Up
M20:Squeeze roller Down
M20 : Trail edge clamp arm
M20:Trail edge clamp arm Up Down Activates the trailing edge clamp arm motor.
M24:Trail edge clamp hook Hold Rele
M24 : Trail edge clamp hook
Activates the trailing edge clamp hook drive motor
M30:Leading edge clamp Up Down
M30 : Leading edge clamp
ESC OK Activates the motor for opening/closing the leading edge
clamp.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel V08
3203
M58 : Door open
M58:Door open On Off
Activates the solenoid for the operation door.
BZ1:Buzzer On Off
(*1) (SL58 for the PT-R4300)
PS2:Power supply(Servo pack) On Off
BZ1 : Buzzer
Activates the buzzer.
ESC OK PS2 : Power supply (Servo pack)
Switches ON/OFF the excitation of the servo
pack.
When ON, the drum is held still.
When OFF, the drum is released.
3204 M52 : Niproller

M52:Niproller Up Down
Activates the nip roller in the trans port unit.
SL53:Shutter Close Open SL53 : Shutter
M55:Path Up Down Activates the shutter.
M55 : Path
Activates the transport unit.
ESC OK
3205
SL59-1 : Load clatch
SL59-1:Load clatch On Off
Activates the transport clutch (on the plate load-
SL59-2:Unload clatch On Off
ing side).
SL59-2 : Unload clatch
Activates the transport clutch (on the plate un-
ESC OK
loading side).
3206 M60-1 : Punch 1

M60-1:Punch 1 On Off
Activates Punch 1.
M60-2:Punch 2 On Off M60-2 : Punch 2
M60-3:Register punch(Home) On Off Activates Punch 2.
M60-4:Register punch(Away) On Off
M60-3 : Register punch (Home)
Activates the registration punch.
ESC OK
M60-4 : Register punch (Away)
Activates the registration punch.
3207
M60-5 : Punch 5
M60-5:Punch 5 On Off Activates Punch 5.
M60-6:Punch 6 On Off M60-6 : Punch 6
M60-7:Register punch(OP) On Off
Activates Punch 6.
M60-7 : Register punch (OP)
M60:Register punch(3-4) On Off
Activates option register punch .
ESC OK
M60 : Register punch (3-4)
Activates register punch (3-4)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3208
M93 : Paper nip roller
M93:Paper nip roller Up Down
Activates the interleaf nip roller.
M90:Paper transport roller On Off
M90 : Paper transport roller
SL97:Carrier lock On Off
Activates the interleaf discharge roller.
VP100:Vacuum pump On Off SL97 : Carrier lock
ESC OK Activates the cassette lock. (only SA-L)
VP100 : Vacuum pump
Activates the vacuum pump.
3209
V102-1 : Plate pad valve1
V102-1:Plate pad valve 1 Close Open Activates the solenoid valve operation for plate
V102-2:Plate pad valve 2 Close Open pad (zoon1).
V102-3:Plate pad valve 3 Close Open
Activates the solenoid valve operation for plate
V102-4:Plate pad valve 4 Close Open
pad (zoon2).
ESC OK
3210 Activates the solenoid valve operation for plate
V102-5:Paper pad valve 1 Close Open pad (zoon3).
V102-6:Paper pad valve 2 Close Open V102-4 : Plate pad valve4
V102-7:Paper pad valve 3 Close Open Activates the solenoid valve operation for plate
V102-8:Paper pad valve 4 Close Open
pad (zoon4).
ESC OK
V102-5 : Paper pad valve1
Activates the solenoid valve operation for
interleaf pad (zoon1).

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3211
SL209 : Mal door
SL209:Mal door Close Open
Releases the door lock of the multi-cassette
M200:Lift motor -> Lift On Off
unit.
-> Cas On Off
After the door lock has been released, closing the

ESC OK
door will automatically lock it.
M200 : Lift motor -> Lift
Moves the cassette transportation motor.
: Lift motor -> Cas
Moves the cassette transportation motor.
For the machine’s protection, the motor will not

operate when the part is in a wrong position (e.g.,
when the height of the lift is not correct).
3212
M210 : Arm motor -> Lift
M210:Arm motor -> Lift Out In Moves the arm motor.
SL207:Lift brake On Off
In order to protect the machine, once the motor

has moved to the Out direction, the motor cannot
ESC OK move again. In such a case, return the cassette
to the multi-cassette unit side until the lock works.
SL207 : Lift brake
Moves the electromagnetic brake used for the
lift tray.
If the M220 servo is turned OFF, the brake can-

not be released. (e.g., when an interlock is re-
leased and a door is opened)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-5.Drum Test
3050 Drum test

Sensor test
Actuator test
With this command, you can check each of the drum
Drum test
unit’s various operations.
Motor test
Drum test key brings up the Drum Unit Op-
Recording head
eration Check screen.
ESC OK NEXT
ESC

3300
NEXT
Zero Leading
Fast Slow
Return Clamp
Squeeze
Front
Check
Tail
clamp
----
----
tion screens.)
Servo Servo Error ----
(ON) (OFF) Clear ---- Pressing the OK key after selecting any of
ESC OK the test items executes its operation.
3350
Pressing the OK key after selecting any of the
above commands brings up the screen shown on the
left.
Start OK ? ESC
Returns you to the previous screen.

OK
ESC OK Cancel
The drum starts the selected command opera-
tion.
CANCEL
Halts the current operation of the drum.

Zero Return:
Detects the drum (encoder) unit’s z-pulse point.
Fast:
Rotates the drum at the exposure speed. (The
drum rotates at the speed used during the last
image exposure.)
Slow:
Rotates the drum at the plate transfer speed.
Leading Clamp:
Moves the drum to the plate loading position
where the leading edge clamps can be opened to
load a plate.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Squeeze:
Moves the drum to the position where the
squeeze roller can be lowered.
Tail clamp:
Moves the drum to the position where the trail-
ing edge clamps can hold or release a plate.
Front check:
Moves the drum to the position where the front
check.
Servo (ON):
Prevents the drum from rotating.
Servo (OFF):
Prevents the drum from rotating.
Error Clear:
Clears errors in the servo.
1050 Tail
clamp
1 Plate 1
2 Plate 2
The screen shown on the left for selecting plate
3 Plate 3
size only appears if this command is selected.
4 Plate 4 This is because the grip’s trailing edge clamp po-
5 Plate 5 sitions are controlled by the plate size.
ESC OK NEXT
After you select the plate size, a confirmation
screen asking you whether to execute the se-
lected command appears.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-6.Pulse Motor Test
3050 Motor test

Sensor test
Actuator test
With this command, you can check the operation of
Drum test
the pulse motor.
Motor test
Individually activates each pulse motor.
ESC
Recording head
ESC OK NEXT
Pressing the OK key after selecting the pulse
motor you want to check starts its operation.
3450
M50:Transport roller(In)
M50 : Transport roller (In)
M50:Transport roller(Out)
Activates the transport motor on the plate load-
M61:
ing side.
M50 : Transport roller (Out)
Activates the transport motor on the plate un-
ESC OK NEXT
loading side.
M61 :
NEXT NEXT
Activates the plate side alignment drive motor.
3451
M91:Plate pad motor M91 : Plate pad motor
M92:Plate transport rollor Activates the plate pad drive motor.
M98:Paper pad motor M92 : Plate transport roller
M95:Lift motor Activates the transportation motor of the AT
section.
ESC OK NEXT
M98 : Paper pad motor
Activates the interleaf pad drive motor.
M95 : Lift motor
Activates the lift drive motor.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Distance setting button Distance setting button
3400 Sets the distance units for moving the selected
CLR
pulse motor. Repeatedly pressing this button
7 8 9
0 [pulse] changes the indication in the following order.
4 5 6
0.0 [mm/sec] [pulse] (Allowable range: -9999 to 9999):
1 2 3
Currently, this button cannot be used for any of
0 . -
the listed pulse motor tests.
ESC OK ENT
[mm] (Allowable range: -999.9 to 999.9):
[pulse]
Sets the distance to move the pulse motor in
3400
“mm”
CLR
• To operate the pulse motor continuously, input
7 8 9 “0” in both fields of the screen shown on the left
0 [mm]
4 5 6 and press the OK key.
0.0 [mm/sec]
1 2 3 • If you want to execute the M61 command, enter
0 . - the plate’s width in this field.
ESC OK ENT
[pulse] • If there is no plate loaded on the drum when

you execute the M61 command, an error ap-
3400
pears. Therefore, be sure to set a plate on the
drum before executing this command.
init
init
Returns the selected pulse motor to its home

position for initialization.
ESC OK
This button cannot be used with either the M50
and M54 command.
0.0 [mm/sec] (Allowable range: 0 to 999.9):
Sets the operation speed of the pulse motor.
Setting this parameter to “0” will operate the pulse
motor at the default speed (normal operating speed).
Only use this parameter if you want to operate
the pulse motor at a different speed.
Pressing the OK key after completing the
setting brings up the screen for pulse motor op-
eration shown on the left.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3452
OK
Operates or initializes the pulse motor. When

the operation is completed, the screen for dis-
Start OK ?
tance setting reappears.
ESC OK Cancel

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7.Recording Head
3050 Recording head

Sensor test
Actuator test With this command, you can select the operation of
Drum test the recording head unit.
Motor test Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Recording head Recording headkey brings up the Recording Head
ESC OK NEXT Unit Operation screen.
ESC

NEXT

tion screens.)
3504
RH test
RH test
Test command for recording head
RH parameter
RH parameter
Recording head parameter setting screen.
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1.RH test (Recording head)
3504
RH test RH test
RH parameter
With this command, you can check the operation of
the recording head unit.
RH test key brings up the Recording Head
ESC OK
Unit Operation screen.
ESC

NEXT

tion screens.)
3505
RH zero return RH zero return
RH positioning Returns the recording head to its home position.

Focus zero return RH positioning
Focus positioning Positions the recording head at a desired point

Zoom zero return in the secondary scanning direction.
ESC OK NEXT Focus zero return
Returns the focus motor to its home position.

NEXT NEXT
Focus positioning
Positions the focus motor at a desired point.

Zoom zero return
Returns the zoom motor to its home position.

3506 Zoom positioning
Zoom positioning
Peltier test Positions the zoom motor at a desired point.

Laser calibration Peltier test
LD ON Executes an operation test for the Peltier unit.

Laser calibration
ESC OK NEXT
Executes LD channel calibration.
LD ON
NEXT NEXT
Turns the laser diodes ON.
Adjusts the position of the calibration sensor.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3507
Move to cal. pos. Move to cal. pos.
Temperature Moves the recording head to the calibration po-

Laser power measure sition.
Iop/IopMax
Temperature
Iop/IopMAX graph
Displays the temperatures in the recording head
ESC OK NEXT
and in the PT-R unit.
Laser power measure
Measures the laser power.

Iop/IopMAX
Displays the value obtained by calculating

(IopMax - Iop)/(IopMax - IopI) in percentage.
Iop/IopMAX graph
Displays the graph obtained by calculating

(IopMax - Iop)/(IopMax - IopI) in percentage.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-1.Zero Return screen for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor (Re-
cording head/RH test)
3505
RH zero return RH zero return
RH positioning Focus zero return
Focus zero return

Zoom zero return
Focus positioning
Allows you to return the recording head unit, focus
Zoom zero return motor, and zoom motor to their home positions.
ESC OK NEXT Pressing the OK key after selecting any of the
above keys brings up the zero return confirmation
screen.
3515
ESC

START
Zero return ?
Starts the zero return operation. When the zero
return operation is completed, the Recording
ESC START
Head Unit Test screen reappears.
3516
Processing Now.
Please wait !

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-2.Positioning screens for recording head unit/focus motor/zoom motor (Recording
head/RH test)
3505 RH positioning
RH zero return
RH positioning Focus positioning
Focus zero return Zoom positioning
Focus positioning Allows you to position the recording head unit, focus
Zoom zero return motor, and zoom motor.
ESC OK NEXT Pressing the OK key after selecting any of the
above keys brings up the position entry screen.
3506
Zoom positioning
ESC
Peltier test
Laser calibration
LD ON
ESC OK NEXT
After inputting values for the positions of each

3520
CLR unit, press the ENT key and then the START
7 8 9 key to start the positioning operation.
0.00 mm
4 5 6 Allowable range
1 2 3 RH positioning [mm]: -100.0 to 903.0
0 · — Focus positioning [pulse]: 101 to 4000
ESC START ENT Zoom positioning [pulse]: 201 to 9970
Screen display for RH positioning • For the zero return operation, the home posi-
tion is regarded as the absolute position “0”.
3540
CLR • 1 pulse corresponds to about 1 µm movement
7 8 9 for Focus positioning and Zoom positioning.
2080 [pulse]
4 5 6 When the positioning operation is completed,
1 2 3 the Recording Head Unit Test screen reappears.
0 · —
ESC START ENT
Screen display for Focus posi-

tioning and Zoom positioning
3521
Processing Now.
Please wait !

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-3.Peltier Test (Recording head/RH test)
3506
Zoom positioning Peltier test
Peltier test Allows you to execute an operation test for the Peltier
Laser calibration unit.
LD ON Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Peltier test key brings up the Peltier Test Input
screen.
ESC OK NEXT
ESC
3570 A value ranging from 0 to 255 can be input in

CLR
Peltier ctl. DAC the “Peltier ctl. DAC” field.
0 7 8 9
Values in the range from 0 to 255 correspond to
4 5 6
Peltier drive voltages ranging from 0 to 12V.
1 2 3
0 . -
ESC OK ENT
3571
Pressing the OK key after inputting a value
in this field activates the Peltier unit.
Processing Now STOP

Please wait !
• When an “Error Exe20” is displayed (LD block
STOP temperature too high), the Peltier test key
is used to identify whether the malfunction is in
the Peltier unit itself or in the board driving the
Peltier unit.
• To identify the source of the error, run the
Peltier unit and check whether output occurs
normally from the Peltier unit’s terminal box and
whether the area where the dew condensation
sensor is attached has cooled down.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel V08
3-7-1-4.Laser Calibration (Recording head/RH test)
3506
Zoom positioning Laser calibration
Peltier test Executes LD channel calibration.

Laser calibration The operation for calibrating the laser diodes is
LD ON
the same as that executed by the “Laser calibra-
tion” command from the User Setting Selection
screen.
ESC OK NEXT
Laser calibration key brings up the Resolution Selec-
tion screen.
ESC
3580
Press the key after selecting the resolu-
OK
Resolution
tion at which you want to calibrate the laser di-
1200 2000 2400 odes.
dpi dpi dpi
The Channel Selection screen for selecting a la-
4000 2438 2540
dpi dpi dpi
ser diode channel appears.
ESC OK
3581
CLR
Input the number of the laser diode channel you
want to calibrate, and then press the ENT
7 8 9
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL) key.
4 5 6
32
1 2 3 0-31 : Calibrates only the selected channel.
0 —
32 : Calibrates all channels.
·
ESC START ENT Then, press the START key to execute calibra-
tion.
It takes approximately 20 seconds to calibrate a
channel. To calibrate all the channels, it takes ap-
proximately 3 minutes.
When laser calibration is completed, the Re-
cording Head Unit Test Menu screen reappears.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-5.LD ON (Recording head/RH test)
3506
Zoom positioning LD ON
Peltier test Turns the laser diodes ON at each resolution setting.

Laser calibration
LD ON
Although the laser diodes are not directly visible,
NEVER operate them while the RH unit’s cover is
ESC OK NEXT open.
LD ON key brings up the Resolution
Selection screen.
ESC

Select the exposure resolution for which the la-
3590
Resolution ser diodes will be used, and then press the
1200 2000 2400 OK key.
dpi dpi dpi
The Laser Power Setting screen appears.
4000 2438 2540
dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
3591 Input the desired laser power, and then press the
CLR
ENT key.
Light Adjust
7 8 9
85.0 % Then, press the OK key. The Channel Input
4 5 6
screen for selecting the number of the LD chan-
1 2 3
nel to turn ON appears.
0 · —
ESC OK ENT
3592 Input the number of the channel you want to

CLR
turn ON, and then press the ENT key. Press
7 8 9
LD No. (0-31)
the START key. The laser on the channel you
4 5 6
0
selected is then lighted.
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC START ENT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3595
Pressing the STOP key terminates the laser il-
lumination and returns you to the Recording
Head Unit Test Menu screen.
Processing Now.
Please wait !
STOP

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-6.Calibration Position (Recording head/RH test)
3506
Zoom positioning Calibration position
Peltier test With this command, you can automatically detect and
Laser calibration adjust the position of the calibration sensor board.
LD ON
Whenever you replace the RH unit and/or cali-
ESC OK NEXT bration sensor, be sure to use this command.
Pressing the key after selecting the
OK
3600 Calibration position key brings up the Calibration Sen-

CLR
SEARCH
sor Position Detection screen.
7 8 9
ESC
4 5 6
-0.6 -0.6 [mm] Returns you to the previous screen.
1 2 3
SEARCH
0 · —
Detects the position of the calibration sensor
ESC SAVE ENT
board.
3601
Processing Now.
Please wait !
3600 When detection of the calibration sensor board

SEARCH CLR
is completed, the Calibration Sensor Position
7 8 9
Detection screen reappears.
4 5 6
-0.6 1.0 [mm]
The resulting detection data is also displayed on
1 2 3
this screen.
0 · —
SAVE
ESC SAVE ENT
Saves the new data.
3605 Press YESand then OK to save the posi-

tion of the calibration sensor board.
Save Data ? If you want to cancel the save, press NO and
YES NO
then OK .
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-7.Moving to Calibration Position (Recording head/RH test)
3507 Move to cal. pos.

Move to cal. pos.
Temperature Allows moving of the recording head to the calibra-

Laser power measure
tion position.
Iop/IopMax
key moves the recording head to the
Move to cal. pos.
Iop/IopMAX graph
position where the calibration is executed.
ESC OK NEXT
3610 When the recording head movement is completed, the

menu screen shown on the left appears
Processing Now.
Please wait !

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-8.Temperature (Recording head/RH test)
3507 Temperature
Move to cal. pos.
Temperature Allows displaying of the temperatures in the recording

Laser power measure
head and in the PT-R unit.
Iop/IopMax
Temperature key displays the Temperature
Iop/IopMAX graph
screen.
ESC OK NEXT
ESC
3620 Temperature
Temperature Machine env. :
Machine env.
LD bolck
27.1
25.0
Displays the temperature in the PT-R
RH base
Fin
28.1
28.0
unit.
Dew condens 0 Warning status:
Temperature in the PT-R unit > 28 °C or
OK temperature in the PT-R unit < 18 °C
LD block :
Displays the LD base temperature.
Error status: LD base temperature >28 °C
RH base :
Displays the temperature RH base.
Error status: Temperature around the re-
cording head >35 °C
Fin :
Displays the temperature of a radiating
fin.
Error status: Radiating fin temperature >
55 °C
Dew condens :
Displays the dew condensation sensor
status.
(Unit: kOHM)
Normal status: 0 to 20 kOHM
Warning status: Over 20 kOHM
Error (dew condensation) status:
Over 100 kOHM

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Ambient temperature sensor

(Machine env.)
Focus motor driver

Parabolic mirror
PM80
LS80 Zoom lens
PM81
Dew condensation
sensor (C080)
Cylindrical lens FAN Temparature
Stereographic projection lens sensor (RT82)
No1.Lens Fan for Peltier element
Reflective mirror LD block Temparature

sensor (RT80)
RH base temperature sensor
Cooler for Peltier element
(TP2)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-9.Laser Power Measurement (Recording head/RH test)
3507
Move to cal. pos. Laser power measure
Temperature Allows you to measure the laser power.

Laser power measure Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Iop/IopMax
Laser power measure key brings up the Resolution Se-
lection screen.
Iop/IopMAX graph
ESC
ESC OK NEXT
2260 Select the resolution by which you wish to mea-

Resolution
sure the laser power and then press the OK
1200 2000 2400
dpi dpi dpi key.
The Laser Power Measurement screen appears.
4000 2438 2540
dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
2261 Then, press the OK key to activate the laser

power measurement.
Start OK ?
ESC OK
2262 While the laser power is being measured, the

display shown to the left appears.
When the measurement of laser power is com-
Processing Now. pleted, the following screen appears.
Please wait !

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
2263
{ : The measured value of the laser power is within ± 5%
0
1
8
9
16
17
24
25
(threshold) relative to the target laser power (Lpw)
2
3
10
11
18
19
26
27
× : The measured value of the laser power is not
4 12 20 28 within ± 5% (threshold) relative to the target laser
5 13 21 29
6 14 22 30 power (Lpw)
7 15 23 31
ESC NEXT
With Ver. 1.51 or higher, 4000 dpi and 2000 dpi
NEXT have two types of threshold (5% and 10%). For
details, refer to “Auto Calibration setting screen”.
2264
Target value (Lpw):

The value set in the Laser Power setting screen.
(Select Service Maintenance/Recording head/
RH parameter/Laser power setting.)
PT-R4300
ESC NEXT 1200dpi:240mW/ch 2000dpi:270mW/ch
2400dpi:240mW/ch 2438dpi:240mW/ch
2265 2540dpi:230mW/ch 4000dpi:240mW/ch
0 270mW 8 270mW 16 270mW 24 270mW
1 270mW 9 270mW 17 270mW 25 270mW
2 270mW 10 270mW 18 270mW 26 270mW
3 270mW 11 270mW 19 270mW 27 270mW
4 270mW 12 270mW 20 270mW 28 270mW
5 270mW 13 270mW 21 270mW 29 270mW
6 270mW 14 270mW 22 270mW 30 270mW
7 270mW 15 270mW 23 270mW 31 270mW
ESC NEXT
NEXT
2266
Threshold:
32
33
270mW
270mW
40
41
270mW
270mW
48
49
270mW
270mW
56
57
270mW
270mW
The value set in the Meas. thd (%) ## field in
34
35
270mW
270mW
42
43
270mW
270mW
50
51
270mW
270mW
58
59
270mW
270mW
the Auto Calibration screen.
36
37
270mW
270mW
44
45
270mW
270mW
52
53
270mW
270mW
60
61
270mW
270mW
(Select Recording head/RH parameter/Auto
38
39
270mW
270mW
46
47
270mW
270mW
54
55
270mW
270mW
62
63
270mW
270mW
calibration.) For details, refer to “Auto Calibra-
tion setting screen” .
ESC NEXT
Example) When measuring the laser power of 2400 dpi

270 mW × 5% = 14 mW
When the measurement result is o. 256 mW <= laser power <= 284 mW
When the measurement result is ×. Laser power < 256 mW or Laser power > 284 mW
<Reference>
260 mW × 5% = 13 mW. 260 mW ± 5% = 247 mW, 273 mW
135 mW × 5% = 15 mW. 135 mW ± 5% = 128 mW, 141 mW
Simultaneously pressing both the left and right centers of the 2263 or 2264 screen brings up the measured
values in mW. Repeating the same operation once more returns to the screen of ox display.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-10.Iop/IopMAX (Recording head/RH test)
3507 Iop/IopMAX
Move to cal. pos.
Temperature Calculates and displays the life of laser diodes.

Laser power measure
Iop/IopMAX key brings up the Resolution Selec-
Iop/IopMax
tion screen.
Iop/IopMAX graph
ESC
ESC OK NEXT
Select the resolution and then press the OK
3700
Resolution key.
1200 2000 2400
dpi dpi dpi
4000 2438 2540

dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
3701
The values listed in the screen shown on the left
0 100% 8 100% 16 100% 24 100%
indicate the following formula.
1
2
100%
100%
9
10
100%
100%
17
18
100%
100%
25
26
100%
100%
{(IopMAX - Iop)/(IopMAX - IopI)} × 100
3 100% 11 100% 19 100% 27 100%
4 100% 12 100% 20 100% 28 100% Indicated value ≤ 20%
5 100% 13 100% 21 100% 29 100%
6 100% 14 100% 22 100% 30 100% Life warning status of laser diode
7 100% 15 100% 23 100% 31 100%
Indicated value > 20%
ESC NEXT
Normal status of laser diode
Indicated value = 0%
Life error status of laser diode
Pressing the NEXT key brings up the next
3702
32 100% 40 100% 48 100% 56 100%

screen.
33 100% 41 100% 49 100% 57 100%
34
35
100%
100%
42
43
100%
100%
50
51
100%
100%
58
59
100%
100%
For details, refer to “3-7-4 Laser Calibration
36 100% 44 100% 52 100% 60 100%
37 100% 45 100% 53 100% 61 100% screen”.
38 100% 46 100% 54 100% 62 100%
39 100% 47 100% 55 100% 63 100%
ESC NEXT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-1-11.Iop/IopMAX graph (Recording head/RH test)
3507 Iop/IopMAX graph

Move to cal. pos.
Temperature
Displays the graph of laser lifetime diodes.
Laser power measure
Iop/IopMAX graph key brings up the Resolution Selec-
Iop/IopMax
tion screen.
Iop/IopMAX graph
ESC
ESC OK NEXT
Select the resolution and then press the OK

3700
Resolution key.
1200 2000 2400
dpi dpi dpi
4000 2438 2540

dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
Ch. number of LD
ch 0 The values listed in the screen shown on the left indicate the
100%
following formula.
{(IopMAX - Iop)/(IopMAX - IopI)} × 100
50%
Ch switch button
20% Switch the LD ch. number on the display.
Display period
ESC 3 months
Change the display period.
3 months: Display the data of past three months.
Reserve % of LD Ch switch button
1 month: Display the data of past one month.
Display period 1 week: Display the data of past one week.
The amount of the maximum memory is 72.

(Totality of all resolutions at each ch.)
Example of display
Reserve % of three months in the past of Ch0

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2.RH parameter (Recording head)
3504
RH test RH parameter
RH parameter Allows you to set parameters for the board and laser
diodes in the RH unit.
RH parameterkey brings up the menu screen for
ESC OK setting RH parameters.

3895
Laser power setting
Allows entry of the target laser power used for
Laser power adjust
channel calibration at each resolution.
Laser power confirm
Laser power adjust
Iop MAX Iop, Iop/IopMAX

Allows precise adjustment of the power of each
LD channel at each resolution.
ESC OK NEXT

Allows checking of the electric current used in a

laser diode channel at each resolution.
NEXT NEXT
Allows the checking of the initial current (IopI)

, current to output the rated power (Iopd) and
the current that determines the life of laser di-
odes (IopMAX) of each LD channel at each
resolution.
IopMAX-Iop,Iop/IopMAX
Allows the checking of the initial current (IopI)

, current to output the rated power (Iopd), the
current that determines the life of laser diodes
(IopMAX) and reserve current (%) of each LD
channel at each resolution.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3896
Temperature setting Temperature setting
Laser running time Allows entry of the parameters for temperature

Writing times clear in the RH unit.
Board constant setting
Laser running time
Auto calibration
Displays or clears the cumulative laser illumi-
ESC OK NEXT
nation time.

Displays or clears the number of times that the
NEXT NEXT
laser illumination time data has been written to
the EEPROM.
Board costant setting
Allows the checking of parameters that are

unique to each board of recording head.
Auto calibration
Allows you to set the execution time for auto

calibration.
3897
Set temp. warning Set temp. warning
Focus temp. adjust Allows you to set the warning error level for
LD exchange temperature.

Allows you to adjust the focus temperature.

ESC OK NEXT
LD exchange
Allows setting while an LD is replaced.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-1.Laser power setting (Recording head/RH parameter)
3895

Laser power setting
Laser power adjust Allows entry of the target laser power used for channel
Laser power confirm calibration at each resolution.
Reference laser power Pressing the OK key after selecting the

key brings up the Resolution Selec-
ESC OK NEXT
tion screen.
ESC

3910 Select a resolution and then press the
Resolution OK
1200 2000 2400 key.

dpi dpi dpi The Data Input screen appears.
4000 2438 2540
dpi dpi dpi Input the target laser power for channel calibra-
tion and the power output percentage at each
ESC OK specified measurement point.
PT-R4300
Lpw 1200dpi : 240mw 2000dpi : 270mw
2400dpi : 240mw 4000dpi : 270mw
3901
CLR 2438dpi : 240mw 2540dpi : 230mw
Lpw Ip1 Ip2 Ip3
[mW] [%] [%] [%] 7 8 9
300 90 75 50
4 5 6
LPW(original)
[mW] 1 2 3
300
0 . -
ESC SAVE ENT
Ip1 value
90%(Fixed and applied to all resolutions.)
Ip2 value
Ip3 value
ESC

3905 SAVE
Allows you to save the new data.

Save Data ?
Press YES and then OK to save the setting
YES NO
data.
If you want to cancel the save, press NO and
ESC OK then OK .

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-2.Laser power adjust (Recording head/RH parameter)
3895 Laser power adjust

Laser power setting
Laser power adjust Allows precise adjustment of the power of each LD

Laser power confirm
channel at each resolution.
Laser power adjust key brings up the Resolution Selec-
tion screen.
ESC OK NEXT
ESC

3910
Resolution Select a resolution and then press the OK
1200 2000 2400 key.

dpi dpi dpi The Data Input screen appears.
4000 2438 2540
dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK

All the parameter setting values in this screen are

fixed. Therefore, be sure to never modify any of

them.

A: 1.00
B: 0

SAVE
○
Allow you to save the new data.

○
○
○

data.
then OK .


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-3.Laser power confirm (Recording head/RH parameter)
3895
Laser power setting

Laser power adjust Allows the checking of the power output of LD with
Laser power confirm the value set in the Ip1, Ip2, and Ip3 fields in the Laser
Reference laser power Power setting screen at each resolution.
Iop MAX Iop, Iop/IopMAX Pressing the OK key after selecting the
ESC OK NEXT

key brings up the Resolution Selec-
tion screen.
ESC

Select a resolution and then press the OK
3910 key.
Resolution
The Data confirmation screen appears.
1200 2000 2400
dpi dpi dpi
Pw1 : Power measured when an LD is lit using the
4000 2438 2540 electrical current value “lop” × “lp1”.
dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK electrical current value “lop” × “lp2”.
electrical current value “lop” × “lp3”.
Although it is possible to change the data settings

3921
Iop Pw1 Pw2 Pw3
575 263 209 111
CLR for each LD channel in this screen, modifying any
Ch 0
Ch 1 501 257 197 92 7 8 9 of them could adversely affect the resulting beam
Ch 2 517 259 202 110
Ch 3 542 257 192 88 4 5 6 balance of the recording head.
Ch 4 537 261 201 104
Ch 5 502 248 177 71 1 2 3 Therefore, never change the data setting in this
Ch 6 493 262 201 101
Ch 7 511 259 200 106 0 · — screen.
ESC NEXT ENT
SAVE
・ Allows you to save the new data.

・
ESC ・ NEXT
data.
then OK .
3929
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-4.Reference laser power (Recording head/RH parameter)
3895
Laser power setting Reference laser power
Laser power adjust
Allows the checking of the initial current (IopI), cur-
Laser power confirm
rent that determines the life of laser diodes (IopMAX),
and current to output the rated power (Iopd) of each
LD channel at each resolution.
ESC OK NEXT
Pressing OK key after selecting the
Reference laser power key brings up the Resolution Selec-
tion window.
ESC
3910
Resolution Returns you to the upper layer Menu screen.
1200 2000 2400 Select a resolution and then press the OK
dpi dpi dpi
key.
4000 2438 2540 The Data Confirmation screen appears.
dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
IopI: [mA] (Allowable range: 0 to 1600)
IopI when performing the first calibration after
setting Iopd in the LD Exchange screen
IopMAX: Electric current that determines the life of
3933
Ch0
IopI
570
IopMAX
770
Iopd
800
CLR laser diodes
Ch1
Ch2
502
512
678
691
684
625
7 8 9 lopd : [mA] (Allowable range : 0 to 2000)
Ch3 534 721 697 4 5 6 Maximum rated current for each LD channel
Ch4 540 729 691
Ch5 496 670 645 1 2 3
Ch6 489 660 676
Ch7 507 684 668 0 · —
ESC OK ENT
Although it is possible to change the data settings
for each LD channel in this screen, modifying any
・
of them could adversely affect the resulting beam
・
・ balance of the recording head.
Therefore, never change the data setting in this
screen.
For details, refer to “Laser Calibration screen”.
3939 SAVE

Save Data ?
YES NO
data.
ESC OK then OK .

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-5.IopMAX-Iop, Iop/IopMAX (Recording head/RH parameter)
3895
Laser power setting IopMAX-Iop,Iop/IopMAX
Laser power adjust

Allows the checking of the initial current (IopI) , cur-
Laser power confirm
rent to output the rated power (Iopd), the current that
determines the life of laser diodes (IopMAX) and re-
serve current (%) of each LD channel at each resolu-
ESC OK NEXT tion.
Pressing OK key after selecting the
IopMAX-Iop,Iop/IopMAX key brings up the Resolution Selec-
tion window.
ESC
3910 Returns you to the upper layer Menu screen.

Resolution
1200 2000 2400 Select a resolution and then press the OK
dpi dpi dpi

key.
4000 2438 2540 The Data Confirmation screen appears.
dpi dpi dpi
ESC OK
IopI: [mA] (Allowable range: 0 to 1600)
IopI when performing the first calibration after
3701
IopI Iop IopMAX Remainder
ch 0 570 575
PH96
770 195mA 97.5% Iop: [mA] (Allowable range: 0 to 1600)
ch 1 502 501 678 177mA 100.5%
ch 2
ch 3
512
534
517
542
691
721
174mA 97.2%
179mA 95.7%
Iop when performing the first calibration after
ch 4
ch 5
540
496
537
502
729
670
192mA 101.5%
168mA 96.5%
ch 6
ch 7
489
507
493
511
660
684
167mA 97.6%
173mA 97.7%
IopMAX: Electric current that determines the life of
laser diodes
ESC
Remainder: Reserveof LD current
・
IopMAX-Iop [mA]
・
(IopMAX-Iop)*100/(IopMAX-IopI) [%]
・
Scroll the page.

3939
SAVE
Save Data ? Allows you to save the new data.

YES NO Press YES and then OK to save the setting
data.
ESC OK If you want to cancel the save, press NO and
then OK .

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-6.Temperature setting (Recording head/RH parameter)
3896
Temperature setting Temperature setting
Laser running time Allows entry of the parameter for the temperature in
Writing times clear the RH unit.
Board constant setting Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Auto calibration key brings up the Temperature Set-
Temperature setting
ESC OK NEXT ting screen in which you can input parameter settings.
ESC

3940
CLR
Temperature 25
Pelter ctl. DAC 7 8 9 All the values appearing in this screen are fixed
1.
3.
255
0
2. 255
4 5 6 values. NEVER modify any of them.
Alarm leve
LD 28 Fin 55
1 2 3 Temperature:
Env. 35
0 . - The control temperature of the Peltier element
ESC SAVE ENT has been set.
Alarm level :
The temperatures at which an error will occur
during temperature checks (of the following
items) have been set.
LD : Temperature of the laser diodes.
Fin : Temperature of the Peltier element’s cooling
fan.
Env. : Temperature of the periphery of the RH unit.
3945
SAVE
Save Data ? Allows you to save the new data.

YES NO Press YES and then OK to save the setting
data.
ESC OK If you want to cancel the save, press NO and
then OK .

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-7.Laser running time (Recording head/RH parameter)
3896 Laser running time

Temperature setting
Laser running time Displays or clears the cumulative laser illumination

Writing times clear time.
Auto calibration key brings up the Laser Illumina-
Laser running time
ESC OK NEXT tion Time Display/Clear screen.

ESC

CLEAR
3950
[Hour] Displays the screen in which you can clear the
0. 123 8. 123 16. 123 24. 123
1.
2.
123
123
9.
10.
123
123
17.
18.
123
123
25.
26.
123
123
laser illumination time.
3. 123 11. 123 19. 123 27. 123
4. 123 12. 123 20. 123 28. 123
5. 123 13. 123 21. 123 29. 123
6. 123 14. 123 22. 123 30. 123
7. 123 15. 123 23. 123 31. 123
ESC SAVE CLEAR
Display for 16ch only on PT-R4300E.

Input the number of the ID channel whose illu-
3951
mination time you want to clear, and then press
CLR
the ENT key.
7 8 9
LD No. (0-31 32 : ALL)
4 5 6
0-31 : Clears the laser illumination time for only the
32
1 2 3
selected LD channel.
0 -
32 : Clears the laser illumination time for all the LD
.
ESC START ENT

channels.
Then, press the key. The Laser Illumina-
START
tion Time Clear screen appears.

Pressing the key clears the specified la-
OK
ser illumination time.

3956
CANCEL
The Laser Illumination Time Display/Clear

Data Clear ? screen reappears.
ESC OK CANCEL

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-8.Writing time clear (Recording head/RH parameter)
3896
Temperature setting

Laser running time Displays or clears the number of times that the laser
Writing times clear illumination time data has been written to the
Board constant setting EEPROM.
Auto calibration (The number of times that the laser illumination time
ESC OK NEXT has been written to the EEPROM, equivalent to the
image exposure count, is displayed.)

key brings up the EEPROM Write
Count Clear screen.
ESC

3960 CLEAR
Brings up the screen in which you can clear the

Writing time
EEPROM write count.
1729
Pressing the OK key clears the EEPROM
write count. On command completion, the up-
ESC CLEAR
per layer menu screen reappears.
ESC
3965
CANCEL
Data Clear ?
ESC OK CANCEL

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-9.Board constant setting (Recording head/RH parameter)
3896
Temperature setting Board costant setting
Laser running time Allows entry of parameters that must be set for an in-
Writing times clear dividual board when it is replaced.
Auto calibration key brings up the Recording Head
Board costant setting
ESC OK NEXT Board Parameter Input screen.

ESC

Parameters that are set in this menu are unique
values for each CPU and driver board of the re-
cording head.
Always set these parameter values whenever re-
placing these boards.
Parameters of CPU board for recording head
Temperature sensor
50C : Corrects the input/output differences oc-
curring in the board’s circuitry when re-
3970
CPU Board
Temparature sensor
CLR ceiving input from the temperature sen-
Tm1 Tm2
50C 19.4 30.0
7 8 9 sors provided for the LD base and ma-
100C 30.2 59.5
4 5 6 chine interior.
R1 10 R2 101 1 2 3 Tm1: 20ºC
Calibration sensor
Cal1 488 Cal2 3965 0 . - Tm2: 30ºC
ESC OK ENT 100C : Corrects the input/output differences oc-
ceiving input from the temperature sen-
sors provided for the Peltier fan.
Tm1: 30ºC
Tm2: 60ºC
Corrects the input/output differences oc-
ceiving input from the dew condensation
sensors.
R1: 10 kOHM
R2: 100 kOHM

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3971
CLR
Calibration sensor
7 8 9
Corrects the input/output differences oc-
Cal. Sensor Gain
7759 4 5 6
1 2 3 ceiving input from calibration sensors.
0 . - Cal1: 500 mV
ESC OK ENT Cal2: 4000 mV
Cal. Sensor Gain
Displays the Gain value attached to the
3972 Driver Board 1
CLR
calibration sensor board.
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.26
ch.19
235
267
949
966
7 8 9 Parameters of driver board for recording head
ch.12
ch. 5
265
242
993
969
4 5 6 Im1, Im2
ch. 6 251 982
ch.13 261 994 1 2 3 Corrects the input/output differences occurring
ch.20 242 966
ch.27 251 970 0 . - in the driver board’s circuitry when outputting
ESC OK ENT current to run the LD.
3973 Driver Board 2

CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.28 248 969 7 8 9
ch.21 264 986
ch.14 235 955
ch. 7 246 970
4 5 6
ch. 0 258 972
ch.15 251 971 1 2 3
ch.22 238 971
ch.29 256 973 0 . -
ESC OK ENT
3974 Driver Board 3

CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch. 8 243 960 7 8 9
ch. 1 239 957
ch.30 251 974
ch.23 263 988
4 5 6
ch.16 237 958
ch. 9 262 979 1 2 3
ch. 2 254 977
ch.31 272 1001 0 . -
ESC OK ENT
3975 Driver Board 4

CLR
Im1[mA] Im2[mA]
ch.24 254 968 7 8 9
ch.17 249 971
ch.10 243 966
ch. 3 254 967
4 5 6
ch. 4 258 978
ch.11 257 958 1 2 3
ch.18 249 975
ch.25 258 968 0 . -
ESC SAVE ENT
3999
data.
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-10.Auto calibration (Recording head/RH parameter)
3896
Temperature setting Auto calibration
Laser running time Allows you to set the time for auto calibration and the
Writing times clear temperature at which an error warning will occur.
Board constant setting Pressing OK key after selecting the
Auto calibration key brings up the setting screen for
Auto calibration
ESC OK NEXT auto calibration time and the error warning levels.
ESC
Returns you to the upper level Menu screen.

3980
Auto calibration CLR
Meas. period (Allowable range: 0 to 99)
Meas. period
Meas. thd(%)
24
5 7 8 9
Once the exposure is performed by the number
Meas. thd2(%)
Cal. period (Hour)
10
10 4 5 6
of times specified in this parameter, the light
Iop warning 20
1 2 3
intensity is automatically measured.
Cal. low temp 16
IopMAX/ IopI(%) 135
0 . -
Default: 24
---- 0
ESC SAVE ENT

Meas. thd (%) (Allowable range: 0 to 9999)
The value set in the Meas. thd (%) field, is the
allowable range for the measured value of light
intensity. If the measured value falls out of this
allowable range, a calibration is performed.
Default: 5
Meas. thd2 (%) (Allowable range: 0 to 9999)
The value set in the Meas. thd2 (%) field, is the
allowable range for the measured value of light
intensity. If the measured value falls out of this
allowable range, a calibration is performed and
display the request message for the customer.
Default: 10
Cal. period (Hour) (Allowable range: -60 to 999)
Once the exposure is performed for the period
specified in this parameter, a calibration is auto-
matically performed. A negative value indicates
minutes while a positive value indicates hours.
When “0” is set here, calibration is not per-
formed. When “-1”, “-2”, or “-3” is set here, cali-
bration is executed before each time an exposure
is performed. Default setting value is 10 hours.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Iop warning (Allowable range: 0 to 100)
A warning message appears on screen when the
value obtained by calculating the following for-
mula is smaller than the value that was specified in
this parameter when performing the calibration.
{(IopMAX-Iop)/(IopMAX-Iop)}*100
Default setting value is 20.
Cal. low temp (Allowable range: 0 to 300)
The calibration is prohibited when the tempera-
ture for an LD block is lower than the tempera-
ture specified in this parameter.
Default setting value is 16 °C.
IopMAX / IopI
Collection value to judge the lifetime from ini-
tial current value.
Default: 135
Never change.
3971 Press YES and then OK to save the setting

data.
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

Light intensity
measurement/ Calibration conditions Channel to be calibrated Panel message Task
D-52
Laser calibration
When light intensity for any Only deviated channel(s).

channel falls out of the range However, if four or more “Please inspect xx plates just Warning/Continue
of target value +/- 5% channels have deviated, all before this warning.” the exposure.
Light intensity (threshold value 1) channels will be calibrated.
After PT-R power is turned ON and before the first plate exposure.
measurement
When light intensity for any "Please inspect carefully xx
channel falls out of the range plates just before this Task
All channels
of target value +/- 10% warning, as they may have request./Pause
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
(threshold value 2) quality problem on them."

Light intensity (threshold value 1) channels will be calibrated.
After exposure of 24th plate and before exposure of the next plate.
measurement
When light intensity for any "Please inspect carefully xx
All channels
After 10 hours of exposure time has elapsed and before exposure of the next plate. Laser calibration - All channels No display. -
D.Panel

When calibration with another
resolution has been performed
(threshold value 1) channels will be calibrated.
according to threshold value 1 Light intensity
When calibration has been or has been performed after 10 measurement
performed with another hours of exposure time has When light intensity for any "Please inspect carefully xx
resolution before the elapsed. channel falls out of the range plates just before this Task
currently set resolution was All channels
changed. (threshold value 2) quality problem on them."
When the resolution has When the calibration with

been changed. another resolution has been
Laser calibration - All channels No display. -
performed according to
threshold value 2.

When light intensity measurement with the present resolution (threshold value 1) channels will be calibrated.
Light intensity
was not performed within 24 plates (just before the previous
measurement
resolution was changed to the present resolution). When light intensity for any "Please inspect carefully xx
All channels

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-11.Set temp. warning (Recording head/RH parameter)
3897
Set temp. warning Set temp. warning
Focus temp. adjust Allows setting of the temperature warnings and error
LD exchange levels.
Set temp. warning
ESC OK NEXT you can set the temperature warnings and error levels.
ESC
4140
CLR
Do not change the parameters of (##) displayed
Set temp. 2.
(35) 7 8 9
in this screen. These parameters are used when
35
(28) 28
(22) 22 4 5 6
switching error displays that are related to tem-
(16) 16
(17) 17
1 2 3 peratures.
Fine ch 0:0-,1:32- 0
--- 0
0 0 . - (35) : Temperature around recording head
ESC SAVE ENT (28) : Temperature in the PT-R unit
(22) : LD base temperature
(18) : Temperature in the PT-R unit
(17) : LD base temperature
Fine ch 0:0-,1:32-:
PT-R4300E/S
Reserved: Fixed to 0
4145
data.
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-12.Focus temp adjust. (Recording head/RH parameter)
3897

Set temp. warning
Focus temp. adjust Allows you to adjust the focus temperature.

LD exchange Pressing the OK key after selecting the

key brings up the Focus Tempera-
ture Adjustment window.
ESC OK NEXT ESC
Focus temp. adjust :

Allows you to set ON/OFF of the focus tem-
3995
perature adjustment.
Focus temp. adjust On
RH base temp.:
RH base temp. 21.3 Displays the current temperature of the RH
Focus position 4225
base.
Focus position:
ESC NEXT Displays the current position of the focus mo-
tor. The “---” mark appears when home posi-
tioning is not completed.
3996
CLR Gain.:
7 8 9 The amount of focus movements when tem-
Gain -0.5 pulse
4 5 6 perature changes 1 degree.
Width 2.0 deg
1 2 3 PT-R4300: -0.5
0 · —
ESC SAVE ENT

Width:
DWhen temperature changes to reference tem-
perature beyond the value set up here, tempera-
ture compensation of focus becomes effective.
PT-R4300: 2.0

data.
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
• The focus temperature
The focus temperature adjustment functions as shown in the below graph.
• PT-R4300
• 21 degrees <= recording head base temperature <= 25 degrees
Performs exposure with the focus value set for the PT-R.
(Focus is notmoved within 23 +/- Width value degrees.)
• Recording head base temperature < 21 degrees
Performs exposure with 1.0 pulses (=Gain*Width) added to the focus set value, when-
ever the temperature decreases in increments of 2 degrees (=width value) from 21
degrees.
• 25 degrees < recording head base temperature
Performs exposure with 1.0 (=Gain*Width) pulses reduced from the focus set value,
whenever the temperature increases in increments of 2 degrees (=width value) from 25
degrees.
PT-R4300
Focus pulse
Setting data+(Gain*Width)*2 pulse

1 pulse
Setting data+(Gain*Width)*1 pulse
1 pulse
Setting data
1 pulse
Setting data-(Gain*Width)*1 pulse
1 pulse
Setting data-(Gain*Width)*2 pulse
1 pulse
··· 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 ···
Recording Head
Base temp. Base Temparature(ºC)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-7-2-13.LD exchange (Recording head/RH parameter)
3897
Set temp. warning LD exchange
Focus temp. adjust Allows for setting when exchanging an LD.

LD exchange Pressing the OK key after selecting the
LD exchange key brings up the LD Exchange
screen.
ESC OK NEXT ESC
4000
Do not input the Iopd value in this screen except
LD change CLR
for when exchanging the LD.
LD No. (0-63)
7 8 9
0 When laser calibration is performed, after input-
Iopd(mA) 0 4 5 6
ting and saving the Iopd value in this screen, the
1 2 3
Iop value at the time will be used as an IopI value.
0 · -
In consequence, the life of the LD changes in ac-
ESC SAVE ENT
cordance with the IopMAX value change.
LD No. (0-63):
Allows you to input the LD No. you wish to exchange.
Iopd (mA): (Allowable range: 512 to 1601)
Allows you to input an Iopd value for the LD
4001 you wish to exchange.
Pressing the OK key after pressing the
Laser running time clear?
YES key clears the laser illumination time of
YES NO
the channel that was specified in the previous
screen. However, pressing the OK key after
ESC OK pressing the NO key does not alter the laser
illumination time.
The screen shown on the left only appears with

Ver. 1.51 or higher, not with Ver. 1.23 or lower.
4002
With Ver. 1.23 or lower, the laser illumination
time of the channel specified in the previous
Save Data ?
screen will be automatically cleared.
YES NO
data.
ESC OK
then OK .
When you wish to exchange more than one LD,
perform the above procedure repeatedly.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8.Input parameter
3051 Input parameter

Input parameter
Machine option select With this command, you can enter and change various
I/O Read/Write parameters.
Special action Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Special action 2 Input parameter key brings up the Input Parameter
ESC OK NEXT Menu screen.
3705
Set Correction data Set Correction data
Allows you to set correction values for pre-
Set preset Plate type cisely adjusting the image length to be exposed
Drum base position on a plate (in the secondary scanning direction)
Drum position and adjusting the exposure start origin.
ESC OK NEXT Set preset Plate type
Allows you to register the data for preset plate
types.
Drum base position
Allows you to correct for the deviation between
the drum reference point and the encoder Z
pulse point.
Drum position
Allows you to precisely adjust the positioning
of the drum.
3706 Punch adjust
Punch adjust
Set punch data Allows you to set a correction value for posi-
Set Focus Zoom tioning the punch unit with reference to a
Drum parameter plate’s center, and adjusts the spring tension in
Set misc. data the plate side alignment unit.
ESC OK NEXT Set punch data
Allows you to set parameters for optional punch
units.
Set Focus Zoom
Allows you to store the focus/zoom value of the

preset plate type.
Drum parameter
Allows you to set parameters for the drum mo-
tor driver.
Set misc. data
The Mfg. No of the machine is already entered.
) D-57
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3707
Set resolution Set resolution
Set weight Sets the address in the parameter table for regis-
Set cassette data tering the RH unit’s settings for each resolution.
Set weight
Test pattern
Sets the weights of the trailing edge clamps and
ESC OK NEXT
the balancer.
5AJ ?=IIAJJA @=J=
Sets the sizes of the plates to be used in the
zones 2 and 3.

Sets the password for various special functions.
Test pattern
Set the order to the test pattern.

3708
Option for engineering Option for engineering
Initialize data For debugging

DHCP
Allows you to initialize various data.

DHCP
ESC OK NEXT
Download mode (DHCP) is switched according
to connected method of Rmlight.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-1.Set correction data (Input parameter)
3705 Set Correction data

Set Correction data
Allows you to set correction values for precisely ad-
Set preset Plate type justing the image length to be exposed on a plate (in
Drum base position the secondary scanning direction) and adjusting the
exposure start origin.
Drum position
ESC OK NEXT
key brings up the Correction Data
Set Correction data
Setting screen. From this screen you can input correc-

tion values, precisely adjust the image length to be ex-
posed on a plate in the secondary
scanning direction, and adjust the exposure start ori-
gin.
ESC
0.000 [%] 4 [%] (Allowable range: -9.999 to 9.999)

0.000 [mm] This correction value precisely adjusts the
0.000 [mm] length of an image exposed on a plate in the sec-
0.000 [mm]
ondary scanning direction.
L:0.0 [Ǵ] Drum p When this value is changed, the Zoom adjust-
S:0.0 [Ǵ]
ment is needed.
The correction value is used to adjust the image

length exposed on a plate in the secondary scan-
ning direction.
For example, if an image which is 800 mm in the
secondary scanning direction is exposed on a
plate while this correction value is set to “0”, if the
resulting length of the exposed image on the
plate is 799 mm, the image deviation equals:
(800 - 799)/800 × 100 = 0.125 (%)
Inputting this value as the correction value above
allows you to precisely expose an image on a
plate with exactly the same length as its second-
ary scanning dimension.

) D-59
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel V08
Refer to ‘chapter B, the punch position and the
exposure start position adjustment’ for details of
the following each value.
4 [mm] (Allowable range: -9.99 to 9.99)

Input a correction value for the exposure start
position in the primary scanning direction.
4 [mm] (Allowable range: -9.99 to 9.99)
Input a correction value for the exposure start
origin in the secondary scanning direction.
+ [mm] (Allowable range: -9.99 to 9.99)
Input a correction value for the image position
in the primary scanning direction.
[µm] (Allowable range: -350 to 350)
This setting can correct deviation from the stan-
dard pin position.
L: When the plate width is 610 mm or more
S: When the plate width is less than 610 mm
3742
CLR
Grip adj. [0.1mm] 0
A-Grip adj. [0.1mm] -15
7 8 9
Temp. offset [x0.1] -3
0 4 5 6
to Clamp [0.1mm] -80
t=0.24 0 1 2 3
t=0.20 0
t=0.15 0
0 · —
ESC OK ENT
Grip : (Allowable range: -20 to 999)

After-Grip : (Allowable range: -20 to 999)
Adjusts the unexposed area of leading grip margin (Grip) and trailing grip margin (After-Grip).
• When input value is -20 to 119
Corrects the present unexposed area, 1 enlarges the area by 0.1 mm.
•When input value is 120 to 999
Sets the unexposed area. Input an appropriate size, 1 enlarges the area by 0.1 mm.
Temp. offset: [0.1°C] (Allowable range: -50 to 50)
Input a correction value for the temperature sensor. For details, refer to “Temperature correction
sensor adjustment” in chapter C.
to Clamp [0.1mm]: (Allowable range: -200 to 200)
Plate slow down position at plate loading. (Distance of reference pin and plate leading edge.
Target is 3mm.) Effect all size.
t=0.24: Effect to t=0.24mm

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3743 Expo start X: [0.01 mm] (Allowable range: -999 to

CLR
Expo start X [0.01mm]
999)
1200 0
7 8 9
2000 0 Input correction values for the exposure start
2400 0
4 5 6
4000
2438
0
0
point in the secondary scanning direction for
1 2 3
2540 0
each resolution.
0 · —
ESC NEXT ENT
3744 Expos start Y: [0.01 mm] (Allowable range: -999 to

CLR
Expo start Y [0.01mm]
999)
1200 0
7 8 9
2000
2400
0
0
Input the correction values for the exposure
4 5 6
4000
2438
0
0
start point in the primary scanning direction for
1 2 3
2540 0
each resolution.
0 · —
ESC NEXT ENT

data.
If you do not want to save the data, press NO
and then OK .


) D-61
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-2.Set preset Plate type (Input parameter)
3705
Set Correction data Set preset Plate type
Allows you to register the data for preset plate types.
Set preset Plate type Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Drum base position Set preset Plate type key brings up the Preset Plate Type
Drum position Setting screen.
ESC OK NEXT ESC

Select the number of the plate type option you
want to modify, and then change or correct its
1057
data.
31 Media Type 31 • The default plate type data has already been
32 Media Type 32 set in the factory before shipment.
33 Media Type 33
• For details on how to change or correct plate
34 Media Type 34
type data.
35 Media Type 35
ESC OK NEXT

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-3.Drum base position (Input parameter)
3705
Set Correction data Drum base position
Allows you to correct for the deviation between the
Set preset Plate type drum reference point and the encoder Z pulse point.
Drum base position
key brings up the Drum Base Posi-
Drum base position
Drum position
tion Setting screen in which you can correct the devia-
ESC OK NEXT
tion (in pulses) between the drum reference point and
the encoder Z pulse point.
ESC

4-),

Returns Detects the deviation (in pulses) be-

! " tween the drum reference point and the encoder

#$% Z pulse point.

Before using this 4-), command, be sure to in-
stall the drum positioning jigs. For details, refer to
“5-1 Adjustment of primary scanning section’s
home position” in chapter C.

After completing the detection of the deviation
between the drum reference point and the en-

coder Z pulse point, the screen shown on the left
appears. Press the OK key.
PT-R4000/4100/4300/4300E/S

: 0.20mm / 1 Puls (1000Puls encoder)
3840
CLR
The encoder pulse multiplies four electrically
READ
which is used to the drum positionig.
7 8 9
Drum base position
4 5 6
1105 1105 [pulse]
1 2 3
The resulting data is then displayed on the
0 •
screen.
ESC SAVE ENT
SAVE

) D-63
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Press YES and then OK to save the result-
ing data.
then OK .


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel V10
3-8-4.Drum position (Input parameter)
3705
Set Corection data Drum position
Allows you to precisely adjust the positioning of the
Set preset Plate type drum.
Drum base position Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Drum position Drum position key brings up the Drum Position
ESC OK NEXT Precise Adjustment screen.
ESC

Drum position moves by 0.2mm per 1pulse.
3850 Lead clamp (load)

Drum position [pulse] CLR
Lead clamp (load): 0 Not use
7 8 9
Front Sensor:
Tail clamp:
10
12
Front Sensor [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
4 5 6
Squeeze roller:
Balancer pin:
0
0
Perform the fine adjustment for the position check for plate
1 2 3
Pick up clamp: 4 leading edge when loading.
Tail clamp (unload): 1
Length Sensor: -5 0 . - (Adjust the position of the sensor so that the sensor turns
ESC SAVE ENT from On to Off.)
Tail clamp [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Precisely adjusts the drum position at which the trailing edge
clamps will hold a plate.
Squeeze rollor [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Precisely adjusts the drum position at which the squeeze
roller will be lowered.
Balancer pin
Not use
Pick up clamp [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Precisely adjusts the drum position to the pick up clamp
position.
Tail clamp (unload) [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Precisely adjusts the drum position at which the trailing edge
clamps will be released from the drum.
Length Sensor [pulse] (Allowable range: -100 to 100)
Sets a value to correct the plate size in the primary scanning
direction.
Adjust the value in the screen accessed by the following order.
(Select User Maintenance ® 40 .)

Press YES and then OK to save the setting data.
If you want to cancel the save, press NO and then OK .


) D-65
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-5.Punch adjust (Input parameter)
3706
Punch adjust
Set punch data

Allows you to set a correction value for positioning
Set Focus Zoom
the punch unit with reference to a plate’s center, and
Drum parameter adjusts the spring tension in the plate side alignment
Set misc. data unit.
ESC OK NEXT

key brings up the Punch Adjust-
ment screen in which you can correct the punch posi-
tion with reference to the plate center and adjust the
tension of the spring in the plate side alignment unit.
-5+
3860
CLR : Adjust centering distance of cam finely.
Punch adjust
7 8 9 *1 : Collection value of cam sensor of home side.

0.000 [mm]
4 5 6 *2 : Collection value of cam sensor of away side.
*1 0.000 [mm]
1 2 3
*2 0.000 [mm]
0 . -
ESC SAVE ENT


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-6.Set punch data (Input parameter)
3706
Punch adjust Set punch data
Set punch data Allows you to set parameters for optional punch units.
Set Focus Zoom Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Drum parameter Set punch data key brings up the Punch Data Set-
Set misc. data ting screen in which you can set data for the optional
ESC OK NEXT punch units.
ESC

Enter the punch unit position number (connec-

tor number) for the optional punch unit

mounted on the machine.

! Entering a number for a punch unit position

where no punch unit is mounted could cause an
" error during punch operation.
Also input the punch pitch into the Set punch
name field to simplify later settings of the
punch unit name.
For punch unit position numbers, refer to “E.
REFERENCE”.
3885
SAVE

Save Data ?
YES NO
data.
ESC OK
then OK .

) D-67
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-7.Set Focus / Zoom (Input parameter)
3706 Set Focus Zoom

Punch adjust
Set punch data Allows you to enter the focus/zoom value for the pre-
Set Focus Zoom set plate type.
Drum parameter Pressing OK key after selecting the
Set misc. data Set Focus Zoom key brings up the focus/zoom value
ESC OK NEXT entry screen for the preset plate type.
3760
CLR
The thickness of plate is set up. It is the thickness of the ref-
Thickness 0.30mm
7 8 9 erence for Focus and Zoom value set up on the next screen.
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 · —
ESC OK ENT
3762 The Focus and Zoom value are set up corresponding to plate
CLR
[pulse] [pulse]
1200 2815 10545 7 8 9 thickness inputted on the before screen
------ 2815 15000
10545
4 5 6
2400 2815
------ 2815 15000 1 2 3
2438 2820 11155 Even if it changes plate thickness on the before screen, the
2540 2820 12730 0 · —
Focus and Zoom value on this screen are not changed. When
ESC SAVE ENT
plate thickness is changed on a before screen, it is necessary
to change Focus and Zoom value according to the plate
thickness.
When a preset media setup is copied in ‘Set media type’, this

value is copied to the Focus value and Zoom value in it.
3763
Please refer to ‘Chap.B: Installation / Set media type’.
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-8.Drum parameter (Input parameter)
3706
Punch adjust Drum parameter
Set punch data Allows setting of the parameters for the drum motor
Set Focus Zoom driver.
Drum parameter Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Set misc. data key brings up the menu screen for
Drum parameter
ESC OK NEXT the drum parameter.

Allows the checking of the servo pack param-

eter value.

Displays the status of the servo pack.
Initialize
Sends the default parameters of the servo pack

to the servo pack.

Adjusts the Offset value for the servo pack.

Adjusts the Gain value for the servo pack.

) D-69
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-8-1.Parameter set (Input parameter/ Drum parameter)

Allows checking of the servo pack parameter value.

key brings up the servo pack pa-

rameter check screen.

ESC

Input the parameter number to be changed.
4010
Positioning Pn100 15 CLR The screen shown on the left includes the parameters
Pn101 25
7 8 9 relevant to the operation of the primary-scanning mo-
Pn103 3000
Pn100 300
4 5 6 tor.
Pn101 4000
Pn103 100 1 2 3
0
0 0 . -
Do not change these parameter values as they
ESC OK ENT
are fixed.
Refer to ‘C: Replace and adjustment for servo pack’ for the
details of each data.

data.
then OK .


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-8-2.Status read (Input parameter/ Drum parameter)

Allows displaying of the status of the servo pack.

key brings up the servo pack status

screen.

-5+
4020
Sarvo pack status 850A : Current status
850A 0099 8502 0099 8500 to 8509 : History of the primary-
8514 0101 8503 0099
8517 00CA 8504 0099 scanning servo pack status
8518 0014 8505 0099
8000
8001
0000
FFFF
8506
8507
0099
0099
Other than above : Unique parameter values
8500
8501
0071
0099
8508
8509
0099
0099
for the servo pack
ESC
Indication Name Description Remedy

Parameter corruption There is an error in the EEPROM data for the Replace the servo pack.
02 servo pack.
Main circuit’s detection There is an error in the detection data of the Replace the servo pack.
03 section error power circuit.
Parameter setting error The value set by the user is out of the allowa- Initialize or replace the servo pack.
04 ble range.
Compatibility error The capacity of the motor is incompatible with Replace the servo pack, the regenerative resist-
05 that of the servo pack. ance, and/or the motor.
Overcurrent or heat sink Overcurrent was detected or the heat sink of Check the wiring connection, check the periph-
10 overheat the servo pack was overheated. eral temperature, replace the servo pack, and/or
replace the motor.
Regenerative error The regenerative resistance was disconnected Replace the servo pack and/or regenerative re-
30 or the regenerative transistor was damaged. sistance.
Regenerative overload The regenerative energy exceeds the capacity Initialize the servo pack or replace the regener-
32 of the regenerative resistance. ative resistance.
Overvoltage The DC voltage of the main circuit is abnor- Check the input voltage and/or replace the ser-
40 mally high. vo pack.
Undervoltage The DC voltage of the main circuit has been Check the input voltage and/or replace the ser-
41 lowered. vo pack.
Overspeed The number or rotation of the motor is abnor- Check the wiring connection, initialize the ser-
51 mally high. vo pack, and/or replace the servo pack.
Overload (instantaneous The operation was carried out for some sec- Check the wiring connection, replace the mo-
71 maximum load) onds at a torque that exceeded the rated value tor, and/or replace the servo pack.
significantly.
Overload (continuous max- The operation was carried out continuously at Same as above
72 imum load) a torque that exceeded the rated value signifi-
cantly.
Overload of DB The rotational energy of the dynamic brake Replace the servo pack.
73 operation exceeded the capacity of the
dynamic brake resistance value.
Overload of incoming The power supply to the main circuit was Replace the servo pack.
74 resistance turned ON/OFF frequently.
Heat sink overheat The heat sink of the servo pack was Check the peripheral temperature and/or
7A overheated. replace the servo pack.
Encoder backup alarm The encoder power supplies were deactivated Initialize the servo pack, replace the motor,
81 entirely and the position data was cleared. and/or replace the servo pack.
Encoder sum check alarm There is an error in the result of the encoder Initialize the servo pack, replace the motor,
82 memory sum check. and/or replace the servo pack.
Encoder battery alarm The voltage for the backup battery of the Initialize the servo pack and/or replace the
83 absolute value encoder has been lowered. motor.
Encoder data alarm There is an error in the encoder internal data. Check the wiring connection and/or replace the
84 servo motor.
Encoder overspeed The encoder rotated at a high speed when the Check whether the recording drum is rotating
85 power was turned ON. and/or replace the servo pack.

) D-71
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Indication Name Description Remedy
Encoder overheat The motor temperature in the encoder is too Check the peripheral temperature, replace the
86 high. (This is detected only when the absolute servo pack, and/or replace the servo motor.
value encoder is used.)
Speed command A/D There is an error in the A/D converter for Replace the servo pack.
b1 converter error inputting the speed command.
Torque command A/D There is an error in the A/D converter for Replace the servo pack.
b2 converter error inputting the torque command.
bF System alarm A servo pack system error occurred. Replace the servo pack.
Detection of runaway The servo motor ran away. Check the wiring connection, replace the servo
C1 protection pack, and/or replace the motor.
Encoder clear error/multi- The number of rotations for the multi-turn Replace the motor and/or replace the servo
C8 turn limit setting error setting of the absolute value encoder could not pack.
be cleared or set correctly.
Encoder communication The communication between the encoder and Check the wiring connection, replace the
C9 error the servo pack cannot be established. motor, and/or replace the servo pack.
Encoder parameter error An encoder parameter has been corrupted. Replace the servo pack and/or replace the
CA
motor.
Encoder echo back error The communication with the encoder is Check the wiring connection, replace the
Cb
inaccurate. motor, and/or replace the servo pack.
Disagreement of the multi- The multi-turn limit values of the encoder and Initialize the servo pack.
CC turn limit value the servo pack disagree.
Excessive positional The positional deviation pulse exceeded the Check the wiring connection, initialize the
d0 deviation user set value. servo pack, and/or replace the servo pack.
Open-phase of the power One of the three phases for the power supply Check the wiring connection and/or replace the
F1 supply line of the main circuit is disconnected. servo pack.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-8-3.Initialize (Input parameter/ Drum parameter)

Initialize

Allows sending of the default parameters of the servo

pack to the servo pack.


Initializekey sends the default parameters of

the servo pack to the servo pack.
ESC
4030
Send initial parameter
Data send OK ?
ESC OK

) D-73
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-8-4.Adjust Offset (Input parameter/ Drum parameter)

Allows adjusting of the Offset value for the servo

pack.

key brings up the servo pack Offset
value adjustment screen.

Make sure to perform this procedure when re-

placing the motor, servo pack, and PIO.
ESC

4040 It will take about 10 seconds before the screen on
the left appears.
Adjust Offset
The servo offset is adjusted automaticaly.
Offset : 0 +
ESC

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-8-5.Adjust Gain (Input parameter/ Drum parameter)
Adjust gain with plate loaded.

Allows adjusting of the Gain value for the servo pack.


key brings up the servo pack Gain

value adjustment screen.

Be sure to check the Gain value whenever you

replace the motor, the servo pack, or the PIO
board.
When performing the above procedure, be care-

ful as the recording drum will rotate.
ESC

4050
It will take about 10 seconds before the screen on
Adjust Gain the left appears.
Offset : 108 + Use the POI board trimmer to adjust the value .
• PT-R4300E/S: A0 +/- 1
ESC

) D-75
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-9.Set misc. data (Input parameter)
3706
Punch adjust
Set misc. data
Set punch data Displays miscellaneous machine information includ-

Set Focus Zoom ing the manufacturing number of the machine.
Drum parameter Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Set misc. data key brings up the data input screen
Set misc. data
ESC OK NEXT for miscellaneous machine information including the

manufacturing number of the machine.
ESC

4100 Machine type 2:
CLR
Mfg.no(high): 58180 Default setting value: 0 Not used.
Mfg.no(low):
7 8 9
6
Mfg.year: 98
Machine type:
4 5 6
Mfg.month: 12 Default setting value: 0 Not used.
Machine type 2: 0 1 2 3
Machine type : 4
0 . - These default settings are OFF.
ESC NEXT ENT Disable float sensor:
Disable float sensor
Hide STOP button at 50%:
4101
OFF
Hide STOP button at 50% while exposure.
Disable float sensor:
Spiral correction always ON:
Hide STOP button at 50%: OFF
Spiral correction is enabled every exposure pattern.
Spiral correction always ON: OFF
Spiral correction always OFF:
Spiral correction always OFF: OFF
Spiral correction is disabled every exposure pat-
Enable 1000RPM: OFF
tern.
ESC NEXT
Enable 1000RPM:
Enable 1000rpm exposure.
Disable HEAD cable checking
4102 Disable head cable checking function.
Disable head cable checking OFF Disable balancer pos. checking
Disable balancer pos. checking OFF Disable balancer pos. checking function.
Disable PIF preload command OFF Disable PIF preload command
Load after 2nd motor init OFF Disable PIF preload command from the RIP.
Set "Adjust H/V" by 0.01mm OFF Load after 2nd motor init
ESC NEXT Load plate after RH is returned back to origin.
Set ‘Adjust H/V’ by 0.01mm
Enable to input 0.01mm unit to the ‘Adjust H/V’ in
the ‘Set printing machine’. (Default is 0.1mm)
4105

Save Data ? data.
YES NO
then OK .
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-10.Set resolution (Input parameter)
Set resolution
3707
Set resolution
Set weight Allows controlling of the data for each resolution used
Set cassette data by the recording head.
Password for spec. func Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Test pattern Set resolutionkey brings up the recording head
ESC OK NEXT data control screen.
Do not change any of the data.
ESC
4120
CLR
PT-R4300E/S: 2,1,2,3,2,4
Set density
dpi ZP 7 8 9
1200 2
2000 1 4 5 6
2400 2
4000 3 1 2 3
2438 2
2540 4 0 . -
ESC SAVE ENT
4105
data.
Save Data ?
YES NO
then OK .
ESC OK

) D-77
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-11.Set weight (Input parameter)
3707
Set resolution Set weight
Set weight Allows inputting of the weights of the trailing edge

Set cassette data clamps and the balancers.
Test pattern Set weight key brings up the screen in which
ESC OK NEXT you can input the weights of the trailing edge clamps
and the balancers.
ESC
4130
Clamper [g] (Allowable range: 0.00 to 999.99)
CLR
Input the total weight of three trailing edge
7 8 9
Clamper: 724.79[g] clamps.
4 5 6
Balancer: 334.89[g] Balancer [g] (Allowable range: 0.00 to 999.99)
1 2 3
Input the average weight of four balancers.
0 •
ESC SAVE ENT
4135
data.
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-12.Set cassette data (Input parameter)
3707
Set resolution
5AJ ?=IIAJJA @=J=
Set weight Allows the setting of the plate size to be used for each
Set cassette data cassette zone.
Test pattern key brings up the screen in which
5AJ ?=IIAJJA @=J=
ESC OK NEXT
you can set the plate size for each cassette zone.
ESC

4140 Paper pad suck [0.1 mm] (Allowable range: -20 to 20)
Set cassette data [mm] CLR
Paper pad suk 10 7 8 9

The interleaf pad position for securing inter-
Paper pad nip
Y size base A
190
0 4 5 6
leaves is corrected. The reference point is where
Y size base B 9808
Y size base C 478
1 2 3
the metal sensor of the interleaf pad turns ON.
Zone-2 min. size 460
Zone-3 min. size 610
0 -
Paper pad nip [0.1 mm]:
Zone-4 min. size 730 .
ESC NEXT ENT

Positional relationship between the interleaf
pad and the nip roller while an interleaf is dis-
charged is corrected. Set the distance from the
interleaf pad origin.
Y size base A, B, C:
The plate size in the Y (primary scanning) di-
rection is checked while the plate is transferred
from the SA-L/MA-L in reference to the value
specified for this parameter.
The values of these parameters must be set

again in case of the following conditions.
• The nip roller used at the bridge section of the
SA-L/MA-L has been replaced.
• The distance between sensor 1 and sensor 2 of
the SA-L/MA-L has been changed.
• The sensor 1 amplifier trimmer of the SA-L/MA-
L has been turned.
Zone 2 min. size:

Minimum size for zone area 2
Zone 3 min. size:
Zone 4 min. size:

) D-79
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
4141
Set cassette data [mm] CLR
motion para 1 (Allowable range: 0 to 9999)
motion Para1 1039 7 8 9 Sets an operation when returning the plate pad.
motion Para2 000
---- 0 4 5 6 Default setting value is 0.
---- 0
---- 0
1 2 3 Each digit of the parameter value has meaning.
---- 0
----
----
0
0 . - 1 0 3 9
ESC SAVE ENT ABCD
A [10%] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)

Increases the amount by percentage of the first
raising of the plate pad that has picked up a
plate. During the operation, the plate pad is first
raised and lowered slightly. The “first raising”
however, refers to the operation that follows
this movement.
The plate pad is raised by 50 mm.
Example:
When “1” is set, the plate pad unit is raised
10% more than the default (50 mm).
B [10%] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Increases by percentage the distance that the
plate pad is lowered from the A position in or-
der to shuffle the plate.
Default distance
• When the plate size in the X direction is
less than 600 mm or the plate thickness is
0.15 mm: 10 mm
• Other cases than above: 25 mm
The distance that the plate is to be moved
varies with the plate size and thickness.
Once this value is changed, a variety of
checks are required.
We recommend that you use the default
value.
Example (plate thickness: 0.15 mm):
When “1” is set, the plate pad unit is lowered
10% more than the default (10 mm).

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
C [sec.] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Waiting time at the A position until the B opera-
tion starts.
This sets the waiting time of the plate pad at its
first raised position.
Example:
When “3” is set, the plate pad pauses for 3
seconds.
D [sec.] (Allowable range: 0 to 9)
Additional increment to the waiting time be-
tween when the shuffling operation has been
performed four times consecutively and when
the plate is raised again.
This sets the waiting time of the plate pad at the
A position after the plate has been shuffled be-
tween A and B four times.
The plate pad waits for 4 seconds.
Example:
When “9” is set, 9 seconds are added to the
default of 4 seconds.
motion para 2 (Allowable range: 0 to 3)

Sets an operation when returning the plate pad
2.
Each digit of the parameter value has meaning.
0 0 0
ABC
A: 0.25mm < t = < 0.3mm plate.

B: 0.20mm < t = < 0.25mm plate.
C: t = < 0.20mm plate.
0: Same as current sequence.

1: Plate separate sequence is canceled. (Stop plate
at position A, after pick plate up.)
A

) D-81
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
2: Plate pad is positioning to position A directly, after plate
is sucked.
A
3: Plate pad is positioning to position A directly, after plate

is sucked. And plate transport speed is slow downed.
(1/4.3)
4135
data.
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-13.Password for spec. func (Input parameter)
3707
Set resolution

Set weight Allows setting of the password for various special
Set cassette data functions.
Test pattern
ESC OK NEXT you can set the passwords to support various special
functions.
ESC
3850 Password 1 : Reserved.

Password for s CLR
Password 2 : Reserved.
Password 1 0 7 8 9
Password 2 0 Password 3 : Reserved.
Password 3 0 4 5 6
Password
Password
4
5
0
0
Password 6 0 1 2 3
Password 7 0 Password 5 : For the punch less option.
Password 8 0 0 •
Password 6 : For the lenticular option.
ESC SAVE ENT
4135

Save Data ? data.
YES NO If you want to cancel the save, press NO and
then OK .
ESC OK

) D-83
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-14.Test pattern (Input parameter)
3707
Set resolution Test pattern
Set weight
Allows making of the special test pattern.
Set cassette data
Test pattern key display the screen in which you
Test pattern
can make the special test pattern.
ESC OK NEXT
ESC
3810 3811
AUX 1 CLR AUX 2 CLR
1. -1 9. -1 17. -1 1. -1 9. -1 17. -1
7 8 9 7 8 9
2. -1 10. -1 18. -1 2. -1 10. -1 18. -1
3. -1 11. -1 19. -1 3. -1 11. -1 19. -1
4. -1 12. -1 20. -1 4 5 6 4. -1 12. -1 20. -1 4 5 6
5. -1 13. -1 21. -1 5. -1 13. -1 21. -1
6. -1 14. -1 22. -1 1 2 3 6. -1 14. -1 22. -1 1 2 3
7. -1 15. -1 23. -1 7. -1 15. -1 23. -1
8. -1 16. -1 24. -1 0 — 8. -1 16. -1 24. -1 0 —
· ·
· Two kinds of test pattern (AUX1, AUX2) can be made.

· AUX pattern is disabled, when ‘-1’ is inputted on the first column. (Default)
· The data shoud be finish ‘-1’.
· The length of the pattern is calculated by the following.

· Pattern of length (mm) = (Plate length - 50 mm) / Number of Pattern
E.g.) Pattern of length is 800 mm, Number of Patterns are 18
(800-50) / 18 = Around 41.7 mm

data.
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
Basic Pattern Number for each recording head
Pattern CAN type head

Number PT-R40/41/43/80/81/83
1dot horizontal
0
Line & Space
2dot horizontal
1
Line & Space
1dot vertical
2
Line & Space
2dot vertical
3
Line & Space
4 0%
5 150LPI 3%
6 150LPI 5%
7 150LPI 10%
8 150LPI 15%
9 150LPI 50%
10 150LPI 85%
11 150LPI 90%
12 150LPI 95%
13 150LPI 97%
14 100%
15 Grid (3dot width)
16 C1 Pattern(For 32ch)
17 D1 Pattern(For 32ch)
Grid
18
(3dot width dot line)
19 H Pattern(For 16ch)
20 D1 Pattern(For 16ch)
21 H Pattern(For 32ch)
29 Not used
30 Not used
31 Not used

) D-85
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-15.Option for engineering (Input parameter)
3708
Option for engineering Option for engineering
Initialize data
Option for engineering screen.
DHCP
Option for engineering key display the option for engineer-
ing screen.
ESC OK NEXT
ESC
• Make sure to keep default setting.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-16. Initializes data (Input parameter)
3708
Option for engineering
Initialize data Allows initializing of various data.

DHCP Pressing the OK key after selecting the
key brings up the menu screens for
data initialization.
ESC OK NEXT ESC

Initializes all data.

4400
Initialize all data
Select brand
Initialize user data Allows selection of the brand name.

Consumable Timer
Upgrade

ESC OK Only initializes the user data.

Initializes the Consumables Timer.
Upgrade
Upgrade command for recording head.

) D-87
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-16-1. Initialize all data / Initialize user data (Input parameter)
4400
Initialize all data
Select brand Allows initializing of all data.


Consumable Timer
Allows initializing of only the user data.
Upgrade
ESC OK
When initialization is performed using any of the
above keys, all selected data will be cleared.
Press YES and then to save the setting data.
OK
If you want to cancel the save, press NO and then

OK .

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-16-2.Select brand (Input parameter)
4400
Initialize all data
Select brand
Allows selecting of the brand name.
Consumable Timer

key, then display the password
Upgrade
screen.
ESC OK
ESC

Press the OK key after inputting the pass-
word.
3000
CLR
7 8 9 Passwoard is 7270.
Pass Word
4 5 6
0
1 2 3
0 ·
ESC OK ENT
Select the mashine name.

PT-R 4300S
PT-R 4300E
ESC OK
[YES]: Initialize the machine data.

[NO]: Keep the machine data.
Initialize all data ?
YES NO
ESC OK
Display the Information. Perform it after press [START]

Brand code : SCREEN
button.
Product key : PT-R4300S
Initialize? : YES
ESC START CANCEL

) D-89
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-16-3.Consumable Timer (Input parameter / Initialize data)
4400
Initialize all data

Select brand Allows initializing of the Consumable Timer.
Initialize user data P r e s s i n g t h e OK key after selecting the
Consumable Timer key brings up the Consumable
Upgrade Timer initialization screens.
ESC OK ESC

2240
Running time :
Running time
0h Displays the total time the PT-R power is ON.
Actual running time
0h Actual running time :
Exposure time
0h Displays the cumulative amount of time that the
Plate winding cycles
0 PT-R8000 has actually run.
ESC SAVE NEXT
Exposure time :
Displays the cumulative amount of time that the
exposure has been carried out.
Plate winding cycles :
2241
Exterior cover filter

Displays the number of plate loading cycles.
RESET
(Max:1000h)
Clamp cycles
78 h Exterior cover filter :
RESET
786 Initializes the cumulative amount of time that
Plate winding cycles/ye
786 RESET
the exterior cover filter has been used.
Compressor linked LD
(Max:3000h) 719h RESET Clamp cycles :
ESC SAVE NEXT Initializes the number of cycles that the trailing
edge clamps are detached from and attached to
the clamp arm.
Plate winding cycles/ye :
2242
Initializes the number of plate loading cycles in
Punch cycles No.1
RESET
(Max:10000) 78 the past year.
Punch cycles No.2
(Max:10000) 78
RESET
Compressor linked LD :
Punch cycles No.3
(Max:10000) 78 RESET Initializes the time of head compressor.
Punch cycles No.4
(Max:10000) 78 RESET
ESC SAVE NEXT

Punch cycles No.1-8 :
Initializes the number of times that the punch
operates for each punch.
2245
data.
YES NO then OK .
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-16-4.Upgrade (Input parameter / Initialize data)
4400
Initialize all data Upgrade
Select brand
Allows recording head upgrade.
P r e s s i n g t h e OK key after selecting the
Consumable Timer
Upgrade key brings up the upgrade screens.
Upgrade
ESC
ESC OK
Refer to the Chap. C: Head upgrade procedure for the

detail.
4411 Upgrade confirming screen 1

This screen displayed at E model PT-R. Select the
PT-R4300E -> PT-R4300S
[YES] button, when upgrade machine from E model
to S model.
Yes No
Then, push [OK] and reboot the machine.
ESC OK
4410 Upgrade confirming screen 2

After performed Upgrade confirming screen 1, this
Select exchanged channels.
screen displayed when select the upgrade again.
Select the number of replaced LD on this screen.
16ch 32ch
ESC OK

) D-91
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-8-17. DHCP (Input parameter)
3708
Option for engineering DHCP
Initialize data
Download mode (DHCP) is switched according to
DHCP
connected method of Rmlight.
Pr e s s i n g t h e OK key after selecting the
DHCP key brings up the DHCP screens.
ESC OK NEXT
ESC
Refer to the Chap. E: RMLight for the detail.

DHCP server ON
[ON] Interface the RMLight by Ethernet.
[OFF] Interface the RMLight by Serial. (Default)
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel V08
3-9.Machine option select
3051 Machine option select

Input parameter
Machine option select Allows setting of the options for the PT-R.
I/O Read/Write P r e s s i n g t h e OK key after selecting the
Special action key brings up the screen in which
Special action 2 you can set options for the PT-R.

ESC OK NEXT ESC

4200
LD/Stocker
LD/Stacker OFF
Cassette
LD : It is possible to discharge plates to the processor (rear
OFF
Singnal tower OFF

discharge). The Error and Busy signals are used for
Air filtering unit OFF
communication.Be sure to select “D” when the AT-T
is connected.
ESC NEXT
Stocker : Although it is possible to discharge plates to the
processor (rear discharge), the Error and Busy signals
are ignored.
OFF : Plates are discharged within the machine. The rear
discharge is not available.
ATM : Be sure to select “ATM” when the AT-M is con-
nected.
CASSETTE
OFF : Select when the PT-R is used alone.
Single : Select “Single” when the SA-L is connected.
Single E : Select “Single E” when the SA-Le is connected.
Multi : Select “Multi” when the MA-L is connected.
Signal tower
OFF: Without Signal tower option. (Standard)
ON: With Signal tower option. (Option)
Air filtering unit
OFF:Without Air filtering unit option. (Standard)
ON: With Air filtering unit option. (Option)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel V08
4201
Centering unit:
Centering unit Option
Normal: Without small size option unit. (Plate minimum
Option Regist Punch ON
width 450.0mm) (Standard)
Option: With small size option unit. (Plate minimum width
304.0mm)
Option Regist Punch: Display only for smallsize option.
ESC NEXT
OFF: Without option punch for plate width 590mm-
610mm.
ON: With option punch for plate width 590mm-610mm.
4202 Power up Laser:
Power up Laser OFF
OFF:Default. (Maximum EXP. power: 100%: 240 mw)
Remove from the door OFF
ON:Change maximum EXP. power to 113%: 270 mw
Use delicate plate OFF Remove from the door: Display only selected Stacker, LD.
# of option pattern 0 OFF: No display the select button of unloading to front or
back side under the media setting.
ESC SAVE ON: Display the select button of unloading to front or back
side under the media setting.
Use delicate plate:
Countermeasure against roller marks on exposed plate.
OFF: Default.: The plate is nipped at the same position as
before (approximately 40 mm from the end of the plate).
0 mm: The plate is nipped at a position approximately 12
# of option pattern:
0:Default.
Fine screen mode ON 1: A button to select a test pattern is dis played on the first
Test pattern Std. page of light intensity exposure, rotation exposure, fo-
cus exposure, and zoom exposure screens.
‘Std.’: Exposes the existing pattern.

‘Checkers’: Exposes the new pattern.
ESC OK
4205
Save Data ?
YES NO
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-10.I/O Read / Write
3051
Input parameter I/O Read/Write
Machine option select Allows reading or writing of the I/O port number.
I/O Read/Write Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Special action I/O Read/Write key brings up the port number input
Special action 2 screen.
ESC OK NEXT ESC
Input the port number to read and write the pa-

rameters of the PT-R.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-11.Special action
3051
Input parameter Special action
Machine option select Allows executing of some special operations such as

I/O Read/Write trailing edge clamp attachment and status initializa-
Special action tion.
Special action 2 Pressing the OK key after selecting the
ESC OK NEXT Special action key brings up the special action
screens.
4450
Initialize Initialize
Initialize machine status Initializes the PT-R.

Pick up clamp
Initializes the status of the PT-R.
Put clamp on drum
ESC OK NEXT Pick up clamp

Picks up the trailing edge clamps.
Put clamp on drum

Attaches the trailing edge clamps to the drum.
4451
Register test Register test
NVRAM backup With this command, you can check whether the
NVRAM restore plate’s punch hole positions align with the reg-
Adjust Displacement sensor istration pins.

ESC OK NEXT Backs up the NVRAM data in the flash
memory.

Restores the NVRAM data from the flash
memory.
It is used when adjusting the heigh position to

install the displacement sensor.
It is used when adjusting the horizontal position

to install the displacement sensor.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 D.Panel
4452
Front sensor offset Front sensor offset
Centering test Adjusts the positioning offsets at the Home and

Centering test2 Away sides for the plate leading edge detection
Belt maintenance sensors automatically.
Centering test
ESC OK NEXT
Centering test2
Allows you to perform the centering operation.
Belt maintenance
Nip-roller cam is moved to belt maintenance

position.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-11-1.Initialize / Initialize machine status (Special action)
4450
Initialize Initialize
Initialize machine status Allows initializing of the PT-R.

Pick up clamp
Allows initializing of the status of the PT-R.
Put clamp on drum
ESC OK NEXT
OK
Executes the initialization of the PT-R and of its

status. Once the initialization has been com-
pleted, the upper layer Menu screen will appear.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-11-2.Pick up clamp / Put clamp on drum (Special action)
4450
Initialize
Pick up clamp
Initialize machine status Allows picking up of the trailing edge clamps.

Put clamp on drum
Pick up clamp Allows attaching of the trailing edge clamps onto the
Put clamp on drum drum.
ESC OK NEXT This command should be used when the trailing edge
clamps need to be taken out from the clamp arm for
cleaning.

OK
Executes the pickup of the trailing edge clamps

or the “Put clamp on drum” operation. Once the
initialization has been completed, the upper
layer Menu screen will appear.
• When a plate is discharged, secure the drum at
the position where the leading edge clamps
open and then execute “Put clamp on drum”.
• After executing “Put clamp on drum”, the drum
brake is cancelled.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-11-3.Register Test (Special action)
4451
Register test Register test
NVRAM backup With this command, you can check whether the
NVRAM restore plate’s punch hole positions align with the registration
Adjust Displacement sensor pins.
Adjust Displacement sensor 2 Pressing the OK key after selecting the
ESC OK NEXT Register test key brings up the media type selec-
tion screen.
Select a plate whose punch position is to be checked.
0000
After the completion of side alignment and punching,
1 Media Type 1
2 Media Type 2
the drum is rotated to the loading position and then the
3 Media Type 3 transport path lowers.
4 Media Type 4 Load the drum to the position 10 mm from the regis-
5 Media Type 5 tration pin position and turn OFF the excitation for the
ESC OK NEXT M50.
The screen on the left appears during the laser calibra-
tion.

Check the plate’s punch hole positions with reference

to the registration pins and adjust them if necessary.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-11-4.NVRAM backup (Special action)
4451
Register test

NVRAM backup Allows storing of the NVRAM data in the flash
NVRAM restore memory.
Adjust Displacement sensor Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Adjust Displacement sensor 2 key brings up the screen by which

ESC OK NEXT you can store the NVRAM data in the flash memory.
After left side screen displayed, turn ON the DipSW2

bit 2 on the RCP3 board. Storing the NVRAM data

!"# $ enables to Flash-memory.
Press the OK key, then executes NVRAM data

storing in the flash memory.

4452
The screen during the operation is as shown on the

left.
Processing Now.
Please wait !
After backup finished, be sure to turn OFF the

DipSW2 bit 2 on the RCP3 board.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-11-5.NVRAM restore (Special action)
4451

Register test
NVRAM backup
Allows restoring of data from the flash memory to the
NVRAM restore
NVRAM.

key brings up the NVRAM data re-
store screen.
ESC OK NEXT

After left side screen displayed, turn ON the DipSW2

bit 2 on the RCP3 board. restoring the NVRAM data
!"#
$% & enables from Flash-memory.
Press the OK key, then executes NVRAM data re-

storing from the flash memory.

4452
The screen during the operation is as shown on the
left.
Processing Now.
Please wait !
After restore finished, be sure to turn OFF the DipSW2

bit 2 on the RCP3 board.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-11-6.Adjust Displacement sensor (Special action)
4451 Adjust Displacement sensor

Register test
NVRAM backup
It is used when adjusting the heigh position to
NVRAM restore
install the displacement sensor.

ESC OK NEXT
key plate type and the
screen for execution confirmation
appears. OK

See PT-R replace and adjustment C “Adjusting the
loose plate detection sensors for two-plate loading”.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel V08
3-11-7.Adjust Displacement sensor 2 (Special action)
4451 Adjust Displacement sensor 2
Register test
NVRAM backup It is used when adjusting the horizontal position

NVRAM restore to install the displacement sensor.
ESC OK NEXT 1) It is not used to PT-R4300ES.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-11-8.Front sensor offset (Special action)
4452 Front sensor offset
Front sensor offset
Centering test Adjusts the positioning offsets at Home and Away

Centering test2 sides for the plate leading edge detection sensors auto-
Belt maintenance matically.
Refer to ‘Chap. C’ for the detail.
ESC OK NEXT
Front sensor offset key brings up the plate type screen.
1050 Press the OKkey after selecting the plate type and
1 Plate 1
the screen for execution confirmation appears.
2 Plate 2
3 Plate 3
4 Plate 4
5 Plate 5
ESC OK NEXT
4451
OK
Executes the automatic adjustment of the posi-

Start OK ? tioning offsets at Home and Away sides for the
plate leading edge detection sensors.
ESC OK CANCEL
4452 The screen during the operation is as shown on

the left.
Once the adjustment has been completed, the
Processing Now.
Please wait ! Menu screen will appear.
The offset value is input in Front offset that is
included in the Set media type screen.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel V08
3-11-9.Centering test / Centering test2 (Special action)
4452
Front sensor offset Centering test
Centering test
Centering test2
Centering test2
Belt maintenance Allows you to perform the centering operation.

ESC OK NEXT Centering test
Centering test2 key brings up the plate type screen.

1050
1 Plate 1
2 Plate 2
3 Plate 3 Press the OK key after selecting the plate type and
4 Plate 4 the screen for execution confirmation appears.
5 Plate 5
ESC OK NEXT
4451
OK
Start OK ?
Pressing the OKkey after setting the plate
executes the centering operation.
ESC OK CANCEL
4452
The screen during the operation is as shown on

the left.
Processing Now.
Please wait !
4050 Once the operation has been completed, the

screen shown on the left will appear and the op-
Centering test
eration will be on standby.
Waiting
-5+
Completes the centering operation and return back the
plate to transport pass.
ESC
• When centering test: Finally, transport pass return
back to origin position.
• When centering test2: Finally, transport pass posi-
tion is kept to punch height. (Pass does not move to
origin position.)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 D.Panel
3-11-10.Belt maintenance (Special action)
4452
Front sensor offset Belt maintenance
Centering test
Plate tranceport nip-roller cam position is moved to
Centering test2
belt maintenance position.
Belt maintenance
Belt maintenance key brings up the screen for execu-
ESC OK NEXT
tion confirmation appears.
4451
OK
Pressing the OK key then nip-roller cam po-

Start OK ? sition is moved to belt maintenance position.
ESC OK CANCEL
4452
The screen during the operation is as shown on
the left.
Processing Now.
Please wait !
Once the movement has been completed, the

Menu screen will appear.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-12.Special action 2
3051
Input parameter

Machine option select Allows displaying of the maintenance jig command
I/O Read/Write screens.
Special action Pressing the OK key after selecting the
Special action 2
key brings up the maintenance jig
ESC OK NEXT command screens.
Initialize

Performs step-by-step initialization.

Tests the balancer operations.

Mail test
Tests the mail function of the remote mainte-
nance.
Auto loader test

Tests the auto loader operations.

Tests the plate pad unit operations.

Tests the interleaf pad unit operations.

Tests the multi auto loader operations.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-12-1.Initialize (Special action 2)

Initialize
Allows executing of step-by-step initialization.


Initialize key brings up the machine initial-
ization screen.
ESC
4461 1:---
CLR
Initialize 1
Not used.
1:--- 7 8 9
2:Head, 3:2nd motor 2:Head
4:Trans error check 4 5 6
5:Actuator
6:Main motor
Initializes the recording head.
1 2 3
7:Punch
9:Init. status
8:Path up
3:2nd motor
0 . -
Initializes the sub shaft motor and returns it to
ESC OK ENT
the origin.
4:Trans error check
Checks the transportation system errors.
5:Actuator
Initializes the transportation system actuators.
6:Main motor
Initializes the drum and then searches the bal-
ancers.
7:Punch
Initializes the punch system.
8:Path up
Raises the transportation section.
9:Init. status
Initializes the data that controls the sequence.
OK
Starts the selected initialization.

Once the initialization has been completed, the
upper layer Menu screen will appear.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-12-2.Balancer test (Special action 2)

Allows testing of the balancer operations.

key brings up the screen by which
you can test the balancer operations.
ESC
0: Searches the balancers and displays their positions.

4462 0054
CLR
Balancer test 0 Home = 3940, 5752 Away = 3944, 5747
7 8 9
Printing No. :
4 5 6
Note :
1 2 3
No.0 is searching
0 · —
ESC OK ENT
1 to 15: Moves the balancers to the appropriate positions depending on the plate size used
in the specified printer setting.

! "# $

" $
"# % !

-1 to -15: Displays the positions of balancers depending on the plate size used in the speci-
fied printer setting.
4462 0054
CLR
Balancer test -1 Target pos. = 5747 Away = 3932
7 8 9
Printing No. :
4 5 6
Note :
1 2 3
No.0 is searching
0 · —
ESC OK ENT


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-12-3.Mail test (Special action 2)

Mail test
Allows testing of the mail function of the remote
maintenance.

Mail test key brings up the mail testing
screen.
ESC
4469
1 : Sends an error mail.
CLR
Balancer test 11 : Sends a warning mail.
1
7 8 9
1-:Error
21 : Sends a work request mail.
4 5 6
11-:Warning
21-:Request 31 : Sends a user information mail.
31-:User Info 1 2 3
51-54:Rotating light 51-54 : Lights up the signal tower.
55-:Dammy communi. 0 —
·
55 : Not used
ESC OK ENT
OK

Starts the selected test.

Once the test has been completed, the mail test-
ing screen will appear.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-12-4.Auto loader test (Special action 2)
Auto loader test

Allows testing of the auto loader operations.

Auto loader test key brings up the screen by which

you can carry out various auto loader tests.

ESC

1:Initialize
Executes the initialization sequence.

2:Disch. paper

!"###$ Executes the interleaf discharge sequence.
%#&'( )) 3:Trans plate (1/2)
" )* +,

"( -
"( - Transports a plate to the AT section.
" )*+,
"( .# - 4:Cont. loader seq
Executes the continuous operation of the SA-L
by itself.
(For individual unit adjustment)
The system assumes that one sequence has been
completed when the AT pass sensor turns OFF
and then ON again. It then starts the next se-
quence.
5:Cont. all seq
Sequentially executes SA-L (MA-L) operation,
PT-R’s plate winding and discharge operations.
Before using this function in the MA-L, the desired cassette must
be transported to the loader section beforehand using “11-15: Load
cassette” of “Multi auto loader”.
6:Trans plate(2/2)
Transports the plate at the AT section to the
transportation table of the PT-R.
7:Cont. Multi seq
Please do not use this command since it is only used for debugging
at the factory.

OK

Starts Starts the selected initialization.
screen for balancer operations will appear.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-12-5.Plate pad test (Special action 2)

Allows testing of the plate pad unit operations.

you can carry out various plate pad unit tests.
ESC
4466 1:Init
CLR
Plate pad test 1
Initializes the plate pad unit.
1:Init, 3:Separation 7 8 9
2:Down until H1 on 2:Down until H1 on
4:Move to waiting pos 4 5 6
5/6:Vacume On/Off
7:Zone 1 8:Zone 2
Moves the plate pad unit until the pressure sen-
1 2 3
9:Zone 3 10:Zone4
11:Close
sor shows the set value (H1).
0 . -
3:Separation
ESC OK ENT
Executes the plate separation sequence.
4:Move to waiting pos
Moves the plate pad unit to the position to
which the interleaf pad is lowered.
5/6:Vacume On/Off
Turns the vacuum pump ON or OFF.
7:Zone 1
Opens the Zone 1 valve of the plate pad.
8:Zone 2
9:Zone 3
10:Zone 4
11:Close
Closes the plate pad valves.
OK

plate pad unit testing screen will appear.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-12-6.Paper pad test (Special action 2)

Allows testing of the interleaf pad unit operations.
you can carry out various interleaf pad unit tests.
ESC
4467 1:Init
CLR
Paper pad test 1
Initializes the interleaf pad unit.
1:Init 3:Down metal 7 8 9
2:Judge 4:Suck paper 2:Judge
5:Up to nip 4 5 6
6/7:Vacume On/Off
8:Zone 1 9:Zone 2
The paper pad is lowered to the paper/plate
1 2 3
10:Zone 3 11:Zone 4
12:Close
judgment position and stopped.
0 . -
3:Down metal
ESC OK ENT
Moves the interleaf pad to the position where
the metal sensor turns ON
4:Suk paper
The paper suction is performed.
5:Up to nip
Moves the interleaf pad to the interleaf rollers’
nipping position.
6/7:Vacume On/Off
Turns the vacuum pump ON or OFF.
8:Zone 1
Opens the Zone 1 valve of the interleaf pad.
9:Zone 2
10:Zone 3
11:Zone 4
12:Close
Closes the interleaf pad valves.

OK

interleaf pad unit testing screen will appear.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel
3-12-7.Multi auto loader test (Special action 2)

Allows testing of the multi auto loader operations.

key brings up the screen by which you
can carry out various multi auto loader tests.
ESC

4468 1:Initialize
CLR
Multi auto loader test 1 Initializes the MA-L8000.
1:Initialize 7 8 9
2/3:Door Unlock/lock
2/3:Door Unlock/lock
4:Unload cassette 4 5 6 Locks or unlocks the cassette door.
11-13:Load cassette
20-23:Lift position 1 2 3 4:Unload cassette
5:C->Lift, 6:Lift->C
0 . - Returns the cassette tray on the lift side to its origi-
ESC OK ENT nal position.
11-13:Load cassette
11: Moves the 1st slot cassette tray to the lift side.
12: Moves the 2nd slot cassette tray to the lift side.
13: Moves the 3rd slot cassette tray to the lift side.
The cassette tray stands by at the loading position
height on the lift side.
20 - 23: Lift positioning
20:Moves the lift to the loading position height.
21:Moves the lift to the 1st slot cassette height.
22:Moves the lift to the 2nd slot cassette height.
23:Moves the lift to the 3rd slot cassette height.
5:C->Lift
Moves the cassette tray from the cassette storing
side to the lift side.
6:Lift->C
Moves the cassette tray from the lift side to the cas-
sette storing side.
OK

Once the initialization has been completed, the multi
auto loader testing screen will appear.


PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
D.Panel

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E. Reference
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Contents
1. Sequence explanations ........................................................................ 1
1-1.Initialization sequence .......................................................................................... 1
1-2.Main processing of initializing ............................................................................... 3
1-3.Processing of trans pass initializing ...................................................................... 4
1-4.Processing of punch sequence ............................................................................. 5
1-5.Centering sequence .............................................................................................. 6
1-6.Processing of loading sequence ........................................................................... 7
1-7.Discharge Sequence ............................................................................................ 9
1-8.Drum high speed rotating sequence ................................................................... 11
1-9.Auto Balance Sequence ..................................................................................... 12
2. Parts layout ........................................................................................... 13
2-1.Front side of main unit ......................................................................................... 13
2-2.Back side of main unit ......................................................................................... 13
2-3.Base unit ............................................................................................................. 14
2-4.Tranceport unit .................................................................................................... 14
2-5.Punch base unit .................................................................................................. 15
2-6.Squeeze unit ....................................................................................................... 15
2-7.Balancer positioning unit..................................................................................... 16
2-8.Electronocal section ............................................................................................ 16
2-8-1.Electronocal section .................................................................................... 16
2-8-2.RCP3(E) (PT-R4300E/S) ............................................................................. 17
2-8-3.PIO-PTR4XE (PT-R4300E/S) ...................................................................... 20
2-8-4.CON-PCB .................................................................................................... 22
2-8-4-1.CON-PTR4XE (PT-R4300E/S) ................................................................. 22
2-8-5.Image PCB .................................................................................................. 25
2-8-5-1.LRB32E (PT-R4300E/S) ........................................................................... 25
3.Recording Head Unit............................................................................. 27
3-1.PT-R4300E/S ...................................................................................................... 27
3-1-1.Parts Layout: PT-R4300S ............................................................................ 27
3-1-2.Parts Layout: PT-R4300E ............................................................................ 28
3-1-3.LD array block: PT-R4300E/S ...................................................................... 29
3-1-4.Head driver box: PT-R4300E/S .................................................................... 30
3-1-5.Head CPU3(E): PT-R4300E/S ..................................................................... 31
3-1-6.Head DRV2: PT-R4300E/S .......................................................................... 32
3-1-7.Head MB2E: PT-R4300S ............................................................................. 33
3-1-8.Head MB2E-16: PT-R4300E ........................................................................ 33
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) E-i
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
3-1-9.Head connection: PT-R4300S ..................................................................... 34

3-1-10.Head connection: PT-R4300E ................................................................... 34
4.Maintenance software. (RMLight6) ....................................................... 35
4-1.Outline of RMLight6 ............................................................................................ 35
4-1-1.Compatibility list between RMLight version and PT-R. ................................ 35
4-1-2.Down load data compatibility. ...................................................................... 36
4-1-3.About Up load / Down load data. ................................................................. 37
4-2.Requirements...................................................................................................... 38
4-3.Installation of RMLight6....................................................................................... 38
4-4.Connecting the terminal to the main unit ............................................................. 39
4-5.Setting ................................................................................................................. 40
4-5-1.Setting of the Download mode. (Only for connecting to ethernet port) ......... 40
4-5-2.Setting of the RMLight6 ............................................................................... 41
4-5-3.Typical communication error ........................................................................ 42
4-6.Procedure for downloading the PRODUCT ID data ............................................ 43
4-7.Procedure for downloading the PT-R firmware / FPGA. ...................................... 44
4-8.Procedure for downloading the PT-R panel data ................................................ 48
4-9.Procedure for downloading the frimware and FPGA data of theRH .................... 50
4-9-1.Use the RMLight6 ............................................................................................ 50
4-9-1-1.CAN type LD recording head (PTR4300E/S, 8300E/S) ........................... 50
4-9-2.Head directly connection ............................................................................. 52
4-9-2-1.CAN type LD recording head. (PTR4300E/S, 8300E/S) ........................... 52
4-10.Uploading or downloading the PT-R’s machine specific value data .................. 57
4-10-1.Data types that can be uploaded or downloaded ....................................... 57
4-10-2.Procedure for data upload ......................................................................... 60
4-10-3.Procedure for data download ..................................................................... 63
4-11.A setup in the case of connecting a terminal to PT-R. ....................................... 65
5. Panel system ........................................................................................ 66
5-1.Caution to update the panel data. ....................................................................... 66
5-2.Reference: List of panel system settings. ............................................................ 68
6. Periodic replacement parts and maintenance list ............................... 75
6-1.PTR4300E/S ....................................................................................................... 75
6-2.The Jig list ........................................................................................................... 76
7.Power supply and interlocks ................................................................. 77
8.Press punch .......................................................................................... 78
8-1.Press punch for standard plate size machine. ..................................................... 78
8-2.Press punch for small plate size specification machine. ..................................... 89
E-ii PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) E-iii

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
E-iv PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V06 E.Reference
1. Sequence explanations
1-1.Initialization sequence
The processing before
initializing InitSeq1
Error The processing of plate

Servo Pack alarm checking
on trans pass initializing
It resets Servo pack, if it occur

sover load alarm
The processing of
acutuaters initializing
It returns to the generally After to make initializing is

No
mode, if loop gain of once ended, it isn©t Off a
speed and integration power supply?
constant are a high-
Yes
speed turn mode.
The processing of SVC

Servo reset
Yes initializing
Service call error B occurs
No It checks whether or not

Ok
plate is left in the
It waits 5second, after it
equipment.
servo ON.
It checks load and unload
condition which is memorized
in NvRam Equal to or more than 5 Yes
deviation counters?
Is it in the clamping only with Yes No

Adjustment of
leading clamps? automatically Offset zero
No
InitSeq1
Drum : It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b

The state at which it removes Yes position of Squeeze Ex167,Ex16e
tail clamps by discharging.
No It decides on the target

InitSeq2 position of squeeze if not Error Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex167
being within the +-
Ex16e,Ex175
11pulse and it retries
5times.
The state at which plate is Yes
wrapped around drum and
tail clamps put on drum. Error Ex107,Ex1c6
It lowers squeeze.
Ex1c7
No
InitSeq3
Drum : It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b

position of tail clamps. Ex166,Ex16d
The state at which plate is
translated from the supply Yes
side by the winding? It decides on the target
position of tail clamp if Error
No Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex166
not being within the +-
InitSeq4 Ex16d,Ex174
5times.
Yes
Processing of punching Error
It closes shutter Ex111
No
InitSeq5
Error Ex104,Ex1c2,Ex1c3
It lowers trans path
Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb
To main processing of
It returns plate to the
initializing
discharge side trans
pass
End
PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) E-1

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V06
InitSeq2 The processing of actuaters

initializing
Do the tail clamps match a Yes

clamp arm?
It closes shutter
No Clamp bolts in the middle
position
Error
It raises clamp arm Ex105,Ex1c6,Ex1c7
Error
It lowers clamp arm Ex106,Ex1c6,Ex1c7
Error
It closes th leading clamps Ex10e,Ex1c0,Ex1c1
To the drum lock position of Error

Ex10a
the clamp bolt Error
It returns the lock pin of drum Ex19b,Ex19c
Error
Servo OFF
The processing of
actuaters initializing Error
It raises niproller Ex101
It memorizes that plate is

winded onto the drum in
NvRam End
End
InitSeq3
The processing of
actuaters initializing InitSeq4
End InitSeq5
Error recovery 4
The punch mechanizm is

End initialized.
Error recovery 1
End
E-2 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V06 E.Reference
1-2.Main processing of initializing
Start
Parallel processing
Checking of supply door is Error The registered punch

Ex189
open/close are Idled 5times.
No
The 2nd error?
Interlock checking of frame Error
Ex14c
cover No Yes
End?
Blower of drum resets Yes Ex131,Ex132,Ex133

Ex134,Ex135,Ex136
after that ON
It returns the side alignment Error

The processing of plate Error mechanism to the starting Ex12d,Ex13f
on trans pass point.
initializing
Blower of drum is OFF

End
The processing of Error
actuaters initializing
After to make initializing is

Yes
once ended, it isn©t Off a
power supply?
No
The processing of SVC

Servo reset
Initializing
Servo ON, it waits 5seconds
It adjusts an offset
automatic zero if the Error
deviation counter is
equal to or more than 5.
Yes
Is plate wrapped on drum?
No
Drum: It decides on tail A
clamp position(NvRam
memorized) in the position
Do the tail clamps match a Error
Ex155
clamp arm?
Drum: It decides on leading Error Ex11b,Ex13b
It decides on the target
clamp position in the Ex165,Ex16c
position of tail clamp if
Error position.
Balancer search not being within the +-
5times.
position of leading Error
Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex165
clamp if not being
Servo OFF It lowers trans path Ex16c,Ex173
within the +-5pulse and
it retries 5times.
Ex128,Ex151,Ex19f
Ex1a0,Ex1a1,Ex1a2 It returns plate to the
discharge side of trans Error
The Blower operation Error pass Sensor detected head is ON Ex17c,Ex17f
checking

It raises trans path Servo OFF
Ex18c Sensor detected head is

Ex14f
OFF
Drum vaccum pressure Error
checking
Is a punch of option Yes
Blower of drum is OFF set to ON?
Blower of drum is Off No

PH61H/A,PH62 Error
Ex17b,Ex17d,Ex17e
Sensor checking
Ex186
Sensor detected head is ON
End
It waits 1second

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V06
1-3.Processing of trans pass initializing
Start
Both PH54 and PH70 detect Yes

plate?
No No Is trans path at the

highest position?
Yes
Clutch of supply side is OFF

Clutch of discharge side is ON
Is there plate on sensor of Yes

Trans motor: It transfers
PH54 only?
660mm at speed of 40mm/s
No Clutch of supply side is OFF
Clutch of discharge side is ON
Ex603
Trans motor: It return plate
Error
until PH54©s OFF
at 40mm/s.
Trans motor is stopped.
Ex145
Isn©t there plate on sensor ofYes

PH59?
No
Ex1ce
Ex14f
Is there plate on sensor of Yes Error

Ex1b7 It lowers niproller. Ex102
PH70 only?
No
Error
Is there plate on sensor of Yes It opens shutter. Ex110
Ex14f
PH59?
No
Clutch of supply side is ON
Do sensor of PH50 detect Yes Clutch of discharge side is OFF
plate?
No Error
It closes shutter Trans motor: It returns plate
until PH50©s OFF at 50mm/s.
But, it stops even if it doesn©t
End OFF and it passes in the
(194.5/50)sec.
Ex150
Error
It closes shutter. Ex111
Error
It raises niproller Ex150
Trans motor: It transfers

31.5mm at speed of 40mm/s
Ex150

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V06 E.Reference
1-4.Processing of punch sequence
Start B
Do it detect an interleaf Yes

Ex1c8
paper? Error
It lowers niproller
No
It lowers trans path at the Error Ex104,Ex1c2,Ex1c3 *1

punch position. Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb
Side alignment Error Ex102

starting point return
Does it detect an Yes
It raises trans path interleaf paper?
No
*1
Ex12d,Ex13f
It occurs an error within Yes Ex1c8

the idling of punch at
plate before. It drives the set Error
Error punch
No Idling of punch
*1
It raises trans path
Error
It lowers niproller Ex131,Ex132,Ex133
Ex131,Ex132,Ex133 Ex134,Ex135,Ex136
Ex134,Ex135,Ex136
Clutch of supply side is ON Parallel processing
Clutch of discharge side is
OFF
Ex102
Side alignment Error It return back plate Error
Error starting point return to trans pass
It opens shutter
Isn©t it punch©s ON and Yes
retrying?
It raises trans path *1
No Error
It strikes a set punch
Retry
It raises niproller Ex12d,Ex13f It closes shutter.
Ex110 It raises niproller.
Trans motor: It trans Time out

plate until ON of PH62
sensor at 70mm/s Ex130
No Is there plate on sensor
of PH62? Error
Yes
It raises niproller and Error Is it possible to have Yes

it trans plate to sense withdrawn plate by Ex1ca
ON of PH62. retring?
Error
It lowers niproller Ex102 No
Error Does it detect an Yes

It raises niproller
Error interleaf paper?
It opens shutter Ex110
Trans motor: if it©s No
Error recovery 1 It raises trans path
0.3mm of plate
thickness, it trans by Trans motor : It returns End
intermission mal at Time out
plate until PH50©s OFF
50mm/s. If not it trans Ex101 at 50mm/s It raises niproller
by continuously at
50mm/s
No Is there plate on sensor
It adjusts side of PH50?
Error
alignment according to Ex1c8
the plate size. Yes
It closes shutter
It waits 0.5 second.
Side alignment motor: Error

It move 3mm in reverse It trans plate to
at speed of 5mm/s shutter and it raises Error Ex101,Ex103
trans path at the Ex111
same time.
The waitng time
according to plate
Ex12f
Side alignment motor:
Error
It move 3mm at speed of
5mm/s
After 0.5sec, trans motor *1
is stopped.
Side alignment
It waits 2second
starting point return
*1
Error recovery 1
B Ex12d,Ex156,Ex157
Ex158,Ex1c9

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08
1-5.Centering sequence
Start
Plate thickness is 0.24 mm orYes

less?
No
Transfer motor: intermittent

Transfer motor: 50 mm/sec.
drive
Both PH61H and PH61A are

Ex1c9
OFF? No
Yes
Plate side alignment drive [Moving distance]

motor: M61 Home side: (830 - Plate©s X size) / 2 + 27.65 + offset value
Forward rotation at 20 mm/ Away side: (830 - Plate©s X size) / 2 + 22.5 + offset value
sec. Offset value: First parameter displayed in the screen.
[Home side offset value]
Second parameter displayed in the screen.
[Away side offset value]
Third parameter displayed in the screen.
Interruption of PH61H ON status Interruption of PH61A ON status
Remaining distance is stored. Remaining distance is stored.
(restPH) (restPA) Yes
restPH > restPA
No
D = restPH - restPA
M61 stops due to any of the
following conditions: D = restPA - restPH
Remaining distance is "0".
Both PH61H and PH61A are ON. D > 1.5 mm + Home side Yes
Remaining distance > (15 + 1.5) offset value
D > 1.5 mm + Away side Yes
offset value
Remaining distance > Yes No D = 1.5 mm + Away side No D = 1.5 mm + Home side
2 mm Ex156 offset value offset value
No
Yes
PH61H or PH61A is OFF? Ex157 Plate side alignment drive
motor: M61 Further movement of the plate stoppers
No Forward rotation at 1.25 mm/ = 1.5 + (Home side offset value + Away side offset value - D) / 2
sec.
restPH > (15 + 1.5) mm Yes
or Ex1c9
restPA > (15 + 1.5) mm
Waiting for 0.5 sec.
No
Plate side alignment drive

motor: M61
Reverse rotation by 3 mm at
5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting time [sec.]

Waiting for specified period
= 5 - {(830 - plate©s X size) / 2} / 20 / 2
Plate thickness is 0.15 mm or Yes

less?
No Transfer motor:
Continuous feeding at 50 mm/
sec.
Plate side alignment drive

motor: M61
Forward rotation by 3 mm at
5.0 mm/sec.
Waiting for 2 sec.
Transfer motor stops.
End

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08
1-6.Processing of loading sequence
Start
C
Parallel processing
Error Error
Does it detect a leaf paper? Ex1c8 It closes leading clamps
Trans motor : stop

Error It open leading clamps
Ex104,Ex1c2,Ex1c3 Trans motor : stop
It lowers trans path.
Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb Clutch of supply side is Off.
Error recovery 1
Drum: It decides on the Error

leading clamp position Servo ON Ex10e,Ex1c0
Ex1c1
When the SVC status
doesn©t Ready, it
adjusts and it retries an Yes It returns the both side drum Error
Ex19b,Ex19c
automatic offset zero if locking pin.
never retrying
It adjusts an offset Parallel processing
automatic zero if the No
deviation counter is equal to
or more than 5. Drum: It decides on the Error It lowers squeeze roller
Ex11b,Ex13b
Ex165,Ex16c position of squeeze to a half
It decides on target leading

clamp in the position if not Error Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex165 It decides on the target
being within +-3and it Ex16c,Ex173 squeeze position if not Error
retries. being within+-11pulse
and it retries
Is there plate in the supply No Error recovery 2

Ex810
side?
Leading edge detection
Yes
sensor ON
Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex167
Does it detect an interleaf Yes Ex16e,Ex175
Ex1c8
paper?
Error
No It lowers squeeze roller.
Are there tail clamps in the No Leading edge detection

Ex1b0
clamp arm? sensor OFF
Blower of drum is ON It raises squeeze roller
It puts out the drum locking Error

Ex199,Ex19a Error recovery 2
pin
Servo OFF Ex107,Ex1c6,Ex1c7
Parallel processing
Error Ex10f,Ex1c0
It opens leading clamps
Ex1c1 Displacement sensor Error It decides on the position of Middle position of clamp Error The leading edge Error
Error
checking. tail clamp of drum. bolt position checking
Error
It lowers niproller Ex102
Recovery of the size It makes a clamp bolt a drum Error recovery 4
Ex11b,Ex11c,Ex127
Ex13b,Ex15d error unlocking position.
Clutch of supply side is ON

Clutch of discharge side is OFF Ex1b9,Ex139
Ex112,Ex115,Ex11b Error recovery 4
Ex13b,Ex166,Ex16d
Error
Ex10a
Trans motor: It trans plate

(127+A)mm at speed 150mm/s. A = Set collection data / to Clamp
A is the revision value which is Error
The vaccum pressure
peculiar to the machine.
checking
Error Error recovery 4

It raises niproller
Error recovery 1
Does it detect an interleaf Ex186
paper?
No Yes
Ex101 It detected an interleaf paper?
Trans motor : driving of Yes

No
speed 150mm/s intermittently. Error recovery 4
Trans motor : stop
W ait 2 seconds : thin plate

Ex1c8
W ait 1 seconds : normal
plate It decides on the target
Error recovery 1 Error
tail clamp position if
not being within +-
C Error recovery 4
Ex1c8
D Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex166
Ex16d,Ex174

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V06 E.Reference
Error
It lowers clamp arm
It makes a clamp bolt a drum

unlocking position.
It closes shutter
It raises a clamp arm in the

middle position.
Error recovery 4
Ex106,Ex1c6,Ex1c7
It makes a clamp bolt the Error

position of the drum locking.

unlocking position.
It raises a clamp arm in the

middle position.
Error recovery 4
Ex10a

Error
It makes a clamp bolt the unlocking position.
position of the drum locking.
No
More than retry two times?
It memorizes the drum Yes

present position as the
position which tail clamps
were put on.
unlocking position.
Error
It raises clamp arm Ex105,Ex1c6,Ex1c7 It raises a clamp arm in the
middle position.
Is tail clamps locked up the Error

Ex11d
drum? Error recovery 4
The blower operation Error

Ex18c
checking Ex1b2
End

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V06
1-7.Discharge Sequence
Start E
Parallel operation
Trans motor: It return plate
at the speed of 125mm/s.
It lowers trans path Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb
Clutch of the discharge side
is OFF.
Error
It returns drum locking pin Ex19b,Ex19c
Parallel operation
Drum: It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b Drum: It decides on the Error If it becomes the position of
position of tail clamp Ex166,Ex16d position of leading clamp 150mm to a leading clamp
position, it is begun to raise
a squeeze roller
Trans motor : stop
Error Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex166
tail clamp position if
not being within +- Ex16d,Ex174
2pulse and it retries Ex11b,Ex13b
Ex165,Ex16c
Doing PH54 and PH59 Yes

sensor Plate deing? It decides on the target
leading clamp position
No Error
It raises trans path if not being within +-3
and it retries until
5times.
Trans motor : stop
Ex143
Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex165
Is there tail clamp in the Yes
Ex1b1 Ex16c,Ex173
clamp arm.
No
It puts out the drum locking Error
Ex199,Ex19a
It makes a clamp bolt the pin.
Error
position of the drum Ex10a
locking.
Trans motor : stop
Error
It lowers clamp arm
Clutch of the supply side Off.

It raises clamp arm Clutch of the discharge side is ON
Ex106,Ex1c6,Ex1c7 Servo OFF
It makes a clamp bolt the Error

position of the drum
unlocking. Yes
Is it sensor of PH54 OFF? Ex11f
It makes a clamp bolt
No
locking.
Error
It opens leading clamps Ex10f,Ex1c0,Ex1c1
It raises clamp arm

Drum blower OFF
Trans motor: It returns until
Error
PH54 OFFs.
Ex109 240 mm / s. : normal plate.
160 mm / s. : thin plate.
Clutch of the supply side is OFF
Clutch of the discharge side is OFF Trans motor : stop
It raises a clamp arm in the Error

Ex11f
middle position.
Yes
It lowers clamp arm Is it sensor of PH59 OFF?
No
Ex1ce
It makes a clamp bolt the
Is there plate to wind Yes
locking.
continuously?
No
It raises clamp arm
Error
It closes leading clamps Ex10e,Ex1c0,Ex1c1
Ex108,Ex1c6,Ex1c7
Error
It returns drum locking pin Ex19b,Ex19c
Is there tail clamp in the Error

Ex11d
clamp arm?
End

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V06 E.Reference
Error recovery 1 Error recovery 3
It returns plate to the Error

side of supply plate.
No
It retried?
Error
Yes
It closes shutter Drum: It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b

position of squeeze Ex167,Ex16e
Ex102,Ex110,Ex146 It decides on the target

squeeze position if not
being within +-11 and Ex16e,Ex175
it retries.
Error
Error
Trans motor : stop
Error recovery 2
Error
It raises niproller

End
Clutch on the supply side is
OFF
Ex101 Error Recovery 4
Error
It closes leading clamps
Do sensor of PH54 detect Yes

Ex142
It raises trans path plate?
No
Ex10e,Ex1c0,Ex1c1 It lowers trans path
Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb
Ex1c4,Ex1c5,Ex1cb Blower of drum is OFF
End
Trans motor : stop
Error recovery 2 It discharges plate to the

discharge side of pass.
Blower of drum is OFF End
Recovery of size error

Doing PH50 sensor, plate Yes
Ex000
being?
Drum: It decides on the Error Ex11b,Ex13b Do sensor of PH50 detect Yes

position of leading clamp. Ex165,Ex16c plate?
No Error
Drum: It decides on the tail
It decides on the target clamp position with Ysize of
leading clamp position 650mm in the position.
if not being within +-3 Ex16c,Ex173 Blower of drum is OFF
But it stops drum forcing
and it retries. when plate passes PH50
sensor.
Error Ex115,Ex11b,Ex11c
It returns drum locking pin Ex19b,Ex19c Ex127,Ex13b
Drum: It decides on the tail
clamp position with the
Error Ex11b,Ex11c
Ysize which calculated from
Servo OFF the position of PH50 sensor Ex127,Ex13b
OFF in the position.
Error
It opens leading clamps Ex10f,Ex1c0,Ex1c1 It closes shutter
Error recovery 1 Error recovery 4
End End

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V06
1-8.Drum high speed rotating sequence
The
Deceleration
acceleration
Error Ex14c,Ex14e,Ex15f
The all kind checking (*1) Ex161,Ex162,Ex164 Turn Stop command
Ex18c
Drum high speed rotation It waits for the speed

agreement signal and the Error
error latch signal clear.
speed Zero signal to ON. The
time out is 15 seconds.
Error Error Ex14c,Ex14e,Ex15f
Vaccum pressure checking Ex186 The all kind checking (*1) Ex161,Ex162,Ex164
Ex18c
It waits 1second
Loose plate checking is enable

Vaccum pressure checking is Yes Ex15f,Ex164,Ex188
Bit2,5 of address 05h are ON
enable Ex1a3,Ex1a4
No
It sets speed loop gain and
Integration constant to high
speed rotational mode It waits for the speed
agreement signal and the
speed Zero signal to ON.
Start command of drum high The time out is 15 seconds.
speed rotation
The balancer positon Error It clears drum high speed

checking rotation error latch signal
Ex15b
Loose plate latch signal check Error
Ex15e
Loose plate latch signal disable
Error
It waits 2seconds
The vaccum pressure decline

*2
latch signal checking Error
Vaccum pressure checking Ex188
Error disable
The all kind checking (*1)
*3 Error
The Error of stopped timeout Ex183
Yes
Bit4 of address fc00h is ON Ex180
It clears SVC mode, a
No distance, a speed register
Yes
Speed OK? It makes speed loop gain,
Integration constant to
No generally mode.
It waits until it reaches Error

specification speed.
End
*2
Error
*3
Yes
Bit4 of address fc00h is ON Ex181
No
It waits 0.5 second until the Error

turn is stable.
*2
Error
*3
*1 *2 *3
Servo stop (LS58-1,-2, SW58)
Cover interlock (LS57-1,-2,-3)
Yes
Bit4 of address fc00h is ON Ex180 Actuater (PH20,PH11-2A,PH11-2H,PH30,PH30H) Drum stop Drum stop
Drum blower (INVALM)
No
Yes Ex14c,Ex14e,Ex15f
Bit2 of address fc00h is OFF Ex181 Ex15e,Ex184,Ex185
Ex188,Ex1a3,Ex1a4 Ex161,Ex162,Ex164
Ex18c
No
End

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V06 E.Reference
1-9.Auto Balance Sequence
Balancer movement
Start
processing
It calculates the position of Yes The movement distance of

balancer from plate size and balancer which moves to the
thickness. 1st is within 3pulse?
No
It fixes the order and the The movement distance of

position which moves balancer which moves to the Error Ex11b,Ex13b,Ex168
balancers (Home side) 1st is within 3pulse? Ex16f,Ex176
When bumping by the Error

Detection of balancer Ex120,Ex19d
balancer movement, it
moves one to the Balancer search
temporary position.
Error
Yes It puts out balancer pin Ex199,Ex19a
Balancer movement Error Ex120 and less than retry
processing (Home
two times?
Side)
Error Ex11b,Ex13b
No It moves 1st balancer
Ex169,Ex170
Servo OFF
Error
It returns balancer pins. Ex19b,Ex19c
Error
It fixes the order and the Detection of balancer Ex121,Ex19e
position which moves
balancers (Away side)
It renews the present drum

Position as the position of
When bumping by the balancer.
balancer movement, it
moves one to the Balancer search
temporary position.
Yes Yes
The movement distance of
Balancer movement Error Ex19d and less than two balanser which moves to the
processing (Away side) times. 2nd is within 3pulse?
No No
Servo OFF It does the 1 processing
End
End

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference
2. Parts layout
2-1.Front side of main unit
2-2.Back side of main unit

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08
2-3.Base unit
2-4.Tranceport unit

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference
2-5.Punch base unit
2-6.Squeeze unit

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08
2-7.Balancer positioning unit
2-8.Electronocal section
2-8-1.Electronocal section

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V06
2-8-2.RCP3(E) (PT-R4300E/S)
X 150 X 166 X 155 X 163 X 162 X 161
X159
X 160
X167
X158
U9
Memory
Flash
DSW2
X157
Memory
U18
Flash
DSW1
JP 1 JP 2
X156
JP 3
X 173
X 170
JP 6
SW1
X168
JP 5
JP 13
JP 4
X154
JP 11
X 169
X172
JP 10
JP 12
JP 9
JP 8
JP 7
VR1
X153
X171
X 164
VR2
X151 X152
LED
Not used
• Firmwear and FPGA are common to PT-R4300E/S. It can change from panel command.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V06 E.Reference
X150 : +5V
X151 : X111 PIO-PTR4XE
X152 : X101 LRB32E (PTR4300E/S)
X153 : X112 PIO-PTR4XE (M2 control signal)
X154 : XPNL1 Panel (RS232C)
X156 : PIF-2 PIF (RS232C)
X157 : XECN3 M1 ServoPack(E1A) (RS232C)
X158 : X811 Head CPU3(E) (RS232C) (PTR4300E/S)
X159 : XPC Terminal PC (RE232C)
X162 : XAT ATM-8xxx (RS232C)
X168 : XETH Ethernet port
X171 : +/-15V
X172 : XTH1 Thermistor
JP1 :USER SIDE DSW1 -1:ON

JP2 :SHORT -2:ON
JP3 :USER SIDE -3:ON
JP4 :ANOH SIDE -4:OFF
JP5 :AN1H SIDE -5:ON
JP6 :ANENH SIDE -6:ON
JP7 :OPEN
DSW2 ALL OFF (Normaly)
JP8 :SHORT
-1:ON Command mode
JP9 :SHORT
-2:ON NVRAM BACK UP/RESTORE
JP10 :SHORT
-8:ON Product ID Data download
JP11 :CPU SIDE
JP12 :SHORT
JP13 :EXT SIDE
FlashROM: 16M x 2 (16bit bass) Program (U8,U17)

FlashROM: 4M x 2 (8bit bass) Machine parameter (U9,U18)
SRAM: 16M x 2 (16bit bass) Program, Work (U6,U15)
SRAM: 4M (8bit bass) Correction (U42)
NVRAM: 256K (8bit bass) For store the data (U26)
Blank soket: (U76)
VR1: TH1 Adjust gain Thermistor (Environment sensor)
VR2: TH1 Adjust offset Thermistor (Environment sensor)
SW1: Reset SW

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
No. Signal name Light ON status Note
D1 RESET RESET
D2 SPEED Connecting 10BASE-T
D3 DPLX Full Duplex
D4 COL Collision data
D5 GDLNK Link upped
D6 TX Transferring data
D7 RX Receiving data
D8 3.3V 3.3V on
D9 2.5V 2.5V on
D10 PLOT_EN State that can be exposed
D11 IMAGING During exposure
D12 PGON PGON signal from RB (TB) is on
D13 START Start signal from RB (TB) is on
D14 STEP-RQ STEP_RQ signal from RB (TB) is on
D15 LD-ENABLE Laser enable signal to RB (TB) is on
D16 OUT-ON Out putting 1 line image data
D17 INH-T Synchronization signal for drum 1 rotation
D18 ENCA Signal A of encoder
D19 ENCORG Corrected position signal Z of encoder
D20 D-LDENB LD_ENB signal from PIO is active
D21 S-NEAR Near origin position sensor for sub axis is on
D22 S-ORG Detecting rotate sub axis motor is on
D23 PLS-EN Pulse for the sub axis motor is ready to out put
D24 S-H-PLS Sub axis motor is moving to HOME side.
D25 S-A-PLS Sub axis motor is moving to AWAY side.
D26 SCAN-ON SCAN-ON signal to RB (TB) is on
D27 STET-AK STEP_AK signal to RB (TB) is on
D28 CAL Not used
D29 S-STATE Waiting exposure
D30 MSCF Correction function of main axis is ON
D31 SSCF Correction function of sub axis is ON
D32 TEST Test mode
D33 DPLL Low rotation speed
D34 S-OT-H HOME side over travel LS is on
D35 S-OT-A Away side over travel LS is on
D36 S_FAULT Sub axis motor is out of controlled
D37 S_PAUSE Pause exposure (Start and Stop)
D38 S_OVER Head position is out of exposure area
D39 S_SMERR Exposure sequence error
D40 X-AREA-ERR Address error of correction
D41 ERR Error Not used
D42 LED9 Reserve (CONTROLLED BY FPGA)
D50 LED1 Reserve (CONTROLLED BY CPU)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
2-8-3.PIO-PTR4XE (PT-R4300E/S)
X112 X1 11
X113
X110
X122
X 114
X11 6
X125
B13 ALTERA
X118 X115
1‫ޓ‬2
䊶䊶
䊶䊶
䊶䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
䊶
LED8
䊶䊶 J2
䊶䊶
䊶䊶
䊶䊶 ALTERA
䊶䊶
19 ‫ޓ‬20
LED1
X120
X117
VR1 X119 X124A X124
Not used

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08
X110 : Power supply (+5V / +24V / +/- 15V)
X111 : X151 RCP3(E)
X112 : X153 RCP3(E) (M2 control signal)
X113 : X11H CON-PTR4XE
X113A : XS1 S1
: X58 PH58 Origin sensor for door motor.
: X59 PH59 Plate detection sensor2 on the unload path.
: X60 Short
X114 : X11 CON-PTR4XE
X115 : X115T ACON-SA-L / ACON-MA-L
X116 : Open
X117 : XECN1 M1 ServoPack(E1A)
Primary scanning motor positioning signal output
X118 : Open
X119 : XECN1 M1 ServoPack(E1A)
For controlling the primary scanning motor
X120 : XENC1 Encoder
X122 : P1 Blower pressure sensor
X124 : PH6 Loose plate detection sensor
X124A : GND
X125 : KA2 ON / OFF Servo power supply, Key SW
B13 : FPGA ROM 100097517Vxx:4300E/S

VR1 : For adjusting the servo’s gain
• LED list
Signal name ON status
LED1 VCOMP Drum speed is target rpm.
LED2 ENCZ Drum origin position
LED3 SV_ON Servo ON
LED4 V=0 Drum speed is zero.
LED5 COIN Drum positioning is finished.
LED6 IPRBUSY Command pulse output busy
LED7 SVCBUSY Servo busy
LED8 SVCERR Servo error

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V07->
2-8-4.CON-PCB
2-8-4-1.CON-PTR4XE (PT-R4300E/S)
X23
JP3
C01
C07
C04
C06
C05
C02
C08
CB1
C03
LED2A LED1A
LED4A LED3H
CP1 LED6A LED5A
LED64 LED8A LED7A
LED10A LED9A
LED7H LED11A
CA4
X11 LED14A LED13A
LED16A LED15A
CA1 LED14H LED13H
LED20A LED19A
LED22A LED21A
X01 CH1
LED2H LED1H
LED4H LED3A
CA2 LED16H LED15H
LED72
LED30A LED29A
LED32A LED31A
CA3 LED34A LED33A
X02 LED30H LED29H
CP2 CS1 LED22H LED17H
LED42H LED21H
LED44H LED43A
LED24H LED23H
CP2-1
X113 LED26H LED25H
LED24A LED23A
LED74 LED73

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V06
JP3 : Short 1-2
CO1 : M11A, M20, KA30MA-M30A, M24, M11H, KA30MH-M30H, M58
CO2 : M52, SL53, SL59-1, SL59-2
CO3 : KA40-BM40, BZ1, M41
CO4 : X2012
X2013 PMD50 M50
CO5 : X2013 PMD50 M61
C06 : X2011 PMD2 M2
CO7 : M55
CO8 : Reserve
CA1 : PH11-1A, PH11-2A, PH10A, PH30A, PH31A, PH21, PH24-1, PH24-2, PH27-1,
PH27-2, PH27-3
CA2 : PH56, PH57, PH61A, PH61H, PH63, PH62, PH70
CA3 : PH50, PH52, PH54, PH53, PH55
CA4 : PH29H, PH29A, PH51, XAT (RCP3), Short X281
CB1 : Blower
CH1 : PH11-1H, PH11-2H, PH10H, PH20, PH30H, PH31H, LS4H, LS4A, PH2
CP1 : M60-1, M60-2, M60-3, M60-4, M60-5, M60-6, M60-7
CP2 : SB60-1, SB60-2, SB60-3-1, SB60-4-1, SB60-5, SB60-6, SB60-3-2, SB60-4-2
CP2-1 : SB60-7
CS1 : LS56, LS57-1, LS57-2, LS57-3, LS57-4, LS58-1, LS58-2, SW58
X01 : XST3 (Signal tower)
X11 : X114 PIO-PTR4XE I/F
X23 : Power supply (5V, 24V)
X113 : X113 PIO-PTR4XE I/F
LED1A :PH11-1A Balancer pin position 1 (Away)

LED1H :PH11-1H Balancer pin position 1 (Home)
LED2A :PH11-2A Balancer pin position 2 (Away)
LED2H :PH11-2H Balancer pin position 2 (Home)
LED3A :Processor ready (PD_READY)
LED3H :PH20 (Trailing edge clamp arm origin sensor)
LED4A :PH21 (Trailing edge clamp arm end point sensor)
LED4H :Processor error (PD_ERROR)
LED5A :PH24-1 (Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor 1)
LED6A :PH24-2 (Trailing edge clamp open/close position sensor 2)
LED7A :PH10A (Balancer weight detection senso) (Away)
LED7H :PH10H (Balancer weight detection senso) (Home)
LED8A :Reserve
LED9A :PH27-1 (Trailing edge clamp presence detection sensor 1)
LED13A :PH30A (Leading edge clamp open/close origin sensor (Away))
LED13H :PH30H (Leading edge clamp open/close origin sensor (Home))
LED14A :PH31A (Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Away))
LED14H :PH31H (Leading edge clamp open/close end point sensor (Home))
LED15A :PH50 (Plate pass sensor on the plate-loading path)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V06 E.Reference
LED15H :LS4H (Scanning start point limiter) (Home)
LED16A :PH52 (Nip rollor origin sensor)
LED16H :LS4A (Scanning end point limiter) (Away)
LED17H :PH2 (Scanning origin sensor)
LED19A :PH54 (Plate pass sensor on the plate transport path)
LED20A :PH53 (Shutter origin sensor)
LED21A :PH55 (Transport path change lower limit sensor)
LED21H :Reserve
LED22A :PH56 (Transport path change upper limit sensor)
LED22H :Reserve
LED23A :SB60-5 (Punch 5 origin sensor)
LED23H :SB60-1 (Punch 1 origin sensor)
LED24A :SB60-6 (Punch 6 origin sensor)
LED24H :SB60-2 (Punch 2 origin sensor)
LED25H :SB60-3-1 (Punch 3-1 origin sensor)
LED26H :SB60-4-1 (Punch 4-1 origin sensor)
LED29A :PH61A (Sensor for detecting the Away side edge of a centering unit) (Away)
LED29H :PH61H (Sensor for detecting the Away side edge of a centering unit) (Home)
LED30A :PH63 (Centering unit origin sensor)
LED30H :PH62 (Plate edge detection sensor for the punch unit)
LED31A :PH70 (AT unit plate detection sensor)
LED32A :LS56 (Operation door interlock switch)
LED33A :LS57-1,2,3,4 Operation door interlock switch
LED34A :LS58-1,2 Operation door interlock switch
LED42A :PH57 (Transport path punch position sensor)
LED43A :PH29-1 (Plate leading edge detection sensor (Away))
LED44H :PH29-2 (Plate leading edge detection sensor (Home))
LED72 :SB60-3-2 (Punch 3-2 origin sensor)
LED73 :SB60-4-2 (Punch 4-2 origin sensor)
LED74 :SB60-7 (Punch for the small size option origin sensor)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V10
2-8-5.Image PCB
2-8-5-1.LRB32E (PT-R4300E/S)
X101
H11
X100
SW2
X102
JP4
JP5
SW1
JP7
JP6
X103
LED(HL1-24)
EEPROM: Pattern ROM (H11) JP4 :1-2 X100 : +5V

SW1: Reset SW JP5 :Open X101 : X152 RCP3(E)
SW2 -1:ON: Head CPU3 JP6 :1-2 X102 : PIF-1
-1:OFF: Head CPU2 JP7 :1-2 X103 : X810 Head CPU3(E)
-2:OFF
-3:OFF
-4:OFF

E-26
No. Color Name Light on status
HL1 RED RESET Reseting
HL2 YELLOW PGON PGON signal is ON
HL3 YELLOW LDAV LDAV signal is ON
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
HL4 YELLOW LREQ LREQ signal is ON

HL5 YELLOW NR Image buffer is clearing
HL6 YELLOW START Start exposure
HL7 YELLOW PON PON signal is ON
HL8 YELLOW OUTEN LD enable signal for LD driveris ON
HL9 YELLOW LDEN LD enable signal for RH is ON
HL10 YELLOW NEGA Negative image signal is ON
HL11 YELLOW BYTE Data length is 8 bit
HL12 YELLOW RCON Input signal of PIF is enable.
HL13 YELLOW TESTPAT Test pattern is exposed
HL14 YELLOW SPX Correction signal is ON
E.Reference
HL15 YELLOW KATA0 Half exposure mode (0-15ch)

HL16 YELLOW KATA1 Half exposure mode (16-31ch)
HL17 YELLOW ONE Barn out signal is ON
HL18 YELLOW SELFT Selftesting
HL19 YELLOW TRANS Tranceporting the test pattern from ROM (H11) to RAM
HL20 YELLOW R0 Exposing
HL21 YELLOW SYSLED For debaging
HL22 YELLOW ERASE For debaging
HL23 YELLOW LOAD For debaging
HL24 RED ERROR For debaging

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
3.Recording Head Unit

3-1.PT-R4300E/S
3-1-1.Parts Layout: PT-R4300S
Focus motor driver
Parabolic mirror
PM80
LS80 Zoom lens
PM81
Dew condensation
sensor (C080)
Cylindrical lens FAN Temparature
Stereographic projection lens sensor (RT82)
No1.Lens Fan for Peltier element
Reflective mirror LD block Temparature

sensor (RT80)
(TP2)
LD block
PH84
Fainal lens Parabolic mirror
PH86
PH85
PH82 PH83
Focus motor driver
PH82 :Focus origin(on the RH’s “Home” side)

PH83 :Focus origin(on the RH’s “Away” side)
PH84 :Origin for rotating the focus motor
PH85 :Zoom origin(on the RH’s “Home” side)
PH86 :Zoom origin(on the RH’s “Away” side)
PM80 :Focus motor
PM81 :Zoom motor

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V05->V07
3-1-2.Parts Layout: PT-R4300E
Parabolic mirror
LS80
Zoom lens
PM81
Cylindrical lens Dew condensation

sensor (C080)
Fan for Peltier element
No1.Lens
LD block Temparature sensor
Reflective mirror (RT80)
FAN Temparature sensor (RT82)
(TP2)
LD block
PM80
PH84
Fainal lens
Parabolic mirror
PH86
PH85
PH82
PH83
Focus motor driver
PH82 :Focus origin(on the RH’s “Home” side)

PH83 :Focus origin(on the RH’s “Away” side)
PH84 :Origin for rotating the focus motor
PH85 :Zoom origin(on the RH’s “Home” side)
PH86 :Zoom origin(on the RH’s “Away” side)
PM80 :Focus motor
PM81 :Zoom motor

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
3-1-3.LD array block: PT-R4300E/S
PT-R4300S
PT-R4300E
Ch4 Ch11
Ch15
Ch0
Ch5 Ch12

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
3-1-4.Head driver box: PT-R4300E/S
Fan cover unit
Head mother board

PTR4300S/ Head MB2E
PTR4300E/ Head MB2E-16
Head CPU3E
No.1 of DRV2
No.2 of DRV2 (4300S only)
No.3 of DRV2
No.4 of DRV2 (4300S only)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
3-1-5.Head CPU3(E): PT-R4300E/S
X819 X820
AGND 24GA +24VB
24GB
X813 X811 X815 X814 X810
-5VG X812 +24VA
DGND
-5V +5V
+15V
CLK1 CLK2
-15V DSW1
ALTERA
U2
VR2 VR1 SW1
HL2 HL1
U2 : DATA ROM
X810 : Image data from the LRB32(E) board
X811 : RS232C for command communication
X812 : Calibration sensor input
X813 : Laser diode block sensor input (from the laser head connection bpard)
X814 : Focus motor drive output
X815 : Zoom motor drive output
X819 : Mother board connection
SW1 : CPU reset SW
VR1 : For the temperature sensor input adjustment (Resolution)

VR2 : For the temperature sensor input adjustment (Offset values)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
3-1-6.Head DRV2: PT-R4300E/S
X832 X833
AGN DGN
+24GP D D
+5V
+15V -15V -5VG -5V
+24V
X831
VR2 VR1
X830
X830 : Laser diode drive signal output

X831 : Peltier element control signal output
VR1 : For adjusting the Peltier element’s control voltage to 0V
VR2 : For adjusting the Peltier element’s control voltage to its maximum value
Driver board and its supporting LD channels (PT-R4300S)
Driver board 1 : 26, 19, 12, 05, 06, 13, 20, 27
Driver board 2 : 28, 21, 14, 07, 00, 15, 22, 29
Driver board 3 : 08, 01, 30, 23, 16, 09, 02, 31
Driver board 4 : 24, 17, 10, 03, 04, 11, 18, 25
(The driver boards are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4, from the one closest to the CPU board)
Driver board and its supporting LD channels (PT-R4300E)

Driver board 1 :12, 05, 13, 06, 15, 00, 07, 14
Driver board 3 :08, 01, 09, 02, 04, 11, 03, 10
(The driver boards are numbered 1 and 3 from the one closest to the CPU board)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
3-1-7.Head MB2E: PT-R4300S
X808 X801 X800
X802 X803 X807 X806 X804 X805
X819 X820
X832-1 X833-1
X832-2 X833-2
X832-3 X833-3
X832-4 X833-4
X800 :LD drive power supply input (-5V) X807 :Power supply control output for LD
X801 :Power supply input for substrate con- drive
trol X808 :Power supply input for a peltier
X802 :Cooler fan’s power supply for Peltier drive
element (24V)
X819_X820 :For CPU board
X803 :Fan power supply (24V)
X832-1_X833-1:For driver 1 board
X804 :Fan power supply (24V)(Not used)
X805 :Fan power supply (24V)
X806 :Head cover switch input
3-1-8.Head MB2E-16: PT-R4300E
X808 X801 X800
X802 X803 X807 X806 X804 X805
X819 X820
X832-1 X833-1
X832-3 X833-3
X800 : LD drive power supply input (-5V) X807 : Power supply control output for
X801 : Power supply input for substrate con- LD drive
trol X808 : Power supply input for a peltier
X802 : Cooler fan’s power supply for Peltier drive
element (24V)
X803 : Fan power supply (24V) X819_X820 : For CPU board
X804 : Fan power supply (24V)(Not used) X832-1_X833-1: For driver 1 board
X805 : Fan power supply (24V) X832-3_X833-3: For driver 3 board
X806 : Head cover switch input

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
3-1-9.Head connection: PT-R4300S
LD1
TH1
X840 X845 X847 X848
X844
X849
XCH04 XCH11 XCH18 XCH25
XCH03 XCH10 XCH17 XCH24 XCH31

X843
X842 XCH00 XCH07 XCH14 XCH21 XCH28
XCH06 XCH13 XCH20 XCH27
X841 XCH05 XCH12 XCH19 XCH26
X841 :LD drive signal 1 input X845 :Temperature sensor input for the LD
X842 :LD drive signal 2 input block
X843 :LD drive signal 3 input X847 :Sensor input for detecting the fin tem-
X844 :LD drive signal 4 input perature on the Peltier unit
X840 :Sensor signal output (to CPU) X848 :Sensor input for detecting dew conden-
X849 :Socket for inserting the short-circuit connec- sation in the LD block
tor to prevent static electricity TH1 :Temparature sensor
LD1 :-5V power supply monitor
XCH00 to XCH31 :LD (laser diode) channels
3-1-10.Head connection: PT-R4300E
LD1
TH1
X840 X845 X847 X848
X849
XCH04 XCH11
XCH03 XCH10
X843
XCH02 XCH09
XCH01 XCH08 XCH15
X841 XCH00 XCH07 XCH14
XCH06 XCH13
XCH05 XCH12
X841 :LD drive signal 1 input

X843 :LD drive signal 3 input
X840 :Sensor signal output (to CPU)
X849 :Socket for inserting the short-circuit connector to prevent static electricity
LD1 :-5V power supply monitor
X845 :Temperature sensor input for the LD block
X847 :Sensor input for detecting the fin temperature on the Peltier unit
X848 :Sensor input for detecting dew condensation in the LD block
TH1 :Temparature sensor
XCH00 to XCH15 :LD (laser diode) channels
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
43-V08 83/86-V10 E.Reference

4.Maintenance software. (RMLight6)
4-1.Outline of RMLight6
4-1-1.Compatibility list between RMLight version and PT-R.
RMLight3 RMLight4 RMLight5 RMLight6
Main CPU board PT-R
RS232C RS232C Ethernet
4000 (Ver1,2,3) O O O
4000 (Ver4) O O
4100 O O
4000II O O
RCP
4300 O O
RCP2
8000 O O O
8100 O O
8000II O O
8600 O O
N1000 O O
8800II O O
8800II(ver1) *2 O O
8800II(ver2) *2 O O O
ARC
16000 O O
32000(ver2) *１ O O
32000(ver3) *１ O O
24000 / 36000 O O
4300E/S O O
8300E/S O O
RCP3 8600E/S-R/Z O O
N2000 O O
6600 O O
RMLight3 RMLight4 RMLight5 RMLight6

Main CPU board PF-R / FT-R
RS232C RS232C Ethernet
PF-R2055VI-R O O
P-RAM
FT-R5040R / 5055R O O
* Support since the completion machine for ROHS.
*1) Select the [PT-R3200II(ver2)] for the version 2.xx or before of PT-R32000.
Select the [PT-R3200II(ver3)] for the version 3.00 or later of PT-R32000.
*2) Select the [PT-R8800II(ver1)] for the version 1.xx or before of PT-R8800II.
Select the [PT-R8800II(ver2)] for the version 2.00 or later of PT-R8800II.
· RMLight6 supports the RS232C and the ethernet connection. Sep. 05 or later released PT-R can con-
nect the ethernet port.
· RS232C connection by RMLight6 support all PT-R. Therefore, Recommend to Use RMLight6 from
now. However, head firmwear and FPGA are downloaded by direct connection same as old procedure
for RCP / RCP2 cpu machines.
· Machine log can not captured by ethernet connection. RS232C connection can capture the machine log
only.
· ‘RMLight.cfg’ file contents are not necessary to change on RMLight6.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference 43-V05 83/86-V10

4-1-2.Down load data compatibility.
· Refer to the following list for the compatibility of download data of Firmware, FPGA or etc.
Jul. 51th. 2006 present
PTR4300
Section Content
E/S
PRODUCT ID 4xxx.dat
CPU RCP3(E) Firmware Firm4KR_V101.dat
FPGA (Common) FPGA_V022.dat
Main Pattern data
Image TB256 DSP program
FPGA 1, 2
Panel GP2301L Panel data PanelDif_xxxx.dat
Firmware
HeadFirm_313_32.dat
32ch
Head
CPU HEAD-CPU3E Firmware
(CAN type LD) HeadFirm_313_16.dat
16ch
FPGA (Common) HeadFPGA_EP1K30V4.dat
* Reference: Head Firmware for old machine.
Section Content PTR4100/4300

Firmware
ldv304-32.hex
32ch
Head
CPU HEAD-CPU3E Firmware
(CAN type LD) ldv304-16.hex
16ch
FPGA (Common) EP1K30V4.HEX

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
4-1-3.About Up load / Down load data.
· The following list shows the firmware and FPGA data of which versions are managed in the RCP3(E) cpu
machines. Refer to the following list when checking firmware and FPGA data that can either be down-
loaded using RMLight or that cannot be downloaded. Also, use the following list when checking user data
or machine parameters.
Downloading /
Removability
Section Content Saved Location Uploading
(location)
(Caution)
PRODUCT ID NVRAM No Yes
Firm ware Flash Memory No Yes
FPGA Flash Memory No Yes
User data Flash Memory Yes (U9,U18) Yes
Machine parameter Flash Memory Yes (U9,U18) Yes
CPU RCP3(E)
Brand code * Flash Memory Yes (U9,U18) Yes
Main
Product key Flash Memory Yes (U9,U18) No
Consumerble Timer NVRAM No No
Error Log NVRAM No No
MAC address NVRAM No No
I/O PIO-PTR4XE FPGA Flash Memory Yes (B13) No
Panel GP2301L Panel data - - Yes
Firm ware Flash Memory No Yes
Head HEAD-CPU3E FPGA Flash Memory No Yes
CPU
(CAN type LD) (16ch/32ch) RH and DRV
EEPROM Yes (U2) Yes
parameter
* Brand code data is included the machine parameter.
1) Firmware and FPGA data cannot be uploaded.

2) Consumable timer data and error logs are not included in the user data that is saved on the flash
memory of the RCP3 board. This data is saved on the NVRAM of the RCP3 board as shown in
the list above. When replacing the RCP3 board, make sure to perform NVRAM BACK UP/RE-
STORE, save the consumable timer data and errorlogs on the flash memory temporarily, and
then replace the flash memory in order to shift the data.
3) FPGA data on the PIO-86XE, APIO-PTR4XE boards cannot be downloaded using RMLight.
Therefore, when upgrading is required in the future, flash memories should be replaced. The
FPGA ROM of PT-R8300E/S, PTR8600E/S/Z on the location 9L is attached to the PIO-86XE
board to be provided. The FPGA ROM of PT-R4300E/S on the location 9L is attached to the PIO-
PTR4XE board to be provided.When replacing the FPGA ROM at the same time as replacing the
board, order the FPGA ROM of the relevant model.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
4-2.Requirements
(1) Terminal
Terminal environment
OS: Windows 98 or later
(2) Cable
RS232C connection
· Specification : RS232C straight cable (Normal)
· Model : D-sub9P plug, D-sub9P plug
· Connection : All
Ethernet connection
· Specification : Ethernet cable (Cross cable : Recommend to 100Base-TX category 5 or upper.)
(3) RMLight6 maintenance software for PT-R
\ RMLiht6
+ RMLight6.exe
+ RMLight.cfg
+ config_data
++ conf_1.cfg
++ conf_2.cfg
++ conf_3.cfg
* Do not rewrite the ‘*****.cfg’ files. ‘RMLight.cfg’ file contents are not necessary to change on
RMLight6.
4-3.Installation of RMLight6
(1) Prepare the following two files.
\ RMLiht6
+ RMLight6.exe
+ RMLight.cfg
+ config_data
++ conf_1.cfg
++ conf_2.cfg
++ conf_3.cfg
(2) Save the above procedure files in the same directory on the terminal.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
4-4.Connecting the terminal to the main unit
(1) Connect the communication cable to the communication port of the terminal.
(2) Connect the communication cable which is circled in the figure below.
RS232C Port
Back side
Ethernet Port

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
4-5.Setting
4-5-1.Setting of the Download mode. (Only for connecting to ethernet port)
(1) Connect the terminal PC to PT-R directly through the cross cable.
(2) Setup the network protocol (TCP/IP) of terminal PC like below.
(3) Turn on the power to the PT-R. Then turn [ON] the down-
DHCP server ON
load mode (DHCP).
·Service / Input parameter / DHCP [ON]
ESC OK
(4) Reboot the PT-R. (Turn off / on the power to the PT-R.)
(5) PT-R is changed to download (DHCP) mode. (Download
Could not initialize due to the download
mode. mode screen is displayed.)
The DHCP server is started.
LAN. * Keep this mode during Upload / Download.
(6) When change to off the download (DHCP) mode, once push
the hidden button to change the OFF-LINE mode then turn
Could not initialize due to the download off the download (DHCP) mode.
mode.
The DHCP server is started. (7) After that, Reboot the PT-R. (Turn off / on the power to the
LAN. PT-R.)

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
4-5-2.Setting of the RMLight6
(1) Turn on the power to the PT-R. And start the RMLight6.
(2) Click the RMLight6 icon on the top of leftside.
(3) Select the [Setup] on the menu bar.
(4) Select the machine type.
(5) Select the interface device.
(6) Select the COM port number when select the RS232C
(Serial) port.
(7) Push [SAVE] to store the setting.

(8) Push [OK] to finish the RMLight6.
(9) Restart the RMLight6. Then confirm the RMLight6 setting.
RS232C (Serial) port connection Ethernet port connection

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
4-5-3.Typical communication error
· ENQ Packet Time Over!
Bit-1 on DIP SW2 is turned ON.
· COMport Open Error!
RMLight cannot found serial port on the PC.
· Recorder No Connect!
Cross type serial cable is used to connect RS232C port connection.
· Ethernet Connect error!
Bit-1 on DIP SW2 is turned ON.
Straight type serial cable is used to connect ethernet port connection.
PT-R mode is not DHCP mode.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4-6.Procedure for downloading the PRODUCT ID data
* This procedure need to replace the RCP3(E) board only.

· When the PRODUCT ID data of the RCP3(E) board is provided individually, it is shipped as data
for the PT-R8300E/S.
· PT-R4300E/S Product ID is ‘PT-R4xxx’
· PT-R8300E/S Product ID is ‘PT-R8xxx’
· PT-RN2000 Product ID is ‘PT-RNxxx’
· However, there is a possibility that the Product ID data has

been changed for stocked PCB. Please confirm data first.
(1) Turn bit8 of Dip Switch No. 2 on the RCP3(E) board and then the Download mode.
power supply to the main unit on. Only the boot program starts up Please download control program.
ProductID in NVRAM is "PT-R8xxx".
and the screen shown on the right appears. Confirm the installed The DHCP server is started.
PRODUCT ID. Don't connect the engine with user's
LAN.
When only the boot program is installed in the
RCP3(E) board, the same screen also appears when
turning the bit8 of Dip Switch No. 2 off and then turning
the power supply to the main unit on.
(2) Prepare the PRODUCT ID data file.

For PT-R4300E/S : ProductID_4xxx.dat
For PT-R8300E/S : ProductID_8xxx.dat
For PT-RN2000 : ProductID_Nxxx.dat
(3) Execute RMLight6.exe while bit8 of Dip Switch No. 2 on the
RCP3(E) board is turned on. The window shown on the right ap-
pears. Click Download in the window.
(4) Select the data to be downloaded and click the Open button. The
window shown in step 5 appears.
(5) Click OK to start downloading of the selected data.

Downloading time: about 1min
During downloading, the following window is displayed.
0054
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel dur-

ing downloading. Data downloading now!
Please wait.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(6) When the data has been downloaded, the following window ap-
pears. Click OK to display the window shown in step 7.
(7) When the following window appears, turn the power supply to
the main unit off and then on again.
(8) Confirm the Product ID on the panel.
(9) Turn off the main switch and turn off the DSW2 bit8 on the
RCP3(E) board.
4-7.Procedure for downloading the PT-R firmware / FPGA.
1) The PT-R8300E/S firmware and FPGA are downloaded to the RCP3(E) board to be provided for
parts.
2) When the PRODUCT ID or firmware of the NVRAM on the new board does not match to the
machine, and initializing the machine in this condition, the data of the flash memories is to be
overwritten with the default value of that PRODUCT ID machine. If firmware is downloaded after
RCP3(E) board was changed,follow to the [Replacement procedure of the RCP3(E) board.].
3) Confirm that all switches of DIP SW 2 on the RCP3(E) board are off.
If any of the bit of Dip Switch No. 2 is on, turn the power supply to the main unit off, turn all bits of
Dip Switch No. 2 off, and then turn the power supply to the main unit on.
4) When the panel data is also downloaded at the same time, first download the panel data.
5) Be sure to perform downloading while the main unit panel 0101
displays the following screen, which appears immediately

after the power is supplied to the main unit. However, if the P T- R 8 3 0 0 S
firmware is not installed, the screen shown in step 1 of 4-6-
(1) appears.
6) Upload / Download time are dozens of seconds, when con-
nect to the Ethernetport.
START V1.00

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(1) Select the [Information/Version] screen. Billow screen is displayed. Confirm current firmwear version.
·PTR4300E/S, PTR8300E/S
Panel data version
1310
RCP3(E) board Boot program version
Panel Ver A2.00 ('05.11.21)
Firmware version installed in the machine
RCP Boot V0.50
Soft V0.26b
V0.21e
* Firmware currently used
FPGA V0.22 RCP3(E) board FPGA version
Head CPU V1.10
ROM V3.12-32 Head_CPU board version
FPGA FFF0692E Head_CPU board Firmware version
Head_CPU board FPGA version
ESC ALTER
·PTR8600E/S-R/Z, PTRN2000, PTR6600

Panel data version
1310
Panel Ver A2.00 ('05.11.21)
RCP BootV1.00 Firmware version installed in the machine
SoftV1.00 Firmware currently used
V1.10
*
FPGA V0.22 RCP3(E) board FPGA version
TB256 DSP V0.503
TB256 DSP program version
FPGA1 V1.03
FPGA2 V0.3
FPGA1 version
Head CPU V2.00 FPGA2 version
Head_CPU board Firmware version
ESC ALTER
RCP3(E) board have two store area for the firmware. When push the [Alter], next screen
displayed. Re-boot the machine, After push [Yes] and [OK] then firmware boot area is changed.
New downloaded firmware is installed to the not booting firmware area.
1311
Do you want to switch the software:

V1.01 --> V1.00
After the reboot, software switching
will become valid.
YES NO
ESC OK

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(2) Prepare the following files for the PT-R firmware.
Latest firmware version for each machine (Feb. 23th. 2006 present)
• Common for PT-R8300E/S 8600E/S-R/Z : Version 1.12 F8xxx_V112.dat
• PT-R N2000 : Version 1.12 F_N2000_v112.dat
Latest FPGA version for each machine (Feb. 23th. 2006 present)
• Common Version 0.22 FPGA_V022.dat
(3) Execute RMLight6.exe. The window shown in step 4 appears.
(4) Upload UserData and MachData by referring to ‘4-11-2 Pro-
cedure for data upload’
When downloading the firmware, uploading of the
user data is not always required, but it is recom-
mended.
(5) After UserData and MachData have been uploaded, click

Download in the window below.
(6) Select the data to be downloaded and click the Open button.
The window shown in step 7 appears.

Download time : approximately 6 minutes
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel during 0054
downloading.
Data downloading now!

Please wait.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

(8) When the data has been downloaded, the following win-
dow appears. Click OK to display the window shown in
step 9.
(9) When the following window appears, turn the power sup-
ply to the main unit off and then on again.
(10) Turn the power supply to the main unit on, and then startup the main unit without initializing it. And
then confirm the downloaded firmware version in the [Information / Version screen].
Newly downloaded firmware was installed the not booting firmware area. And boot area of
firmware is automatically changed to newly area.
·PTR4300E/S, PTR8300E/S
Panel data version
1310
Panel Ver A2.00 ('05.11.21)
RCP Boot V0.50 Firmware version installed in the machine
Soft V0.26b
V0.50c Firmware currently used
FPGA V0.22
*
RCP3(E) board FPGA version
Head CPU V1.10
ROM V3.12-32 Head_CPU board version
FPGA FFF0692E Head_CPU board Firmware version
Head_CPU board FPGA version
ESC ALTER
·PTR8600E/S-R/Z, PTRN2000, PTR6600

1310 Panel data version
Panel VerA2.00 ('05.11.21)
RCP Boot
V1.00 Firmware version installed in the machine
Soft
V1.00 Firmware currently used
V1.10
FPGA V0.22
*
RCP3(E) board FPGA version
TB256 DSP V0.503
TB256 DSP program version
FPGA1 V1.03
FPGA2 V0.3 FPGA1 version
Head CPU V2.00 FPGA2 version
Head_CPU board Firmware version
ESC ALTER
(11) Download UserData and MachData that were uploaded in step 4 as necessary by referring to ‘4-11-3
Procedure for data download’.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4-8.Procedure for downloading the PT-R panel data
1) Confirm that all switches of DIP SW 2 on the RCP3(E) board 0101
are off.
2) When the panel data is also downloaded at the same time,
P T- R 8 3 0 0 S
first download the panel data.
3) Be sure to perform downloading while the main unit panel
after the power is supplied to the main unit.
START V1.00
(1) Prepare the PT-R panel differ data.
May. 21th. 2006 present
• Latest differ panel data for each machine. PanelDif_a200_a202.dat
• Latest All panel data for each machine. Panel_a202.dat

(3) Click Download in the window below. The window shown in
step 4 appears.

Download time: approximately 1 minutes
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel during

0054
downloading.

Please wait.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(6) When the data has been downloaded, the following window
appears. Click OK to display the window shown in step 7.
(7) When the following window appears, turn the power supply
to the main unit off and then on again.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4-9.Procedure for downloading the frimware and FPGA data of theRH
4-9-1.Use the RMLight6
4-9-1-1.CAN type LD recording head (PTR4300E/S, 8300E/S)
1) RMLight6 can download the firmweare and FPGA to CAN type LD recording head witch is only
below machine.
·PTR4300E/S, 8300E/S
2) Download the firmweare and FPGA by the head directly connection according to the current
prucedure for the recording head on the RCP / RCP2 machine.
Download the firmweare and FPGA by the head directly connection prucedure for the fiber type
LD recording head machine.
3) Confirm that all switches of DIP SW 2 on the RCP(3) board are off.
4) Be sure to perform downloading while the main unit panel 0101
after the power is supplied to the main unit. P T- R 8 3 0 0 S
(1) Prepare the dawnloading file.

• Latest firmware version for Head CPU (May. 21th. 2006
present)
• PT-R43E/83E (16ch) : Version 3.13
START V1.00
HeadFirm_313_16.dat
• PT-R43S/83S (32ch) : Version 3.13
HeadFirm_313_32.dat
• Latest FPGA version for Head CPU (May. 21th. 2006
present)
• PT-R43ES/83ES common: Version EP1K30V4
HeadFPGA_EP1K30V4.dat
(3) Click Download in the window below. The window shown in
step 4 appears.

Download time
Firmware : approximately 15 minutes
FPGA : approximately 5 minutes
During downloading, the following window is

displayed.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel 0054
during downloading.

Please wait.
(6) When the data has been downloaded, the following window
appears. Click OK to display the window shown in step 7.
1) When downloading the RH data to the RH, "Data downloading now! Please wait." is displayed in
the main unit panel even when the window shown on the right appears on the terminal. This
means that the data is being transferred from the RCP3(E) board to the RH, although data on the
RCP3(E) board had completed downloading. Although the window shown is step 7 appears
when OK is clicked in the window shown on the right, do not turn the power supply to the main
unit off until "Download complete" is displayed in the main unit panel.
(7) After the window shown on the right appears, check that
"Download complete" is displayed in the main unit panel.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

4-9-2.Head directly connection
4-9-2-1.CAN type LD recording head. (PTR4300E/S, 8300E/S)
· Preparation
· Terminal supporting PC Windows 98 or higher.
· Communication cable (fully connected straight cable supporting the RS-232C.)
· Communication software (such as hyper-terminal, etc.)
· Head firmware (For directly connection)
Ver3.13-16•Software for 16ch (File:ldv313-16.hex)
· FPGA data (For directly connection)
FFF0692E (Common 32/16ch) (File:Ep1k30v4.hex)
· Reference: For old model data. (PT-R8100/8000II))
FFF0692E (Common 32/16ch) (File:Ep1k30v4.hex)
· The following procedure is the procedure using Hyper Terminal on Windows 98.
(1) Set the properties of the hyper-terminal as follows when creating or after creating a file for the hyper-
terminal.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(2) Ensure that the power to the machine is off, and then remove the cable connected to the X811 connec-
tor of the recording head CPU board.
Reset SW
Head CPU board

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(3) To the X811 connector of the recording head CPU board, connect the communication cable (the other
end of which is connected to the terminal unit).
(4) Turn on the power to the machine.
* After turning on the power to the machine, do not initialize the operation panel.
(5) Press the SW1 (reset SW: white button) on the recording head CPU board. (Refer to the diagram in step
2 above.) The following screen will appear.
The displays of ROM, VER and FPGA change with the head versions on the machines.
(6) Input the following command. The machine will enter the download mode.
· DW[enter]
* ER31 is displayed if the downloader has already booted up.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(7) Input the following commands. It will become the download mode.
· DP[enter] : Download mode of a firmware
· DF[enter] : Download mode of a FPGA
(8) Select the following menu items from the menu bar.
· Transfer/Send Text File
And select the file which is data and click [OPEN]

· File : ldv304-16.hex (Ver3.04-16 Software for 16ch)
· File : ldv304-32.hex (Ver3.04-32 Software for 32ch)
· File : Ep1k30v4.hex (FFF0692E (Common 32 and 16 ch))
* Clicking [Open] initiates the downloading.
The download takes

·Firmware :about 15minits
·FPGA :about 5minits
If the terminal setting is not appropriate (Flow control, Delay (lines)), an error is displayed.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(9) When the downloading is completed, the following screen is displayed. If OK appears at the bottom of
the screen, this signifies that the download has been completed successfully.
* The figure on the left indicates the screen that will appear when the downloading of the CPU
ROM V Ver3.04(er3.04(Software for 16ch) has been completed.
(10) After the completion of the download, press the SW1 (reset SW) button on the recording head CPU
board, and the following screen will be displayed. Confirm that the version of the CPU ROM or
FPGA data shown on the screen corresponds with that of the one you have just installed.
In Ver3.04(Software for 16ch), download is an end now.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V02->V05
4-10.Uploading or downloading the PT-R’s machine specific value data
4-10-1.Data types that can be uploaded or downloaded
The following machine specific value data and the log data can be uploaded using RMLight6.
* Exposure condition settings, error logs, and consumable timer data cannot be uploaded.
* PT-R to be able to save the log file in the machine is roughly 1-1.5 days. Therefore, it is needed to
upload as soon as possible. Moreover, note that the log file is not overwrited by other work when
you upload it.
* No information for unused data.
(1) UserData
User data
· Printing machine setting (1 to 60)
· Plate setting (1 to 15)
· Plate type setting (1 to 15, 30 to 45)
· Punch data (punch name and ‘Set punch data’ setting in the Service Maintenance screen)
· The data saved in ‘User maintenance / Option’
(2) Printer_Plate
· Printing machine setting (1 to 60)
This function is used to share the Printing machine data by the user by whom two or more
machines are installed. . By downloading this data to other machines, data can be easily
copied to other machines.
(3) MachData
The data saved in the following menus of the Service Maintenance screen.
· Input parameter / Initialize data / Select bland
· Initialize data / Bland code
· Machine option select
· Input parameter / Set Correction data
· Input parameter / Drum base position
· Input parameter / Punch adjust
· Input parameter / Calibration position
· Input parameter / Set misc. data
· Input parameter / Set resolution
· Input parameter / Set weight
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Auto calibration
(4) NVARAM
Please do not use.
(5) Head data
Head Data is used for uploading and downloading all of the recording head data.
The head data binary file is composed of the (6)HeadData_CPU and (7)HeadData_DRVx data files.
Data trancefering time is needed more than 2 min in used for the fiber type LD recording head
(PT-RN2000). Do not cut off the power during transfering.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(6) HeadData_CPU (The fiber type LD recording head : PT-RN2000
The data saved on the EEPROM of the head CPU board. The contents of the data are confirmed or
saved in the following menus of the Service Maintenance screen.
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Laser power setting
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Laser power adjust
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Laser power confirm
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Reference laser power 1
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Reference laser power 2
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Temperature setting
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Laser running time
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Writing times clear
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Board constant setting / 3970 and 3971 screens
(7) HeadData_DRVx (The fiber type LD recording head : PT-RN2000
The data saved on the EEPROM of the 64LD DRVx board. The contents of the data are saved in the
following menus of the Service Maintenance screen.
· Input parameter / RH parameter / Board constant setting / 3972 to 3975 screens

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(8) LogList
A list of the ‘Log0-9’ (Sequence log data step (9)) and ‘ErrLog0-21’ (Error log data) files to store date
and time. The following are examples of LogList.
PT-R8xxx 20050421600003a022
0 1645 byte
1 04/21 16:02:57
2 04/21 16:01:10
3 04/21 15:59:37
4 32766 byte
5 32767 byte
6 32767 byte
7 04/21 15:29:00
8 32767 byte
9 04/21 14:41:57
Log file No. Date Time Errorcode
0 04/15 15:20:13 E41a5 ##

1 04/15 11:59:16 E7a01 ##
2 04/15 10:29:53 E01c0 ##
3 04/15 10:29:36 E01c0 ##
4 04/15 10:29:09 E01c0 ##
5 04/15 10:29:09 E01c0 ##
6 04/15 10:28:02 E0189 ##
7 04/12 18:35:54 E514f ##
8 04/12 17:55:08 E6e6d ##
9 04/12 16:59:13 E514f ##
10 04/12 16:56:11 E6e19 ##
11 04/11 15:56:17 E41a5 ##
12 04/11 11:02:26 E5112 ##
13 04/11 10:57:42 E5112 ##
14 04/09 18:56:52 E5112 ##
15 04/09 17:03:24 E5112 ##
16 04/09 16:51:55 E5112 ##
17 04/09 16:43:13 E5112 ##
18 04/09 16:35:03 E5112 ##
19 04/09 16:32:19 E5112 ##
20 04/09 16:27:11 E5112 ##
21 empty
(9) Log0-Log9
This is the sequence log data files. Machine can store max 10 files in the memory. One of log file data
size is 32kbyte.
(10) ErrLog0-ErrLog21
This is the error log data files. Machine can store max 22 files in the memory. One of error file data size
is 16kbyte.
(11) LogAll, ErrLogALL
LogAll : That file is composed of Log0 - Log9 files. (Without LogList file.)
ErrLogAll : That file is composed of ErrLog0 - ErrLog21 files.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
4-10-2.Procedure for data upload
1) Confirm that all witches of DIP SW 2 on the RCP3(E) board are off.
2) Be sure to perform uploading while the main unit panel displays the following screen, which
appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 8 3 0 0 S
START V1.00

(2) Click Upload in the window below. The window shown in step 3 appears.
(3) Select the data to be uploaded in the following window and click OK.
For data types, refer to the previous section (4-11-1). The window shown in step 4 appears.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(4) Select the directory in which the data is to be saved, enter the file name, and then click the Save button. The
window shown in step 5 appears.
Default file name: “type of data”_“date”.dat

The sample window above is displayed when UserData is uploaded.
(5) Click OK in the following window to start uploading of the data.
During uploading, the following window is displayed.
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel during uploading.
0054
Data uploading now!

Please wait.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
(6) When the data has been uploaded, the following window appears.
Upload time of each data

Upload / Download time is dozens of seconds by Ether port connection. (Without head data.)
· UserData : approximately 45 seconds
· MachData : approximately 5 seconds
· HeadData : approximately 3 minutes
· HeadData_CPU : approximately 1 minutes
· HeadData_DRVx : approximately 1 minutes each
· LogList : approximately 1 seconds each
· Log0 - Log9 : approximately 30 seconds each
· ErrLog0 - ErrLog21 : approximately 30 seconds each
· LogAll : approximately 5 minutes
· ErrLogAll : approximately 5 minutes
* Do not rewrite or change the uploaded files.

When a file is downloaded, RMLight checks the file and confirms the type of data, then automati-
cally determines where to save the data.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
4-10-3.Procedure for data download
1) Confirm that all witches of DIP SW 2 on the RCP3(E) board are off.
2) Be sure to perform uploading while the main unit panel displays the following screen, which
appears immediately after the power is supplied to the main unit.
0101
P T- R 8 3 0 0 S
START V1.00
3) Do not rewrite or change the uploaded files.

When a file is downloaded, RMLight checks the file and confirms the type of data, then automati-
cally determines where to save the data.

(2) Click Upload in the window below. The window shown in step 3 appears.
(3) Select the data to be downloaded and click the Open button. The window shown in step 4 appears.
The sample window above is displayed when UserData is downloaded.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
The following screen is displayed in the main unit panel during downloading.
0054

Please wait.
(5) When the data has been downloaded, the following window appears. Click OK to display the window
shown in step 6.
(6) After the window shown on the right appears, check that "Download complete" is displayed in the main
unit panel, and then turn the power supply to the main unit off and then on.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
4-11.A setup in the case of connecting a terminal to PT-R.
· Machine log can not captured by ethernet connection. RS232C connection can capture the ma-
chine log only.
· When a terminal is connected to this machine, refer to the following for a setup of the terminal. The
following is an example when using a hyper-terminal.
· For RCP / RCP2 cpu machines. : 9600bps

· For ARC / RCP3 cpu machines. : 19200bps

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
5. Panel system
5-1.Caution to update the panel data.
· Check the panel system setting before upfate to panel data.
1) Turn on power the PT-R. Then push position A Immediately. Panel system menu will be displayed.
2) Select the INITIALIZE.
A
㩷㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㩷㪤㪜㪥㪬㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪁㪁㪆㪁㪁㪆㪁㪁㩷㩷㪁㪁㪑㪁㪁㪑㪁㪁㩷㩷㩷
+0+6+#.+<'
64#05('45%4''0&#6#
㪤㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪺㪿㪼㪺㫂㩷㫀㫅㩷㫇㫉㫆㪾㫉㪼㫊㫊㩷㩸㩸
㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㫎㪸㫀㫋㪅 5'.(&+#)015+5
470
㩷㩷㪤㪫㪦㪤㪄㪪㪠㪦㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪭㪼㫉㪅㪁㪅㪁㪁
3) Select the PLC SETTING.
㩷㩷㪤㪘㪠㪥㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪠㪥㪠㪫㪠㪘㪣㪠㪱㪜㩷
5;56'/5'672 5'6725%4''0
5'672+1 (1065'66+0)
2.%5'66+0)
+0+6+#.+<'/'/
5'6726+/'
4) Select the MODE SELECT.
㩷㩷㪪㪜㪫㩷㪬㪧㩷㪦㪧㪜㪩㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪪㪬㪩㪩㪦㪬㪥㪛㪠㪥㪞㪪
/1&'5'.'%6
':6'0'&'&/1&'
4'5'48'
/#+0/'07

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
5) Change the SCREEN TRANSFER MODE to ASC 6.
6) Push SET button.
7) Return back to the SET UP OPERATION SURROUNDINGS screen automatically. Turn off the power
to the PT-R.
㩷㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣㪜㪚㪫㪠㪦㪥 5'6 '5%
㩷㩷㪚㪦㪤㪤㪬㪥㪠㪚㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥㩷㪧㪩㪦㪫㪦㪚㪦㪣㪜㪯㪫㪜㪥㪛
㩷㩷㪪㪚㪩㪜㪜㪥㩷㪫㪩㪘㪥㪪㪝㪜㪩㩷㪤㪦㪛㪜㪘㪪㪚㩷㪍

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

5-2.Reference: List of panel system settings.
/#+0/'07
+0+6+#.+<'
+0+6+#.+ <'
64#05('45%4''0&#6#
5'.(&+#)015+5
470
/61/5+1
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<'
5;56'/5'672
5;56'/5 '672 5'6725%4''0
5'672+1 (1065'66+0)
2.%5'66+0)
+0+6+#.+<'/'/
5'6726+/'
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5;5'08+410/'06 5;56'/5'672 5'6 '5%

5;56'/5'672
5;56'/5 '672 56#0&$;/1&'6+/'=/+0?
5;56'/#4'#5'672 56#466+/'=5'%?
).1$#.9+0&19 617%*$7<<'45170& 10
%*#4564+0)&#6# 2#55914&5'672
&#6#6;2'1(5%4''001 $+0
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5;5'08+410/'06 5;56'/#4+#

94+6' 0':6 5'6 '5%
%744'065%4''001
%744'065%4''001 4'5'48'&
5;56'/5'672
914&

914&
914&
'441456#67
'441456#675
5;56'/#4'#5'672
5;56'/#4'# 5'672 016%*#0)'
914&
%.1%-&#6#%744'06
%.1%-&#6#%744'06
).1$#.9+0&19
914&
56#675
%*#4564+0)&#6#
914&
#4+#5+<'914&

4GXGTUGOQFGKVGOUCTGUGNGEVGF
5;56'/#4+#
4'#& 24'8 5'6 '5%
%*#0)'5%4''001
%*#0)'5%4''001 4'5'48'&

914&
914&

914&
&+52.#;101((
&+52.#;101(( 9+0&19%10641.

914&
914&
%.1%-&#6#5'6
%.1%-&#6#5'6 9+0&194')01

914&
914&
%10641. 9+0&19.1%#6+10

914&
914&
#4+#5+<'914&

4GXGTUGOQFGKVGOUCTGUGNGEVGF

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
/#+0/'07
+0+6+#.+<'
+0+6+#.+ <'
64#05('45%4''0&#6#
5'.(&+#)015+5
470
/61/5+1
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<'
5;56'/5'672
5;56'/5 '672 5'6725%4''0
5'672+1 (1065'66+0)
2.%5'66+0)
+0+6+#.+<'/'/
5'6726+/'
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5;5'08+410/'06 ).1$#.9+0&195'672 0':6 5'6 '5%
5;56'/5'672 ).1$#.9+0&19 01675'
5;56'/#4'#5'672
).1$#.9+0&19
).1$#.9 +0&19
%*#4564+0)&#6#
).1$#.9+0&195'672 24'8 5'6 '5%
).1$#.9+0&19#%%'55 &+4'%6
&#6#(14/#6 $+0
4')+564#6+1001

.1%#6+10:

;

/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5;5'08+410/'06 %*#4#%6'4564+0)&#6#5'672 5'6 '5%
5;56'/5'672 %*#4564+0)&#6#/1&'

5;56'/#4'#5'672
).1$#.9+0&19
%*#4564+0)&#6#
%*#456 4+0)&#6#

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
/#+0/'07
+0+6+#.+<'
64#05('45%4''0&#6#
5'.(&+#)015+5
470
/61/5+1
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<'
5;56'/5'672 5'6725%4''0
5'672+1 (1065'66+0)
2.%5'66+0)
+0+6+#.+<'/'/
5'6726+/'
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5'672+1 5'6725+1 5'6 '5%
5'6725+1 ':25'4+#.5'672 %1//70+%#6+104#6'

%1//5'672 ':25'4+#.'08+ &#6#.'0)6*
5'672+1 5'672%#2674'12 2#4+6; 1((
&+52.#;5'672 (70%6+105'672 %10641. '4%064.
24+06'45'672 0':6 %1//70+%#6+10+06'4(#%' 45%
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5'672+1 %1//70+%#6+105'672 5'6 '5%
5'6725+1 ':25'4+#.5'672 4'%'+8'6+/'176

5'%
%1//5'672 ':25'4+#.'08+ 4'64;%1706

5'672+1 5'672%#2674'12
&+52.#;5'672 (70%6+105'672
24+06'45'672 0':6
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5'672+1 5'672+1 0':6 5'6 '5%
5'6725+1 ':25'4+#.5'672 617%*12'4#6+10/1&' 21+06
%1//5'672 ':25'4+#.'08+ 5;56'/4'5'6/1&' 10
5'672+1 5'672%#2674'12 %1064#565'66+0) 10
&+52.#;5'672 (70%6+105'672 $4+)*60'555'66+0) 10
24+06'45'672 0':6 5'672.%& 014/#.
5'672+1 24'8 5'6 '5%

75'617%*2#0'.#(6'4 01
$#%-.+)*6$740176

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5'672+1 &+52.#;5'672 5'6 '5%
5'6725+1 ':25'4+#.5'672
%744'068#.7'
%1//5'672 ':25'4+#.'08+ 㧙
5'672+1 5'672%#2674'12
&+52.#;5'672 (70%6+105'672 5'6&'(#7.68#.7' &GHCWNV
24+06'45'672 0':6
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5'672+1 SET UP CAPTURE OPERATION 5'6 '5%
5'6725+1 ':25'4+#.5'672 QUALITY (1-100) 80
%1//5'672 ':25'4+#.'08+ B/W REVERSE NO
5'672+1 SET UP CAPTURE OP.
&+52.#;5'672 (70%6+105'672
24+06'45'672 0':6
NOT USE
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5'672+1 COMMUNICATION PORT SET UP 5'6 '5%
COM. PORT SET UP SERIAL I/F CHANGE NO
RI/VCC (COM2) RI
24'8

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
/#+0/'07
+0+6+#.+<'
64#05('45%4''0&#6#
5'.(&+#)015+5
470
/61/5+1
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<'
5;56'/5'672 5'6725%4''0
5'672+1 (1065'66+0)
2.%5'66+0)
+0+6+#.+<'/'/
5'6726+/'
5'67212'4#6+105744170&+0)5 /1&'5'.'%6+10 5'6 '5%
/1&'5'.'%6 %1//70+%#6+1024161%1. ':6'0&
':6'0&'&/1&' 5%4''064#05('4/1&' #5%

4'5'48'
/#+0/'07
5'67212'4#6+105744170&+0)5 ':6'0&/1&'. 0':6 5'6 %#0
/1&'5'.'%6 70+60Q
':6'0&'&/1&' 64#05/+55+106;2'
4'5'48' 64#05/+55+10(14/#6 $+0#4;
/#+0/'07 '6:57/%*'%- 10
6'4/+0#614 %4
':6'0&/1&'. $#%- 5'6 %#0
#%- 10
0#- 10

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152

/#+0/'07
+0+6+#.+<'
+0+6+#.+ <'
64#05('45%4''0&#6#
5'.(&+#)015+5
470
/61/5+1
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5'6726+/' 5'6 '5%
5;56'/5'672 5'6725%4''0 24'5'066+/'

5'672+1 (1065'66+0) ;/&
2.%5'66+0)
6+/'5'672
+0+6+#.+<'/'/
; / &
5'6726+/'
5'6726 +/'
/#+0/'07
+0+6+#.+<'
+0+6+#.+ <'
64#05('45%4''0&#6#
5'.(&+#)015+5
470
/61/5+1
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' 5'6725%4''0 5'6 '5%
5;56'/5'672 5'6725%4''0
5'6725 %4''0 +0+6+#.5%4''001 $
5'672+1 (1065'66+0) #.#4//'55#)'85+<'
2.%5'66+0) *5+<'
+0+6+#.+<'/'/ 10.+0''4414&+52.#; 10
5'6726+/'

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference
/#+0/'07
+0+6+#.+<'
+0+6+#.+ <'
64#05('45%4''0&#6#
5'.(&+#)015+5
470
/61/5+1
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' (1065'66+0) 5'6 '5%
5;56'/5'672 5'6725%4''0 (1065'66+0) ,#2#0

5'672+1 (1065'66+0)
(1065'6 6+0) -#0,+(10637#.+6; *+)*
2.%5'66+0)
+0+6+#.+<'/'/
5'6726+/'
* This command will erase the panel data.
/#+0/'07
+0+6+#.+<'
+0+6+#.+ <'
64#05('45%4''0&#6#
5'.(&+#)015+5
470
/61/5+1
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<'
5;56'/5'672 5'6725%4''0
5'672+1 (1065'66+0)
2.%5'66+0)
+0+6+#.+<'/'/
+0+6+#.+ <'/'/
5'6726+/'
/#+0 +0+6+#.+<' +0+6/'/14; +0+6K#.+<'/'/14; '5%
+0+6+#.+<'/'/14; 9#40+0)24'8+175&#6#9+..
$'18'494+66'0
+0+6+#.+<'%(%#4&
'06'42#55914&#0&24'55
%#8&#6#+0&':
56#46-';!
56#46

User Name䋺 Machine: PT-R4300E/S 2006/6
Periodic part exchange

Cycle Block Unit Action and 6M 12M Contents Parts Part code Q'ty
Standard work
Air filter element for RH unit Filter exchange 3 years A filter is exchanged in the third year. However, exchange the filter when it is very dirty. air filter element No.681142 70584840-00 1
<Standard>
<Standard>
Resister punch (H) PTR50-2 1
S70585537-12
Resister punch (A) PTR-51-2 1
S70585538-12
Body Exchange the register punch when it operates in the third year or 60,000 times working. <304mm Factory option> 䇭
Register punch Exchange 60,000 times or 3 years <304mm>
Confirm the punch position after exchanged. Resister punch 270H PTR209 1
S100083307V00
Regularly Resister punch 270A PTR210 1
S100083308V00
part exchange Resister punch 600A PTR211 1
S100083309V00
6-1.PTR4300E/S
(Option)
Compressor for RH unit Compressor A/S exchange 3,000 hours Exchange the compressors A/S when the pump operation time is 3,000 hours or more. Compressor A/S (8005 DC24) 100094767V00 1
RH unit Filter element (IN) 100046946V00 1
Compressor for RH unit Filter exchange 3,000 hours Exchange the filters at the same time as exchanging compressors A/S.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Filter element (OUT) 100046505V00 1

Plate Transport roller unit exchange
Path unit 2 years Exchange the transport roller unit every 2 years. Transport roller unit (Under) U1254042-00 1
transportation (Green roller)
Drum unit Tail clamps unit Tail clamps unit exchange 20,000 times Exchange the tail clamps unit when it operates 20,000 times plate loading. Trail Edge Clamp Unit U1254024-00 1
LOG Log check x Explain additional works to customer if there are troubles shown on the LOG.
Filter at Panel Cleaning Filter x To prevent the temperature error, dust is absorbed with the cleaner.
Air filter element for RH unit Rotate filter position x Rotate the air filter element to the clean area every 6 month.
Vacuum hose Check air leak x The air leakage is confirmed at the hose joint.
Clean punch bit x Collect all the punch bit.
Body
Clean punch dust chute x The punch dust shoot is cleaned by alcohol.
Punch block
The oiled paper is punched several times on all punches and the dust of aluminum on punch
Punch cleaning x

is taken.
Confirm the oil leak of gas spring of door. Clean it when there is an oil leak.
Standard Door Cleaning x
Exchange it when there is defective opening and shutting.
work Check exposure
Check exposure x Expose Focus & Laser power pattern.
(every 6 (Before and after the cleaning)
months) RH unit Cleaning of End of Zoom lens x Remove the CAL sensor circuit board and clean the End of Zoom lens.
RH unit Re-Calibration Operate Laser calibration with output resolution (DPI).
x
before and after lens cleaning And compare the current of laser (Iop/IopMax) before and after optical cleaning.
Clean the transport guide and sheet for prevention of registration problem.
Cleaning of transport guide x
Clean the sensor and transport rollers.
Plate Path unit Cleaning of transport belt x Clean the transport belts.
transportation Clean the roller with water. Clean the transport roller (Green) unit by water. If the roller is sticky by
Cleaning of transport roller x
cleaning, a registration problem may be occur.
Strike confirmation Check x Load a plate and confirm the fitting position of plate onto the drum pin.
Total Check Test expose with customer job Final Test x Expose user Job, and confirm the image quality.
Remove the CAL sensor circuit board and clean the End of Zoom lens.
Inside of RH unit Cleaning x Clean the stereographic projection lends, No1 lens, reflective mirror and zoom lens in the RH Unit.
RH unit
E.Reference
Do not touch nor clean the parabolic mirror for any reason.
Compressor for RH unit Check air flow x Check air flow using tool. (3L on end of Zoom lens)
6 Month work Main motor Tension of timing belt Main (Belt for main-drive motor) x Check the damage of the belt and looseness of the fixing screw on the motor pulley.
(every 12 Check the rod end bearing x Check whether there is grease in the rod end bearing on path unit driving shaft.
months) Put the some grease (Albanian grease) onto the rod end bearing on path unit driving shaft every
Grease up x
Path unit 40,000 times.
Check coil spring x Check the coil spring of path unit. Spring (Balance) 70516755-01 2
Check transport belt Check scratch and the damage of the transportation belt
Squeeze roller cleaning x Clean the squeeze roller (peace of aluminum will damage plate surface).
Clamp arm Explain the cleaning method to customer. Clean the roller with water. If the roller is not sticky or can not
6. Periodic replacement parts and maintenance list
Cleaning roller (Brown) cleaning x

remove the dust, clean it by alcohol. (Do not use the LIQUID 8).
Check for cracks or wear in the clamps.
Check clamp x
Clean the surface of the drum under leading clamps. (The aluminum powder is removed. )
Leading clamp Pin Clamp H 100087269V00 1
Check pin clam unit x Confirm operation pushing the pin clamp by hand. Pin Clamp A 100087270V00 1
Spring for pin clamp 70585504-00 2
Tailing clamp Check clamp rubber x Check the tail clamps. Exchange it if 20,000 times operations.
Clean/Remove the dust/aluminum dust on the drum surface using lint free cloth with alcohol.
Drum Cleaning x
12 Month work Clean the vacuum hole on the drum.
(every 12 Drum unit You rotate the balancer according to the drum groove by hand.
Check x
months) Confirm whether movement is smooth.
Drum balance unit Clean the balancer and the balancer groove.
Cleaning x Polish the balancer groove with the compound if some scratch exist or the balancer movement
does not be smooth.
Check Tail Clamp margin. It should be 7mm to 11mm with max plate size.
Transport Check tail clamp position x
If the margin is more than 11mm, Re-adjustment is required.
V08
Plate floating sensor Check plate floating sensor x Readjust the plate floating sensor. Check the parameter of the plate floating sensor.
Expose the internal test pattern (0% 50% on full exposure mode) on customer maximum plate.
Exposure Test Plate floating on the drum x
Confirm the presence of the banding.
Note
Engineer name
E-75
[Symbols] Good㧦1‫ޔ‬Adjustment㧦2‫ޔ‬Replaced㧦3‫ޔ‬Repaired㧦4‫ޔ‬Cleaning㧦5‫ޔ‬Oiling㧦6‫ޔ‬Tighten㧦7‫ޔ‬Dismantle㧦8
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V1.0
6-2.The Jig list
· PT-R4xxx
<< Reference >>
Sonic Tension Meters for belt tension adjustment.
Sonic Tension Meters U-505 or U-507. (Gates Unitta Asia Company)
URL
Jpn. : http://www.unitta.co.jp/
Eng. : http://www.gnapco.com/
· CAN Type Head

Jumper connector A/S 32ch_Head 86401386-00
Allen wernch (1.5) GX-15 70585359-00
The handle A/S(RC) 32ch_Head U1154038-00
The chip replacement jig A/S(RC) 32CH HEAD U1154037-00

FU1
1ǾA C200-240V
0.5A
50/60Hz
L S57-1 S1
LS56
U9(24V /30W ) L S57-2
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
X T0 L S57-3
L D Dri ver
L S57-4
U6(5V /300W )
M ai n Switch S1 RC KA1 KA3

S0
Head CPU

Surge Protector Board A C Servo Dri ver LS57-1㧦Rear cover i nterlock swi tch
LS57-2㧦Front cover interl ock swi tch
KA2
7.Power supply and interlocks
LS57-3㧦Home cover i nterl ock swi tch

LS57-4㧦A way cover interl ock swi tch
SRGE
LS56㧦 Operati on door interl ock swi tch
E1A S1㧦 M aintenance key swi tch
24V Head
U4(24V/300W ) Sensor,Li mi t Switch,Panel
Fan
X T1
E.Reference
U5(24V/300W ) A ctuator
-15V
Ci rcui t Protector U3(15V /75W )
QF1 KA3
A
A
15
15
PI O,Temperature sensor
KA 1 +15V
U2(15V /75W )
Noise Fil tter

Z1
V06
5V
RCP2,RB31,PIO
U1(5V /100W )
5V
CON,Head CPU
E-77
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08
8.Press punch
8-1.Press punch for standard plate size machine.
Parts cord Parts Name
U1250039-00 HB-S220
U1250040-00 HB-S425
U1250041-00 HB-S220/425
U1250042-01 DS400
U1250043-01 DS500
U1250044-01 DS700
U1250045-01 DS400/700
U1250046-01 DS400/700
U1250047-01 DS500/700
U1250048-00 KM550
U1250049-01 HB-W425
U1250050-01 PC458
U1250051-01 PC757
U1250052-01 PC458/757
U1250057-00 HB-S425(UU)
U1250108-00 HB-S220(UU)
U1250060-01 DS400/KM550(8/9)
U1250061-01 DS400/KM550(7/9)
U1250058-00 HB-S425+KM550
U1250063-01 HB(W)425/393+KM550
U1250069-00 HB/DS(W)425/400(11/8)
U1250104-00 HB/DS(W)425/400(11/6.25)
U1250106-00 HB(W)425/393+DS550
U1250107-00 HB/DS(W)425/400(11/10)
U1250113-00 HB(W)425/393+DS700
U1250119-00 HB/DS(W)425/400(11/6)
U1250110-00 PC737/KM550
U1250121-00 PC458/KM550
U1250118-00 HB/PC(W)425/457(11/11)
U1250120-00 HB/PC(W)425/457(11/10)
U1250059-00 HB/DS(W)425/400+KM550(10/9)
U1250111-00 HB/DS(W)425/400+KM550(11/9)
U1250115-00 DS/KM(W)500/550+HB425(10/11,8)
* All press punch are option.

On the press punch list from U1250039-00 to U1250052-01 are had a standard order code.
The other press punch on the list are ordered custom.

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08
E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

Punch block Template Gap
V08
Code Name Note

Home Away Home Away (mm)
Reference punch For plate width
100104374V00
617A (Option) from 590mm or more to less than 610mm
U1250039-02 HB-S220 PTR5-2 TYPE-D PTR7-3 TYPE-D 100079843V00 100079843V00 10/11 Common to standard spec. machine.
100108461V00 HB-S425 PTR5 TYPE-D PTR7-1 TYPE-D 70408137-01 100111397V00 10/11
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
100108463V00 HB-W425 PTR11 TYPE-D PTR12 TYPE-D 70408139-01 100111426V00 10(7)/11(8)

100108466V00 DS400 PTR9-1 TYPE-D PTR4-1 TYPE-D 70408141-01 100105409V00 6/8/9/10
Old:100108465V00
PTR4-4 custom (2 pieces.)

100108470V00 DS700R PTR4-1 TYPE-D PTR9-6 TYPE-D 70408142-01 100105423V00 6/8/9/10
DS400/500 (400 side)
100108468V00 PTR9-1 TYPE-D x2 PTR4-1 TYPE-D x2 70408141-01 100105409V00 6/8/9/10
DS400/500 (500 side)
DS400/700L(400 side) PTR4-1 TYPE-D 100105409V00
100110001V00 PTR9-1 TYPE-D x2 70408142-01 6/8/9/10 Old:100108465V00
DS400/700L(700 side) PTR4-4 TYPE-D 100105423V00
PTR4-4 custom (2 pieces.)
DS400/700R (400 side) PTR9-1 TYPE-D PTR4-1 TYPE-D 100105409V00
100108474V00 70408142-01 6/8/9/10
E.Reference

DS500/700L (500 side) PTR4-1 TYPE-D 100105409V00
100108469V00 PTR9-1 TYPE-D x2 70408142-01 6/8/9/10
DS500/700L (700 side) PTR4-4 TYPE-D 100105423V00
100108475V00 70408142-01 6/8/9/10
100108473V00 PC458 PTR1 TYPE-D PTR2 TYPE-D 70408140-01 100111499V00 8(7)
100108471V00 PC737 PTR1 TYPE-D PTR2 TYPE-D 70408143-01 100111500V00 8(7)
PC458/737 (458 side) 100111499V00
100108472V00 PTR1 TYPE-D x2 PTR2 TYPE-D x2 70408143-01 8(7)
8-2.Press punch for small plate size specification machine.
PC458/737 (737 side) 100111500V00

100108464V00 KM550 PTR7-1 TYPE-D PTR8-2 TYPE-D 70408138-01 100111535V00 9
* For the HB-S220/HB-S425 press punch, order below 2 each unit.

U1250039-02 HB-S220
100108461V00 HB-S425
* Press punch are custom option except HB-S220 for small plate size specification machine (option).
E-89
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
V08 E.Reference

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
E.Reference V08

PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
F. Error list
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
PT-R4xxx V1.10
******************** Detail message ********************
Ex101 : Nip roller does not ascend.

Ex102 : Nip roller does not descend.
Ex103 : Transport unit does not ascend.
Ex104 : Transport unit does not descend.
Ex105 : Trail clamp arm does not ascend.
Ex106 : Trail clamp arm does not descend.
Ex107 : Squeeze roller does not descend.
Ex108 : Squeeze roller does not ascend.
Ex109 : Trail clamp cannot be locked. PH24-1/2 or M24 is illegal.
Ex10a : Trail clamp cannot be unlocked. PH24-1/2 or M24 is illegal.
Ex10b : Balancer drive pin cannot be initialized.
Ex10c : The both of Home and Away side drive pin for the balancer can not be pulled out.
Ex10d : The both of Home and Away side drive pin for the balancer can not be inserted.
Ex10e : Bar for releasing the lead clamp does not ascend.
Ex10f : Bar for releasing the lead clamp does not descend.
Ex110 : Shutter does not open.
Ex111 : Shutter does not close.
Ex112 : Plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter than the set value.
Ex114 : Not bring down squeeze at loading.
Ex115 : Plate size (in the Y direction) is longer than the set value.
Ex116 : Servo status is illegal.
Ex117 : Servo status is error.
Ex118 : Servo alarm.
Ex11a : Drum speed is set beyond the permitted rate of the servo controller.
Ex11b : Current drum's encoder pulse is beyond 4000.
Ex11c : Error has occurred during drum positioning.
Ex11d : When the clamp is locked, some tail clamps are detected on the clamp arm, or when the clamp is
unlocked, some tail clamps are not detected on the clamp arm.
Ex11e : Drum's encoder pulse is beyond the permitted range after drum positioning.
Ex11f : Plate cannot be transferred into the transport unit.
Ex120 : Balancer pin cannot be detected before inserted.(Home side)
Ex121 : Balancer pin cannot be detected before pulled out (the balancer is not moving).(Home side)
Ex122 : Clamp arm and squeeze roller do not descend.
Ex123 : Trail clamp is half-locked.
Ex124 : The plate passing-sensor for unloading (PH54) does not switch to ON.
Ex125 : Time-out error has occurred when the squeeze roller ascends and clamp cam descends
simultaneously.
Ex126 : There was no plate to move to the shutter.
Ex127 : Servo controller does not enter the "Ready" status.
Ex128 : No balancer has been detected by the balancer search sensor.
Ex12c : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while alignment is performed).
Ex12d : Error has occurred on the alignment plate (while alignment is performed).
Ex12e : Error has occurred on the Home and Away sides of the alignment plate (when alignment is
performed).
Ex12f : Plate is not transferred to the punch unit.
Ex130 : Plate does not leave the punch unit.
Ex131 : Time-out error has occurred when Punch 1 is activated.
Page (1)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
Ex139 : After a plate is transferred to the gripper clamp, the plate detection sensor (PH29H/A) does not
switch to ON.
Ex13a : When the clamp arm is lowered, the sensor (to detect whether the clamp arm pins are hooked on the
clamp properly) has been turned ON.(Home side)
Ex13b : The specified encoder pulse for the drum is beyond 4000.
Ex13c : The transport unit's Away side is not moving during its operation.
Ex13d : The transport unit's Home side is not moving during its operation.
Ex13e : Error has occurred on the Home side of the alignment plate (while the alignment plate is finely
returning to its origin).
Ex13f : Error has occurred on the Away side of the alignment plate (while the alignment plate is finely
returning to its origin).
Ex140 : Error has occurred on the Home and Away sides of the alignment plate (while the alignment plate is
finely returning to its origin).
Ex141 : A plate remains in the transport unit when the machine received a request command.
Ex142 : A plate remains in the transport unit during error handling.
Ex143 : A plate remains on the discharge table in the transport unit.
Ex144 : A plate remains on the insertion table in the transport unit.
Ex145 : Plate cannot be moved onto the discharge table during initialization.
Ex146 : Plate cannot be moved onto the insertion table.
Ex147 : Balancer search operation has not been completed properly.
Ex148 : When the transport unit descends, only the Home side Down sensor in the transport unit is turned
ON.
Ex149 : When the transport unit descends, only the Away side Down sensor in the transport unit is turned
ON.
Ex14a : When the transport unit ascends, only the Home side UP sensor in the transport unit is turned ON.
Ex14b : When the transport unit ascends, only the Away side UP sensor in the transport unit is turned ON.
Ex14c : Front, rear or side cover is open.(Some interlock switches are OFF.)
Ex14d : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (home)
Ex14e : Thumbscrew is not tightened securely on the rear cover. (The servo stop switch is ON.)
Ex14f : A plate exists on the discharge table in the transport unit during initialization.
Ex150 : A plate exists on the insertion table in the transport unit during initialization.
Ex151 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (The number of balancers checked with the balancer search
sensor was one, two or three for both the Home and Away sides.)
Ex152 : Clamp arm is not in the UP position.
Ex153 : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (away)
Ex154 : Blower is turned off but signal does not change.
Ex155 : Tail clamps are missing during initialization.
Ex156 : The size check program of the cetering function detects that the measured plate size is longer than
expected one.
Ex157 : The size check program of the cetering function detects that the measured plate size is shorter than
expected one.
Ex158 : Both of Home and Away size check sensors are on before starting the centering program.
Ex159 : Auto-loader is stopped by a interlock OFF.
Ex15a : This hardware matching is illegal.
Ex15b : The balancer is not moved to the target position.
Ex15c : The drum can not be spun up because the Home-Upper sensor of the Lead clamp release bar is off.
Ex15d : During the plate loading, double plate loading is detected.
Ex15e : The loaded plate is floating from the drum is detected during drum spining.
Ex15f : The drum cannot be spun up because the Upper sensor of the clamp arm is off.
Ex160 : The drum can not be spined up because the Home-Upper sensor of the clamp arm is off.
Ex161 : The drum can not be spined up because the balancing pin (Away side) is not in the waiting position.
Ex162 : The drum can not be spined up because the balancing pin (Home side) is not in the waiting position.
Ex163 : The drum can not be spined up because the Upper sensor of the squeeze roller is off.
Ex164 : The drum can not be spun up because the Away-Upper sensor of the Lead clamp release bar is off.
Ex165 : The drum is rotated to "lead clamp position", but status of Servo controller (SVC) is not changed to
"Ready".
Ex166 : The drum is rotated to "tail clamp position", but status of Servo controller (SVC) is not changed to
"Ready".
Page (2)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
Ex167 : The drum is rotated to "squeeze position", but status of Servo controller (SVC) is not changed to
"Ready".
Ex168 : The drum is rotated to "balance pin before inserted", but status of Servo controller (SVC) is not
changed to "Ready".
Ex169 : The drum is rotated to "balance pin after inserted", but status of Servo controller (SVC) is not
changed to "Ready".
Ex16a : The drum is rotated to "pick up tail clamp", but status of Servo controller (SVC) is not changed to
"Ready".
Ex16b : The drum is rotated to "plate remove", but status of Servo controller (SVC) is not changed to
"Ready".
Ex16c : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for lead clamp.
Ex16d : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for tail clamp.
Ex16e : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for squeeze.
Ex16f : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for balance pin insertion.
Ex170 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for balance pin pulling out.
Ex171 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for picking up tail clamp.
Ex172 : SVC Error has occurred during drum positioning for plate removing.
Ex173 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(lead clamp position)
Ex174 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(tail clamp position)
Ex175 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(squeeze position)
Ex176 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(balance pin before inserted)
Ex177 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(balance pin after inserted)
Ex178 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(pick up tail clamp)
Ex179 : Time-out error has occurred during drum positioning.(plate remove)
Ex17a : After verifying the removal of the plate, press the OK button.When the OK button is pressed,
initialization begins.
Ex17b : PH62A-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17c : PH29H-sensor is illegal. The PH29H-sensor does not turn ON during initialization.
Ex17d : PH61H-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17e : PH61A-sensor is illegal. The sensor detects a plate during initialization.
Ex17f : PH29A-sensor is illegal. The PH29A-sensor does not turn ON during initialization.
Ex180 : Drum does not start rotating at high-speed.
Ex181 : Drum does not rotate at the specified high-speed.
Ex182 : Error has occurred after the drum rotated at the specified high-speed.
Ex183 : Drum cannot be stopped when rotating at high-speed.
Ex184 : Drum operation is halted with an emergency stop command.
Ex185 : Drum operation is stopped with a abort command.
Ex186 : Drum's vacuum pressure is not sufficient. Please confirm connection of the blower-hose, or the
Vacuum-sensor is illegal.
Ex187 : Error has occurred on the blower or the power supply of the blower is OFF.
Ex188 : Drum operation is halted due to low pressure in the drum.
Ex189 : Door is open.
Ex18a : Door does not open.
Ex18b : Transport tasks: Parameter error
Ex18c : Error has occured on the blower. Please turn off this machine, and turn on after waiting 10 seconds.
Also, confirm whether or not the connector doesn't come off.
Ex18d : The drum can not be spun up, because some of the interlock switches are OFF, or some of the
actuator's sensors are damaged, or the blower is damaged.
Ex18e : Door does not opend, because some interlock switch are OFF(front, rear or side cover is open).
Ex190 : Clamp arm does not descend.(Home side)
Ex191 : Clamp arm does not descend.(Away side)
Ex192 : Clamp arm does not ascend.(Home side)
Ex193 : Clamp arm does not ascend.(Away side)
Ex194 : When the clamp arm is lowered, the sensor (to detect whether the clamp arm pins are hooked on the
clamp properly) has been turned ON.Away side)
Ex195 : Trail clamp cannot be locked.(Home side)
Ex196 : Trail clamp cannot be locked.(Away side)
Ex197 : Trail clamp cannot be unocked.(Home side)
Page (3)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
Ex198 : Trail clamp cannot be unocked.(Away side)
Ex199 : Balancer drive pin cannot be inserted.(Home side) Either of PH11-1H,PH11-2H or M11H is illegal.
Ex19a : Balancer drive pin cannot be inserted.(Away side) Either of PH11-1A,PH11-2A or M11A is illegal.
Ex19b : Balancer drive pin cannot be pulled out.(Home side) Either of PH11-1H,PH11-2H or M11H is illegal.
Ex19c : Balancer drive pin cannot be pulled out.(Away side) Either of PH11-1A,PH11-2A or M11A is illegal.
Ex19d : Balancer pin cannot be detected before inserted.(Away side)
Ex19e : Balancer pin cannot be detected before pulled out (the balancer is not moving).(Away side)
Ex19f : No balancer has been detected by the balancer search sensor.(Home side)
Ex1a0 : No balancer has been detected by the balancer search sensor.(Away side)
Ex1a1 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (Home side)
Ex1a2 : Number of balancers is not sufficient. (Away side)
Ex1a3 : Soft-interlock or drum-stop swtich is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a4 : The cover-interlock switch is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a5 : The interlock switch-3 is OFF during drum spining.
Ex1a6 : A plate cannot be carried into the transport unit.
Ex1a8 : Auto-loader is not turned on, or some interlock switches on Auto-loader are OFF. Please turn on
Auto-loader, or all interlock switch.
Ex1a9 : Cassete carrier was removed. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex1aa : The door of the cassette part is open.
Ex1ab : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode maintenance-cover.
Ex1ac : Bridge cover-2 was opened. Please clode bridge cover-2.
Ex1ad : A slipping paper under a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter than the set
value.
Ex1ae : A slipping paper on a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter than the set
value.
Ex1b0 : Trail clamp is not detected on the clamp arm before the plate loading.
Ex1b1 : Trail clamp is detected on the clamp arm before the plate unloading.
Ex1b2 : Trail clamp cannot be set correctly.
Ex1b3 : This plate can't be transed. Because something error has occured when the transfering to AT.
Ex1b4 : This plate can't be transed. Because trans path position is down.
Ex1b6 : The bridge-passing sensor does not turn OFF.(for Jig mode)
Ex1b7 : A plate remains on the plate detection sensor(PH70).
Ex1b8 : When detects the front of a plate, the detection area is not brought.
Ex1b9 : When detects the front of a plate, the detection of Home or Away is not brought.
Ex1ba : PH11-2H-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2H-sensor does not turn ON during initialization.
Ex1bb : PH11-2A-sensor is illegal. The PH11-2A-sensor does not turn ON during initialization.
Ex1c0 : Lead clamp release bar cannot be driven. Either PH30H or PH31H is illegal.
Ex1c1 : Lead clamp release bar cannot be driven. Either PH30A or PH31A is illegal.
Ex1c2 : Trans path cannot be driven. Either PH55, PH56, or PH57 is illegal.
Ex1c3 : Trans path cannot be driven. Either PH56, or, PH57 is illegal.
Ex1c6 : Trail clamp arm cannot be driven. Either PH20 or PH21 is illegal.
Ex1c7 : Trail clamp arm cannot be driven. Either PH20 or M20 is illegal.
Ex1c8 : An interleaf was detected under a plate.
Ex1c9 : When centering alignment is performed, the plate set position is out of range or the measured plate
size is longer than the expected one.
Ex1ca : Error has occured on the punching unit. The punch hole could not be opened correctly.
Ex1cb : Opened shutter obstructs trans path driving.
Ex1cc : Trail clamp arm obstructs trans path driving.
Ex1cd : A plate remains in a machine.
Ex1ce : When the plate is unloaded, the plate pass sensor (PH59) does not switch to ON.
Ex1d0 : Transfer operation is halted with a abort command.
Ex1d1 : Transport tasks are being processed.
Ex1d2 : Transport tasks are not being processed.
Ex1d3 : Transport tasks: Message order error
Ex1d4 : Transport system is not initialized.
Ex1d5 : Loose plate detection sensor is illegal.
Page (4)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
Ex1d6 : Clamp arm sensors are illegal. (PH20,PH21)
Ex1d8 : Clamp bolt sensors are illegal. (PH24-1,PH24-2)
Ex1d9 : Transport unit position sensors are illegal. (PH55,PH56,PH57)
Ex1dc : Sampling the plate displacement detection did not end.
Ex1e0 : SVC user parameter breakdown
Ex1e1 : SVC user parameter setting error
Ex1e2 : SVC over-current
Ex1e3 : SVC detection of regenerative error
Ex1e4 : SVC postion error pulse overflow
Ex1e5 : SVC Main circuit voltage error detection
Ex1e6 : SVC overspeed
Ex1e7 : SVC overloaded (high load)
Ex1e8 : SVC overloaded (low load)
Ex1e9 : SVC stauts 99h
Ex1ea : SVC heat sink has overheated.
Ex1eb : SVC stauts b1h
Ex1ec : SVC is out of control.
Ex1ed : SVC phase error has been detected in the encoder.
Ex1ef : SVC A and B phase for the encoder has broke down.
Ex1f0 : SVC C phase for the encoder has broke down.
Ex1f1 : SVC some phases of power line is open.
Ex1f3 : SVC An instantaneous loss of power has occurred
Ex1f4 : SVC unknown error
Ex200 : Exposure operation is interrupted with a abort command.
Ex201 : Exposure processing task is now processing another message.
Ex202 : Cancellation requested while no processing is being performed.
Ex203 : PGON is not asserted.
Ex204 : START signal is not asserted.
Ex205 : START signal is not negated.
Ex206 : Test pattern; Data is not transferred.
Ex207 : Test pattern; Data transfer is not completed.
Ex208 : Reset procedure for Image board is not completed.
Ex209 : The set value for the drum rotation speed is too large.
Ex20c : Recording head has traveled beyond the limit (on the Away side).
Ex20d : Recording head has traveled beyond the limit (on the Home side).
Ex20e : Recording head positioning range error
Ex20f : Recording head has not been positioned at its origin. (origin sensor does not turn OFF.)
Ex210 : Recording head has not been positioned at its origin. (origin sensor does not turn ON.)
Ex211 : Emergency stop is requested for the secondary-scanning motor.
Ex212 : Secondary-scanning motor is deactivated with a abort command.
Ex213 : Secondary scanning motor is illegal.
Ex214 : Exposure in the secondary scanning direction exceeds the effective image output range.
Ex215 : FPGA sequence error.
Ex216 : Time-out error has occurred when the secondary scanning motor is activated.
Ex217 : EZ search has not detected the ORG sensor.
Ex218 : EZ search has not detected the EZ sensor.
Ex219 : When the CAL sensor search was executed, the maximum light intensity was less than 50 mW.
Ex21a : When the CAL sensor search was executed, the light intensity at the measurement starting point was
the maximum.
Ex21b : When the CAL sensor search was executed, the light intensity at the measurement end point was the
maximum.
Ex21c : CAL sensor search has not detected the over travel limit switch on the recording head's Home side.
Ex21d : Test pattern parameter error
Ex21e : PGON signal is not negated.
Ex21f : Secorndary direction original point setup procedure failure.(The calibrated original point is not same
as logical original point)
Ex220 : After an image data transfer from RIP is interrupted, it isn't resumed.
Ex221 : Drum rotation error was detected. This plate will be unloaded because it could not be exposed
Page (5)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
correctly.
Ex222 : An error was detected in the exposure control signal. This plate will be unloaded because it could not
be exposed correctly.
Ex223 : The secondary-scanning area counter overflowed.
Ex224 : Hungup was detected.
Ex225 : An error was detected in the exposure preparation processing.
Ex300 : Both op plate pad and paper pad are not in original point.
Ex301 : After a slipping paper is removed, plate cannot be detected.
Ex302 : A slipping paper on a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter than the set
value.
Ex303 : Plate pad cannot be initialized.
Ex304 : Plate pad cannot carry a plate.
Ex305 : During the carring a plate, plate pad dropped the plate.
Ex306 : Paper pad cannot be initialized.
Ex307 : Air pressure in the plate pad does not go down.
Ex308 : Air pressure in the paper pad does not go down.
Ex309 : Time-out error has occurred when plate pad was moved.
Ex30a : Time-out error has occurred when paper pad was moved.
Ex30b : Time-out error has occurred when plate pad was moved intermittently.
Ex30c : Time-out error has occurred when paper pad was moved intermittently.
Ex30d : A plate cannot be carried into the transport unit.
Ex30e : During the removing a paper, PH90 does not switch to ON.
Ex30f : During the removing a paper, PH90 does not switch to OFF.
Ex310 : Maintenance cover of auto-loader is open. Please close maintenance cover.
Ex311 : Bridge cover-2 of auto-loader is open. Please close bridge cover-2.
Ex312 : Cassette carrier is not set. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex313 : A plate remains in the bridge unit.
Ex314 : A paper remains in the paper exit.
Ex317 : Auto-loader is not turned on, or some interlock switches on Auto-loader are OFF. Please turn on
Auto-loader, or all interlock switch.
Ex318 : A plate cannot be carried to the bridge-passing sensor.
Ex319 : The plate pad went down from original point.
Ex31a : The paper pad went down from original point.
Ex31b : Maintenance-cover of Auto-loader was opend. Please clode maintenance-cover.
Ex31c : Bridge cover-2 was opened. Please clode bridge cover-2.
Ex31d : Door was opened. Please close the door.
Ex31e : Cassete carrier was removed. Please set cassette carrier.
Ex31f : During the carring a paper, paper pad dropped the paper.
Ex320 : Plate pad dropped a plate, until the plate pad arrived at intermediate sensor.
Ex321 : A slipping paper on front of a plate was detected.
Ex322 : A plate remains on the sensor-2 of the bridge.
Ex323 : Intermediate sensor is OFF.
Ex324 : Power switch was turned off, while Auto-loader was moving.
Ex325 : A plate cannot be carried to intermediate sensor.
Ex326 : A slipping paper under a plate was detected. Or a plate size (in the Y direction) is shorter than the set
value.
Ex327 : The bridge-passing sensor does not turn OFF.(for Jig mode)
Ex341 : The interlock switch-3 is OFF.
Ex344 : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (home)
Ex345 : A fuse on the relay board was blown. (away)
Page (6)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
Ex348 : Shutter does not open.
Ex349 : Shutter does not close.
Ex360 : A plate remains on the bridge's sensor-1.
Ex361 : No plate exists on the bridge's sensor-3.
Ex362 : A plate remains on the bridge's sensor-3.
Ex363 : A plate size in the Y direction is too long when its transferring to the AT.
Ex364 : A plate size in the Y direction is too short when its transferring to the AT. Or an interleaf in front of a
plate was detected.
Ex365 : After the paper pad is descended, the metal sensor does not switch to ON.
Ex366 : Plate pad dropped the plate, before this initialize.
Ex367 : A teaching of plate size in the Y direction (1st) is finished.
Ex368 : A teaching of plate size in the Y direction (2nd) is finished.
Ex369 : This plate can't be transed. Because something error has occured when the transfering to AT.
Ex36a : Air pressure in the plate pad does not go down after retry.
Ex36c : This plate is judge as a paper during judgement operation.
Ex36d : This plate can't be transed. Because trans path position is down.
Ex380 : The door of the cassette part is open.
Ex381 : Time-out error has occurred when lift was initialized.
Ex382 : Time-out error has occurred when lift was moved.
Ex383 : Though the lift was initialized, the origin sensor is not ON.
Ex384 : The lift is not in the position where it is specified.
Ex385 : Already, there has been a cassette on the lift.
Ex386 : There are some cassettes which aren't being set properly.
Ex388 : There is no cassette in the specified cassette slot.
Ex389 : There is no cassette on the lift.
Ex38a : Lift has traveled beyond the limit (on the Up side).
Ex38b : Lift has traveled beyond the limit (on the Down side).
Ex38d : A cassette is already in the place to return a cassette.
Ex38e : A lift can't be raised and lowered because some cassettes are not in the lift or the cassette properly.
Ex38f : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to cassette part.
Ex390 : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to lift.
Ex391 : Either plate pad or paper pad is not in original point.
Ex392 : An ineffective cassette number was indicated.
Ex393 : Cassette has traveled beyond the limit (on the Lift side).
Ex394 : Cassette has traveled beyond the limit (on the Cassette side).
Ex395 : MA-L can't be initialized because some cassettes can't be returned to the origin.
Ex396 : Though there is a cassette on the lift, the place to return the cassette isn't vacant.
Ex397 : Though the movement of the lift was finished, the lift position sensor at the target position is not on.
Ex398 : MA-L Servo alarm
Ex399 : Time-out error has occurred when arm was moved.
Ex39a : Time-out error has occurred when a cassette was moved to cassette part by arm.
Ex39b : Arm jut-out sensor (LS210E) is off.
Ex39c : A cassette is in illegal position of the cassette slot.
Ex39d : Arm is not in original point.
Ex39e : SQ210A sensor is illegal.
Ex3a0 : Autoloader power is OFF, or all interlock switches are OFF.
Ex3a1 : Autoloader's maintenance cover is open.
Ex3a2 : Cassette carrier not set.
Ex3a3 : Zero-point sensor for pad transport not OFF at time of zero-point return.
Ex3a4 : Zero-point sensor for pad rotation not OFF at time of zero-point return.
Ex3a5 : Zero-point sensor for pad transport (or zero-point sensor for pad rotation) not OFF at time of
zero-point return.
Ex3a6 : Pad rotation motor not at zero point at time of zero-point return by pad transport motor.
Ex3a7 : Pad transport motor cannot do zero-point return.
Ex3a8 : Pad transport zero-point sensor not ON after zero-point return by pad transport motor.
Ex3a9 : Pad rotation motor cannot do zero-point return.
Ex3aa : Pad rotation zero-point sensor not ON after zero-point return by pad rotation motor.
Ex3ab : Timeout from sensor for prohibited pad rotation position during separate operation.
Page (7)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
Ex3ac : Timeout at sensor for prohibited pad rotation during transfer.
Ex3ad : Plate detected at autoloader's conveyer rollers.
Ex3af : Zero-point sensor for pad transport not going OFF.
Ex3b0 : Zero-point sensor for pad rotation not going OFF.
Ex3b1 : Timeout for carrier lock DC motor rotation.
Ex3b2 : Zero-point sensor not ON after carrier lock.
Ex3b3 : Timeout for carrier lock DC motor rotation.
Ex3b4 : Zero-point sensor not OFF after cassette lock cleared.
Ex3b5 : Timeout during position change for pad customization.
Ex3b6 : Drop in vacuum pressure at start of plate transport.
Ex3b7 : Plate dropped near carrier during plate transport.
Ex3b8 : Plate dropped during handling movement.
Ex3b9 : Plate dropped between units during plate transport.
Ex3ba : Plate dropped near conveyer rollers during plate transport.
Ex3bb : Vacuum pressure not OFF after vacuum pump turned OFF.
Ex3bc : Timeout without completing PCL status at time of pad transport motor step operation.
Ex3bd : Plate transported, but interleaf detected.
Ex3be : Pad transport motor not at zero point after plate transported to rollers.
Ex3bf : Pad rotation motor not at zero point after plate transported to rollers.
Ex3c0 : Plate transported, but interleaf adhering to plate front, or plate's [Y] size shorter than setting.
Ex3c1 : A plate cannot be carried into the transport unit.
Ex3c2 : Plate transported, but plate remains on conveyer rollers (plate's [Y] size longer than setting.)
Ex3c3 : Possible collision as pad rotation motor not returned to zero point.
Ex3c4 : Timeout without completing PCL status at time of pad transport motor movement.
Ex3c5 : Timeout without completing PCL status at time of pad rotation motor movement.
Ex3c6 : Power cut during operation.
Ex3c7 : Maintenance cover opened.
Ex3c8 : Cassette carrier out.
Ex3c9 : Plate dropped without nipping at conveyer rollers.
Ex3ca : PT-R's door open.
Ex3cb : Plate on PT-R's conveyer table prior to plate transport from SA-L.
Ex3cc : Autoloader power is OFF.
Ex400 : Plate has already been loaded.
Ex401 : Plate has not been loaded.
Ex403 : Dump papers which collected in the box.
Ex600 : Either the conveyer, processor, or stacker is not turned on, or is in the busy status or error status.
Ex601 : Either the conveyer, processor, or stacker is not turned on, or is in the busy status or error status.
Ex602 : The plate is not possible to be transfered into AT unit.
Ex603 : The plate cannot be transferred completely into the AT unit.
Ex606 : Error
Ex607 : Busy
Ex608 : Error
Ex609 : Busy
Ex60a : Error
Ex60b : Busy
Ex60c : Error occurred in ATM while a plate was carried to ATM.
Ex80c : The result of the calculation "Initial value + increment value * (repetition - 1)" exceeds the upper limit
value.
Ex80d : (The result of the calculation "Exposure starting point + (pattern width + gap) * (repetition - 1)"
exceeds the plate size.
Ex80e : The specified plate is not linked with the printing-machine's data.
Ex80f : Initialization process is not completed.please reboot.
Ex810 : No plate is set at inlet of transport unit.
Ex811 : Plate (printer) size specified by host computer is not registered.
Ex812 : Image size specified by host computer is larger than allowable output image size.
Ex813 : Current offset of printing machine settings cause image to extend off plate.
Ex814 : Current Adjust of printing machine settings cause image to extend outside of allowable exposure
Page (8)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
area.
Ex815 : The exposure area cannot be secured.
Ex816 : Some LD is (are) nearing the end of life. Please contact our office or agency to replace with new
one(s).
Ex817 : There are some punch blocks which have been used more than endurance time. Please contact our
office or agency and ask to replace them.
Ex819 : It failed to read the cassette number. It considers that the cassette number is No.1.
Ex81a : Some LD cannot be calibrated to target power. Calibration has been done to lower target and usable,
but please contact our office or agency.
Ex81b : Some LD cannot be calibrated to target power. Temporary the machine is working with half channels
of LD. Please contact our office or agency.
Ex81c : Some LD cannot be calibrated to target power. Calibration must be done.
Ex81d : Temperature of environment > 28 degrees.
Ex81e : Temperature of environment < 18 degrees.
Ex81f : Sensor for temperature of environment has not been connected.
Ex820 : The maintenance time of Trail clamps is drawing near. Please contact our office or agency and
request those maintenances.
Ex821 : Trail clamps have been used for more than the endurance time. Please contact our office or agency
and request those maintenances.
Ex822 : Backup/restore of the data on NVRAM can't be performed, because the Dip-Sw 2 is not on.
Ex823 : The backup of the data on NVRAM is not in Flash-Memory.
Ex824 : LD calibration is required, as LD power deviated from target power. But it cannot be processed
because LD block temperature is too low.
Ex825 : The direction where a connected conveyer can't be changed is set up in the plate types setting.
Ex826 : No respons was returned from the conveyer.
Ex827 : An error was returned from the conveyer toward the switching command.
Ex828 : The conveyer can't be changed to the direction that is set up in the plate types setting.
Ex82a : LD calibration has been done, as LD power deviated from target power.
Ex82b : Test mail
Ex82c : No response come from DNS.
Ex82e : It failed in the connection to the signal tower via network.
Ex82f : The name of the mail server isn't right.
Ex830 : It failed in the connection to the mail server.
Ex831 : Mail account was rejected.
Ex832 : An error occurred in the transmission of DATA command.
Ex833 : An error occurred in the transmission of header.
Ex834 : An error occurred in the transmission of body.
Ex835 : An error occurred in the transmission of attached file.
Ex836 : An error occurred in the transmission of TO command.
Ex837 : A command was sent to the SMTP server. But, no answer was returned from the server.
Ex838 : An error occurred in the POP befor SMTP.
Ex839 : The head task was hanged up.
Ex83a : Execute the calibration against all the following resolutions. Cannot expose until the calibration is
done.
Ex83b : LD calibration has been done, as LD power DEVIATED MUCH from target power.
Ex83c : It is time to replace the filter in the air filtering unit. Note that, after replacing the filter, it is necessary
to press the RESET button of the counter for the Dust filter in the Consumable Timer screen.
Ex83f : Compressor linked LD have been used for more than the endurance time. Please contact our office or
agency and request those maintenances.
Ex840 : The DHCP server is started. Don't connect the engine with user's LAN.
Ex841 : Could not initialize due to the download mode.
Ex870 : Drum servo is not matched.
Ex871 : Image control board is not matched.
Ex880 : Product-Key data is not matched.
Ex881 : Brand-Code data is not matched.
Ex890 : An error occurred in SMTP AUTH process.
Ex891 : SMTP AUTH is not supported.
Ex892 : SMTP AUTH authentication failed
Page (9)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
Ex8f0 : Servo pack: Time-out error occurred while receiving data.
Ex8f1 : Servo-Pack:Address error
Ex8f2 : Servo-Pack:Data error
Ex8f3 : Servo-Pack:Check sum error
Ex8f4 : Servo-Pack:Undefined error code
Ex8f5 : Servo-Pack:Number of received characters is insufficient.
Exe01 : Excessive current in the LD drive (driver 1 board)
Exe05 : Driver board temperature error or FPGA Version error
Exe06 : -5 V power supply error
Exe07 : Calibration sensor is not connected.
Exe08 : Offset error in the calibration sensor
Exe09 : Irregular 5 V power supply
Exe0a : Irregular +15 V power supply
Exe0b : Irregular -15 V power supply
Exe0c : Irregular 24 V power supply
Exe0d : Cover switch is OFF.
Exe0e : BL command error (counter value is 0)
Exe0f : Zoom sensor does not detect.
Exe10 : Focus sensor does not detect.
Exe11 : Time over for home return.(zoom or focus motor)
Exe12 : Power supply irregular while the motor is driving.(zoom or focus motor)
Exe13 : Pulse motor has traveled beyond the limit. (Zoom or focus motor)
Exe14 : Irregular power supply(instantaneous loss)
Exe20 : Temperature of the LD block is greater than 28•. (Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit >
35•. Temperature of environment > 28•.)
Exe21 : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit is greater than 35•. (Temperature of environment >
28•.)
Exe22 : Temperature of the radiating fin of the Peltier element is greater than 55 •. (Temperature at the
periphery of the optical unit > 35•. Temperature of environment > 28•.)
Exe23 : Dew condensation error. (Temperature of the LD block • 22•.)
Exe24 : Sensor for LD block has not been connected.
Exe25 : Sensor for the periphery of the optical unit has not been connected.
Exe26 : Sensor for the radiating fin of the Peltier element has not been connected.
Exe27 : Sensor for the dew condensation detection sensor has not been connected.
Exe28 : Temperature of the LD block is low.
Exe30 : Power supply error occurred when the recording head received the DW command.
Exe31 : Command error occurred when the recording head received the DW command.
Exe32 : Download error occurred when the recording head received the DP command.
Exe33 : Download error occurred when the recording head received the DF command.
Exe34 : Download address error occurred.
Exe35 : Error occurred when the recording head received the BU command.
Exe36 : Error occurred when the recording head received the BD command.
Exe40 : Writing error occurred when the recording head received the AC command.
Exe41 : Writing error on EEPROM
Exe42 : RAM error
Exe43 : ROM check sum error
Exe44 : FPGA error
Exe45 : Data error due to a divide-by-zero error
Exe60 : LD current setting Error
Exe61 : Temperature of the LD block > 28•. (Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35•.
Temperature of environment • 28•.)
Exe62 : Temperature of the LD block > 28•. (Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit • 35•.
Temperature of environment > 28•.)
Exe63 : Temperature of the LD block > 28•. (Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit • 35•.
Page (10)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
Exe64 : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35•. (Temperature of environment • 28•.)
Exe65 : Temperature of the radiator > 55•. (Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35•.
Exe66 : Temperature of the radiator > 55•. (Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit • 35•.)
Exe67 : The LD block has dew.(Temperature of the LD block < 22•. Temperature inside the machine • 18•.)
Exe68 : The LD block has dew.(Temperature of the LD block < 22•. Temperature inside the machine < 18•.)
Exe69 : Temperature of the LD block < 5•.(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit • 17•.)
Exe6a : Temperature of the LD block < 5•.(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit < 17•.
Exe6b : Temperature of the LD block > 28•.(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35•.
Exe6c : Temperature of the LD block > 28•.(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit • 35•.
Exe6d : Temperature of the LD block > 28•.(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit • 35•.
Exe6e : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35•.(Temperature of environment • 28•.)
Exe6f : Temperature of the radiator > 55•. (Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35•.
Exe70 : Temperature of the radiator > 55•. (Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit • 35•.)
Exe71 : It is just before an exposure head has dew.(Temperature of the LD block < 22•. Temperature of
environment • 18•.)
Exe72 : It is just before an exposure head has dew.(Temperature of the LD block < 22•. Temperature of
environment < 18•.)
Exe73 : 5• • Temperature of the LD block < 17•.(Temperature of environment • 18•.)
Exe74 : 5• • Temperature of the LD block < 17•.(Temperature of environment < 18•.)
Exea0 : Light intensity adjustment error 0ch
Exeaa : Light intensity adjustment error 10ch
Exeab : Light intensity adjustment error 11ch
Exeac : Light intensity adjustment error 12ch
Exead : Light intensity adjustment error 13ch
Exeae : Light intensity adjustment error 14ch
Exeaf : Light intensity adjustment error 15ch
Exeb0 : Light intensity adjustment error 16ch
Exeba : Light intensity adjustment error 26ch
Exebb : Light intensity adjustment error 27ch
Exebc : Light intensity adjustment error 28ch
Exebd : Light intensity adjustment error 29ch
Exebe : Light intensity adjustment error 30ch
Exebf : Light intensity adjustment error 31ch
Exec0 : Light intensity adjustment error 32ch
Page (11)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
SCREEN CONFIDENTIAL
Execa : Light intensity adjustment error 42ch
Execb : Light intensity adjustment error 43ch
Execc : Light intensity adjustment error 44ch
Execd : Light intensity adjustment error 45ch
Exece : Light intensity adjustment error 46ch
Execf : Light intensity adjustment error 47ch
Exed0 : Light intensity adjustment error 48ch
Exeda : Light intensity adjustment error 58ch
Exedb : Light intensity adjustment error 59ch
Exedc : Light intensity adjustment error 60ch
Exedd : Light intensity adjustment error 61ch
Exede : Light intensity adjustment error 62ch
Exedf : Light intensity adjustment error 63ch
Exee0 : Incorrect command has been input.
Exee1 : Temperature of the LD block > 28•.(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35•.
Exee2 : Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35•.(Temperature of environment > 28•.)
Exee3 : Temperature of the radiator > 55•. (Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit > 35•.
Exee4 : It is just before an exposure head has dew.(Temperature of the LD block • 22•..)
Exee5 : Temperature of the LD block < 5•.(Temperature at the periphery of the optical unit < 17•. Tem
Page (12)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
G. Supplement
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
XT0 S0 SRGE XT1 QF1 Z1(20A)

A L L L1 U1 U2 U2 A
(L1) 15A
1φ AC
U1 (75W 5V)
200V∼240V +5V
L +
50Hz/60Hz FV2
RA1
PE FV1 To SA-L/MA-L FG
E E E E
B FV3 B
N +5VE
-
N N N1 V1 V2 V2
(L2) 15A
TERMINAL MAIN SWITCH SURGE PROTECTOR TERMINAL CIRCUIT PROTECTOR NOISE FILTER POWER SUPPLY 1
BOARD
C C
U2 U2
U2 (50W 15V)
PIO-PTR4 U3
L +
+15V U4 (300W 24V) U9 (30W 24V) FU1 (250V/T0.4A)
U4+24V U9+24V1 IN25
L L U9+24V U9+24V1
FG + +
E
±15VE S1 LS56
N -
LS57-1 LS57-2 LS57-3 LS57-4 +5VE U31
U3 (50W 15V) FG FG 1 2 3 3A 6
D D
±15VE E E PIO-PTR4 U6
L +
KA1 V1 KA3 V3
FG E
+24VE U9+24VE U9+24VE
E N - N -
-15V
N -
E
V2 V2
POWER SUPPLY 2,3 POWER SUPPLY 4 POWER SUPPLY 9 INTERLOCK DOOR INTERLOCK
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 1
( POWER SUPPLY & INTERLOCK )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
APPROVED E.Tamba FILE
F DATE 2005.12.1 MODEL PT-R4300S/E REV
CODE DRAW
SYM REVISION ALT.NO. DATE REVISED APPROVED NO. NO. 100094907V00 (1/9) A3
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
KA1 KA2 CONTROL

A U2 U3 U4 A
L1 CN2
U2
U3 L1C
(300W 5V) for S V2 U
CR1
CR2
L2C
U5 (300W 24V) S1 U6 (150W 5V) for E U PG1
KA40 U5+24V U31 -5VE V
L + L + PIO-PTR4 CONTROL CN1 V M PG1
∼ ∼
KA3 U5+24VA W
W
M1
U201 V201 D
FG FG RCP2 RS-232C CN3 E
E MAIN SHAFT DRIVE MOTOR
E E
B B
N +24VE -5V
- N -
2 M TOG CNT
B1
∼ L2
M40 RC1 HEAD MB BOARD R1:50Ω 200W
3
RC2 HEAD MB BOARD
E B2
V2 V3 V4 L3 B3
E1A
GUS BLOWER INTERLOCK POWER SUPPLY 5 POWER SUPPLY 6 AC SERVO MOTOR DRIVER
SERVO MOTOR POWER ON/OFF

C C
Z2 U8
U2 U200
L1
200
P24
KABL1 201
1
U202
D CON-PTR4 T1/U D
V202 M
T2/V ∼
STMBL1 W202 MBL1
202 T3/V
E 3
MBL1 E
KABL2 203 IN34HINV

5 AL0 CON-PTR4
AL1 +5VE CON-PTR4
CON-PTR4
V2 V200
L3/N
E
E PRINTING PLATE BLOWER E
NOISE FILTER INVERTER
BU-200
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 2
( INTERLOCK & BLOWER UNIT )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
+5V +5V
U1
A THERMISTOR A
U4
U4+24V RCP3E LRB32E
U4
+24VE OP.PANEL Ethernet REMOTE MONITOR
BUS
PANEL
PC
RS-232C PIF
HEAD CPU CONTROL PIF
AT-T I/F
MA-L I/F
B B
RS-232C E1A CONTROL HEAD CPU
CONTROL
CONTROL/BUS PIO-PTR4
+5VE +5VE
U1
PANEL BOARD RCP BOARD LRB32 BOARD
C C
+5V +5V
U1
PIO CON
+15V CONTROL ENC1
U2
±15VE -PTR4XE -PTR4XE
U2/U3
-15V CON-PTR4
U3 CONTROL U5+24VA
U4+24V AUTO LOADER KA3 +24V2
U4 FU10
+24VE U4+24V +24V5
U4
U5+24V
IN17,+5VE KA2 U5 +24V3
PH58 U5+24V
D IN25 OUT-41 U5 +24V1 D
S1 +24VE
+5V,IN42,+5VE U5 +24VE
PH59
INP1
X124
+5VE PH
E1A CONTROL U4+24V
+24VE 6 SENSORS
IN114 CONTROL CONTROL P.M.DRIVERS
RCP2 CONTROL/BUS PIO-PTR4
DC MOTORS
X122 +24VE P1
U4+24V
+5VE +5VE
U1
E PIO-PTR4 B OARD CON-PTR4 B OARD E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 3
( BOARD DIAGRAM )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
SYM REVISION ALT.NO. DATE REVISED APPROVED NO. NO.
100094907V00 (3/9) A3
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
U6
-5VE HEAD MB -5VE
HEAD MB
+5V
HEAD MB
+5V
HEAD MB
+5V
-5V -5V +5VE HEAD CPU +5VE +5VE
U6 HEAD MB HEAD MB CONTROL HEAD MB CONTROL
A U1
+5V +5V
HEAD MB
+15V
HEAD MB
+15V HEAD DRV1 HEAD MB
+15V HEAD DRV2 A
+5VE +5VE ±15VE ±15VE ±15VE
U1 HEAD MB CONTROL/BUS HEAD MB HEAD MB
+15V +15V -15V -15V RH CONNECTION -15V RH CONNECTION
U2 HEAD MB HEAD DRV4 HEAD MB HEAD MB
±15V ±15V U4+24V U4+24V U4+24V
U2/U3 HEAD MB CONTROL/BUS HEAD MB HEAD MB
-15V -15V +24VE +24VE +24VE
U3 HEAD MB HEAD DRV3 HEAD MB HEAD MB
U4+24V U4+24V S12V S12V
U4 CONTROL/BUS PU80 PU80
+24VE +24VE + M12 M12
U4 HEAD DRV2 PU80 PU80
-
PH85 OUT CONTROL/BUS CONTROL
U4+24V +
B HEAD CPU B
-
M M81 PH86 OUT
+24VE +
FAN -
PH82
CONTROL CONTROL
OUT HEAD MB HEAD MB
M
U4+24V PM81
ZOOM MOTOR +
M M82 -
RS-232C
OUT PH83
+24VE RCP2
FAN HEAD DRV1 B OARD HEAD DRV2 B OARD
CONTROL / BUS +
IN114 -
CONTROL RB31
OUT PH84
LS80 HEAD CPU
5VE HEAD DRV1-4 CONTROL CONTROL
HEAD MB FOCUS MOTOR M
C Laser Cove r SW PM80 C
+15V DRIVER
HEAD MB CONTROL
RC1
U6 HEAD MB
±15VE
CAL.SEN CONTROL PMD80 FOCUS MOTOR
RC2 RL1 -15V
U6 HEAD MB
Laser Powe r ON
HEAD MB BOARD CAL.SEN BOARD HEAD CPU BOARD
Laser Head Laser Head
TEMP3 HEAD DRV1 S12V S12V
-5VE -5VE
HEAD MB
-5V
HEAD MB
TEMP3 RT80 HEAD DRV1
M12 M12 PELTIETR 80
-5V
HEAD MB CONTROL HEAD MB CONTROL
+5V +5V PU80
D HEAD MB HEAD MB S12V S12V D
+5VE HEAD DRV3 +5VE HEAD DRV4 RH CONNECTION TEMP1 HEAD DRV1
M12 M12 PELTIETR 81
HEAD MB HEAD MB CONTROL HEAD DRV1
+15V RH CONNECTION +15V
HEAD DRV3
TEMP1 RT82
HEAD MB HEAD MB
±15V ±15V S12V S12V
HEAD MB HEAD MB CONTROL HEAD DRV1
HEAD MB
-15V
HEAD MB
-15V
HEAD DRV2
DEW1 M12 M12 PELTIETR 82
HEAD DRV1
U4+24V U4+24V DEW1 CO80
HEAD MB HEAD MB CONTROL
+24VE +24VE HEAD DRV1 S12V S12V
HEAD MB HEAD MB HEAD DRV1
S12V S12V HEAD DRV1
M12 M12 PELTIETR 83
PU80 PU80
M12 M12 U4+24V (+24V)
CONTROL / BUS PU80 CONTROL / BUS PU80 PLD0-PLD31 HEAD MB
HEAD CPU HEAD CPU M
HEAD MB +24VE (M24) M80
E E
CONTROL CONTROL
HEAD MB HEAD MB
RH CONNECTION BOARD PELTIER UNI T 80
HEAD DRV3 BOARD LD DRIVER 4 B OARD DESIGNED I.AOKI

DRAWN I.AOKI
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 4
( HEAD BOARD DIAGRAM )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON_PTR4
LED1A LED2A LED7A LED13A LED14A LED4A LED5A LED6A LED9A LED10A LED11A
A A
U1+5V
+5VE
CA1( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 )
IN1A IN2A IN7A IN13A IN14A IN4A IN5A IN6A IN9A IN10A IN11A
B B
PH11-1A PH11-2A PH10A PH30A PH31A PH21 PH24-1 PH24-2 PH27-1 PH27-2 PH27-3
Balancer Pin A Balancer Pin A Balance Weight A Leading Edge Leading Edge Trail Edge Trail Edge Trail Edge Trail Edge Clamp Trail Edge Clamp Trail Edge Clamp
Position 1 Position 2 Detection Clamp A Clamp A Clamp Arm Clamp Hook 1 Clamp Hook 2 Detection 1 Detection 2 Detection 3
Close Open Down
LED22A LED42A LED29A LED29H LED30A LED30H LED31A LED15A LED16A LED19A
U1+5V
+5VE
C C
22-26
CA2( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 ) CA3( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
IN22A IN42A IN29A IN29H IN30A IN30H IN31A IN15A IN16A IN19A
PH56 PH57 PH61A PH61H PH63 PH62 PH70 PH50 PH52 PH54
Pass Position Pass Position Plate Centering Plate Centering Centering Unit Plate Edge Position Plate Detection Plate Pass Sensor Nip Roller Plate Pass Sensor
D Origin Punch Position Position Origin Detection AT Load Origin Unload D
Detection A Detection H
OUT55
+24V1 OUT59
LED20A LED21A +5V1 R LED43A LED44H LED3A LED4H LED8A LED21H LED22H
U1+5V +24V1
+5VE +24VE
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ) CA4( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 )
IN8A IN21H
IN20A IN21A IN43A IN44A IN3A IN4H
E E
Plate/Paper
PH51 Distinction Reserve To AT-T I/F
PH53 PH55 PH29H PH29A Ready/Busy Error
DESIGNED I.AOKI
Plate Stop Shutter Pass Position Leading Edge Leading Edge
DRAWN I.AOKI
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 5
Origin Set Detection H Detection A
AT-T I/F ( SENSOR & INPUT PORT 1 )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON_PTR4 LED1H LED2H LED7H LED3H LED13H LED14H LED15H LED16H LED17H
U1+5V
+5VE
A A
CH1( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 )
IN1H IN2H IN7H IN3H IN13H IN14H IN17H
PH11-1H PH11-2H PH10H PH20 PH30H PH31H LS4H LS4A PH2

B Trail Edge Leading Edge Leading Edge Limit SW H Limit SW A B
Blancer Pin H Blancer Pin H Blance Weight H Sub Shaft
Clamp Arm Clamp H Clamp H
Position 1 Position 2 Detection Position Origin
Up Close Open
LED32A LED33A LED34A LED23H LED24H LED25H LED26H LED23A LED24A LED74
U1+5V U1+5V
+5VE +5VE
CP2-1
CS1 （
1 2 3 4 5 6
） CP2( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 26
・ ) (1 2 3
)
IN32A IN33A IN34A
IN23H IN24H IN25H IN26H IN23A IN24A IN74
C LS58-1 C
LS56 LS57-1
IN33A1
LS58-2
LS57-2 SB60-1 SB60-2 SB60-3 SB60-4 SB60-5 SB60-6 SB60-7
IN33A2
Punch 1 Punch 2 Punch 3 Punch 4 Punch 5 Punch 6 Punch 7

LS57-4 LS57-3 SW58 Origin Origin Origin Origin Origin Origin Origin OPTION
IN33A3
+24V3
Cover Interlock Main Cover Interlock Main Cover Interlock +24VE
D Monitor Monitor 1 Monitor 2 D
OUT25A OUT26A OUT27H
FU16 FU17 FU24
650mA 650mA 650mA
+24V3
U9 DRIVER IC U5 DRIVER IC U6 DRIVER IC
+24VE
RV6 RV7 RV7
OUT25H OUT26H OUT56A OUT57A OUT70A OUT71A
FU12 FU13 FU14 FU15
650mA 650mA 650mA 650mA 9 10 11 12 13 14 )
U7 DRIVER IC U3 DRIVER IC U8 DRIVER IC U4 DRIVER IC

E
M M M E
RV2 RV3 RV4 RV5
M60-5 M60-6 M60-7
Punch Drive Punch Drive Punch Drive
CP1( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Motor 5 Motor 6 Motor 7 OPTION
DESIGNED I.AOKI
M M M M SYSTEM DIAGRAM 6
DRAWN I.AOKI
( INPUT PORT 2 & PUNCH UNIT )
M60-1 M60-2 M60-3 M60-4 CHECKED E.TAMBA
Punch Drive Punch Drive Punch Drive Punch Drive APPROVED E.Tamba FILE
Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Motor 4
COD DRAW
SYM REVISION ALT.NO. DATE REVISED APPROVED E NO. 100094907V00 (6/9) A3
NO.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
U1+5V
A +24V3 A
+5,24VE
OUT34H OUT13H FU2 OUT7A OUT8A FU3 OUT13A OUT14A FU4 OUT15A OUT16A
650mA 1.1A 1.1A
U11 DRIVER IC U12 DRIVER IC U15 DRIVER IC

KABL1 KABL2
RV8 RV9 RV10
B IN34H B
CB1( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CO1( 1 2 3 4 5 6
) V30MA1
M M KA30MA
M11A M20 KA30MA

V30MA2
INVALM Balancer A Trail Edge Clamp
Drive Motor Arm Drive Motor
Inverter Alarm
M
C M30A C
JP3 Leading Edge Clamp A
Drive Motor
+24V2
U1+5V
+24V3 +24V4
+5,24VE
FU5 OUT9A OUT10A FU6 OUT7A OUT8A FU7 OUT15H OUT16H FU8 OUT23H OUT24H
650mA 650mA 1.1A 1.1A
D D
U13 DRIVER IC U16 DRIVER IC U19 DRIVER IC U18 DRIVER IC
RV11 RV12 RV13 RV14
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 )
V30MH1
M M KA30MH M
M24 M11H KA30MH M58

E V30MH2 E
Trail Edge Clamp Balancer H Door Open
Hook Drive Motor Drive Motor
M
M30H DESIGNED I.AOKI
Leading Edge Clamp H DRAWN I.AOKI
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 7
Drive Motor ( DC MOTOR )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
A A
+5V1 +5V1
+24V2 FU10 +24V5 +24V5 +24V2 +24V2
+5,24VE 2.5A +5,24VE
OUT17A OUT18A R R R R R
FU1 OUT29A OUT29H OUT30H OUT30A OUT54A
650mA
U2 V1 V2 V3 V4 V14
DRIVER IC
B RV1
B
D1 D2 D3 D4 D14
CO2( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
)
M YA YA YA
M52 SL53 SL59-1 SL59-2

Nip Roller Drive Motor Shutter Solenoid Load Clatch Unload Clatch Reserve Reserve
C C
+5V1
+24V3 +24V2 +24V1 +24V3
+5,24VE
R
OUT23A OUT24A ST7 OUT28H
OUT32H OUT33H OUT3H FU9 FU22
1.1A 650mA
OUT80 OUT81 OUT82 OUT83
D FU11 D
V17 U14 DRIVER IC U10 DRIVER IC
2.5A
RV15
D8
3 4
CO3( 1 2 5 6 ) CO7(
1 2
) X01(
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
)
V40
H
A KA40 M M
E BZ1 KA40 M41 M55 E

Alarm Buzzer Gas Suction Blower Blowing Pump Path Drive Motor Signal Tower Option + RESERVE
ON/OFF
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 8
( DC MOTOR & SOLENOID )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
A A
+24V2 +24V3 +24V1 +24V2

+5V1 +5V1 +5V1 +5V1
+5,+24VE +5,+24VE +5,+24VE +5,+24VE
B B
OUT46AA OUT42AH OUT46AH OUT51AA

OUT45AA OUT47AA OUT41AH OUT43AH OUT45AH IN37H OUT50AA
CO4( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
) CO5( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
) CO6( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
) CO8( 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
)
C C
CCW
CW
MO
CN1( )CN2( ) CN2( ) CN1( )
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PMD50-1/2 PMD50-2/2 PMD2
Reserve
CN2( 1 2 3 4 5 6 ) CN2( 1 2 3 4 5 6 ) CN2( 1 2 3 4 5 )
M61HA
M61HB
M61HC
M61HD
M61HE
M61HF
M50A
M50B
M50C
M50D
M50E
M50F
M2A
M2B
M2C
M2D
M2E
D D
M M M
M50 M61 M2
Plate Transport Motor Plate Centering Motor Sub Shaft Drive Motor
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
SYSTEM DIAGRAM 9
( PULSE MOTOR )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
100094907V00 (9/9) A3
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
S0 QF1 Z1
XT0 #T0-2-1/EA/SVB(MOELLER) #100092763V** #CP22RM/15D-M1 (FUJI ELECTRIC) #100092873V** #MXB1220-33(DENSEI-LAMBDA)
#WJS-2002039-OR(WAGO) #100092816V**
AWG14(UL1015) AWG14(UL1015) AWG14(UL1015) NOISE FILTER
BLK L BLK L BLK 1 2 L1 BLK U1 BLK U2 BLK
A L(L1) L1 15 A 1 3
A
WHT N WHT N WHT 3 4 N1 WHT V1 WHT V2 WHT
N(L2) L2 15 A 2 4
GRN/YEL PE GRN/YEL LINE LOAD

PE AWG14(UL1015) MAIN SWITCH CIRCUIT PROTECTOR AWG14(UL1015) GRN/YEL AWG14(UL1015) GRN/YEL
#STR21(LAPP) #100092762V**
#GMP21(LAPP)
PE E E
AWG14(UL1015)
MAIN BODY FRAME
FRAME FRAME
XT1 #100092819V**
XFV
#WJS-2002039-OR(WAGO) SRGE
AWG18(UL1015) #VHR-5N(JST)
L1 BLK #BVH-21T-P1.1 XFV
B L1 BLK 1 L1 1 L1 SRGE B
N1 WHT 2 2 BOARD
L2 GRN/YEL 3 E 3 E
E GRN/YEL 4 4
WHT 5 N1 5 N1
#ST16(LAPP)
#GMP16(LAPP) #100092869V**
E AWG14(UL1015)
XT2 XU11 U1 XU12

To BLOWER UNIT #100093026V** #VHR-5N(JST) #VHR-6N(JST) #100093150V**
AWG16(UL1015) BLK U2 BLK 2 #100093110V** #BVH-21T-P1.1 #ZWS75AF-5/J (DENSEI-LAMBDA) #BVH-21T-P1.1
(XT20) Pg(32/33) XT10 AWG18(UL1007)
AWG18(UL1015) BLK 1 U2
U2 BLK BLK U2 BLK 2 1 L CN1 CN2 1 -V 1 +5VE BLK 4 Pg(5/33)
C C
E GRN/YEL BLK U2 BLK 2 2 2 2 -V 2 +5VE BLK To XT3
WHT 3 V2
V2 WHT WHT V2 WHT 2 #100093112V**,#100093115V**
3 N 3 -V 3
4 4 4 +V 4 +5V RED
#AC-F01FB01 WHT WHT 2 AWG18(UL1015)
(ECHO ELECTRIC) V2 GRN/YEL 5 E 5 FG 5 +V 5 +5V RED
AWG16 WHT V2 WHT 2 6 +V 6
AWG18(UL1015)
(UL1015) POWER SUPPLY 1
#UK15-6J (YOSHIDA) #100093030V**
E E
AWG14(UL1015)
To KA1
#100093086V** Pg(2/33)
AWG16(UL1015) XU21 U2 XU22
#100093028V** #5239-06(MOLEX) #ZWS50-15 (DENSEI-LAMBDA) #5239-04(MOLEX)
To E1A AWG18(UL1015) #5167PBTL #5167PBTL
Pg(4/33) BLK 6 U2 4 +15VE BLK
To KA40 6 L 4 -
D Pg(3/33) 5 5
CN1 CN2 3 - 3 +15VE BLK AWG18(UL1007) D
WHT 4 V2 #100093354V**
4 N 2 + 2 +15V YEL
#100093117V** 3 1 + 1 +15V YEL 2 To XT3
3
AWG18(UL1015) U4 #HWS300-24 (DENSEI-LAMBDA) 2 Pg(5/33)
2
#100092771V** #100093132V** GRN/YEL 1 E
GRN/YEL E 1 FG POWER SUPPLY 2
AWG18(UL1015) FG + AWG14(UL1007)
BLK U2 U4+24V 2 AWG18(UL1015)
L(AC) + To XT3
WHT V2 N(AC) - +24VE Pg(5/33) E XU31 U3 XU32
#5239-06(MOLEX) #ZWS50-15 (DENSEI-LAMBDA) #5239-04(MOLEX)
AWG18(UL1015) - #5167PBTL #5167PBTL
BLK 6 U2 6 L 4 - 4 -15V BRN
CN1 CN1(ACCESSORY) CN1 CN2 3 - To X171
E 5 5 3 -15V BRN Pg(5/33)
FRAME 1 +Vm +S 2 1 +Vm +S 2 WHT 4 V2 4 N 2 + 2 -15VE BLK
To XU91 To XT3
1 -15VE BLK 2
3 -Vm -S 4 3 -Vm -S 4
Pg(2/33) 3 3 1 +
E 5 PC COM 6 5 PC COM 6 Pg(5/33) E
2 2 AWG18(UL1007)
7 8 7 8 GRN/YEL 1 E 1 FG POWER SUPPLY 3
9 CNT TOG 10 9 CNT TOG 10
11 PF TOG 12 11 PF TOG 12 AWG18(UL1015)
E
POWER SUPP LY 4 DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI WIRING DIAGRAM 1
(POWER SUPPLY UNIT 1)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
#100093030V** #100092871V**
AWG14(UL1015) AWG14(UL1015)
BLK U4 BLK #100095543V** for E
U2 To E1A (L1,L3) #HWS150-5/RA (DENSEI-LAMBDA) for E
From XT2 V2 WHT V4 WHT U6 #100094774V** for S
Pg(4/33) #HWS300-5 (DENSEI-LAMBDA) for S
Pg(1/33) AWG14(UL1015)
A #100093091V**
#100092765V**
GRN/YEL E -5VE BLK 2 A
AWG18(UL1015) FG +
AWG14(UL1015) BLK BLK U31 -5VE BLK 2
From S1 U31 L(AC) + To HEAD MB(X800)
Pg(3/33) BLK WHT V3 -5V BLU 2 Pg(6/33)
To S1 U3 N(AC) -
-5V BLU 2
-
#100092747V**
AWG18(UL1015)
AWG18(UL1015) XU61 for S
#PHDR-12VS(JST)
CN1 #SPHD-001T-P0.5
1 +Vm +S 2 1 +Vm +S 2
2 2 3 -Vm 4 3 -Vm 4
-S -S
WHT WHT BLK BLK E 5 PC COM 6 5 PC COM 6
B B
AWG18(UL1015)
7 8 7 8
V3 V2 U3 U2 V4 V3 U4 U3 9 CNT TOG 10 9 CNT TOG 10 #100093358V** for S
8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2 11 PF TOG 12 11 PF TOG 12 AWG24(UL1007)
KA1 KA2 BLK
To HEAD MB(X807)
#G7L-2A-BUB DC24V #G7L-2A-BUB DC24V POWER SUPPLY 6 BRN
#P7LF-C (OMRON) (OMRON) (OMRON) #P7LF-C (OMRON) Pg(6/33)
1 0 1 0
XU62 for E
U9+24VE 3A OUT-41 U4+24V #XHP-2(JST)
#BXH-001T-P0.6 #100095539V** for E
BLK V1 WHT WHT V2 ORG 1 +R 1 +5V From XU61 Pg(5/33)
2 -R 2 -R5 To HEAD MB(X807)
#1S1888(Q) #1S1888(Q) X125 PIO-PTR4XE BOARD Pg(6/33)
C (TOSHIBA) (TOSHIBA) #H6P-SHF-AA (JST)
C
#100093357V** #100092774V**,#100092775V**
AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS X125 U5 #HWS300-24 (DENSEI-LAMBDA)
ORG AWG14(UL1015)
1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V GRN/YEL E U5+24V ORG
WHT FG +
2 OUT-41 2 OUT-41 BLK U3 U5+24V ORG
3 3 L(AC) + To XT3
WHT V3 N(AC) - +24VE BLK Pg(5/33)
#100092753V** 4 4
AWG22(UL1007) - +24VE BLK
5 5
AWG18(UL1015)
WHT
6 6
BLK To XT3 CN1 CN1(ACCESSORY)
Pg(5/33) 1 +Vm +S 2 1 +Vm +S 2
3 -Vm -S 4 3 -Vm -S 4
5 PC COM 6 5 PC COM 6
D E 7 8 7 8 D
9 CNT TOG 10 9 CNT TOG 10
11 PF TOG 12 11 PF TOG 12
U9 #ZWS30-24/J(DENSEI-LAMBDA) POWER SUPPLY 5

XU91 XU92
#100092771V** #VHR-5N(JST) POWER SUPPLY 9 #VHR-4N(JST) #100092834V**
AWG18(UL1015) #BVH-21T-P1.1 CN1 CN2 #BVH-21T-P1.1 AWG22(UL1007)
BLK 1 U2 1 AC(L) 1 - 1 U9+24VE BLK U9+24VE BLK
From U4 GRN/YEL U9+24V1 ORG To XT3 Pg(5/33)
2 2 2 - 2 U9+24VE
Pg(1/33) WHT 3 V2 ORG
3 AC(N) 3 + 3 U9+24V
XFU1 XFU1
4 4 4 + 4 #100092787V**
GRN/YEL 5 E #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
5 FG AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 AWG22(UL1007)
E AWG18(UL1015) AWG18(UL1015) ORG 1 U9+24V ORG FU1(250V/T0.4A) E
1 U9+24V
ORG 2 U9+24V1 ORG #F-220 01-A2(SATO) or F-400-01A2
E E 2 U9+24V1 #218.400MXP(LITTEL)
DESIGNED I.AOKI
(POWER SUPPLY UNIT 2)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
Pg(6/32)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
XFAN1 XFAN1
#SMP-03V-BC(JST) ACCESSORY #100074486V**
A AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS CONNECTOR ACCESSORY WIRE A
ORG 2 #100092825V**,#100092828V** ORG 1 U5+24V RED
U5+24V 1 U5+24V
From XT3 +24VE BLK 2 2 2 M FAN1
Pg(5/33) BLK 3 +24VE 3 +24VE BLK
#9G1224H104(SANYO)
BLK AWG18(UL1015) XFAN2 XFAN2
U2
From XT2 V2 WHT #SMP-02V-BC(JST) ACCESSORY #100093366V**
Pg(1/33) AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS CONNECTOR ACCESSORY WIRE
ORG 1 U5+24V 1 U5+24V RED
BLK 2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK M FAN2
#100094787V**
#100094786V**
B #109E1724H502(SANYO) B
CR2
CR1
V201 V200 U201 U200
X40M X40M
CR1,CR2: #XEB1201 (OKAYA) #100093126V** #350781-1 (TYCO) #350715-1 (TYCO) #100093129V**
8 6 4 2 AWG18(UL1015) #350550-1 #350547-1 ACCESSORY WIRE
BLK BLK
KA40 1 U201 1 U201(1)
#G7L-2A-BUB DC24V 2 2 2 2 BLK
#P7LF-C (OMRON) (OMRON) BLK BLK M
1 0 3 3 3 3 BL40
WHT BLK ∼
OUT33H +24V1H 4 V201 4 V201(4) #VB-70WSG-U(HITACHI)
5 5 P BLK
#100093131V**
6 6 GRN/YEL AWG18(UL1015)
C V40 C
E
#100094781V** #1S1888(Q) MAIN BODY FRAME
From AWG22(UL1007) (TOSHIBA)
BLK
CON-PTR4 PCB
ORG
CO3
Pg(31/33)
#100092765V** #100092812V**
AWG18(UL1015) AWG22(UL1007)
From U5 IN25 WHT
+5VE BLK To XS1 Pg(7/33) #100092757V**
To U6 AWG22(UL1007)
U9+24VE
Pg(2/33) BLK KA3
U5+24VA U5+24V
#100092768V** ORG
5
AWG22(UL1007) From XT3
4
#1S1888
D AWG22(UL1007) Pg(5/33) D
ORG
Coil
V3
2 WHT To XT3 Pg(5/33) ORG
1
BLK WHT ORG ORG WHT
6
6
WHT
#100092756V**
U3 IN25 U9+24V1 U9+24V1 AWG18(UL1007) #HE1aN-S-DC24V(MATSUSHITA)
2 2 4 4 From XT3
S1 Pg(5/33)
S1
1 1 3 3 #AR22JR-2A22(A)(FUJI)
U31 +5VE 3A 6
E BLK BLK WHT WHT E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
(BLOWER 1)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
#100092871V**
U4 AWG14(UL1015) BLK L1
From KA2 V4 WHT X5 X5
Pg(2/33) L3 #350780-1(TYCO) #350779-1(TYCO) ACCESSORY WIRE
E1A #100093124V**
AWG14(UL1015) +1 AWG16(UL1015) #350689-1 #350690-3(No.1-3) (AWG20,UL2464)
A 付属線 BLK AC SERVO MOTOR DRIVER RED RED A
+2 U 1 U 1 U
#SGDH-08AE-SY202 (YASKAWA) WHT 2 V 2 V WHT M
U2 #100093086V** BLK L1C V
From XT2 BLU 3 W 3 W BLU ∼ M1
PIO-PTR4XE BOARD V2 WHT L2C W
Pg(1/33) 4 FG 4 FG GRN/YEL
GRN/YEL
X117 XECN1 #770210-1(No.4)
#H2P-SHF-AA (JST) #100094808V** #10150-3000VE (3M)
X117 #BHF-001T-0.8SS UL2547-S/W AWG22*2 #10350-52A0-008 CN1
1 SPEED 1 SPEED RED 5 SPEED 5 SPEED
WHITE #100094822V**
2 SPEEDC 2 SPEEDC 6 SPEEDC 6 SPEEDC
SHIELD 4 N.C 4 N.C XECN2 AWG24-6C X7 X7 ACCESSORY WIRE
#55100-0600 (UL2464-SW/R) #54280-0600 #55102-0600 (UL20276)
B X119 7 N.C 7 N.C CN2 (MOLEX) (MOLEX) (MOLEX) B
X119 #HIF3BA-30DA-2.54R (HIROSE) 8 N.C 8 N.C 1 PG5V 1 PG5V RED 1 PG5V 1 PG5V RED
A1 *Vcmp A1 *Vcmp GRY/BLK 25 *Vcmp 25 *V-CMP+ BLK BLK
GRY/RED 2 PG0V 2 PG0V 2 PG0V 2 PG0V
B1 SG B1 SG 26 SG 26 V-CMP- 3 3 3 3
A2 *TGON A2 *TGON WHT/BLK PG
27 *TGON 27 *TGON+ 4 4 4 4 ∼
WHT/RED BLU BLU
B2 SG-COM B2 SG-COM
L.GRN/BLK
28 SG-COM 28 TGON- 5 PS 5 PS 5 PS 5 PS PG1
A3 *P-CL A3 *P-CL 45 *P-CL 45 *P-CL 6 *PS WHT/BLU WHT/BLU
L.GRN/RED 6 *PS 6 *PS 6 *PS
B3 *N-CL B3 *N-CL 46 *N-CL 46 *N-CL
(SHELL) (SHELL) (SHELL) (SHELL)
YEL/RED SHIELD SHIELD
A4 U4+24V A4 U7+24V 47 U7+24V 47 +24V
B4 *SV-ON B4 *SV-ON WHT/RED 40 *SV-ON 40 *SV-ON
A5 SV-DIR A5 SV-DIR BRN/BLK 41 SV-DIR 41 SV-DIR #SGMPH-08AAA21
B5 P-OT B5 P-OT BRN/RED 42 P-OT 42 P-OT (YASKAWA)
A6 N-OT A6 N-OT YEL/BLK 43 N-OT 43 N-OT
C BRN/BLK C
B6 SV_SG B6 SG 1 SG 1 SG
A7 SV_SG A7 N.C. 3 N.C. 3 N.C. RCP3(E) BOARD
B7 *ALMRST B7 *ALMRST YEL/RED 44 *ALMRST 44 *ALMRST XECN3 #100094812V** X157
YEL/BLK #10114-3000VE (3M) AWG24-5C(UL2547) #H5P-SHF-AA (JST)
A8 PA0 A8 PA0
YEL/RED
33 PA0 33 PA0 CN3 #10314-52A0-008 #BHF-001T-0.8SS X157
B8 *PA0 B8 *PA0 34 *PA0 34 *PA0 ORG/RED
L.GRN/BLK 1 TXD 1 TXD 1 RXD 1 RXD
A9 PB0 A9 PB0 35 PB0 35 PB0 ORG/BLK
L.GRN/RED 2 *TXD 2 *TXD 2 *RXD 2 *RXD
B9 *PB0 B9 *PB0 36 *PBO 36 *PBO GRY/RED
L.GRN/BLK 3 RXD 3 RXD 3 TXD 3 TXD
A10 PC0 A10 PC0 19 PC0 19 PC0 GRY/BLK
L.GRN/RED 4 *RXD 4 *RXD 4 *TXD 4 *TXD
B10 *PC0 B10 *PC0 20 *PCO 20 *PCO SHIELD
GRY/BLK 5 N.C 5 N.C 5 +5VE 5 +5VE
A11 AL01 A11 AL01 37 AL01 37 AL01 GRN
GRY/RED 6 *RXD 6 *RXD
B11 AL02 B11 AL02 38 AL02 38 AL02 AWG22(UL1007)
WHT/BLK 7 RT 7 RT
A12 AL03 A12 AL03 39 AL03 39 AL03
BRN/RED 8 N.C 8 N.C
D B12 SV_SG B12 SG-AL 2 SG-AL 2 SG D
BRN/BLK 9 N.C 9 N.C
A13 ALM A13 ALM 31 ALM 31 ALM+
BRN/RED 10 N.C 10 N.C
B13 ALM-SG B13 ALM-SG 32 ALM-SG 32 ALM-
11 N.C 11 N.C
A14 FG A14 SG 50 N.C. 50 N.C.
12 N.C 12 N.C
B14 N.C B14 N.C 9 N.C. 9 N.C.
YEL/BLK 13 N.C 13 N.C
A15 N.C A15 N.C 10 SG 10 N.C.
B15 N.C AWG26-13P(UL2464-SW/R) 14 GND 14 GND
B15
N.C 11 N.C. 11 N.C.
(SHELL)
DRAIN WIRE 12 N.C. 12 N.C.
13 N.C. 13 N.C.
FRAME 14 N.C. 14 N.C.
AWG22(UL1007)GRN 15 N.C. 15 N.C. #100093123V**
16 N.C. 16 N.C. AWG16(UL1015)
WHT
17 N.C. 17 N.C. B1
E R1 E
18 N.C. 18 N.C.
21 N.C. 21 N.C. 50Ω 200W
22 N.C 22 N.C B2 WHT (SANKYO DENKI)
23 N.C. 23 N.C.
24 N.C. 24 N.C.
29 N.C. 29 N.C. B3 DESIGNED I.AOKI
30 N.C. 30 N.C.
48 N.C. 48 N.C.
49 N.C. 49 N.C.
(AC SERVO UNIT)
#100093120V** (Shell)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
AWG14(UL1015) GRN/YEL
F E FRAME DATE 2005.12.9 MODEL PT-R4300S/E REV
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
To XBZ1
#100094779V** X23 CON-PTR4XE BOARD
#100109966V** Pg31/33 To HEAD MB #VHR-5N(JST)
AWG22(UL1007) 8 AWG18(UL1007)
(X801) Pg(6/33) #100092823V**
XT3 AWG18(UL1007)
#BVH-21T-1.1 X23
RED 1 +5V 1 +5V
#SK15-24J
A #100093150V** (YOSHIDA) ORG 2 U5 +24V 2 U5 +24V A
RED AWG18(UL1007) 2 2 RED RED 2 #100093361V** ORG
+5V +5V 3 U5 +24VA 3 U5 +24VA
2 RED RED 2 AWG18(UL1007) ORG
From U1 +5V 4 U5 +24V 4 U5 +24V
Pg(1/33) +5VE BLK 2 2 BLK
+5VE BLK 2 BLK 5 +5VE 5 +5VE
#100093132V** 2 BLK
+5VE BLK 2 BLK
AWG14(UL1015) 6 +24VE 6 +24VE
U4+24V ORG 2 ORG ORG #100092883V**
U4 +24V
From U4 U4+24VE BLK ORG U4 +24V ORG AWG18(UL1007)
Pg(1/33)
2 BLK BLK XPNL21 XPNL21 X150
U4 +24VE #350778-1(TYCO) #350777-1(TYCO) RCP3(E) BOARD
#100092774V** BLK U4 +24VE BLK #VHR-2N(JST)
AWG14(UL1015) #350689-1 #350690-1
From U5 U5+24V
ORG 2 ORG
U5 +24V
ORG ORG ORG #BVH-21T-1.1 X150
B Pg(2/33) U5+24VE BLK BLK BLK 1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V RED 1 +5V 1 +5V B
U5 +24VE BLK BLK
ORG 2 2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK 2 +5VE 2 +5VE
U5 +24VA
#100092775V** U5 +24V
ORG
ORG AWG14(UL1015) ORG ORG 2
U5+24V U5 +24V
From U5 BLK BLK
Pg(2/33) U5+24VE U5 24VE XPNL2 XPNL2
BLK 2 #100092890V**
2 YEL
U5 24VE #350778-1(TYCO) #350777-1(TYCO) #100094823V** OPE. PANEL
+15V YEL AWG18(UL1007) YEL 2 AWG18(UL1007) AWG18(UL1007)
+15V #350689-1 #350690-1 XT5
From U2 BLK 2 BLK BLK ORG ORG
+15VE 15VE 1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V + U4+24V
Pg(1/33) BLK AWG18(UL1007) 2 BLK BLK 2
-15VE 15VE BLK BLK
From U3 BRN 2 BRN BRN 2
2 +24VE 2 +24VE - +24VE
-15V -15V E
Pg(1/33) 2 ORG ORG 2
U9+24V1 #100092889V** AWG18(UL1007) GRN
#100092834V** 2 BLK BLK
AWG22(UL1007) U9+24VE AWG22(UL1007)
From XFU1 ORG WHT WHT
C BLK
2 6 X8501 X8501 C
From XU92 WHT 3A WHT 2 #SMP-03V-BC(JST)SMR-03V-B(JST)
Pg(2/33) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
XU61 XU61 #100095539V**
#100092768V** YEL YEL #SMP-02V-BC(JST)#SMR-02V-B(JST) AWG22(UL1007)
ORG AWG22(UL1007) 1 +15V 1 +15V #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
BLK BLK RED RED
To XU62
From S1 WHT 2 +15VE 2 +15VE 1 +5V 1 +5V Pg(2/33)
BRN BRN BLK BLK
Pg(3/33) WHT 3 -15V 3 -15V 2 +5VE 2 +5VE To X807
#100095538V** Pg(6/33)
#100092753V** AWG22(UL1007)
WHT AWG22(UL1007) for E Model Only
From KA1
Pg(2/33) BLK #100092829V**
AWG22(UL1007)
X850 CAL.SENSOR BOARD
To XLS56P #H5P-SHF-AA(JST)
D
Pg(27/33) #BHF-001T-0.8SS X850 D
LRB32E BOARD X100 1 CS1 1 CS1
#350777-1(TYCO) #100093362V** SHIELD 2 +15VE 2 +15VE
#100092832V**
X100 #350689-1 AWG18(UL1007)
AWG22(UL1007)
YEL 3 +15V 3 +15V
1 +5V 1 +5V RED To CPU 1.5D-QEV BLK
BLK 4 +15VE 4 +15VE
2 +5VE 2 +5VE To XLS572 (X812) BRN
#100092888V** 5 -15V 5 -15V
Pg(27/33) AWG22(UL1007)
PIO-PTR4XE BOARD X110
#VHR-8N(JST) #100093364V** #100092757V**
X110 #BVH-21T-1.1 AWG18(UL1007) AWG22(UL1007)
1 +5V 1 +5V RED #100092825V**,#100092828V**
BLK To KA3 AWG22(UL1007)
2 +5VE 2 +5VE
ORG Pg(3/33) 4 To XFAN1,XFAN2
3 U4+24V 3 U4+24V Pg(3/33)
4 4 U4+24VE BLK
E U4+24VE #100092756V** E
5 5 +15V YEL AWG18(UL1007)
+15V
6 6 -15V BRN To KA3
-15V
7 15VE BLK Pg(3/33)
7 15VE
8 8
#100094773V** DESIGNED I.AOKI

RCP3(E) BOARD 2 AWG14(UL1015) (X808) Pg(6/33)
X171 X171 (TERMINAL BLOCK I/F)
1 +15V 1 +15V YEL CHECKED E.TAMBA
2 +15VE 2 +15VE BRN
3 -15V 3 -15V BLK APPROVED E.Tamba FILE

From U2,U3 YEL
BLN CODE DRAW
Pg(1/33)
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
HEAD MB2(E) BOARD

#100095543V** for E X800 OP.PANEL
#100094774V** for S
#231-108/026-000 RCP3(E) BO ARD GP-2301L(DEGITAL)
AWG14(UL1015) (WAGO) X800 X154 XPNL1
A BLU 1 -5V 1 -5V X154 #HIF3BA-20D-2.54C (HRS) #17JE-23250-02(D1) (DDK) A
BLK 2 -5VE 2 -5VE
#HIF-2226CSA #17JE-25LH-1A XPNL1
BLU 3 -5V 3 -5V A1 A1 1 1
From U6
Pg(2/33)
BLK 4 -5VE 4 -5VE B1 B1 2 RXD 2 RXD

BLU 5 -5V 5 -5V A2 A2 3 TXD 3 TXD
BLK 6 -5VE 6 -5VE B2 B2 4 4
#100082270V**
BLU 7 -5V 7 -5V A3 A3 AWG24-3P 5 CTS 5 CTS
BLK 8 -5VE 8 -5VE B3 B3 (UL2464-SB) 6 6
A4 A4 XPNL XPNL 7 +5VE 7 +5VE
B4 B4 #100092878V** #17JE-13090-02(D1)(DDK) #17JE-23090-02(D1)(DDK) 8 8
X801 A5 A5 AWG24-5P #17JE-09H-1A,17L-002A #17JE-09H-1A2 9 9
B #VHR-8N (JST) (UL2464-SW/R) B
#100094779V** B5 B5 1 1 10 10
AWG18(UL1007) #BVH-21T-1.1 X801 A6 TXD A6 TXD L.BRN・ 2 TXD 2 TXD L.BRN・
11 11
ORG B6 RXD B6 RXD YEL・ 3 RXD 3 RXD YEL・
1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V 12 12
BLK 2 +24VE 2 +24VE A7 RTS A7 RTS 4 4 13 13
RED B7 CTS B7 CTS YEL・・ 5 +5VE 5 +5VE YEL・・
3 +5V 3 +5V 14 14
BLK A8 DCD A8 DCD BLU 6 6
4 +5VE(D.GND) 4 +5VE(D.GND) AWG24 15 15
YEL B8 DTR B8 DTR (UL1007) L.GRN・ 7 CTS 7 CTS L.GRN・
5 +15V 5 +15V 16 16
BLK A9 +5VE A9 +5VE GRY・ 8 RTS 8 RTS GRY・
6 ±15VE(A.GND) 6 ±15VE(A.GND) 17 17
BRN
From XT3
7 -15V 7 -15V B9 B9 9 9 18 18
Pg(5/33)
BLK 8 ±15VE(A.GND) 8 ±15VE(A.GND) A10 A10 E 19 19

B10 B10 20 DTR 20 DTR
21 21
C 22 22 C
X808 23 23
#231-102/026-000 X805
#100094773V** 24 24
AWG14(UL1015) (WAGO) X808 1 U4+24V 25 25
ORG 1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V 2 +24VE
BLK
2 +24VE 2 +24VE
X802
#H2P-SHF-AA (JST)
#100094757V**
X802 #BHF-001T-0.8SS AWG22(UL1007)
ORG
1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V
X807 BLK To PU80(XT80)
2 +24VE 2 +24VE Pg(19/33)
#H2P-SHF-AA(JST)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS X807 X803
D From XU61 BLK 1 RC1 1 RC1 #H2P-SHF-AA (JST) D
BRN #100094763V**
Pg(2/33) 2 RC2 2 RC2 X803 #BHF-001T-0.8SS ACCESSORY WIRE
RED
1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V
#100095539V** for E
2 +24VE 2 +24VE
BLK M M81
#100093358V** for S
AWG24(UL1007) #109P1224H402.109-019B (SANYO)
X804
#H2P-SHF-AA (JST)
#100094764V**
X804 #BHF-001T-0.8SS ACCESSORY WIRE
RED
1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V
2 +24VE 2 +24VE
BLK M M82
X806
#109P1224H402.109-019B (SANYO) X880
#1-172075-1(TYCO) LS80
E #H2P-SHF-AA (JST) #100094877V** #170330-1 #D2MV-01L13-1C3 (OMRON) E
X806 #BHF-001T-1.8SS AWG22(UL1007) NC
1 IN114 1 IN114 WHT NO IN114
2 +5VE 2 +5VE BLK C +5VE
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 6
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
RCP3(E) BO ARD PIO-PTR4XE B OARD X122 #100094415V**
X153 X112 #H8P-SHF-AA (JST) ACCESSORY WIRE P1
#HIF3BA-16D-2.54C (HIROSE) #H10P-SHF-AA (JST) X122 #BHF-001T-0.8SS #ZS-27-A #ZSE30-01-25-M(SMC)
BRN
X153 #HIF3-2226SCA #100094789V** #BHF-001T-0.8SS X112 1 IN115 1 IN115
BLK
ORG AWG22(UL1007) ORG 2 +24VE 2 +24VE
A A1 M2_CW A1 M2_CW 1 M2_CW 1 M2_CW BLU A
B1 B1 GRN 2 M2_CCW 2 M2_CCW 3 U4+24V 3 U4+24V
A2 M2_CCW A2 M2_CCW GRN 3 M2_D0 3 M2_D0 4 OUT-38 4 OUT-38
B2 B2 4 M2_D1 4 M2_D1 5 IN115 5 IN115
A3 A3 5 M2_D2 5 M2_D2 6 +24VE 6 +24VE
B3 B3 6 M2_D3 6 M2_D3 7 7
BLU 8 8
A4 A4 7 M2_ORG 7 M2_ORG XS1 XS1
B4 B4 8 8 #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST)
A5 M2_ORG A5 M2_ORG BLU 9 9 #100092776V** #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100092812V**
AWG26(UL1007) 1 1 AWG22(UL1007)
B5 B5 10 10
WHT 2 IN25 2 IN25 WHT
A6 M2_D0 A6 M2_D0
B X124A X113A BLK 3 +5VE BLK From S1 Pg(3/33) B
B6 M2_D2 B6 M2_D2 3 +5VE
A7 M2_D1 A7 M2_D1 #H4P-SHF-AA(JST) #H12P-SHF-AA(JST) X58 X58
B7 M2_D3 B7 M2_D3 #100086277V** #BHF-001T-0.8SS X124A X113A #BHF-001T-0.8SS #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST) PH58
1 1 1 +5VE 1 +5VE BLK #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100092781V** #SS-01GL2-F(OMRON)
A8 A8 AWG22(UL1007) (A1)
GRN 2 E 2 E 2 IN25 2 IN25 WHT 1 1 AWG26(UL1007) NC
B8 B8 (A3)
3 3 (A5) 3 IN17 3 IN17 WHT 2 IN17 2 IN17 WHT

NO
E 4 4 (A7) 4 +5VE 4 +5VE BLK 3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK C
(A9) 5 5 X59 X59 XPH59 PH59
X124 (A11) 6 6 #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST) #51030-0330(MOLEX) #GP2A20
#H4P-SHF-AA (JST) (A13) 7 7 #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #50083-8114 (SHARP)
PH6 #100094417V** RED RED
ACCESSORY WIRE #BHF-001T-0.8SS X124 (A15) 8 +5V 8 +5V 1 +5V 1 +5V 1 +5V
BLK 1 INP1 9 IN42 9 IN42 WHT 2 IN42 2 IN42 WHT 2 IN42
1 INP1 (A17)
BLK BLK
C 2 +5VE 2 +5VE (A19) 10 +5VE 10 +5VE 3 +5VE 3 +5VE 3 +5VE C
BRN 3 U4+24V 11 IN41 11 IN41 WHT
3 U4+24V (A21)
#100092783V**
BLU 4 +24VE 4 +24VE (A23) 12 +5VE 12 +5VE BLK X60 X60 AWG26(UL1007)
#SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST)
#Z4W-V 25R (OMRON) SHIELD #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
1 1
WHT
X151 X111 2 IN41 2 IN41
X151 #8825E-60-175 (KEL) #8825E-60-175 (KEL) X111 3 +5VE 3 +5VE
A1 PA0 B1 +5VE A1 PA0 B1 +5VE A1 PA0 B1 +5VE A1 PA0 B1 +5VE
A2 PA1 B2 +5VE A2 PA1 B2 +5VE A2 PA1 B2 +5VE A2 PA1 B2 +5VE X120
A3 PA2 B3 +5VE A3 PA2 B3 +5VE A3 PA2 B3 +5VE A3 PA2 B3 +5VE #H12P-SHF-AA (JST) #100092880V** XENC1 XENC1 #100094416V**
AWG24-4P(UL2547) #57-60140(DDK) #57-30140(DDK)
A4 PA3 B4 +5VE A4 PA3 B4 +5VE A4 PA3 B4 +5VE A4 PA3 B4 +5VE X120 #BHF-001T-0.8SS ACCESSORY WIRE
A5 PA4 B5 +5VE A5 PA4 B5 +5VE A5 PA4 B5 +5VE A5 PA4 B5 +5VE 1 Z 1 Z ORG/BLK 1 Z 1 Z YEL
D A6 PA5 B6 +5VE A6 PA5 B6 +5VE A6 PA5 B6 +5VE A6 PA5 B6 +5VE ORG/RED YEL/BLK D
2 *Z 2 *Z 8 *Z 8 *Z
A7 PA6 B7 +5VE A7 PA6 B7 +5VE A7 PA6 B7 +5VE A7 PA6 B7 +5VE 3 A 3 B GRN/BLK 2 A 2 A BLU
A8 PA7 B8 +5VE A8 PA7 B8 +5VE A8 PA7 B8 +5VE A8 PA7 B8 +5VE 4 *A 4 *B GRN/RED 9 *A 9 *A BLU/BLK
A9 PD0 B9 +5VE A9 PD0 B9 +5VE A9 PD0 B9 +5VE A9 PD0 B9 +5VE 5 B 5 A YEL/BLK 3 B 3 B GRN ENC1
A10 PD1 B10 +5VE A10 PD1 B10 +5VE A10 PD1 B10 +5VE A10 PD1 B10 +5VE 6 *B 6 *A YEL/RED 10 *B 10 *B GRN/BLK
A11 PD2 B11 +5VE A11 PD2 B11 +5VE A11 PD2 B11 +5VE A11 PD2 B11 +5VE 7 +5V 7 +5V GRY/BLK 4 +5V 4 +5V RED
A12 PD3 B12 +5VE A12 PD3 B12 +5VE A12 PD3 B12 +5VE A12 PD3 B12 +5VE 8 +5VE 8 +5VE GRY/RED 11 +5VE 11 +5VE BLK
A13 PD4 B13 +5VE A13 PD4 B13 +5VE A13 PD4 B13 +5VE A13 PD4 B13 +5VE ENC1
9 SENSOR+5V 9 5 5 SHIELD
A14 PD5 B14 +5VE A14 PD5 B14 +5VE AWG30-30P A14 PD5 B14 +5VE A14 PD5 B14 +5VE SHIELD
10 SENSOR+5VE 10 12 12
A15 PD6 B15 +5VE A15 PD6 B15 +5VE (UL20528-TW) A15 PD6 B15 +5VE A15 PD6 B15 +5VE #OIH48-1000P4-L6-5V
11 +5VE 11 6 6 (TAMAGAWA)
A16 PD7 B16 +5VE A16 PD7 B16 +5VE A16 PD7 B16 +5VE A16 PD7 B16 +5VE 12 12 13 13
A17 *PRE B17 +5VE A17 *PRE B17 +5VE A17 *PRE B17 +5VE A17 *PRE B17 +5VE 7 7
E A18 *PWE B18 +5VE A18 *PWE B18 +5VE A18 *PWE B18 +5VE A18 *PWE B18 +5VE 14 14 E
A19 *PRST B19 +5VE A19 *PRST B19 +5VE A19 *PRST B19 +5VE A19 *PRST B19 +5VE FRAME
(Shell) (Shell)
A20 PINT B20 +5VE A20 PINT B20 +5VE A20 PINT B20 +5VE A20 PINT B20 +5VE
A21 PNM1 B21 +5VE A21 PNM1 B21 +5VE A21 PNM1 B21 +5VE A21 PNM1 B21 +5VE
A22 ENCA B22 +5VE A22 ENCA B22 +5VE A22 ENCA B22 +5VE A22 ENCA B22 +5VE
A23 *ENCORG B23 +5VE A23 *ENCORG B23 +5VE A23 *ENCORG B23 +5VE A23 *ENCORG B23 +5VE
A24 *D_LDENB B24 +5VE A24 *D_LDENB B24 +5VE A24 *D_LDENB B24 +5VE A24 *D_LDENB B24 +5VE DESIGNED I.AOKI
A25 B25 +5VE A25 B25 +5VE A25 B25 +5VE A25 B25 +5VE DRAWN I.AOKI WIRING DIAGRAM 7
A26 B26 +5VE A26 B26 +5VE A26 B26 +5VE A26 B26 +5VE (PIO-PTR4 BOARD)
A27 B27 +5VE A27 B27 +5VE A27 B27 +5VE A27 B27 +5VE CHECKED E.TAMBA
A28 B28 +5VE A28 B28 +5VE A28 B28 +5VE A28 B28 +5VE
A29 B29 +5VE A29 B29 +5VE A29 B29 +5VE A29 B29 +5VE APPROVED E.Tamba FILE
A30 B30 +5VE A30 B30 +5VE A30 B30 +5VE A30 B30 +5VE
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
RCP3(E) BO ARD LRB32E BOARD

X152 X101
X152 #8825E-80-175 (KEL) #8825E-80-175 (KEL) X101
A A1 RA0 B1 +5VE A1 RA0 B1 +5VE A1 RA0 B1 +5VE A1 RA0 B1 +5VE A
A2 RA1 B2 +5VE A2 RA1 B2 +5VE A2 RA1 B2 +5VE A2 RA1 B2 +5VE
A9 RD0 B9 +5VE A9 RD0 B9 +5VE A9 RD0 B9 +5VE A9 RD0 B9 +5VE
B B
A14 RD5 B14 +5VE A14 RD5 B14 +5VE AWG30-40P(UL20528-TW)
A14 RD5 B14 +5VE A14 RD5 B14 +5VE
A17 *RRE B17 +5VE A17 *RRE B17 +5VE A17 *RRE B17 +5VE A17 *RRE B17 +5VE
A18 *RWE B18 +5VE A18 *RWE B18 +5VE A18 *RWE B18 +5VE A18 *RWE B18 +5VE
A19 *RRST B19 +5VE A19 *RRST B19 +5VE A19 *RRST B19 +5VE A19 *RRST B19 +5VE
A20 PGON B20 +5VE A20 PGON B20 +5VE A20 PGON B20 +5VE A20 PGON B20 +5VE
A21 START B21 +5VE A21 START B21 +5VE A21 START B21 +5VE A21 START B21 +5VE
A22 STEP-RQ B22 +5VE A22 STEP-RQ B22 +5VE A22 STEP-RQ B22 +5VE A22 STEP-RQ B22 +5VE
A23 *INH-A B23 +5VE A23 *INH-A B23 +5VE A23 *INH-A B23 +5VE A23 *INH-A B23 +5VE
C A24 *INH-T B24 +5VE A24 *INH-T B24 +5VE A24 *INH-T B24 +5VE A24 *INH-T B24 +5VE C
A25 *RE-SRT B25 +5VE A25 *RE-SRT B25 +5VE A25 *RE-SRT B25 +5VE A25 *RE-SRT B25 +5VE
A26 TB-READ B26 +5VE A26 TB-READ B26 +5VE A26 TB-READ B26 +5VE A26 TB-READ B26 +5VE
A27 SCAN-ON B27 +5VE A27 SCAN-ON B27 +5VE A27 SCAN-ON B27 +5VE A27 SCAN-ON B27 +5VE
A28 STEP-AK B28 +5VE A28 STEP-AK B28 +5VE A28 STEP-AK B28 +5VE A28 STEP-AK B28 +5VE
A29 OUT-ON0 B29 +5VE A29 OUT-ON0 B29 +5VE A29 OUT-ON0 B29 +5VE A29 OUT-ON0 B29 +5VE
A30 OUT-ON1 B30 +5VE A30 OUT-ON1 B30 +5VE A30 OUT-ON1 B30 +5VE A30 OUT-ON1 B30 +5VE
A31 SYNC B31 +5VE A31 SYNC B31 +5VE A31 SYNC B31 +5VE A31 SYNC B31 +5VE
A32 CAL B32 +5VE A32 CAL B32 +5VE A32 CAL B32 +5VE A32 CAL B32 +5VE
A33 LD-ENABLE0 B33 +5VE A33 LD-ENABLE0 B33 +5VE A33 LD-ENABLE0 B33 +5VE A33 LD-ENABLE0 B33 +5VE
A34 LD-ENABLE1 B34 +5VE A34 LD-ENABLE1 B34 +5VE A34 LD-ENABLE1 B34 +5VE A34 LD-ENABLE1 B34 +5VE
A35 SPARE B35 +5VE A35 SPARE B35 +5VE A35 SPARE B35 +5VE A35 SPARE B35 +5VE
D D
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
(RCP3 - LRB32E)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
PIO-PTR4XE B OARD CON-PTR4XE B OARD

X114 X11
X114 #8822E-100-171 (KEL) #8822E-100-171 (KEL) X11
A A1 IN1A B1 IN2A A1 IN1A B1 IN2A A1 IN1A B1 IN2A A1 IN1A B1 IN2A A
A2 IN3H B2 IN4A A2 IN3H B2 IN4A A2 IN3H B2 IN4A A2 IN3H B2 IN4A
A3 IN5A B3 IN6A A3 IN5A B3 IN6A A3 IN5A B3 IN6A A3 IN5A B3 IN6A
A6 IN11A B6 IN7H A6 IN11A B6 IN7H A6 IN11A B6 IN7H A6 IN11A B6 IN7H
A9 IN13H B9 IN14H A9 IN13H B9 IN14H A9 IN13H B9 IN14H A9 IN13H B9 IN14H
B A11 IN21A B11 IN22A A11 IN21A B11 IN22A A11 IN21A B11 IN22A A11 IN21A B11 IN22A B
AWG28-50P(UL20276-SW)
A16 IN31A B16 IN32A A16 IN31A B16 IN32A UL-KHJ999-0814-0814-B0
A16 IN31A B16 IN32A A16 IN31A B16 IN32A
A17 IN33A B17 IN34A A17 IN33A B17 IN34A (KEL)
A17 IN33A B17 IN34A A17 IN33A B17 IN34A
A21 IN34H B21 IN42A A21 IN34H B21 IN42A A21 IN34H B21 IN42A A21 IN34H B21 IN42A
C A24 IN25H B24 IN26H A24 IN25H B24 IN26H A24 IN25H B24 IN26H A24 IN25H B24 IN26H C
A26 OUT7A B26 OUT8A A26 OUT7A B26 OUT8A A26 OUT7A B26 OUT8A A26 OUT7A B26 OUT8A
A28 B28 A28 B28 A28 B28 A28 B28
A32 OUT23H B32 OUT24H A32 OUT23H B32 OUT24H A32 OUT23H B32 OUT24H A32 OUT23H B32 OUT24H
D A36 B36 OUT13H A36 B36 OUT13H A36 B36 OUT13H A36 B36 OUT13H D
A38 OUT3H B38 A38 OUT3H B38 A38 OUT3H B38 A38 OUT3H B38
A40 B40 OUT54A A40 B40 OUT54A A40 B40 OUT54A A40 B40 OUT54A
A44 B44 OUT30H A44 B44 OUT30H A44 B44 OUT30H A44 B44 OUT30H
A46 OUT47A B46 OUT29H A46 OUT47A B46 OUT29H A46 OUT47A B46 OUT29H A46 OUT47A B46 OUT29H
E A49 OUT43H B49 OUT32H A49 OUT43H B49 OUT32H A49 OUT43H B49 OUT32H A49 OUT43H B49 OUT32H E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
(PIO- - CON)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
PIO-PTR4XE B OARD CON-PTR4XE B OARD

X113 X11H
X113 #8822E-100-171 (KEL) #8822E-100-171 (KEL) X113
A A1 IN1 B1 IN2 A1 IN1H B1 IN2H A1 IN1H B1 IN2H A1 IN1H B1 IN2H A
A2 IN3 B2 IN4 A2 IN3H B2 IN4H A2 IN3H B2 IN4H A2 IN3H B2 IN4H
B B
A15 IN33 B15 N.C A15 IN29H B15 IN30H A15 IN29H B15 IN30H A15 IN29H B15 IN30H
A19 INM2_ORG B19 IN94 A19 IN37H B19 IN38H A19 IN37H B19 IN38H A19 IN37H B19 IN38H
A22 IN51 B22 IN52 A22 IN43H B22 IN44H #151340
A22 IN43H B22 IN44H A22 IN43H B22 IN44H
A23 MOT_29 B23 MOT-30 A23 IN45H B23 IN46H A23 IN45H B23 IN46H A23 IN45H B23 IN46H
KHJ999-0762-B0
C A24 IN34 B24 N.C A24 IN47H B24 IN48H (#88-13-124)
A24 IN47H B24 IN48H A24 IN47H B24 IN48H C
A26 MOT-1 B26 MOT-2 A26 OUT7H B26 OUT8H A26 OUT7H B26 OUT8H A26 OUT7H B26 OUT8H
A27 MOT-17 B27 MOT-18 A27 OUT9H B27 OUT10H E A27 OUT9H B27 OUT10H A27 OUT9H B27 OUT10H
A30 N.C B30 N.C A30 OUT15H B30 OUT16H A30 OUT15H B30 OUT16H A30 OUT15H B30 OUT16H
A33 OUT-7 B33 OUT-8 A33 OUT21H B33 OUT22H A33 OUT21H B33 OUT22H A33 OUT21H B33 OUT22H
D D
A38 N.C B38 OUT-37 A38 OUT31H B38 OUT32H A38 OUT31H B38 OUT32H A38 OUT31H B38 OUT32H
A41 MM1_CW B41 MM1_CCW A41 OUT37H B41 OUT38H A41 OUT37H B41 OUT38H A41 OUT37H B41 OUT38H
A42 MMI_PD B42 N.C A42 OUT39H B42 N.C A42 OUT39H B42 N.C A42 OUT39H B42 N.C
A43 M61HCW B43 M61HCCW A43 OUT41H B43 OUT42H A43 OUT41H B43 OUT42H A43 OUT41H B43 OUT42H
A44 M61HPD B44 N.C A44 OUT43H B44 OUT44H A44 OUT43H B44 OUT44H A44 OUT43H B44 OUT44H
A45 M2_CW2 B45 M2_CCW2 A45 OUT45H B45 OUT46H A45 OUT45H B45 OUT46H A45 OUT45H B45 OUT46H
A46 M2_D0 B46 M2_D1 A46 OUT47H B46 OUT48H A46 OUT47H B46 OUT48H A46 OUT47H B46 OUT48H
A47 M2_D2 B47 M2_D3 A47 OUT49H B47 OUT50H A47 OUT49H B47 OUT50H A47 OUT49H B47 OUT50H
A48 MM2_CW B48 MM2_CCW A48 OUT51H B48 OUT52H A48 OUT51H B48 OUT52H A48 OUT51H B48 OUT52H
E A49 MM2_PD B49 N.C A49 OUT53H B49 OUT54H A49 OUT53H B49 OUT54H A49 OUT53H B49 OUT54H E
A50 N.C B50 N.C A50 OUT55H B50 OUT56H A50 OUT55H B50 OUT56H A50 OUT55H B50 OUT56H
DESIGNED I.AOKI
CHECKED E.TAMBA (PIO - CON)
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
PIO-PTR4XE B OARD 【 OPTION 】

X115
X115 #8822E-100-171 (KEL)
A A1 IN1C B1 IN2C A1 IN1C B1 IN2C A
A2 IN3C B2 IN4C A2 IN3C B2 IN4C AUTO LOADER
A3 IN5C B3 IN6C A3 IN5C B3 IN6C
B B
A14 IN27C B14 IN28C A14 IN27C B14 IN28C AWG28-50P(UL20276-SW)
A23 OUT1C B23 OUT2C A23 OUT1C B23 OUT2C
C A24 OUT3C B24 OUT4C A24 OUT3C B24 OUT4C C
D D
A41 OUT37AC B41 OUT38AC A41 OUT37AC B41 OUT38AC
A42 OUT39AC B42 OUT40C A42 OUT39AC B42 OUT40C
A44 OUT43AC B44 OUT44C A44 OUT43AC B44 OUT44C
E A49 OUT53AC B49 OUT54C A49 OUT53AC B49 OUT54C E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
(PIO - SAL)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
LRB32E BOARD HEAD CPU3E BOARD #100094816V** X162 RCP3(E) BOARD
X103 X810 AWG22-3C(UL2547) #H5P-SHF-AA (JST)
X103 #8822E-80-171 (KEL) #8822E-80-171 (KEL) X810 To XAT
Pg(23/33)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS X162
A1 +LD00 B1 +LD16 A1 +LD00 B1 +LD16 A40 +LD00 B40 +LD16 A40 +LD00 B40 +LD16 RED 1 RXD 1 RXD
A A2 -LD00 B2 -LD16 A2 -LD00 B2 -LD16 A39 -LD00 B39 -LD16 A39 -LD00 B39 -LD16 WHT 2 TXD A
2 TXD
A3 +LD01 B3 +LD17 A3 +LD01 B3 +LD17 A38 +LD01 B38 +LD17 A38 +LD01 B38 +LD17 WHT 3 RTS 3 RTS
A4 -LD01 B4 -LD17 A4 -LD01 B4 -LD17 A37 -LD01 B37 -LD17 A37 -LD01 B37 -LD17
4 CTS 4 CTS
A5 +LD02 B5 +LD18 A5 +LD02 B5 +LD18 A36 +LD02 B36 +LD18 A36 +LD02 B36 +LD18 YEL 5 +5VE 5 +5VE
A6 -LD02 B6 -LD18 A6 -LD02 B6 -LD18 A35 -LD02 B35 -LD18 A35 -LD02 B35 -LD18 SHIELD
A7 +LD03 B7 +LD19 A7 +LD03 B7 +LD19 A34 +LD03 B34 +LD19 A34 +LD03 B34 +LD19
X811 X158
X811 #17JE-13090-02(D8A) (DDK) #100094791V** #H5P-SHF-AA (JST)
A9 +LD04 B9 +LD20 A9 +LD04 B9 +LD20 A32 +LD04 B32 +LD20 A32 +LD04 B32 +LD20 AWG22-5C(UL2464) #BHF-001T-0.8SS
A10 -LD04 B10 -LD20 A10 -LD04 B10 -LD20 A31 -LD04 B31 -LD20 A31 -LD04 B31 -LD20 1 1 X158
2 RXD 2 RXD ORG/RED 1 RXD 1 RXD
A11 +LD05 B11 +LD21 A11 +LD05 B11 +LD21 A30 +LD05 B30 +LD21 A30 +LD05 B30 +LD21 ORG/BLK
A12 -LD05 B12 -LD21 A12 -LD05 B12 -LD21 A29 -LD05 B29 -LD21 A29 -LD05 B29 -LD21 3 TXD 3 TXD 2 TXD 2 TXD
B 4 4 GRY/RED 3 RTS 3 RTS B
A13 +LD06 B13 +LD22 A13 +LD06 B13 +LD22 A28 +LD06 B28 +LD22 A28 +LD06 B28 +LD22 GRY/BLK
5 +5VE 5 +5VE WHT 4 CTS 4 CTS
A15 +LD07 B15 +LD23 A15 +LD07 B15 +LD23 AWG28- 20P(UL20012-TW) * 2 A26
+LD07 B26 +LD23 A26 +LD07 B26 +LD23 6 6 5 +5VE 5 +5VE
A16 -LD07 B16 -LD23 A16 -LD07 B16 -LD23 A25 -LD07 B25 -LD23 A25 -LD07 B25 -LD23 7 RTS 7 RTS
A17 +LD08 B17 +LD24 A17 +LD08 B17 +LD24 A24 +LD08 B24 +LD24 A24 +LD08 B24 +LD24 8 CTS 8 CTS SHIELD (SOLDER) DRAIN WIRE
A18 -LD08 B18 -LD24 A18 -LD08 B18 -LD24 A23 -LD08 B23 -LD24 A23 -LD08 B23 -LD24 9 9 (Shell) FRAME
A19 +LD09 B19 +LD25 A19 +LD09 B19 +LD25 A22 +LD09 B22 +LD25 A22 +LD09 B22 +LD25
A20 -LD09 B20 -LD25 A20 -LD09 B20 -LD25 A21 -LD09 B21 -LD25 A21 -LD09 B21 -LD25 XPC X159
A21 +LD10 B21 +LD26 A21 +LD10 B21 +LD26 A20 +LD10 B20 +LD26 A20 +LD10 B20 +LD26 #17JE-23090-02(D3C) (DDK) #H5P-SHF-AA (JST)
A22 -LD10 B22 -LD26 A22 -LD10 B22 -LD26 A19 -LD10 B19 -LD26 A19 -LD10 B19 -LD26 1 #BHF-001T-0.8SS X159
2 RXD BLU 1 RXD 1 RXD
A23 +LD11 B23 +LD27 A23 +LD11 B23 +LD27 A18 +LD11 B18 +LD27 A18 +LD11 B18 +LD27 RED
A24 -LD11 B24 -LD27 A24 -LD11 B24 -LD27 A17 -LD11 B17 -LD27 A17 -LD11 B17 -LD27 3 TXD 2 TXD 2 TXD
A25 +LD12 B25 +LD28 A25 +LD12 B25 +LD28 A16 +LD12 B16 +LD28 A16 +LD12 B16 +LD28 4 3 RTS 3 RTS
C WHT C
A26 -LD12 B26 -LD28 A26 -LD12 B26 -LD28 A15 -LD12 B15 -LD28 A15 -LD12 B15 -LD28 5 +5VE 4 CTS 4 CTS
A27 +LD13 B27 +LD29 A27 +LD13 B27 +LD29 A14 +LD13 B14 +LD29 A14 +LD13 B14 +LD29 6 5 +5VE 5 +5VE
7 RTS YEL SHIELD
A28 -LD13 B28 -LD29 A28 -LD13 B28 -LD29 A13 -LD13 B13 -LD29 A13 -LD13 B13 -LD29 GRN #100094811V**
A29 +LD14 B29 +LD30 A29 +LD14 B29 +LD30 A12 +LD14 B12 +LD30 A12 +LD14 B12 +LD30 8 CTS AWG22-5C(UL2547-SW/R)
A30 -LD14 B30 -LD30 A30 -LD14 B30 -LD30 A11 -LD14 B11 -LD30 A11 -LD14 B11 -LD30 9
A31 +LD15 B31 +LD31 A31 +LD15 B31 +LD31 A10 +LD15 B10 +LD31 A10 +LD15 B10 +LD31 X168
A32 -LD15 B32 -LD31 A32 -LD15 B32 -LD31 A9 -LD15 B9 -LD31 A9 -LD15 B9 -LD31 XETH #100096178V**
#TM22P-88P(CL222-2862-9)
A33 LD-ENABLE0 B33 +5VE A33 LD-ENABLE0 B33 +5VE A8 LD-ENABLE0 B8 +5VE A8 LD-ENABLE0 B8 +5VE #1375055-3(TYCO) HUTP5-4P(UL20276) HIROSE X168
HITACHI GRN/WHT 1 TX+
A34 LD-ENABLE1 B34 +5VE A34 LD-ENABLE1 B34 +5VE A7 LD-ENABLE1 B7 +5VE A7 LD-ENABLE1 B7 +5VE 1 TX+ 1 TX+
A35 +5VE B35 +5VE A35 +5VE B35 +5VE A6 +5VE B6 +5VE A6 +5VE B6 +5VE 2 TX- GRN 2 TX- 2 TX-
A36 +5VE B36 +5VE A36 +5VE B36 +5VE A5 +5VE B5 +5VE A5 +5VE B5 +5VE 3 RX+ ORG/WHT 3 RX+ 3 RX+
A37 +5VE B37 +5VE A37 +5VE B37 +5VE A4 +5VE B4 +5VE A4 +5VE B4 +5VE 4 BLU 4 4
D A38 +5VE B38 +5VE A38 +5VE B38 +5VE A3 +5VE B3 +5VE A3 +5VE B3 +5VE BLU/WHT 5 D
5 5
A39 +CAL B39 +LD-ENABLE A39 +CAL B39 +LD-ENABLE A2 +CAL B2 +LD-ENABLE A2 +CAL B2 +LD-ENABLE 6 RX- ORG 6 RX- 6 RX-
A40 -CAL B40 -LD-ENABLE A40 -CAL B40 -LD-ENABLE A1 -CAL B1 -LD-ENABLE A1 -CAL B1 -LD-ENABLE 7 BRN/WHT 7 7
8 BRN 8 8
XTH1 XTH1 X172

#100082084V** #SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #100096176V** #H8P-SHF-AA(JST)
AWG26(UL1007)+ACCESSORY WIRE #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS AWG24(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS X172
WHT WHT 1 TH1+ WHT 1 TH1+
1 TH1+ 1 TEMP0
TH1 WHT BLK 2 TH1- 2 TH1- BLK 2 TH1- 2 TEMP-
#PB3L-43-D2 3 3 TEMP1
(SHIBAURA ELECTRONICS) 4 4 TEMP-
E 5 5 TEMP2 E
6 6 TEMP-
7 7 TEMP3
8 8 TEMP-
DESIGNED I.AOKI
(RB31 - HEAD - RCP)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
1
NO.
100094909V00 (12/33) A3
SYM REVISION ALT.NO. DATE REVISED APPROVED NO.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
HEAD CPU3E BOARD X815 X870 X870

#H12P-SHF-AA (JST) #SMP-06V-BC (JST) #SMR-06V-B (JST)
#100094886V** (ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE)
X815 #BHF-001T-0.8SS AWG24(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
A 1 PM81A 1 PM81A WHT 1 PM81A 1 PM81A GRY A
2 PM81B 2 PM81B GRY 2 PM81C 2 PM81C ORG
3 PM81C 3 PM81C YEL 3 PM81B 3 PM81B BRN
4 PM81D 4 PM81D PNK 4 PM81D 4 PM81D BLU M
ORG GRN
5 COM(A) 5 COM(A) 5 COM(A) 5 COM(A) PM81
6 COM(B) 6 COM(B) ORG 6 COM(B) 6 COM(B) RED
7 + 7 + RED
#PFC25-48M1G(1/125)-02 (NIPPON PLUSE MOTOR)
BLK
8 - 8 -
WHT
X871 PH85
9 OUT 9 OUT #EE-1001 (OMRON) #EE-SX673A (OMRON)
RED AWG26(UL1007)
10 + 10 + 1(+) +
11 - 11 - BLK 2(L)
B WHT B
12 OUT 12 OUT 3(OUT) OUT
4(-) -
X872 PH86
#EE-1001 (OMRON) #EE-673A (OMRON)
AWG26(UL1007)
1(+) +
2(L)
3(OUT) OUT
4(-) -
X814 X860 PMD80 X861 X862 X862

#H20P-SHF-AA (JST) #100094883V** #5051-12 (MOLEX) #5051-05 (MOLEX) #PHR-5 (JST) #S5B-PH-SM3-TB (JST)
C X814 #BHF-001T-0.8SS AWG24(UL1007) #2759PBGL CN1 DRIVER CN2 #5159PBGL #SPH-002T-P0.5S (ACCESSORY CONNECTOR) C
1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V ORG 1 U4+24V 1 U4+24V 1 PM80D 1 PM80D GRN BLU 1 PM80A 1 PM80A
2 U4+24V 2 U4+24V ORG 2 U4+24V 2 U4+24V 2 PM80C 2 PM80C YEL RED 2 PM80B 2 PM80B
3 +24VE 3 +24VE BLK 3 +24VE 3 +24VE 3 PM80B 3 PM80B RED YEL 3 PM80C 3 PM80C M
4 +24VE 4 +24VE BLK 4 +24VE 4 +24VE 4 PM80E 4 PM80E BLK GRN 4 PM80D 4 PM80D
RED BLU BLK 5 PM80E
5 +5V 5 +5V
BLK
5 +5V 5 +5V 5 PM80A 5 PM80A 5 PM80E PM80
6 +5VE 6 +5VE 6 +5VE 6 +5VE #100094890V**
7 PM80CW 7 PM80CW WHT 7 PM80CW 7 PM80CW AWG24(UL1007)
#103H3505-7040 (SANYO DENKI)
8 PM80CCW 8 PM80CCW GRY 8 PM80CCW 8 PM80CCW
9 PM80PDWN 9 PM80PDWN YEL 9 PM80PDWN 9 PM80PDWN
10 PM80H/F 10 PM80H/F PNK 10 PM80H/F 10 PM80H/F
11 PM80MON 11 PM80MON BRN 11 PM80MON 11 PM80MON
12 + 12 + RED 12 12
D BLK D
13 - 13 -
14 OUT 14 OUT WHT
RED #PMM-BD-53131-10 (SANYO DENKI)
15 + 15 +
BLK
16 - 16 - X863 PH82
17 OUT 17 OUT WHT #EE-1001 (OMRON) #EE-673A (OMRON)
RED AWG26(UL1007)
18 + 18 + 1(+) +
19 - 19 - BLK 2(L)
20 OUT 20 OUT WHT 3(OUT) OUT
4(-) -
X864 PH83
AWG26(UL1007)
E 1(+) + E
2(L)
3(OUT) OUT
4(-) -
X865 PH84 DESIGNED I.AOKI

AWG26(UL1007)
1(+) + DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 13
2(L) (HEAD UNIT )
3(OUT) OUT CHECKED E.TAMBA
4(-) -
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
HEAD CPU3E BOARD RH_CON32E BOARD

X813 X840
X813 #HIF3BA-20D-2.54R (HIROSE) #HIF3BA-20D-2.54R (HIROSE) X840
A A1 TEMP1 B1 PD-A SIGNAL A1 TEMP1 B1 PD-A SIGNAL A1 TEMP1 B1 PD-A SIGNAL A1 TEMP1 B1 PD-A SIGNAL A
A2 TEMP1 B2 PD-A GND A2 TEMP1 B2 PD-A GND A2 TEMP1 B2 PD-A GND A2 TEMP1 B2 PD-A GND
A3 TEMP2 B3 PD-B SIGNAL A3 TEMP2 B3 PD-B SIGNAL #100094892V** A3 TEMP2 B3 PD-B SIGNAL A3 TEMP2 B3 PD-B SIGNAL
AWG28-20C(UL2651)
A4 TEMP2 B4 PD-B GND A4 TEMP2 B4 PD-B GND A4 TEMP2 B4 PD-B GND A4 TEMP2 B4 PD-B GND
A5 TEMP3 B5 PD-C SIGNAL A5 TEMP3 B5 PD-C SIGNAL A5 TEMP3 B5 PD-C SIGNAL A5 TEMP3 B5 PD-C SIGNAL
A6 TEMP3 B6 PD-C GND A6 TEMP3 B6 PD-C GND A6 TEMP3 B6 PD-C GND A6 TEMP3 B6 PD-C GND
A7 DEW1 B7 PD-D SIGNAL A7 DEW1 B7 PD-D SIGNAL A7 DEW1 B7 PD-D SIGNAL A7 DEW1 B7 PD-D SIGNAL
A8 DEW1 B8 PD-D GND A8 DEW1 B8 PD-D GND A8 DEW1 B8 PD-D GND A8 DEW1 B8 PD-D GND
A9 B9 A9 B9 A9 B9 A9 B9
A10 B10 A10 B10 A10 B10 A10 B10
B X845 B
#151239-** #H2P-SHF-AA(JST)
ACCESSORY WIRE #BHF-001T-0.8SS X845
1 TEMP3 1 TEMP3
RT80 2 TEMP3 2 TEMP3
#PB3L-43-D1
(SHIBAURA ELECTRONICS)
X846
1 TEMP2
2 TEMP2
C C
X847
X812 #151238-** #H2P-SHF-AA(JST)
#100093368V** #UM-QB-1.5 (HIROSE)
1.5D-QEV or #UM-QP-1.5VCR3A(41) ACCESSORY WIRE #BHF-001T-0.8SS X847
Pg(5/33) X812 1 TEMP1 1 TEMP1
From CAL.SEN BOARD RT82 2 TEMP1 2 TEMP1
(X850) SHIELD
#PB3P-43-D2
(SHIBAURA ELECTRONICS)
X848
#100087102V** #H2P-SHF-AA(JST)
AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS X848
D WHT D
1 DEW1 1 DEW1
CO80 WHT
2 DEW1 2 DEW1
#EYHS77
(PANASONIC)
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 14
SOLDER ( HEAD CPU - RH )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
100094909V00 (14/33) A3
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
HEAD DRV3E BOARD1 X830-1 RH CONNECTION B OARD X830-3 HEAD DRV3E BOARD3
#H20P-SHF-AA(JST) #H20P-SHF-AA(JST)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS X841 X843 #BHF-001T-0.8SS X830-3
A 1 -5VE 1 -5VE #100094894V** #H16P-SHF-AA(JST) #H16P-SHF-AA(JST) #100094899V** 1 -5VE 1 -5VE A
WHT AWG24(UL1007) WHT
2 LD 2 LD #BHF-001T-0.8SS X841 X843 #BHF-001T-0.8SS AWG24(UL1007) 2 LD 2 LD
SHIELD SHIELD
3 -5VE 3 -5VE 1 -5VE 1 -5VE 1 -5VE 1 -5VE 3 -5VE 3 -5VE
RED DFS010 RED DFS010
4 LD 4 LD 2 LD 2 LD 2 LD 2 LD 4 LD 4 LD
5 -5VE 5 -5VE SHIELD 3 -5VE 3 -5VE 3 -5VE 3 -5VE SHIELD 5 -5VE 5 -5VE
SHIELD SHIELD
SHIELD SHIELD
11 -5VE SHIELD SHIELD 11 -5VE 11 -5VE
11 -5VE 9 -5VE 9 -5VE 9 -5VE 9 -5VE
B RED DFS010 RED DFS010 B
SHIELD SHIELD
SHIELD SHIELD
SHIELD SHIELD
19 19 19 19
WHT AWG24(UL1007) AWG24(UL1007) WHT
20 20 20 20
C C
HEAD DRV3E BOARD2 X830-2 X830-4 HEAD DRV3E BOARD4
#H20P-SHF-AA(JST) #H20P-SHF-AA(JST)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS X842 X844 #BHF-001T-0.8SS X830-4
1 -5VE 1 -5VE #100094897V** #H16P-SHF-AA(JST) #H16P-SHF-AA(JST) #100094901V** 1 -5VE 1 -5VE
WHT AWG24(UL1007) X844 WHT
2 LD 2 LD #BHF-001T-0.8SS X842 #BHF-001T-0.8SS AWG24(UL1007) 2 LD 2 LD
SHIELD SHIELD
SHIELD SHIELD 5 -5VE 5 -5VE
5 -5VE 5 -5VE 3 -5VE 3 -5VE 3 -5VE 3 -5VE
SHIELD SHIELD
SHIELD SHIELD
D 10 LD 10 LD 8 LD 8 LD 8 LD 8 LD 10 LD 10 LD D
SHIELD 9 -5VE SHIELD 11 -5VE 11 -5VE
11 -5VE 11 -5VE 9 -5VE 9 -5VE 9 -5VE
SHIELD SHIELD
SHIELD SHIELD
SHIELD SHIELD
19 19 19 19
WHT AWG24(UL1007) AWG24(UL1007) WHT 20 20
20 20
E PLD 0
E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
PLD 31
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 15
( RH - HEAD DRV 1-4)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
100094909V00 (15/33) A3
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
HEAD CPU3E B OARD HEAD MB2E B OARD HEAD DRV3E BO ARD1

X819 #XC5A-3222 (OMRON) X819 #XC5B-3221 (OMRON) X832-1 #XC5B-3221 (OMRON) X832-1 #XC5A-3222 (OMRON)
A1 -15V B1 -15V A1 -15V B1 -15V A1 U4+24V B1 U4+24V A1 U4+24V B1 U4+24V
A A
A2 ±15VE(A.GND) B2 ±15VE(A.GND) A2 ±15VE(A.GND) B2 ±15VE(A.GND) A2 U4+24V B2 U4+24V A2 U4+24V B2 U4+24V
A3 +15V B3 +15V A3 +15V B3 +15V A3 +24VE B3 +24VE A3 +24VE B3 +24VE
A4 -5VE B4 -5V A4 -5VE B4 -5V A4 +24VE B4 +24VE A4 +24VE B4 +24VE
A5 IOPB B5 IOPB A5 IOPB B5 IOPB A5 -15V B5 -15V A5 -15V B5 -15V
A6 OCP B6 OCP A6 OCP B6 OCP A6 ±15VE(A.GND) B6 ±15VE(A.GND) A6 ±15VE(A.GND) B6 ±15VE(A.GND)
A7 FG B7 PLTC-B2 A7 FG B7 PLTC-B2 A7 +15V B7 +15V A7 +15V B7 +15V
A8 FG B8 PLTC-B1 A8 FG B8 PLTC-B1 A8 N.C. B8 N.C. A8 N.C. B8 N.C.
A9 FG B9 PLTC-A2 A9 FG B9 PLTC-A2 A9 N.C. B9 N.C. A9 N.C. B9 N.C.
A10 FG B10 PLTC-A1 A10 FG B10 PLTC-A1 A10 N.C. B10 N.C. A10 N.C. B10 N.C.
A11 FG B11 LDC-A A11 FG B11 LDC-A A11 N.C. B11 N.C. A11 N.C. B11 N.C.
B A12 FG B12 LDC-B A12 FG B12 LDC-B A12 OCP B12 OCP A12 OCP B12 OCP B
A13 FG B13 LDC-C A13 FG B13 LDC-C A13 IOPB B13 IOPB A13 IOPB B13 IOPB
A14 FG B14 LDC-D A14 FG B14 LDC-D A14 FG B14 PLTC-A1 A14 FG B14 PLTC-A1
A15 FG B15 PLT OUT1 A15 FG B15 PLT OUT1 A15 FG B15 LDC-A A15 FG B15 LDC-A
A16 FG B16 PLT OUT2 A16 FG B16 PLT OUT2 A16 FG B16 PLT OUT1 A16 FG B16 PLT OUT1
X820 #XC5A-6422 (OMRON) X820 #XC5B-6421 (OMRON) X833-1 #XC5B-6421 (OMRON) X833-1 #XC5A-6422 (OMRON)
A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT31(27) A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT31(27) A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT7(25) A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT7(25)
A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT30(20) A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT30(20) A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT6(18) A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT6(18)
A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT29(13) A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT29(13) A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT5(11) A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT5(11)
A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT28(6) A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT28(6) A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT4(4) A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT4(4)
A5 +24VE B5 /LDOUT27(5) A5 +24VE B5 /LDOUT27(5) A5 N.C. B5 /LDOUT3(3) A5 N.C. B5 /LDOUT3(3)
C A6 +24VE B6 /LDOUT26(12) A6 +24VE B6 /LDOUT26(12) A6 MPX SEL0 B6 /LDOUT2(10) A6 MPX SEL0 B6 /LDOUT2(10) C
A7 U4+24V B7 /LDOUT25(19) A7 U4+24V B7 /LDOUT25(19) A7 MPX SEL1 B7 /LDOUT1(17) A7 MPX SEL1 B7 /LDOUT1(17)
A8 U4+24V B8 /LDOUT24(26) A8 U4+24V B8 /LDOUT24(26) A8 MPX SEL2 B8 /LDOUT0(24) A8 MPX SEL2 B8 /LDOUT0(24)
A9 N.C. B9 /LDOUT23(29) A9 N.C. B9 /LDOUT23(29) A9 /DAC CLR B9 N.C. A9 /DAC CLR B9 N.C.
A10 OFF-5V B10 /LDOUT22(22) A10 OFF-5V B10 /LDOUT22(22) A10 SDIN0 B10 N.C. A10 SDIN0 B10 N.C.
A11 /CV_SW B11 /LDOUT21(15) A11 /CV_SW B11 /LDOUT21(15) A11 CLKIN B11 N.C. A11 CLKIN B11 N.C.
A12 /OFF+24V B12 /LDOUT20(0) A12 /OFF+24V B12 /LDOUT20(0) A12 /FSIN B12 N.C. A12 /FSIN B12 N.C.
A13 /OFF-15V B13 /LDOUT19(7) A13 /OFF-15V B13 /LDOUT19(7) A13 /LDAC B13 N.C. A13 /LDAC B13 N.C.
A14 /OFF+15V B14 /LDOUT18(14) A14 /OFF+15V B14 /LDOUT18(14) A14 /TEMP ALM B14 N.C. A14 /TEMP ALM B14 N.C.
A15 /OFF+5V1 B15 /LDOUT17(21) A15 /OFF+5V1 B15 /LDOUT17(21) A15 OCP-A B15 N.C. A15 OCP-A B15 N.C.
A16 /OFF+5V2 B16 /LDOUT16(28) A16 /OFF+5V2 B16 /LDOUT16(28) A16 N.C. B16 N.C. A16 N.C. B16 N.C.
A17 MPX SEL0 B17 /LDOUT15(31) A17 MPX SEL0 B17 /LDOUT15(31) A17 N.C. B17 N.C. A17 N.C. B17 N.C.
D D
A20 /DAC CLR B20 /LDOUT12(16) A20 /DAC CLR B20 /LDOUT12(16) A20 N.C. B20 N.C. A20 N.C. B20 N.C.
A21 SDIN3 B21 /LDOUT11(23) A21 SDIN3 B21 /LDOUT11(23) A21 N.C. B21 N.C. A21 N.C. B21 N.C.
A22 SDIN2 B22 /LDOUT10(30) A22 SDIN2 B22 /LDOUT10(30) A22 N.C. B22 N.C. A22 N.C. B22 N.C.
A23 SDIN1 B23 /LDOUT9(1) A23 SDIN1 B23 /LDOUT9(1) A23 -5VE B23 -5VE A23 -5VE B23 -5VE
A24 SDIN0 B24 /LDOUT8(8) A24 SDIN0 B24 /LDOUT8(8) A24 -5VE B24 -5VE A24 -5VE B24 -5VE
A25 CLKIN B25 /LDOUT7(25) A25 CLKIN B25 /LDOUT7(25) A25 -5VE B25 -5VE A25 -5VE B25 -5VE
A26 /FSIN B26 /LDOUT6(18) A26 /FSIN B26 /LDOUT6(18) A26 -5VE B26 -5VE A26 -5VE B26 -5VE
A27 /LDAC B27 /LDOUT5(11) A27 /LDAC B27 /LDOUT5(11) A27 -5VE B27 -5VE A27 -5VE B27 -5VE
A28 /TEMP ALM B28 /LDOUT4(4) A28 /TEMP ALM B28 /LDOUT4(4) A28 -5V B28 -5V A28 -5V B28 -5V
A29 OCP-D B29 /LDOUT3(3) A29 OCP-D B29 /LDOUT3(3) A29 -5V B29 -5V A29 -5V B29 -5V
A30 OCP-C B30 /LDOUT2(10) A30 OCP-C B30 /LDOUT2(10) A30 -5V B30 -5V A30 -5V B30 -5V
E A31 OCP-B B31 /LDOUT1(17) A31 OCP-B B31 /LDOUT1(17) A31 -5V B31 -5V A31 -5V B31 -5V E
A32 OCP-A B32 /LDOUT0(24) A32 OCP-A B32 /LDOUT0(24) A32 -5V B32 -5V A32 -5V B32 -5V
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 16
( HEAD - HEAD MB - HEAD DRV 1)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
100094909V00 (16/33) A3
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
HEAD DRV3E BO ARD2 HEAD MB2E B OARD HEAD DRV3E BO ARD3

X832-2 #XC5A-3222 (OMRON) X832-2 #XC5B-3221 (OMRON) X832-3 #XC5B-3221 (OMRON) X832-3 #XC5A-3222 (OMRON)
A1 U4+24V B1 U4+24V A1 U4+24V B1 U4+24V A1 U4+24V B1 U4+24V A1 U4+24V B1 U4+24V
A A
A2 U4+24V B2 U4+24V A2 U4+24V B2 U4+24V A2 U4+24V B2 U4+24V A2 U4+24V B2 U4+24V
A3 +24VE B3 +24VE A3 +24VE B3 +24VE A3 +24VE B3 +24VE A3 +24VE B3 +24VE
A4 +24VE B4 +24VE A4 +24VE B4 +24VE A4 +24VE B4 +24VE A4 +24VE B4 +24VE
A5 -15V B5 -15V A5 -15V B5 -15V A5 -15V B5 -15V A5 -15V B5 -15V
A6 ±15VE(A.GND) B6 ±15VE(A.GND) A6 ±15VE(A.GND) B6 ±15VE(A.GND) A6 ±15VE(A.GND) B6 ±15VE(A.GND) A6 ±15VE(A.GND) B6 ±15VE(A.GND)
A7 +15V B7 +15V A7 +15V B7 +15V A7 +15V B7 +15V A7 +15V B7 +15V
A8 N.C. B8 N.C. A8 N.C. B8 N.C. A8 N.C. B8 N.C. A8 N.C. B8 N.C.
B A12 OCP B12 OCP A12 OCP B12 OCP A12 OCP B12 OCP A12 OCP B12 OCP B
A13 IOPB B13 IOPB A13 IOPB B13 IOPB A13 IOPB B13 IOPB A13 IOPB B13 IOPB
A14 FG B14 PLTC-A2 A14 FG B14 PLTC-A2 A14 FG B14 PLTC-B1 A14 FG B14 PLTC-B1
A15 FG B15 LDC-B A15 FG B15 LDC-B A15 FG B15 LDC-C A15 FG B15 LDC-C
A16 FG B16 PLT OUT1 A16 FG B16 PLT OUT1 A16 FG B16 PLT OUT2 A16 FG B16 PLT OUT2
X833-2 #XC5A-6422 (OMRON) X833-2 #XC5B-6421 (OMRON) X833-3 #XC5B-6421 (OMRON) X833-3 #XC5A-6422 (OMRON)
A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT15 (31) A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT15 (31) A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT23 (29) A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT23 (29)
A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT1 4(2) A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT1 4(2) A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT22 (22) A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT22 (22)
A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT1 3(9) A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT1 3(9) A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT21 (15) A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT21 (15)
A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT12 (16) A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT12 (16) A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT2 0(0) A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT2 0(0)
A5 N.C. B5 /LDOUT11 (23) A5 N.C. B5 /LDOUT11 (23) A5 N.C. B5 /LDOUT1 9(7) A5 N.C. B5 /LDOUT1 9(7)
C A6 MPX SEL0 B6 /LDOUT10 (30) A6 MPX SEL0 B6 /LDOUT10 (30) A6 MPX SEL0 B6 /LDOUT18 (14) A6 MPX SEL0 B6 /LDOUT18 (14) C
A7 MPX SEL1 B7 /LDOUT 9(1) A7 MPX SEL1 B7 /LDOUT 9(1) A7 MPX SEL1 B7 /LDOUT17 (21) A7 MPX SEL1 B7 /LDOUT17 (21)
A8 MPX SEL2 B8 /LDOUT 8(8) A8 MPX SEL2 B8 /LDOUT 8(8) A8 MPX SEL2 B8 /LDOUT16 (28) A8 MPX SEL2 B8 /LDOUT16 (28)
A9 /DAC CLR B9 N.C. A9 /DAC CLR B9 N.C. A9 /DAC CLR B9 N.C. A9 /DAC CLR B9 N.C.
A10 SDIN1 B10 N.C. A10 SDIN1 B10 N.C. A10 SDIN2 B10 N.C. A10 SDIN2 B10 N.C.
A11 CLKIN B11 N.C. A11 CLKIN B11 N.C. A11 CLKIN B11 N.C. A11 CLKIN B11 N.C.
A12 /FSIN B12 N.C. A12 /FSIN B12 N.C. A12 /FSIN B12 N.C. A12 /FSIN B12 N.C.
A13 /LDAC B13 N.C. A13 /LDAC B13 N.C. A13 /LDAC B13 N.C. A13 /LDAC B13 N.C.
A14 /TEMP ALM B14 N.C. A14 /TEMP ALM B14 N.C. A14 /TEMP ALM B14 N.C. A14 /TEMP ALM B14 N.C.
A15 OCP-B B15 N.C. A15 OCP-B B15 N.C. A15 OCP-C B15 N.C. A15 OCP-C B15 N.C.
D D
A23 -5VE B23 -5VE A23 -5VE B23 -5VE A23 -5VE B23 -5VE A23 -5VE B23 -5VE
E A31 -5V B31 -5V A31 -5V B31 -5V A31 -5V B31 -5V A31 -5V B31 -5V E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 17
( HEAD MB - HEAD DRV 2,3)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
100094909V00 (17/33) A3
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
HEAD MB2E B OARD HEAD DRV3E BO ARD4

X832-4 #XC5B-3221 (OMRON) X832-4 #XC5A-3222 (OMRON)
A1 U4+24V B1 U4+24V A1 U4+24V B1 U4+24V
A A
A2 U4+24V B2 U4+24V A2 U4+24V B2 U4+24V
A3 +24VE B3 +24VE A3 +24VE B3 +24VE
A4 +24VE B4 +24VE A4 +24VE B4 +24VE
A5 -15V B5 -15V A5 -15V B5 -15V
A6 ±15VE(A.GND) B6 ±15VE(A.GND) A6 ±15VE(A.GND) B6 ±15VE(A.GND)
A7 +15V B7 +15V A7 +15V B7 +15V
A8 N.C. B8 N.C. A8 N.C. B8 N.C.
A9 N.C. B9 N.C. A9 N.C. B9 N.C.
A10 N.C. B10 N.C. A10 N.C. B10 N.C.
A11 N.C. B11 N.C. A11 N.C. B11 N.C.
B A12 OCP B12 OCP A12 OCP B12 OCP B
A13 IOPB B13 IOPB A13 IOPB B13 IOPB
A14 FG B14 PLTC-B2 A14 FG B14 PLTC-B2
A15 FG B15 LDC-D A15 FG B15 LDC-D
A16 FG B16 PLT OUT2 A16 FG B16 PLT OUT2
X833-4 #XC5B-6421 (OMRON) X833-4 #XC5A-6422 (OMRON)

A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT31 (27) A1 +5VE(D.GND) B1 /LDOUT31 (27)
A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT30 (20) A2 +5VE(D.GND) B2 /LDOUT30 (20)
A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT29 (13) A3 +5V B3 /LDOUT29 (13)
A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT2 8(6) A4 +5V B4 /LDOUT2 8(6)
A5 N.C. B5 /LDOUT2 7(5) A5 N.C. B5 /LDOUT2 7(5)
C A6 MPX SEL0 B6 /LDOUT26 (12) A6 MPX SEL0 B6 /LDOUT26 (12) C
A7 MPX SEL1 B7 /LDOUT25 (19) A7 MPX SEL1 B7 /LDOUT25 (19)
A8 MPX SEL2 B8 /LDOUT24 (26) A8 MPX SEL2 B8 /LDOUT24 (26)
A9 /DAC CLR B9 N.C. A9 /DAC CLR B9 N.C.
A10 SDIN3 B10 N.C. A10 SDIN3 B10 N.C.
A11 CLKIN B11 N.C. A11 CLKIN B11 N.C.
A12 /FSIN B12 N.C. A12 /FSIN B12 N.C.
A13 /LDAC B13 N.C. A13 /LDAC B13 N.C.
A14 /TEMP ALM B14 N.C. A14 /TEMP ALM B14 N.C.
A15 OCP-D B15 N.C. A15 OCP-D B15 N.C.
A16 N.C. B16 N.C. A16 N.C. B16 N.C.
A17 N.C. B17 N.C. A17 N.C. B17 N.C.
A18 N.C. B18 N.C. A18 N.C. B18 N.C.
D D
A19 N.C. B19 N.C. A19 N.C. B19 N.C.
A20 N.C. B20 N.C. A20 N.C. B20 N.C.
A21 N.C. B21 N.C. A21 N.C. B21 N.C.
A22 N.C. B22 N.C. A22 N.C. B22 N.C.
A23 -5VE B23 -5VE A23 -5VE B23 -5VE
A24 -5VE B24 -5VE A24 -5VE B24 -5VE
A25 -5VE B25 -5VE A25 -5VE B25 -5VE
A26 -5VE B26 -5VE A26 -5VE B26 -5VE
A27 -5VE B27 -5VE A27 -5VE B27 -5VE
A28 -5V B28 -5V A28 -5V B28 -5V
A29 -5V B29 -5V A29 -5V B29 -5V
A30 -5V B30 -5V A30 -5V B30 -5V
E A31 -5V B31 -5V A31 -5V B31 -5V E
A32 -5V B32 -5V A32 -5V B32 -5V
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 18
( HEAD MB - HEAD DRV 4 )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
100094909V00 (18/33) A3
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
PELTIER UNIT 80 ( PU80)
HEAD DRV3E BO ARD1 #OCE-100PX2 (OHM) or #OCE-100PXR (OHM)
X831-1
#5557-02R (MOLEX) #100094758V**
A X831-1 #5556L AWG20(UL1007) XT80 ACCESSORY WIRE A
1 S12V 1 S12V ORG S12V
2 M12 2 M12 BLK M12
PELTIER 80
S12V
M12
ACCESSORY WIRE
S12V
M12 PELTIER 81
HEAD DRV3E BO ARD2 S12V
X831-2 M12
#5557-02R (MOLEX) RED ACCESSORY WIRE
#100094759V** U4+24V(+24V)
X831-2 #5556L AWG20(UL1007) +24VE(M24)
BLK
B ORG PELTIER 82 B
1 S12V 1 S12V
BLK #UF1003-20A-10P-CT
2 M12 2 M12
(FUJICON)
ACCESSORY WIRE
PELTIER 83
HEAD DRV3E BO ARD3
X831-3
#5557-02R (MOLEX) #100094760V**
X831-3 #5556L AWG20(UL1007)
1 S12V 1 S12V ORG
2 M12 2 M12 BLK
ACCESSORY WIRE
C C
M
M80
#109R1224H102(SANYO)
HEAD DRV3E BO ARD4
X831-4
#5557-02R (MOLEX) #100094761V**
X831-4 #5556L AWG20(UL1007)
1 S12V 1 S12V ORG
2 M12 2 M12 BLK
D #100094757V** D
AWG22(UL1007)
ORG
From HEAD MB BOARD(X802) BLK
Pg(6/33)
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 19
( PELTIER UNIT 80)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
A CON-PTR4XE A
CA1 X111A
#HIF3BA-34D-2.54C (HOROSE)
#100094815V** #171822-3 (TYCO)PH11-1A
CA1 #HIF3-2226SC AWG26(UL1007) #170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1 +5V1
2 IN1A 2 IN1A WHT 2 +5VE
3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3 IN1A
4 +5V1 4 +5V1 RED
5 IN2A 5 IN2A WHT X112A
6 +5VE 6 +5VE BLK #171822-3 (TYCO)PH11-2A
RED #170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
7 +5V1 7 +5V1
B WHT 1 +5V1 B
8 IN7A 8 IN7A
BLK 2 +5VE
9 +5VE 9 +5VE
RED 3 IN2A
10 +5V1 10 +5V1
11 IN13A 11 IN13A WHT
BLK
12 +5VE 12 +5VE
RED
X10A PH10A
13 +5V1 13 +5V1 #EE-1001 (OMRON) #EE-SY671 (OMRON)
14 IN14A 14 IN14A WHT
1 +5V1
15 +5VE 15 +5VE BLK
2 L
+5V1 16 +5V1 RED 3 IN7A
16
17 IN4A 17 IN4A WHT
4 +5VE
18 +5VE 18 +5VE BLK
19 +5V1 19 +5V1 RED
C 20 IN5A 20 IN5A WHT C
21 +5VE 21 +5VE BLK
22 +5V1 22 +5V1 RED
WHT X30A
23 IN6A 23 IN6A #171822-3 (TYCO) PH30A
24 +5VE 24 +5VE BLK #170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
25 +5V1 25 +5V1 RED 1 +5V1
27 +5VE 27 +5VE BLK 3 IN13A
RED
28 +5V1 28 +5V1 To X1001 Pg(21/33)
29 IN10A 29 IN10A WHT X31A
30 +5VE 30 +5VE BLK #171822-3 (TYCO) PH31A
RED #170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
31 +5V1 31 +5V1
WHT 1 +5V1
32 IN11A 32 IN11A
D BLK 2 +5VE D
33 +5VE 33 +5VE
3 IN14A
34 34
X21
#171822-3 (TYCO) PH21
#170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
1 +5V1
2 +5VE
3 IN4A
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 20
( SENSOR 1 )
SOLDER CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
A A
X1001 X1001
#SMP-18V-BC(JST) #SMR-18V-B(JST) X241
#1678
#100094738V** #171822-3 (TYCO) PH24-1
AWG26(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
AWG26(UL1007)
RED 1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1 +5V1
B WHT WHT B
2 IN5A 2 IN5A 2 +5VE
BLK 3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3 IN5A
RED 4 +5V1 4 +5V1 RED
WHT 5 IN6A 5 IN6A WHT X242
BLK 6 +5VE 6 +5VE BLK #171822-3 (TYCO) PH24-2
#170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
From CA1 7 7
1 +5V1
Pg(19/32) 8 8
2 +5VE
9 9
RED RED 3 IN6A
10 +5V1 10 +5V1
WHT 11 IN9A 11 IN9A WHT
BLK 12 +5VE 12 +5VE BLK
RED 13 +5V1 13 +5V1 RED
C WHT 14 IN10A 14 IN10A WHT C
RED 16 +5V1 16 +5V1 RED
WHT 17 IN11A 17 IN11A WHT
BLK 18 +5VE 18 +5VE BLK X271
#179228-3(TYCO) PH27-1
AWG26(UL1007) #179518-1 #OH-218-A5(ALEPH)
1 +5V1
2 IN9A
3 +5VE
X272
#179228-3(TYCO) PH27-2
D #179518-1 #OH-218-A5(ALEPH) D
AWG26(UL1007)
1 +5V1
2 IN10A
3 +5VE
X273
#179228-3(TYCO) PH27-3
AWG26(UL1007) #179518-1 #OH-218-A5(ALEPH)
1 +5V1
2 IN11A
3 +5VE
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 21
( SENSOR 2 )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
A CON-PTR4XE A
CA2 X56
#HIF3BA-26D-2.54C (HOROSE) #171822-3 (TYCO) PH56
CA2 #HIF3-2226SC #100094793V** #170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
RED AWG26(UL1007)
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 1 +5V1
3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3 IN22A
4 +5V1 4 +5V1 RED
5 IN42A 5 IN42A WHT X57
6 +5VE 6 +5VE BLK #171822-3 (TYCO) PH57
RED #170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
7 +5V1 7 +5V1
B WHT 1 +5V1 B
8 IN29A 8 IN29A
BLK 2 +5VE
9 +5VE 9 +5VE
RED 3 IN42A
10 +5V1 10 +5V1
11 IN29H 11 IN29H WHT X1002 X1002
12 +5VE 12 +5VE BLK
13 +5V1 13 +5V1 RED
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094755V** X61A PH61A
WHT AWG26(UL1007) #EE-1001 (OMRON) #EE-SX670 (OMRON)
14 IN30A 14 IN30A RED
BLK 1 +5V1 1 +5V1 1 +5V1
15 +5VE 15 +5VE WHT RED
RED 2 IN29A 2 IN29A 2 L
16 +5V1 16 +5V1 BLK
WHT 3 +5VE 3 +5VE 3 IN29A
17 IN30H 17 IN30H RED
BLK 4 +5V1 4 +5V1 4 +5VE
18 +5VE 18 +5VE WHT
RED 5 IN29H 5 IN29H
19 +5V1 19 +5V1
WHT 6 +5VE 6 +5VE BLK X61H PH61H
C 20 IN31A 20 IN31A RED #EE-1001 (OMRON) #EE-SX670 (OMRON) C
BLK 7 +5V1 7 +5V1
21 +5VE 21 +5VE WHT 1 +5V1
8 IN30A 8 IN30A RED
22 22 BLK 2 L
9 +5VE 9 +5VE
23 23 RED 3 IN29H
10 +5V1 10 +5V1
24 24 WHT 4 +5VE
25 25 11 IN30H 11 IN30H
+5VE BLK
26 26
12 +5VE 12 X63
#171822-3 (TYCO) PH63
#170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
1 +5V1
2 +5VE
3 IN30A
D X62 PH62 D
#EE-1001 (OMRON) #EE-SY671 (OMRON)
1 +5V1
2 L
3 IN30H
4 +5VE
X1003 X1003 X70

#SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST) #179228-3(TYCO) PH70
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094766V**
AWG26(UL1007) #179518-1 #OH-118-A5(ALEPH)
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1 +5V1
2 IN31A 2 IN31A WHT 2 IN31A
3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3 +5VE
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 22
( SENSOR 3 )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
SOLDER
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON-PTR4XE X1004 X1004

CA3 X50
#HIF3BA-16D-2.54C (HOROSE) #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST) #179228-3(TYCO) PH50
#100094753V** #100094746V**
A CA3 #HIF3-2226SC #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 AWG26(UL1007) #179518-1 #OH-118-A5(ALEPH) A
AWG26(UL1007)
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1 +5V1
2 IN15A 2 IN15A WHT 2 IN15A 2 IN15A WHT 2 IN15A
3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3 +5VE
4 +5V1 4 +5V1 RED
5 IN16A 5 IN16A WHT
BLK X52
6 +5VE 6 +5VE #171822-3 (TYCO) PH52
7 +5V1 7 +5V1 RED #170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
8 IN19A 8 IN19A WHT
1 +5V1
9 +5VE 9 +5VE BLK
2 +5VE
10 +5V1 10 +5V1 RED 3 IN16A
B WHT B
11 IN20A 11 IN20A
12 +5VE 12 +5VE BLK X1054 X1054 X54
13 +5V1 13 +5V1 RED #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST) #179228-3(TYCO) PH54
#100094747V**
14 IN211A 14 IN21A WHT #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 AWG26(UL1007) #179518-1 #OH-118-A5(ALEPH)
15 +5VE 15 +5VE BLK 1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1 +5V1
16 2 IN15A 2 IN15A WHT 2 IN19A
16
3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3 +5VE
X53
#171822-3 (TYCO) PH53
#170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
1 +5V1
C 2 +5VE C
CA4 3 IN20A
#HIF3BA-20D-2.54C (HOROSE)
CA4 #HIF3-2226SC #100094816V** X55
1 +24V1 1 +24V1 ORG AWG26(UL1007) #171822-3 (TYCO) PH55
WHT #170204-1 #GP1A05 (SHARP)
2 IN43A 2 IN43A
BLK 1 +5V1
3 +24VE 3 +24VE
ORG 2 +5VE
4 +24V1 4 +24V1
WHT 3 IN21A
5 IN44H 5 IN44H
6 +24VE 6 +24VE BLK
7 IN3A 7 IN3A ORG X1005 X1005
8 +24VE 8 +24VE WHT XAT #SMP-06V-BC(JST) #SMR-06V-B(JST)
PH29H
#BGS-S08N (OPTEX)
D 9 IN4H 9 IN4H ORG #17JE-13250-02(D3A) (DDK) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 BRN D
10 +24VE 10 +24VE WHT 1 WHT
・
1 +24V1 1 +24V1
11 +24V1 11 ・
・
・ 2 IN43A 2 IN43A BLK
WHT WHT
12 IN8A 12 IN8A X281 X281 11 TXD From 3 +24VE 3 +24VE BLU
13 +24VE 13 +24VE BLK 12 RXD RED X162 #100094729V**
#SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST) ACCESSORY WIRE
ORG YEL (RCP2)
14 +24V1 14 +24V1 #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 13 X1006 X1006 PH29A
15 IN21H 15 IN21H WHT 14 +24VE
1 IN8A 1 +24VE BLK Pg(11/32) #SMP-06V-BC(JST) #SMR-06V-B(JST) #BGS-S08N (OPTEX)
16 +24VE BLK BRN
16 +24VE 15 +24VE #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
2 +24VE 2 +24VE
17 +24V1 17 +24V1 16 IN3A 1 +24V1 1 +24V1 WHT
18 IN22H 18 IN22H 17 IN4H 2 IN44H 2 IN44H BLK
19 +24VE 19 +24VE 18 3 +24VE 3 +24VE BLU
20 20 OUT59 WHT 19 #100094730V**
OUT59
20 ACCESSORY WIRE
E E
21
22
23 OUT59
24
25 +5VE
X51 X51 DESIGNED I.AOKI
#SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST) #100094742V** PH51 WIRING DIAGRAM 23
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY WIRE #FS-T1(KEYENCE) DRAWN I.AOKI
ORG 1 +24V1 1 +24V1 BRN #FU-67(KEYENCE) ( SENSOR 4 )
WHT BLK Amp.
CHECKED E.TAMBA
SOLDER 2 IN21H 2 IN21H
BLK BLU Fiber
3 +24VE 3 +24VE APPROVED E.Tamba FILE
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
A CON-PTR4XE A
CH1
X111H
#HIF3BA-34D-2.54C (HOROSE) #171822-3(TYCO) PH11-1H
CH1 #HIF3-2226SC #100094819V** #170204-1 #GP1A05(SHARP)
RED AWG26(UL1007)
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 1 +5V1
2 IN1H 2 IN1H WHT 2 +5VE
3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3 IN1H
4 +5V1 4 +5V1 RED
5 IN2H 5 IN2H WHT X112H
6 +5VE 6 +5VE BLK #171822-3(TYCO) PH11-2H
RED #170204-1 #GP1A05(SHARP)
7 +5V1 7 +5V1
B WHT 1 +5V1 B
8 IN7H 8 IN7H
BLK 2 +5VE
9 +5VE 9 +5VE
RED 3 IN2H
10 +5V1 10 +5V1
11 IN3H 11 IN3H WHT
BLK
12 +5VE 12 +5VE
RED
X10H PH10H
13 +5V1 13 +5V1 #EE-1001(OMRON) #EE-SY671(OMRON)
14 IN13H 14 IN13H WHT
1 +5V1
15 +5VE 15 +5VE BLK RED
2 L
+5V1 16 +5V1 RED
16 3 IN7H
17 IN14H 17 IN14H WHT
4 +5VE
18 +5VE 18 +5VE BLK
19 +5V1 19
C 20 IN15H 20 IN15H WHT C
21 +5VE 21 +5VE BLK
22 +5V1 22 X200
WHT
23 IN16H 23 IN16H #171822-3(TYCO) PH20
24 +5VE 24 +5VE BLK #170204-1 #GP1A05(SHARP)
25 +5V1 25 +5V1 RED X40H 1 +5V1
26 IN17H 26 IN17H WHT #1-172075-1(TYCO) LS4H 2 +5VE
BLK #170330-1 #V-5214D(YAMATAKE)
27 +5VE 27 +5VE 3 IN3H
NC IN15H
28 28
NO
29 29
C +5VE X30H
30 30
31 31 X40A #171822-3(TYCO) PH30H
32 32 #1-172075-1(TYCO) LS4A #170204-1 #GP1A05(SHARP)
D #170330-1 #V-5214D(YAMATAKE) 1 +5V1 D
33 33
NC IN16H 2 +5VE
34 34
NO 3 IN13H
C +5VE
X31H
X20 #171822-3(TYCO) PH31H
#171822-3(TYCO) PH2 #170204-1 #GP1A05(SHARP)
#170204-1 #GP1A05(SHARP) 1 +5V1
1 +5V1 2 +5VE
2 +5VE 3 IN14H
3 IN17H
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 24
( SENSOR 5 )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
SOLDER
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON-PTR4XE
CP2 X601 X601
A #HIF3BA-26D-2.54C (HOROSE) #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST)
A
CP2 #HIF3-2226SC
#100094797V**
AWG26(UL1007 #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE SB60-1(OPTION)
RED AWG26(UL1007) RED 1
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 1 +5V1 1 +5V1
2 IN23H 2 IN23H WHT 2 IN23H 2 IN23H WHT 2
3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3
4 +5V1 4 +5V1 RED

5 IN24H 5 IN24H WHT #DN6848 (PANASONIC)
BLK X602 X602
6 +5VE 6 +5VE
RED #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST)
7 +5V1 7 +5V1 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE SB60-2(OPTION)
WHT #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
8 IN25H 8 IN25H AWG26(UL1007) RED 1
BLK 1 +5V1 1 +5V1
B 9 +5VE 9 +5VE WHT 2 B
RED 2 IN24H 2 IN24H
10 +5V1 10 +5V1 BLK 3
WHT 3 +5VE 3 +5VE
11 IN26H 11 IN26H
12 +5VE 12 +5VE BLK
#DN6848 (PANASONIC)
13 +5V1 13 +5V1 RED X603 X603
14 IN23A 14 IN23A WHT #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST)
15 +5VE 15 +5VE BLK #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE SB60-3-1
RED AWG26(UL1007) RED
16 +5V1 16 +5V1 1 +5V1 1 +5V1 1 +5V1
17 IN24A 17 IN24A WHT 2 IN25H 2 IN25H WHT
2 IN25H
18 +5VE 18 +5VE BLK 3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLU
3 +5VE
19 +5V1 19 +5V1 RED
20 IN72 20 IN72 WHT
BLK X604 X604
21 +5VE 21 +5VE
C RED #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST) C
22 +5V1 22 +5V1
WHT #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE SB60-4-1
23 IN73 23 IN73 AWG26(UL1007) RED
BLK 1 +5V1 1 +5V1 1 +5V1
24 +5VE 24 +5VE WHT
25 2 IN26H 2 IN26H 2 IN26H
25 BLU
3 +5VE 3 +5VE 3 +5VE
26 26
X605 X605
AWG26(UL1007)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE SB60-5(OPTION)
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1
2 IN23A 2 IN23A WHT 2
3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3
D D
#DN6848 (PANASONIC)
X606 X606
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE SB60-6(OPTION)
CP2-1 AWG26(UL1007)
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1
#H3P-SHF-AA (JST) 2 IN24A 2 IN24A WHT 2
CP2-1 #BHF-001T-0.8SS
AWG26(UL1007) 3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLK 3
1 +5V1 1 +5V1
2 IN74 2 IN74 X6032 X6032 #DN6848 (PANASONIC)
3 +5VE 3 +5VE #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 SB60-3-2(OPTION)
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1 +5V1
E 2 IN72 2 IN72 WHT 2 IN25H E
3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLU 3 +5VE
SOLDER AWG26(UL1007) ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE
X6042 X6042
AWG26(UL1007) #SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS SB60-4-2(OPTION) DESIGNED I.AOKI
#BYM-001T-0.6
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 RED 1 +5V1 DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 25
2 IN73 2 IN73 WHT 2 IN25H ( PUNCH SENSOR )
X607 X607 3 +5VE 3 +5VE BLU 3 +5VE CHECKED E.TAMBA
#SMP-03V-BC(JST) #SMR-03V-B(JST) ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE APPROVED E.Tamba FILE
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
SB60-7(OPTION)
RED
F 1 +5V1 1 +5V1
WHT
1 +5V1 DATE 2005.12.9 MODEL PT-R4300S/E REV
2 IN73 2 IN73 2 IN25H
BLU CODE DRAW
3 +5VE 3 +5VE 3 +5VE
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON-PTR4XE CP1 X601M X601M

A #H14P-SHF-AA(JST) #100094796V** #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST) A
CP1 #BHF-001T-0.8SS AWG22(UL1007) AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE
1 OUT25H 1 OUT25H RED 1 M601 1 M601 RED
2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK 2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK M M60-1
3 OUT26H 3 OUT26H RED (OPTION)
4 +24VE 4 +24VE BLK
RED X602M X602M
5 OUT56H 5 OUT56H
BLK #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
6 OUT57H 6 OUT57H ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE
RED AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
7 OUT70H 7 OUT70H RED
BLK 1 M602 1 M602
8 OUT71H 8 OUT71H
RED 2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK M M60-2
9 OUT25A 9 OUT25A
B
10 +24VE 10 +24VE BLK (OPTION) B
11 OUT26A 11 OUT26A RED X603M X603M
12 +24VE 12 +24VE BLK #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
13 OUT27H 13 OUT27H RED #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE
BLK AWG22(UL1007) RED
14 +24VE 14 +24VE 1 M603 1 M603
2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK M
M60-3
X604M X604M
AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR & WIRE
1 M604 1 M604 RED
2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK M
C M60-4 C
X606M X605M
1 M605 1 M605 RED
2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK M M60-5
(OPTION)
X606M X606M
1 M606 1 M606 RED
D 2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK M M60-6 D
(OPTION)
X607M X607M
1 M606 1 M606 RED
2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK M M60-7
(OPTION)
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 26
( PUNCH MOTOR )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON-PTR4XE XLS56S XLS56S

CS1 XLS56 XLS56 #SMP-03V-BC(JST)#SMR-03V-B(JST) XLS56P XLS56P
ACCESSORY WIRE #100092789V**
#171822-6(TYCO) #100094798V** #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST) #100092784V** #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST)
CS1 #170204-1 AWG26(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 AWG26(UL1007) 1 1
LS56 #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS
A WHT WHT ORG/WHT 32 12 BLU/WHT ORG A
1 IN32A 1 IN32A 1 IN32A 1 IN32A 2 IN32A 2 IN32A 1 U9+24V1 1 U9+24V1
BLK BLK ORG BLU 2 6 2 6 WHT
2 +5VE 2 +5VE 2 +5VE 2 +5VE 3 +5VE 3 +5VE 31 11
3 IN33A 3 IN33A WHT
4 +5VE 4 +5VE BLK XLS57-1S XLS57-1S #D4GS-N2T(OMRON)
5 IN34A 5 IN34A WHT XLS571 XLS571 XLS571A XLS571A #SMP-03V-BC(JST)#SMR-03V-B(JST) XLS57-1P XLS57-1P
BLK #SMP-06V-BC(JST) #SMR-06V-B(JST) #SMP-06V-BC(JST) #SMR-06V-B(JST) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST)
6 +5VE 6 +5VE LS57-1
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 1 1 #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS
WHT WHT ORG/WHT 32 12 BLU/WHT ORG
1 IN33A 1 IN33A 1 IN33A 1 IN33A 2 IN33A 2 IN33A 1 U9+24V1 1 U9+24V1
WHT 2 IN33A1 BLK BLK ORG BLU 2 1 2 1 WHT
2 IN33A1 2 IN33A1 2 IN33A1 3 IN33A1 3 IN33A1 31 11
3 IN33A1 3 IN33A1 WHT 3 IN33A1 3 IN33A1
WHT
WHT
4 IN33A2 4 IN33A2
BLK
4 IN33A2 4 IN33A2
BLK XLS57-2S XLS57-2S #D4GS-N2R(OMRON)
B WHT WHT #SMP-03V-BC(JST)#SMR-03V-B(JST) XLS57-2P XLS57-2P B
5 IN33A2 5 IN33A2 5 IN33A2 5 IN33A2 ACCESSORY WIRE #100092808V**
BLK WHT 6 IN33A3 BLK #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST)
6 +5VE 6 +5VE 6 IN33A3 LS57-2
1 1 #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS
#100092790V** #100092795V** ORG/WHT 32 12 BLU/WHT ORG
AWG26(UL1007) AWG26(UL1007) 2 IN33A1 2 IN33A1 1 1 1 1
ORG BLU 2 2 2 2 WHT
3 IN33A2 3 IN33A2 31 11
XLS57-3S XLS57-3S #D4GS-N2R(OMRON)

#SMP-03V-BC(JST)#SMR-03V-B(JST) XLS57-3P XLS57-3P
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST)
1 1
LS57-3 #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS
ORG/WHT 32 12 BLU/WHT ORG
2 IN33A2 2 IN33A2 1 2 1 2
ORG BLU 2 3 2 3 WHT
3 IN33A3 3 IN33A3 31 11
C XLS571B XLS571B XLS57-4S XLS57-4S #D4GS-N2R(OMRON) C

#SMP-03V-BC(JST)#SMR-03V-B(JST) #SMP-03V-BC(JST)#SMR-03V-B(JST) XLS57-4P XLS57-4P
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST)
1 1 1 1
LS57-4 #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS
WHT 2 IN33A3 WHT ORG/WHT 32 12 BLU/WHT ORG
2 IN33A3 2 IN33A3 2 IN33A3 1 3 1 3
BLK 3 +5VE BLK ORG BLU 2 3A 2 3A WHT
3 +5VE 3 +5VE 3 +5VE 31 11
#100092798V**
AWG26(UL1007) #D4GS-N2R(OMRON)
XLS572 XLS572 XLS572A XLS572A

X581 LS58-1 #100092832V** #SMP-06V-BC(JST) #SMR-06V-B(JST) #100092803V** #SMP-06V-BC(JST) #SMR-06V-B(JST) #100092805V**
X580 X580 #1-172075-1(TYCO) #D2MV-01L13-1C3 AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 AWG22(UL1007)
D #SMP-06V-BC(JST) #SMR-06V-B(JST) #170330-1 (OMRON) ORG 1 U9+24V1 1 U9+24V1 ORG 1 U9+24V1 1 U9+24V1 ORG D
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 NC From XT3 WHT WHT 2 1 2 1 WHT 2 1 2 1 WHT
1 IN34A581 1 IN34A581 WHT WHT NO IN34A581 Pg(5/33)
3 1 3 1 ORG 3 1 3 1 ORG
BLK 2 +5VE 2 +5VE BLK BLK C +5VE WHT 4 2 WHT WHT
4 2 4 2 4 2
3 IN34A582 3 IN34A582 WHT 5 2 5 2
ORG
5 2 5 2
ORG
BLK 4 +5VE 4 +5VE BLK X582 LS58-2 WHT ORG WHT
WHT #1-172075-1(TYCO) #D2MV-01L13-1C3 6 3A 6 3A 6 3 6 3
5 IN34A583 5 IN34A583 #170330-1 (OMRON)
BLK
6 +5VE 6 +5VE NC XLS572B XLS572B
WHT NO IN34A582 #100092806V**
#SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST) AWG22
#100094799V** BLK C +5VE
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
AWG26(UL1007) (UL1007)
ORG 1 3 1 3 ORG
XSW58 XSW58 WHT 2 3A WHT
2 3A
#100094824V** SW58
E #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 AWG26(UL1007) #100092829V**
E
WHT 1 IN34A583 1 IN34A583 WHT 1 AWG22(UL1007)
BLK 2 +5VE BLK ORG U9+24V1
2 +5VE From XT3
2 WHT 6
Pg(5/33)
#AOW101B (IDEC)
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 27
( INTER LOCK & LIMIT SW )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON-PTR4XE X11MA X11MA

CO1
#H14P-SHF-AA (JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
#100092866V** #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094727V**
A CO1 #SHF-001T-0.8BS
AWG22(UL1007) AWG22(UL1007) A
1 OUT7A 1 OUT7A RED 1 OUT7A 1 OUT7A RED
2 OUT8A 2 OUT8A BLU 2 OUT8A 2 OUT8A BLU M
RED M11A
3 OUT13A 3 OUT13A
4 OUT14A 4 OUT14A BLU #TG-38F-AG 1/250 C568(TUKASA)
5 OUT15A 5 OUT15A RED X20M X20M
6 OUT16A 6 OUT16A BLU
7 OUT9A 7 OUT9A RED #100094731V**
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
8 OUT10A 8 OUT10A BLU ACCESSORY WIRE
1 OUT13A 1 OUT13A RED
9 OUT7H 9 OUT7H RED M
2 OUT14A 2 OUT14A BLK
10 OUT8H 10 OUT8H BLU M20
B RED B
11 OUT15H 11 OUT15H AWG22(UL1007)
12 OUT16H 12 OUT16H BLU X30MA X30MA(1) V30MA1 RED V30MA2 X30MA(2) X30MA #DME44B8HPBB-150 (NIHON SARVO)
13 OUT23H 13 OUT23H RED #SMP-02V-BC(JST)#SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST)#SMR-02V-B(JST)

BLU #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094734V**
14 OUT24H 14 OUT24H KA30MA AWG22(UL1007)
1 OUT15A 1 OUT15A RED 1 2 RED 1 OUT15A 1 OUT15A RED
2 OUT16A 2 OUT16A BLU 5
Coil
4 BLU 2 OUT16A1 2 OUT16A1 BLU M
M30A
#100092874V** 3 #100092874V**
AWG22(UL1007) #G2R-1-S(DC24V) AWG22(UL1007) #TG-401A-BM-180-HA (TUKASA)
(OMRON)
#P2RF-05(Socket)
(OMRON)
BLU
AWG22(UL1007)
X24M1 X24M1 X24M X24M
#SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
C #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094741V** #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094740V** C
AWG22(UL1007) AWG22(UL1007)
M24
X11MH X11MH #TG-38F-AG 1/250 (TUKASA)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094728V**
AWG22(UL1007)
1 OUT7H 1 OUT7H RED
2 OUT8H 2 OUT8H BLU M
M11H
#TG-38F-AG 1/250 C568 (TUKASA)
AWG22(UL1007)
D X30MH X30MH V30MH1 RED V30MH2 X30MH X30MH D
#SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094736V**
KA30MH AWG22(UL1007)
1 OUT15H 1 OUT15H RED 1 2 RED 1 OUT15H 1 OUT15H RED
2 OUT16H 2 OUT16H BLU 5
Coil
4 BLU 2 OUT16H1 2 OUT16H1 BLU M
M30H
#100092876V** 3
AWG22(UL1007) #G2R-1-S(DC24V) #TG-401A-BM-180-HA (TUKASA)
(OMRON)
#100092876V**
#P2RF-05(Socket) AWG22(UL1007)
(OMRON)
BLU
AWG22(UL1007)
XM58 XM58
V30MA1,2,V30MH1,2 : #TNR15G390(NIPPON CHEMI-CON) #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100092836V**
AWG22(UL1007)
E 1 OUT23H 1 OUT23H RED E
2 OUT24H 2 OUT24H BLU M
M58
#TG-47B-LG 1/224 (TUKASA)
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 28
( DC MOTOR 1)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
SOLDER
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON-PTR4XE X52M X52M

CO2
#H12P-SHF-AA (JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
#100092867V** #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094750V**
A CO2 #SHF-001T-0.8BS AWG22(UL1007) AWG22(UL1007) A
ORG M52
3 +24V5 3 +24V5
4 OUT29A 4 OUT29A BLU #TG-38F-AG 1/25 (TUKASA)
5 +24V5 5 +24V5 ORG XSL53 XSL53
6 OUT29H 6 OUT29H BLU
7 +24V5 7 +24V5 ORG #100094751V**
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
8 OUT30H 8 OUT30H BLU ACCESSORY WIRE
1 +24V5 1 +24V5 WHT
9 +24V5 9 WHT
10 OUT30A 10
2 OUT29A 2 OUT29A SL53
B B
11 +24V5 11 #6SL67.5-26*3 (SHINDENGEN)
12 OUT54A 12
XSL591 XSL591
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094744V**
ACCESSORY WIRE
1 +24V5 1 +24V5 BLK
BLK
2 OUT29H 2 OUT29H SL59-1
#CYT-03-33-A-176 (MIKI PULLEY)
XSL592 XSL592
JP3 #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
C #VHR-3N(JST) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 #100094745V** C
JP3 #BVH-21T-P1.1 ACCESSORY WIRE
1 +24V5 1 +24V5 BLK
1 +24V3 1 +24V3 ORG #100092838V** BLK
2 +24V4 2 +24V4 AWG18(UL1007) 2 OUT30H 2 OUT30H SL59-2
3 +24V2 3 #CYT-03-33-A-176 (MIKI PULLEY)
D D
CO7 X55M X55M
#VHR-2N (JST) #SMP-02V-BC(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
#100094792V** #100094754V**
CO7 #SVH-21T-P1.1 AWG22(UL1007)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
ACCESSORY WIRE
2 OUT24A 2 OUT24A BLU 2 OUT24A 2 OUT24A BLK M
M55
#DME44B6HFPB+6DG36F (NIHON SARVO)
E E
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 29
( DC MOTOR 2 )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
SOLDER
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON-PTR4XE C04 X2012 PMD50 X50MP X50M X50M

#H7P-SHF-AA(JST) #100094794V** #51067-0400(MOLEX) #5051-06 (MOLEX) #100094749V** #SMP-06V-BC (JST) #SMR-06V-B (JST) #100094748V**
A C04 #BHF-001T-0.8SS AWG22(UL1007) #50217-8100 CN1 DRIVER CN3 #5159PBTL AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY WIRE A
1 +24V2 1 +24V2 ORG 1 +24V2 1 +24V2 1 M50A 1 M50A WHT 1 M50A 1 M50A WHT
2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK 2 +24VE 2 +24VE 2 M50B 2 M50B BLK 2 M50B 2 M50B BLK
3 +5V1 3 +5V1 RED 3 +5V1 3 +5V1 3 M50C 3 M50C ORG 3 M50C 3 M50C ORG
4 +5VE 4 +5VE BLK 4 +5VE 4 +5VE 4 M50D 4 M50D BLU 4 M50D 4 M50D BLU M
BLU RED RED
5 OUT45AA 5 OUT45AA
BLU
5 M50E 5 M50E
YEL
5 M50E 5 M50E
YEL
M50
6 OUT46AA 6 OUT46AA 6 M50F 6 M50F 6 M50F 6 M50F
7 OUT47AA 7 OUT47AA BLU #103H6704-0442 (SANYO DENKI)
B C05 X2013 X61MP X61M X61M B

#H7P-SHF-AA(JST) #5051-08(MOLEX) #5051-06 (MOLEX) #100094800V** #SMP-06V-BC (JST) #SMR-06V-B (JST) #100094756V**
C05 #BHF-001T-0.8SS #2759PBGL CN2 CN4 #5159PBTL AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY WIRE
1 +24V3 1 1 OUT45AA 1 OUT45AA 1 M61A 1 M61A WHT 1 M61A 1 M61A WHT
2 +24VE 2 2 OUT46AA 2 OUT46AA 2 M61B 2 M61B BLK 2 M61B 2 M61B BLK
3 +5V1 3 3 OUT47AA 3 OUT47AA 3 M61C 3 M61C ORG 3 M61C 3 M61C ORG
4 +5VE 4 AWG22(UL1007) 4 4 4 M61D 4 M61D BLU 4 M61D 4 M61D BLU M
BLU RED RED
5 OUT41AH 5 OUT41AH
BLU
5 OUT41AH 5 OUT41AH 5 M61E 5 M61E
YEL
5 M61E 5 M61E
YEL
M61
6 OUT42AH 6 OUT42AH 6 OUT42AH 6 OUT42AH 6 M61F 6 M61F 6 M61F 6 M61F
7 OUT53H 7 OUT53H BLU 7 OUT53H 7 OUT53H #103H548-0440 (SANYO DENKI)
8 8
C C
#PM-UDUA1S02-10 (SANYO DENKI)
CO6 X2011 X2MP X2M X2M

#H8P-SHF-AA(JST) #100094795V** #5051-12 (MOLEX) #5051-05 (MOLEX) #100094820V** #SMP-05V-BC(JST) #SMR-05V-B(JST) #100094418V**
CO6 #BHF-001T-0.8SS AWG22(UL1007) #2759PBGL CN1 PMD2 CN2 #5159PBTL AWG22(UL1007) #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 ACCESSORY WIRE
1 +24V1 1 +24V1 ORG 1 +24V1 1 +24V1 1 M2A 1 M2A BLK 1 M2A 1 M2A BLK
2 +24VE 2 +24VE BLK 2 2 +24V1 2 M2B 2 M2B RED 2 M2B 2 M2B RED
RED ORG ORG
3 +5V1 3 +5V1
BLK
3 +24VE 3 +24VE 3 M2C 3 M2C
YEL
3 M2C 3 M2C
YEL
M
4 +5VE 4 +5VE 4 4 +24VE 4 M2D 4 M2D 4 M2D 4 M2D
D 5 OUT45AH 5 OUT45AH ORG 5 +5V1 5 +5V1 5 M2E 5 M2E BLU 5 M2E 5 M2E BLU M2 D
6 OUT46AH 6 OUT46AH BRW 6 +5VE 6 +5VE #103H6500-7011 (SANYO DENKI)
7 IN37H 7 IN37H BLK 7 OUT45AH 7 OUT45AH (CW)
8 8 8 OUT46AH 8 OUT46AH (CCW)
9 9 (P.DOWN)
10 10 (D0)
11 IN37H 11 IN37H (T.OUT)
12 12
#PMM-MD-53031-10 (SANYO DENKI)

CO8
E E
1 +24V2
2 +24VE
3 +5V1
4 +5VE
5 OUT50AA
6 OUT51AA DESIGNED I.AOKI
7
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 30
( PULSE MOTOR )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
CON-PTR4XE XBZ1 XBZ1 XBZ1 XBZ1 In case of using #M2BJ-BH24D-D

CO3 from XT3 U4+24V
#H06P-SHF-AA (JST) Pg5/33 #SMP-02V-BC(JST)#SMR-02V-B(JST) #SMR-02V-B(JST)
#SMP-02V-BC(JST)
#100094781V** #BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6 100090841V**
A CO3 #SHF-001T-0.8BS AWG22(UL1007)
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
ACCESSORY WIRE A
1 +5V1 1 +5V1 ORG 1 +5V1 1 1 U4+24V 1 +5V1 RED
BLK BLK
2 OUT32H 2 OUT32H 2 OUT32H 2 OUT32H 2 OUT32H 2 OUT32H BZ1
3 +24V3 3 +24V3 ORG
#100109966V** #M2BJ-BH24D-D (OMRON)
4 OUT33H 4 OUT33H BLK AWG22(UL1007)
5 +24V5 5 +24V5 ORG
6 OUT3H 6 OUT3H BLK XBZ1
#SMR-02V-B(JST)
In case of using #RMB-06 DC6V #100094785V**
connect to "XBZ1(100094781V00)" #BYM-001T-0.6
ACCESSORY WIRE
directly. 1 +5V1 RED
BLK
B CO9 2 OUT32H BZ1 B
1 +5V1 #RMB-06 DC6V (STAR DENSHI)
2 +5VE
3 OUT56 To KA40
4 OUT57 Pg(3/33)
5 OUT58
6 X41M X41M
7 #350778-1(TYCO) #350777-1(TYCO)
8 #350550-1 #350547-1 #100094767V**
ACCESSORY WIRE
1 +24V5 1 +24V5 RED
2 OUT3H 2 OUT3H BLU P
CB1 M41
#171822-7 (TYCO)
#100094817V**
XBU10 XBU10 #8005 DC24V (80050064) (THOMAS)
C CB1 #170204-1 #57-40140 (DDK) #57-30140 (DDK)
C
AWG22(UL1007)
1 OUT34HA 1 OUT34HA ORG ORG 1 OUT34HA 1 P24 *
2 OUT34H 2 OUT34H WHT WHT 2 OUT34H 2 FW *
3 +24V3 3 ORG 3 IN34H 3 INVALM *
4 +24VE 4 BLK 4 +5VE 4 +5VE *
5 IN34H 5 IN34H ORG 5 5
BLK WHT 6 OUT13H * XST1
6 +5VE 6 +5VE 6 INVRST #57-40240 (DDK)
7 OUT13H 7 OUT13H WHT 7 7 ORG
1 +24V
8 8 2
#100094834V**
9 9 SHIELD AWG24-7C (UL2464-SB) BLK
3 +24V
10 10 To XBU20 4
11 11 WHT
(BLOWER UNIT) Pg(32/33) 5 RED_ON
D X01 X01 12 12 GRN 6 D
ORG 13 13 BLK
1 +24V1 1 +24V1 AWG22 7 YEL_ON
2 OUT80 2 OUT80 BLU 14 14 (UL1007) 8
BLU (Shell) WHT
3 OUT81 3 OUT81 9 GRN_ON
4 OUT82 4 OUT82 BLU 10
BLU BLK
5 OUT83 5 OUT83 11 BZR_ON
6 +24VE 6 +24VE BLK 12
7 7 13
8 8 #100096189V** XST3 XST3 #100083613V** 14
9 9 AWG22(UL1007) #SMP-06V-BC(JST) #SMR-06V-B(JST) AWG22(UL1007)
#SHF-001T-0.8BS #BYM-001T-0.6
ORG 1 +24V1 1 +24V1 ORG
E E
BLU 3 OUT81 3 RED_ON WHT
BLU 4 OUT82 BLK Option for Signal Tower Unit 24
4 YEL_ON
BLU 5 OUT83 5 GRN_ON WHT
BLU 6 OUT80 6 BZR_ON BLK
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 31
( DC MOTOR 3)
CHECKED E.TAMBA
SOLDER APPROVED E.Tamba FILE
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
#100085816V**
AWG24-7C(UL2464-SB) XBU20 XBU20 #100085817V**
From XBU10 #57-30140 (DDK) #57-40140 (DDK)
Pg(31/33) *** 1 P24 ORG AWG22(UL1007)
1 P24
A *** 2 FW 2 FW BLK A
*** 3 INVALM 3 INVALM WHT
*** 4 +5VE 4 +5VE BLK
5 5
*** 6 INVRST 6 INVRST BRN
7 7
8 8
9 9
GRN 10 10
11 11
B AWG22 12 12 B
(UL1007) 13 13
14 14
(Shell) Z2 U8
#MAF-1210-33 (NEMIC-LAMBDA) #L100-004NFE (HITACHI)
From XT10 #100085818V**
Pg(1/33) XT20 AWG16(UL1015) NOISE FILTER INVERTER
BLK U200 BLK
L(U2) U2 3 1
BRN AWG22(UL1007) #100085815V**
E GRN/YEL AWG22(UL1007)
E ORG
WHT V200 WHT
N(V2) V2 4 2
WHT
#AC-P03CS05 BLK
(ECHO ELECTRIC) ORG
C L 5 4 3 2 1 P24 C
H O OI L FM CM2 12 11
GRN/YEL AWG16(UL1015) AWG22(UL1007)
AL0 IN34HINV WHT
GRN/YEL AWG16(UL1015)
AL1 +5VE BLK
#100085819V**
L1 L2 L3/N T1/U T2/V T3/W
U200 V200 U202 V202 W202
AWG16(UL1015)
#100085820V**
XBU1 XBU1
#BHF-001T-0.8SS #BYM-001T-0.6
ORG 1 P24 1 P24 BLK
WHT 2 3 2 3 BLK
D D
#100085814V**
AWG16(UL1015)
3
W202 9
2 4
V202 5 456
8 6
1
U202 7
XBL1 XBL1
#350767-1(TYCO)#350766-1(TYCO) #100085823V**
#350551-1 #350552-1 AWG16(UL1015) ACCESSORY WIRE
RED 1 U202 1 U202 RED
WHT WHT P
2 V202 2 V202
M
E BLK BLK E
3 W202 3 W202 ∼ P
#100085822V**
GRN/YEL AWG16(UL1015) MBL1
#VB-004G-U (HITA CHI)
DESIGNED I.AOKI
DRAWN I.AOKI
WIRING DIAGRAM 32
E E E E ( BLOWER UNIT )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
FRAME
F DATE 2005.12.9 MODEL PT-R4300S/E (BU-200) REV
CODE DRAW
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
2 3 4 5 6 7
LRB32E BOARD
X102 PIF-1
X102 HIF3BB-50DA-2.54R (HRS) 57FE-40500-20S (DDK)
A A1 GND B1 GND A1 GND B1 GND 1 GND 26 GND A
A2 +DIR B2 -DIR A2 +DIR B2 -DIR 2 +DIR 27 -DIR
A3 +LREQ B3 -LREQ A3 +LREQ B3 -LREQ 3 +LREQ 28 -LREQ
A4 +LDAV B4 -LDAV A4 +LDAV B4 -LDAV 4 +LDAV 29 -LDAV
A5 +PGON B5 -PGON A5 +PGON B5 -PGON 5 +PGON 30 -PGON
A6 +STRB B6 -STRB A6 +STRB B6 -STRB 6 +STRB 31 -STRB
A7 +DB0 B7 -DB0 A7 +DB0 B7 -DB0 7 +DB0 32 -DB0
B A11 +DB4 B11 -DB4 A11 +DB4 B11 -DB4 #100094802V** 11 +DB4 36 -DB4 B
A12 +DB5 B12 -DB5 A12 +DB5 B12 -DB5 AWG28-25P(UL2464-SW/R) 12 +DB5 37 -DB5
A15 GND B15 GND A15 GND B15 GND 15 GND 40 GND
A16 N.C. B16 N.C. A16 N.C. B16 N.C. 16 N.C. 41 N.C.
C A24 +DB15 B24 -DB15 A24 +DB15 B24 -DB15 24 +DB15 49 -DB15 C
A25 N.C. B25 N.C. A25 N.C. B25 N.C. 25 N.C. 50 N.C.
RCP3(E) BO ARD PIF-2

X156 17JE-13250-02(D3A) (DDK)
#H5P-SHF-AA (JST) #100094809V** 1
AWG24-5C (UL2547-SW/R)
X156 #BHF-001T-0.8SS 2 RXD
1 RXD 1 RXD 3 TXD
2 TXD 2 TXD 4 CTS
3 RTS 3 RTS 5 RTS
D D
4 CTS 4 CTS 6
5 +5VE 5 +5VE 7 +5VE
SHIELD SHIELD 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
E 18 E
19
20
21
22
23
24
DESIGNED I.AOKI
25 DRAWN I.AOKI WIRING DIAGRAM 33
( PIF )
CHECKED E.TAMBA
CODE DRAW
NO.
100094909V00 (33/33) A3
SYM REVISION ALT.NO. DATE REVISED APPROVED NO.
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
PK/4300/V1.0/SM152
Plate Thermal Recorder
4300E/S
SERVICE MANUAL
Jan, 01, 2007 First Edition Version 1.0
Oct, 12, 2006 Provisional Edition Version 0.8 (temporary)
Jun, 19, 2006 Provisional Edition Version 0.6
Publication
Quality Promotion Department
Media Technology Division
DAINIPPON SCREEN MFG.CO.,LTD.
Printed in Japan

PT-R4300ES Service Manual V10 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PT-R4300ES Service Manual V10 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PT-R4300ES Service Manual V10 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this document?

What is the purpose of this document?

What safety precautions are mentioned?

What safety precautions are mentioned?

PK/4300/V1.

Plate Thermal Recorder

Jan, 01, 2007 Version 1.0

Quality Promotion Department

For your safety

: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided

Please keep the following premises and expectations in mind.

When exporting the machine

PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) §-i

§-ii PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) §-iii

§-iv PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

1-2. Precautions for electricity

PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) §-1

2) Switching operation of power supply

The power supply switch

Main unit Blower unit

§-2 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

5) Processing after power failures

1-3. Regarding the safety of this machine

PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) §-3

Wear clothing that

Hands are wet.

· Maintenance must always be performed by specially trained and authorized maintenance

1-5-1. For maintenance personnel

§-4 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

3) Cautions about chemicals

4) Cautions concerning static electricity

5) About the laser diode

1-5-2. Laser maintenance and safety

2) While performing maintenance with covers removed

PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) §-5

1-6. Caution labels on the equipment

Label indicating the power supply specifications.

Label indicating that this machine complies with CDRH Regulations.

§-6 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

Label indicating that this machine is a Class 1 laser product.

PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) §-7

Label indicating that high voltage power circuits in the inside.

1-7. Disposal of the machine.

1-8. Connecting the blower

§-8 PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) A-i

A-ii PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) A-iii

A-iv PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0)

1-1.For maintenance personnel

2) About laser safety

3) Cautions about chemicals

4) Cautions concerning static electricity

5) About the laser diode

The laser diode is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Damage to

PT-R4300E/S Service manual (Ver1.0) A-1

6) Safety measures to prevent static electricity buildup